%\iffalse meta-comment
% ^^A messages to WinEdt:
% !Mode:: "TeX:DTX:UK"
% !smartQuote:: "English"
% !DTXversion:: "2.4"
% ------------------------------------------------------------------------
% $Id: microtype.dtx,v 1.60 2010-01-10 02:00:23+01 schlicht Exp schlicht $
% ------------------------------------------------------------------------
%                       The `microtype' package
%        An interface to the micro-typographic extensions of pdfTeX
%           Copyright (c) 2004--2010  R Schlicht <w.m.l@gmx.net>
%
% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the
% LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c of this license or (at
% your option) any later version. The latest version of this license is in:
% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt, and version 1.3c or later is part
% of all distributions of LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
%
% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `author-maintained'.
%
% This work consists of the files microtype.dtx and microtype.ins and the
% derived files microtype.sty, microtype.lua and letterspace.sty.
%
% Modified versions of the configuration files (*.cfg) may be distributed
% provided that: (1) the original copyright statement is not removed, and
% (2) the identification string is changed.
% ------------------------------------------------------------------------
%
%<package|letterspace>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
%<*driver>
\ProvidesFile{\jobname.dtx}
%</driver>
%<package|letterspace>\ProvidesPackage
%<config>\ProvidesFile
%<package>  {microtype}
%<letterspace>  {letterspace}
%<m-t>  {microtype.cfg}
%<*package|letterspace|m-t>
  [2010/01/10 v2.4
%<package>   Micro-typography with pdfTeX
%<letterspace>   Robust letterspacing
%<m-t>   microtype main configuration file
  (RS)]
%</package|letterspace|m-t>
%<*config>
%<bch>  {mt-bch.cfg}[2007/03/03 v1.5 microtype config. file: Bitstream Charter (RS)]
%<blg>  {mt-blg.cfg}[2007/07/14 v1.0 microtype config. file: Bitstream Letter Gothic (RS)]
%<cmr>  {mt-cmr.cfg}[2009/11/09 v2.0 microtype config. file: Computer Modern Roman (RS)]
%<pad>  {mt-pad.cfg}[2005/11/07 v1.5 microtype config. file: Adobe Garamond (RS)]
%<pmn>  {mt-pmn.cfg}[2009/11/14 v1.3 microtype config. file: Adobe Minion (HH/KK)]
%<ppl>  {mt-ppl.cfg}[2005/11/16 v1.6 microtype config. file: Palatino (RS)]
%<ptm>  {mt-ptm.cfg}[2006/04/20 v1.7 microtype config. file: Times (RS)]
%<ugm>  {mt-ugm.cfg}[2006/01/26 v1.0 microtype config. file: URW Garamond (RS)]
%<msa>  {mt-msa.cfg}[2006/02/04 v1.1 microtype config. file: AMS symbols (a) (RS)]
%<msb>  {mt-msb.cfg}[2005/06/01 v1.0 microtype config. file: AMS symbols (b) (RS)]
%<euf>  {mt-euf.cfg}[2006/07/03 v1.1 microtype config. file: AMS Euler Fraktur (RS)]
%<eur>  {mt-eur.cfg}[2006/07/31 v1.1 microtype config. file: AMS Euler Roman (RS)]
%<eus>  {mt-eus.cfg}[2006/07/28 v1.2 microtype config. file: AMS Euler Script (RS)]
%<zpeu>  {mt-zpeu.cfg}[2006/05/04 v1.0 microtype config. file: Adobe Euro (RS)]
%<euroitc>  {mt-euroitc.cfg}[2006/05/04 v1.0 microtype config. file: ITC Euro (RS)]
%<mvs>  {mt-mvs.cfg}[2006/07/05 v1.1 microtype config. file: Marvosym Euro (RS)]
%</config>
%
%<*driver|docsty>
%<*driver>
\documentclass[10pt,a4paper]{ltxdoc}
\makeatletter
%</driver>
% Let's abolish CM! We use Charter and Letter Gothic
% (for the pre-built documentation on CTAN):
% \usepackage[charter]{mathdesign}
% \def\rmdefault{bch} % not scaled
% \def\ttdefault{blg}
\usepackage{ifpdf,ifluatex}
\usepackage[latin1]{\ifluatex luainputenc,\fi inputenc}
\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
\usepackage[ngerman]{babel} 
\usepackage{textcomp}
\GetFileInfo{\jobname.dtx}
\usepackage[expansion=false,kerning=true]{microtype}[\filedate]
 \DeclareMicrotypeSet*[protrusion]
      { doc }
      { encoding = {*, TS1, OMS},
        family   = {rm*, tt*},
        size     = {footnotesize, small, normalsize} }
 \SetProtrusion
      { encoding = OMS,
        family   = mdbch }
      { "68 = {400, },  % \langle
        "69 = { ,400} } % \rangle
 \DeclareMicrotypeSet*[kerning]
      { doc }
      { encoding = T1,
        family   = blg, % typewriter font and ...
        font     = * }  % French sample in section \ref{sub:kerning}
 \SetExtraKerning
      { encoding = T1,
        family   = blg }
      { _ = {100,100} } % underscores shouldn't touch
 % disable ?` and !` ligatures (sample in section \ref{sec:disable-ligatures})
 \DisableLigatures[?,!]{encoding = *, family = rm* }
 % Fraktur sample in section \ref{sec:lettersp}
 \IfFileExists{t1mwr.fd}
   {\newcommand\textfrak[1]{{\fontfamily{mwr}\selectfont ##1}}
    \ifpdf
      \SetTracking[no ligatures={f}]{encoding=T1,family=mwr}{100}
    \fi}
   {\IfFileExists{yfonts.sty}
     {\usepackage{yfonts}
      \ifpdf
        \SetTracking[no ligatures={f}]{encoding=LY,family=yfrak}{100}
      \fi}
     {\let\textfrak\@gobble}}
\tolerance=700
\ifpdf
  \ifnum\pdftexversion<140 \else % pdftex 1.40, including textmatrix patch,
    \microtypesetup{expansion=alltext,step=1} % hence we can activate expansion ...
    \tolerance=300         % ... and make TeX almost as intolerant as it normally is
    \g@addto@macro\macrocode{\microtypesetup{expansion=false}}
    \pdfminorversion=5 % for the OCGs
  \fi
  % bonus material
  \InputIfFileExists{microtype-logo.dtx}\relax\relax
  \InputIfFileExists{microtype-lssample.dtx}\relax\relax
\else
  \let\lsstyle\relax
\fi
\ifluatex % microtype.dtx finally compiles with 0.35!
  \microtypesetup{kerning=false}
  \let\lsstyle\relax
\fi
\usepackage{booktabs}
\usepackage{array}
 \newcolumntype{L}[1]{p{#1}<{\raggedright}}
\usepackage{color}
 \definecolor{theblue} {rgb}{0.02,0.04,0.48}
 \definecolor{thered}  {rgb}{0.65,0.04,0.07}
 \definecolor{thegreen}{rgb}{0.06,0.44,0.08}
 \definecolor{thegrey} {gray}{0.5}
 \definecolor{theshade}{gray}{0.94}
 \definecolor{theframe}{gray}{0.75}
\usepackage{graphicx}
% general layout
\frenchspacing
\DeclareRobustCommand\textoractual[2]{\ifpdf
  \pdfliteral direct{/Span<</ActualText(#2)>>BDC}#1\pdfliteral direct{EMC}%
  \else #1\fi}
\expandafter\newif\csname ifcmr\endcsname
\long\def\@tempa{cmr}
\ifx\rmdefault\@tempa
  \cmrtrue
  \def\PackageFont{\sffamily}
  \def\match{\textbullet}
  \usepackage{amssymb} % \varnothing
  \let\OrigTeX\TeX
  \def\TeX{\textoractual{\OrigTeX}{TeX}}
  \setlength\textheight{47\baselineskip}
\else
  \def\bfdefault{b}
  \def\Module#1{{\color{theblue}\textoractual{$\langle$}{<}\textit{#1}\textoractual{$\rangle$}{>}}}
  \def\TeX{\textoractual{T\kern-.1667em\lower.4ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX\@}{TeX}}
  \DeclareRobustCommand\LaTeX{\textoractual{L\kern-.26em{\sbox\z@ T\vbox to\ht\z@{%
     \hbox{\check@mathfonts\fontsize\sf@size\z@\math@fontsfalse\selectfont A}%
    \vss}}}{La}\kern-.1em\TeX}
  \def\PackageFont{\ttfamily}
  \def\match{{\large\raisebox{-.15em}{\textbullet}}}
  {\catcode`\`=\active % indiscernible from ' in Bitstream Letter Gothic
   \g@addto@macro\macro@code{\let`\textasciigrave}}
  \linespread{1.07}\normalfont
  \setlength\textheight{46\baselineskip}
\fi
\addtolength\textheight{\topskip}
\setlength\topmargin{12pt}
% sections
\def\@seccntformat#1{\llap{\csname the#1\endcsname\hskip\marginparsep}}
\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}%
  {0pt}{8pt plus 2pt minus 1pt}{-1em}%
  {\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}
% title
\def\@maketitle{%
  \newpage\null\vskip 2em
  \begin{center}\let\footnote\thanks
    {\LARGE \@title\par}\vskip 1.5em
    {\large \parbox{.33\textwidth}{\centering\@author}%
            \parbox{.33\textwidth}{\centering\@date}}%
  \vskip1.5em\rule{.66\textwidth}{.4pt}%
  \end{center}\par\vskip1.5em}
% headers
\headheight=15pt
\def\ps@MTheadings{%
  \def\@oddhead{%
    \hbox to\textwidth{\vbox{\hbox to\textwidth{%
      \footnotesize{\leftmark\rightmark\strut}\hfill\thepage\strut}%
      \hrule height 0.4pt width\textwidth \vskip-0.4pt
    }}\hss}
  \let\@oddfoot\@empty
  \let\@mkboth\markboth
  \def\sectionmark##1{\markboth{\textls*[60]{\MakeUppercase{##1}}}{}}
  \def\subsectionmark##1{\markright{: ##1}}}
\pagestyle{MTheadings}
% toc
\let\l@section@\l@section
\def\l@section{\vskip -.75ex\l@section@}
\def\l@subsection{\vskip.35ex \penalty\@secpenalty \@dottedtocline{2}{1.5em}{2.7em}}
\def\l@subsubsection#1#2{%
  \leftskip 4.2em
  \rightskip 2em plus 2em
  \parindent 0pt
  {\let\numberline\@gobble{\small #1~[#2]}}}
\def\l@table{\@dottedtocline{1}{0pt}{1.5em}}
\def\@pnumwidth{1.7em}
\ifpdf
  \let\ORIGpdfoutline\pdfoutline
  \def\special@outlines{attr{/F 01}}
  \def\normaloutline {\protected@write\@outlinefile{}{\let\pdfoutline \ORIGpdfoutline}}
  \def\specialoutline{\protected@write\@outlinefile{}{\def\pdfoutline{\ORIGpdfoutline\special@outlines}}}
  \g@addto@macro\appendix{\specialoutline}
\fi
\def\defspecial@toc#1#2#3{\long\def#1{%
  \ifpdf\phantomsection\specialoutline\pdfbookmark[1]{#2}{#3}\normaloutline\fi
  \section*{#2}\@mkboth{\textls*[60]{\MakeUppercase{#2}}}{}%
  \@starttoc{#3}}}
\defspecial@toc\tableofcontents\contentsname{toc}
\defspecial@toc\listoftables\listtablename{lot}
% bibliography
\def\@cite#1#2{#1\if@tempswa, #2\fi}
\def\thebibliography#1{%
  \section{\refname}%
  \list{}{\leftmargin 0pt}%
  \sloppy
  \clubpenalty 4000
  \@clubpenalty \clubpenalty
  \widowpenalty 4000}
\def\@biblabel#1{}
% footnotes
\long\def\@makefntext#1{%
  \leftskip 0pt
  \parindent 0pt
  \everypar{\parindent 0pt}%
  \leavevmode\llap{\@thefnmark\hskip\marginparsep}#1}
\renewcommand\footnoterule{%
  \kern-3\p@
  \hrule\@width \columnwidth
  \kern2.6\p@}
\skip\@mpfootins=4pt
% lists
\setlength\leftmargini{15pt}
\setlength\leftmarginii{12.5pt}
\setlength\leftmarginiii{10pt}
\def\@listi{\leftmargin \leftmargini
            \parsep 4.5pt plus 1pt minus 1pt
            \topsep 4.5pt plus 1pt minus 1pt
            \itemsep 0pt}
\let\@listI\@listi
\def\descriptionlabel#1{\hspace\labelsep\normalfont#1:}
\renewenvironment{itemize}
  {\ifnum \@itemdepth >\thr@@\@toodeep\else
    \advance\@itemdepth\@ne
    \edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}%
    \expandafter\list
      \csname\@itemitem\endcsname
      {\ifnum\@itemdepth=\@ne\leftmargin 0pt\fi
       \def\makelabel##1{\hss\llap{##1}}}%
   \fi}
  {\endlist}
\newenvironment{enum}[1][0]
  {\list\labelenumi
    {\usecounter{enumi}\setcounter{enumi}{#1}\addtocounter{enumi}{-1}%
     \renewcommand\labelenumi{\texttt{\theenumi}:}%
     \leftmargin 30pt
     \itemindent-15pt
     \labelwidth 15pt
     \labelsep 0pt
     \def\makelabel##1{##1\hss}}}
  {\endlist}
\newenvironment{options}
  {\list{}
    {\leftmargin 0pt
     \labelwidth 0pt
     \labelsep 1em
     \itemindent \labelsep
     \lstset{belowskip=0pt}}}
  {\endlist}
% boxes (for some reason, mathdesign changes these values)
\setlength\fboxrule{0.4pt}
\setlength\fboxsep{3pt}
\setlength\arrayrulewidth{0.4pt}
% tables
\setlength\tabcolsep{2pt}
\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
  \sbox\@tempboxa{\footnotesize\itshape#1: #2}%
  \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize
    \footnotesize\itshape#1: #2\par
  \else
    \hb@xt@\hsize{\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
  \fi
  \vskip 4pt}
% index and change log
\IndexPrologue{\section{Index}%
  Links (in blue) refer to the page where the corresponding entry is described
  (bold face) resp. occurs. Plain numbers (in black) refer to the code line
  where the corresponding entry is defined (underlined) resp. used.}
\GlossaryPrologue{\section{Change history}\label{sec:changes}\vspace*{-\multicolsep}}
 %\setcounter{finalcolumnbadness}{100}
 %\raggedcolumns
\setcounter{IndexColumns}{2}
\def\IndexMin{12\baselineskip}
\g@addto@macro\IndexParms{\footnotesize}
\def\GlossaryParms{\IndexParms
  \def\@idxitem ##1##2\efill{%
    \end{multicols}
    \begin{multicols}{2}
      [\subsubsection*{\if##1v\relax Version ##2
        (\csname MTversiondate##2\endcsname)\else ##2\fi}][5\baselineskip]
       \ifpdf \phantomsection \pdfbookmark[2]{\if##1v\relax ##2
           (\csname MTversiondate##2\endcsname)\else ##2\fi}{subsection##2}\fi
    \GlossaryParms \rightskip 15pt plus 5pt
    \let\item\@idxitem
    \ignorespaces \makeatletter \scan@allowedfalse}%
  \def\subitem{\par\hangindent 15pt}%
  \def\subsubitem{\subitem\hspace*{7.5pt}}}
% macro code
\MacroTopsep=0pt
\MacrocodeTopsep=3pt
\setlength\MacroIndent{0pt}
\def\theCodelineNo{\reset@font\color{thegrey}\scriptsize
  \textoractual{\arabic{CodelineNo}\,}{}}% don't copy line numbers
\def\MacroFont{\ttfamily\small}
\def\AltMacroFont{\ttfamily\footnotesize}
\def\PrintMacroName#1{\strut\MacroFont\string #1\hskip15pt}
\def\ImplementationSettings{%
  \linespread{1}%
  \hfuzz=10pt
  \def\MacroFont{\ttfamily\footnotesize}%
  \let\macro@font\MacroFont}
% additional bells ...
\def\Describe#1#2#3{\noindent\csname Describe#1\endcsname{#2}%
  \DescribeValues{#1}{#3}}
\def\DescribeOption{\leavevmode\@bsphack
  \begingroup\MakePrivateLetters\Describe@Option}
\def\Describe@Option#1{\endgroup
  \marginpar{\raggedleft\PrintDescribeOption{#1}}%
  \SpecialOptionIndex{#1}\@esphack\ignorespaces}
\def\DescribePackage{\leavevmode\@bsphack
  \begingroup\MakePrivateLetters\Describe@Package}
\def\Describe@Package#1{\endgroup
  \marginpar{\raggedleft\PrintDescribeOption{#1.sty}}%
  \CatIndex{#1}{package}\@esphack\ignorespaces}
\def\DescribeValues#1#2{%
  \let\@tempa\@empty \let\Option@default\@empty
  \@for\@tempb:=#2\do{%
    \csname Special#1Value\expandafter\endcsname\@tempb\@nil
    \expandafter\g@addto@macro\expandafter\@tempa
      \expandafter{\csname #1Sep\endcsname}%
    \expandafter\g@addto@macro\expandafter\@tempa
      \expandafter{\@tempb}}%
  \@ifnextchar[\PrintValues{\PrintValues[\Option@default]}}
\def\SpecialOptionValue#1#2\@nil{%
  \if#1:\def\@tempb{\Variable{#2}}\else %                      : = variable
  \if#1!\def\@tempb{#2}\def\Option@default{#2}\else %          ! = default
  \if#1*\def\@tempb{#2}\def\Option@default{\MaybeDefault{#2}}% * = default (maybe)
  \fi\fi\fi}
\def\SpecialMacroValue#1#2\@nil{%
  \if#1?\def\@tempb{\normalsize[\Variable{#2}]}%  % ? = optional
   \else\def\@tempb{\normalsize\{\Variable{#1#2}\}}\fi}
\let\SpecialEnvValue\SpecialMacroValue
\def\Variable#1{$\langle${\rmfamily\itshape\small#1}$\rangle$}
\def\MaybeDefault#1{\textrm{*}\,#1}
\def\OptionSep{{\rmfamily, }} \def\MacroSep{\,} \def\EnvironmentSep{\,}
\def\PrintValues[#1]{{\MacroFont\expandafter\@gobble\@tempa\hfill #1}\\*[.25\baselineskip]}
\def\CatIndex#1#2{\index{#1\actualchar{\protect\ttfamily #1} (#2)\encapchar hyperpage}}
\def\SpecialOptionIndex#1{\@bsphack\CatIndex{#1}{option}%
  \index{\quotechar!Options % the `!' will be sorted first
    \actualchar{\protect\bfseries Options:}%
    \levelchar{\protect\ttfamily#1}\encapchar usage}\@esphack}
\def\SpecialUsageIndex#1{\@bsphack{\index{\quotechar!User Commands
    \actualchar{\protect\indexspace\protect\bfseries User Commands:}%
    \levelchar\expandafter\@gobble\string#1\actualchar\string\verb
      \quotechar*\verbatimchar\string#1\verbatimchar\encapchar usage}%
   \let\special@index\index\SpecialIndex@{#1}{\encapchar usage}}\@esphack}
\def\SpecialEnvIndex#1{\CatIndex{#1}{environment}}
\def\PrintDescribeMacro#1{\strut\MacroFont\color{thegreen}\string #1}
\def\PrintDescribeEnv#1{\strut\MacroFont\bslash begin\{{\color{thegreen}#1}\}%
  \\*[.25\baselineskip]\strut\bslash end\{{\color{thegreen}#1}\}}
\def\PrintDescribeOption#1{\strut\MacroFont\color{thered}#1}
\def\Indexing{\let\special@index\codeline@wrindex}
\def\NoIndexing{\let\special@index\@gobble}
\def\GeneralChanges#1{\edef\generalname{\if*#1 General\else#1\fi}}% mind the space!
\DeclareRobustCommand\key[1]{\textcolor{thered}{\ttfamily#1}}
\DeclareRobustCommand\pkg[1]{{\PackageFont#1}\@bsphack\CatIndex{#1}{package}\@esphack}
\DeclareRobustCommand\opt[1]{{\ttfamily#1}\@bsphack\CatIndex{#1}{option}\@esphack}
\DeclareRobustCommand\file[1]{{\ttfamily#1}}
% ... and whistles
{\catcode`\"\active
 \gdef\verbatim#1
   {\catcode`\"\active \def"##1"{\colorbox{theshade}{%
      \textrm{Text lost! Please install the \pkg{listings} package.}}}%
    \@beginparpenalty\predisplaypenalty\@verbatim\MacroFont
    \frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces\expandafter\@xverbatim\@gobble}}
\IfFileExists{listings.sty}{
 \usepackage{listings}
 \lstset{
   gobble=1,columns=flexible,keepspaces,upquote,escapechar=",
   basicstyle=\MacroFont,
   keywords=[0]{\microtypesetup,\DeclareMicrotypeSet,\UseMicrotypeSet,
     \DeclareMicrotypeSetDefault,\SetProtrusion,\SetExpansion,\SetTracking,
     \SetExtraKerning,\SetExtraSpacing,\DisableLigatures,\DeclareCharacterInheritance,
     \DeclareMicrotypeVariants,\DeclareMicrotypeAlias,\DeclareMicrotypeBabelHook,
     \LoadMicrotypeFile,\microtypecontext,\textmicrotypecontext,
     \textls,\lsstyle,\lslig,\Microtype@Hook},
   keywordstyle=[0]\color{thegreen},
   keywords=[1]{protrusion,expansion,activate,DVIoutput,draft,final,verbose,
     config,factor,auto,stretch,shrink,step,selected,unit,tracking,kerning,
     spacing,letterspace,babel,context,%defersetup,copyfonts, % undocumented
     no ligatures,outer spacing,outer kerning}, % there are three \nobreakspace in this line
   keywordstyle=[1]\color{thered},
   comment=[l]\%,
   commentstyle=\color{thegrey}\itshape,
   alsoother={0123456789_},
   frame=single,backgroundcolor=\color{theshade},rulecolor=\color{theframe},
   framerule=\fboxrule,xleftmargin=3.4pt,xrightmargin=3.4pt,belowskip=\smallskipamount
 }
 \let\verbatim\relax
 \lstnewenvironment{verbatim}[1][]{\lstset{##1}}{}
 \ifpdf \IfFileExists{dummy-space.pfb}{%
   \pdfmapline{+dummy-space <dummy-space.pfb}
   \font\dummyspace=dummy-space
   \def\lst@outputspace{% copy spaces (from a font that really has a space at x20)
     \setbox0\hbox{ }\@tempdima\wd0
     \setbox0\hbox{\dummyspace\char"20}\advance\@tempdima-\wd0
     \unhbox0 \kern\@tempdima}
  }\relax \fi
}{
 \let\lstset\@gobble
}
%\def\todo{\changes{zTo Do}{0000/00/00}}
\let\todo\@gobble
\newcommand\microtypesample[1]{\begin{quote}#1\end{quote}}
\let\emptypdfpageresources\relax
% fancy PDF document
\ifpdf
  \ifx\eTeXversion\@undefined \else % errors when not using etex (conflict with multicol)
    \ifx\pdfcolorstack\@undefined   % no longer required with pdftex 1.40
      \usepackage{pdfcolmk}
  \fi\fi
  \usepackage[bookmarks,bookmarksopen,pdfdisplaydoctitle,colorlinks,
    linkcolor=theblue,citecolor=theblue,urlcolor=thered,
    hyperindex=false,hyperfootnotes=false,
    pdftitle={The microtype package},
    pdfauthor={R Schlicht <w.m.l@gmx.net>},
    pdfsubject={An interface to the micro-typographic extensions of pdfTeX},
    pdfkeywords={TeX, LaTeX, pdfTeX, luaTeX, typography, micro-typography,
      character protrusion, margin kerning, optical alignment, font expansion,
      font scaling, hz, kerning, spacing, glue, letterspacing, tracking, ligatures}
    ]{hyperref}
  \pdfcatalog{/Lang(en-GB)}
  \ifnum\pdftexversion < 130 \else
    \IfFileExists{hypdestopt.sty}{\usepackage{hypdestopt}}\relax\fi
  \IfFileExists{hyperxmp.sty}{
    \usepackage{hyperxmp}
    \hypersetup{%
      pdfcopyright={\textcopyright\ 2004--2010 R Schlicht\012%
        This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions
        of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c of this
        license or (at your option) any later version.\&\#xA;%
        This work has the LPPL maintenance status `author-maintained'.},
      pdflicenseurl={http://www.latex-project.org/lppl/}}
  }\relax
  \def\usage#1{\textbf{\hyperpage{#1}}}% for indexing of \DescribeMacro ...
  \def\changes@#1#2#3{% ... the changes ...
    \protected@edef\@tempa{\noexpand\glossary{#1\levelchar
      \ifx\saved@macroname\@empty \space\actualchar\generalname
      \else\expandafter\@gobble\saved@macroname\actualchar
        \string\verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar\saved@macroname\verbatimchar\fi
      :\levelchar #3\encapchar hyperpage}}%
    \@tempa\endgroup\@esphack}
  %\def\theCodelineNo{% % ... and everything else (would double the pdf file size)
  %  \reset@font\color{thegrey}\scriptsize
  %  \@tempcnta\arabic{CodelineNo}\advance\@tempcnta by\@ne
  %  \hypertarget{L:\number\@tempcnta}{\arabic{CodelineNo}}}
  %\def\main#1{\underline{\hyperlink{L:#1}{#1}}}
  %\def\codeline#1{\link@sanitize#1-\@nil{#1}}
  %\def\link@sanitize#1-#2\@nil{\link@@sanitize#1,\@nil}
  %\def\link@@sanitize#1,#2\@nil{\hyperlink{L:#1}}
  %\def\SpecialIndex#1{\@bsphack\special@index{\expandafter\@gobble
  %    \string#1\actualchar
  %    \string\verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar\string#1\verbatimchar
  %    \encapchar codeline}%
  %  \@esphack}
  \def\ctanurl#1{Available from \acronym{CTAN} at
                 \href{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/#1}{\nolinkurl{/#1}}}
  \DeclareRobustCommand\mailto[1]{\href{mailto:#1}{\nolinkurl{#1}}}
  \def\mailtoRS{\href % some PDF viewers don't like spaces:
    {mailto:<w.m.l@gmx.net>\%20Robert\%20Schlicht?subject=[microtype\%20\fileversion]}
    {\texttt{w.m.l@gmx.net}}}
  % the samples in the introduction, utilising nested optional content groups (aka. layers):
  \ifnum\pdftexversion<140 \else
    \def\mt@layer#1#2{\pdfliteral direct{/OC/#1 BDC}#2\pdfliteral direct{EMC}}
    \ifx\mt@objects\@undefined\let\mt@objects\@empty\fi
    \ifx\mt@order  \@undefined\let\mt@order  \@empty\fi
    \let\mt@resources\@empty
    \def\mt@register#1#2{%
      \immediate\pdfobj{<< /Type/OCG /Name(#1:#2) >>}
      \expandafter\xdef\csname mt@#1@#2\endcsname{\the\pdflastobj\space 0 R }
      \xdef\mt@objects  {\mt@objects        \csname mt@#1@#2\endcsname}
      \xdef\mt@order    {\mt@order          \csname mt@#1@#2\endcsname}
      \xdef\mt@resources{\mt@resources/#1#2 \csname mt@#1@#2\endcsname}}
    \xdef\mt@order{\mt@order[(Sample)}
     \mt@register{Protrusion}{true} \mt@register{Protrusion}{false}
     \mt@register{Expansion} {true} \mt@register{Expansion} {false}
     \mt@register{_compatibility}{}
    \xdef\mt@order{\mt@order]}
    \pdfcatalog{/OCProperties <<
                   /OCGs [\mt@objects]
                   /D << /Order [\mt@order]
                         /BaseState/OFF
                         /ON [\mt@Protrusion@false \mt@Expansion@false
                              \ifx\mtl@objects\@undefined\else\mtl@objects\fi] >> >> }
    \newbox\mt@box
    \newdimen\mt@unvdimen
    \def\mt@place#1{%
      \vskip-\mt@unvdimen
      \setbox\mt@box\vbox{#1}%
      \mt@unvdimen\dimexpr\ht\mt@box+\dp\mt@box\relax
      \unvbox\mt@box}
    \def\mt@pseudo@marg#1{%
      \mt@place{\llap{\vbox{%
        \hsize\marginparwidth
        \rightskip \marginparsep plus 1em
        \leavevmode\itshape\footnotesize #1}}}}
    \def\mt@show@sample#1#2{%
      \mt@layer{Protrusion#1}{%
        \mt@layer{Expansion#2}{%
          \mt@place{\microtypesetup{protrusion=#1,expansion=#2}%
            \mt@sample@text}}}}
    \def\mt@toggle@sample#1{%
      \pdfstartlink user{/Subtype/Link
        /BS << /Type/Border/W 1 /S/D /D[4 1] >>
        /H/O /C[0.65 0.04 0.07] /Contents(Click to Toggle #1!)
        %/OC << /Type/OCMD /VE[/Not \csname mt@_compatibility@\endcsname] >> % not honoured by older viewers anyway
        /A << /S/SetOCGState /State[/Toggle \csname mt@#1@true\endcsname
                                            \csname mt@#1@false\endcsname] >>}
      #1 \hfill\pdfendlink & \mt@layer{#1true}{\rlap{on}}\mt@layer{#1false}{off}}
    \renewcommand\microtypesample[1]{%
      \begingroup
      \leftskip 15pt \rightskip 15pt
      \parskip   4pt \parindent  0pt
      \vskip 8pt % = \topsep without vertical stretchability
      \long\def\mt@sample@text{#1}
      \mt@pseudo@marg{\color{theblue}%
        Nachdem Sie den Text rechterhand gelesen haben, können Sie den Effekt
        dieser Features betrachten, indem Sie auf die Links klicken:\strut\\
        \colorbox{theshade}{%
          \begin{tabular}{@{}>{\upshape}l@{\quad}l}
            \mt@toggle@sample{Protrusion}\\\addlinespace
            \mt@toggle@sample{Expansion}
          \end{tabular}}\\[0.3\baselineskip]
        Beide Features sind im ganzen Dokument eingeschaltet.}
      \mt@show@sample{false}{false}
      \mt@show@sample{false}{true}
      \mt@show@sample{true} {false}
      \mt@layer{_compatibility}{%
        % for compatibility with older PDF viewers that don't support OCGs, we
        % add a layer that contains a white box, which will hide the underlying
        % layers for older viewers, and will be ignored by PDF 1.5 capable viewers.
        \mt@place{\rlap{\hskip-\marginparwidth \color{white}%
          \vrule width\dimexpr\hsize+\marginparwidth\relax height\mt@unvdimen}}
        \mt@pseudo@marg{\color{thered}%
          If you had a \acronym{PDF} viewer that understands
          \acronym{PDF}\,{\smaller1.5}, you could view the effect of the
          micro-typographic features by clicking on the links.\strut
          \\\vphantom{\colorbox{white}{\tabular l\\\addlinespace\\\endtabular}}%
          \\[0.3\baselineskip] Both features are enabled throughout this document.}}
      \mt@show@sample{true}{true}
      \vskip 4pt
      \endgroup
      \edef\x{\pdfpageresources{/Properties <<\mt@resources>>}}\x}
    \def\emptypdfpageresources{\pdfpageresources{}}
  \fi
\else
  \usepackage{url}
  \newcommand\hyperref[2][]{#2}
  \let\hyperpage\@firstofone
  \let\texorpdfstring\@firstoftwo
  \def\ctanurl{Available from \acronym{CTAN} at \url}
  \let\nolinkurl\url
  \let\mailto\texttt
  \def\mailtoRS{\mailto{w.m.l@gmx.net}}
\fi
\ifx\l@ukenglish\@undefined
  \hyphenation{let-ter-spac-ing let-ter-spaced let-ter-space}
\else
  \language=\l@ukenglish
\fi
\hyphenation{An-dre-as Ber-nard Ha-rald Mi-cha-el Pe-ter Ste-phan Wolf-ram
             Har-ders Hop-pe Jac-kow-ski Ku-char-czyk Mei-er Mu-the-si-us Zed-ler
             Sveinung % ?
             with-out}
\def\fallbacktext#1{{\centering\itshape[#1]\par}}
% abbreviations
\DeclareRobustCommand\thanh{H\`an Th\^e%
     \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined \llap{\raisebox{0.5ex}{\'{}}}
     \else \llap{\raisebox{0.45ex}{\'{}\kern\dimexpr.05em-2\fontdimen1\font\relax}}
     \fi Th\`anh}
\def\pdftex{\texorpdfstring{pdf\kern.05em\TeX}{pdfTeX}}
\def\luatex{\texorpdfstring{lua\kern-.05em\TeX}{luaTeX}}
\def\etex{\mbox{e-\TeX}}
\def\nonetex{\mbox{\rlap{\kern.05em/}e-\TeX}} % aka. \TeX
\def\@reflect#1{\ifdim\fontdimen1\font=0pt \reflectbox{#1}%
  \else \rotatebox[origin=c]{180}{#1}\fi}
\DeclareRobustCommand\xetex{% also reflect the initial `X'?
  \textoractual{\@reflect{X}\lower.4ex\hbox{\kern-.12em\@reflect{E}}}{Xe}%
  \kern-.16em\TeX}
\def\texlive{\TeX~Live}
\def\microtype{{\PackageFont microtype}}
\def\letterspace{\pkg{letterspace}}
\def\fontdim{\cmd\fontdimen\,}
\def\eg{e.\,g.}
\def\ie{i.\,e.}
\DeclareRobustCommand\smaller{\setbox\z@\hbox{\@tempcnta=\f@size
  \edef\x{\@tempcnta=\the\@tempcnta}\expandafter}\x
  \advance\@tempcnta-7  \ifcase\@tempcnta\tiny\or\scriptsize\or
    \footnotesize\or\small\or\or\normalsize\or\or\large\or\or\or\Large\fi}
\DeclareRobustCommand\acronym[1]{\texorpdfstring{{\smaller\textls[60]{#1}}}{#1}}
\let\less=<
{\catcode`\<=\active
 \AtBeginDocument{\catcode`\<=\active
   \def<#1>{\acronym{#1}}
   \def\contributor#1 <#2\at#3>{\@contributor{#1}{#2@#3}}
   \DeclareRobustCommand\@contributor[2]{\textit{#1}}
   %\DeclareRobustCommand\@contributor[2]{\href{mailto:#2}{\textit{#1}}}
   }}
%<*driver>
\CodelineIndex
\EnableCrossrefs
\RecordChanges
%\OnlyDescription
\begin{document}
  \DocInput{\jobname.dtx}
\end{document}
%</driver>
%</driver|docsty>
% \fi
%
% ^^A -------------------------------------------------------------------------
%\GeneralChanges*
%\changes{v1.0}{2004/09/11}{Initial version}
%\changes{v2.0}{2006/12/29}{new package \letterspace: a stripped-down version,
%                           containing the letterspacing commands only}
%\GeneralChanges{Documentation}
%\changes{v1.9b}{2006/01/13}{activate expansion in the distributed <PDF>}
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/04/01}{logo transparency and amusement}
% ^^A Adobe Reader 8.0 had serious bugs with transparency. Fixed in 8.1.
%
% \GetFileInfo{microtype.dtx}
% \title{\ifx\printlogo\undefined\else\printlogo\fi
%        \textls{Das \microtype\ Paket}\\[.3\baselineskip]\large
%        Eine Schnittstelle für die mikrotypographischen Erweiterungen von \pdftex}
% \author{R Schlicht\\\mailtoRS}
% \date{\fileversion\\\filedate}
%
% \maketitle \thispagestyle{empty}
%
%\begin{abstract}
%\noindent
% Das \microtype\ Paket stellt eine \LaTeX\ Schnittstelle für die mikrotypographischen
% Erweiterungen von \pdftex bereit: besonders markant Zeichenvorsprünge und Fontexpansion,
% weiterhin die Justierung von Zeichenabständen innerhalb Wörter und zusätzliches Kerning sowie
% durch Bindestrich trennbaren Sperrsatz (Tracking) und die Möglichkeit, alle oder ausgewählte
% Ligaturen abzuschalten.
% Es erlaubt, diese Features auf anpassbare Fonts anzuwenden und alle mikrotypographischen Aspekte
% dieser Fonts in einer einfachen und flexiblen Art und Weise zu konfigurieren. Einstellungen
% für verschiedene Schriftarten werden bereitgestellt.\footnote{
%   Zur Zeit stellt dieses Paket Protrusionseinstellungen für Computer Modern
%   Roman, Palatino, Times, <URW> Garamond, Adobe Garamond und Minion,
%   Bitstream Charter und Letter Gothic, die <AMS> Symbole und Euler Fonts,
%   verschiedene Eurosymbol Schriftarten, sowie einige allgemeine Einstellungen für unbekannte Schriftarten
%   (siehe~Tabelle~\ref{tab:fonts} auf Seite~\pageref{tab:fonts}) bereit.
%   Beisteuerungen sind gern gesehen.}
%
% Zu beachten ist, dass Fontexpansion und Zeichenvorsprünge nur mit 
% \pdftex ($\geq$ Version 0.14f) arbeiten. Automatische Fontexpansion erfordert mindestens
% Version 1.20 oder neuer. Ligaturen zu deaktivieren erfordert \pdftex\ 1.30, Sperrsatz und 
% die Justierung von Zeichenabständen innerhalb Wörter sowie Kerning erfordern Version 1.40. Das
% Paket aktiviert standardmäßig Protrusion und Expansion, falls sicher angenommen werden kann, dass diese
% funktionieren. Diese beiden Features sind ebenso verfügbar mit \luatex. Das
% \microtype\ Paket arbeitet nicht mit \xetex.
%
% Das alternative Paket \letterspace, welches ebenso mit einfachem \TeX arbeitet,
% stellt nur die Befehle für Sperrsatz (Letter-spacing) bereit, und lässt Support für alle
% anderen Erweiterungen aus (siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sec:lettersp}).
%
%\bigskip\noindent
% Dieses Paket ist urheberrechtlich geschützt \textcopyright\ 2004\kern.09em--2010 R Schlicht.
% Es darf vertrieben und/oder modifiziert werden unter den Bedingungen der
% \IfFileExists{lppl.tex}{\hyperref[LPPL:LPPL]}{\href{http://www.latex-project.org/lppl/}}
%   {\LaTeX\ Project Public License},
% entweder Version~1.3c dieser Lizenz oder alternativ jeder späteren Version.
% Das Projekt hat den <LPPL> Wartungsstatus `author-maintained'.
%\end{abstract}
%
%
%\newpage
%\emptypdfpageresources ^^A layers of the logo
%\tableofcontents
%\listoftables
%
%
%\newpage
%\section{Mikrotypographie mit \pdftex}\label{sec:micro-type}
%
% \pdftex, die \TeX\ Erweiterung geschrieben von \thanh, führt eine Reihe 
% mikrotypographischer Features ein. welche es nicht nur zum Werkzeug der Wahl 
% für die Erstellung elektronischer Dokumente, sondern auch Werke überragender, altehrwürdiger
% Typographie machen: am bedeutendsten \textit{Zeichenvorsprünge (Character Protrusion, auch bekannt als margin kerning)}
% und\textit{Fontexpansion}. \thanh s Thesis zitierend:
%
%\changes{v1.9b}{2006/01/13}{add samples of micro-typographic features}
%\microtypesample{\small
% `Margin kerning bezeichnet die Justierung der Zeichen an den Rändern (margin) eines
%  gesetzten Textes. Eine vereinfachte Anwendung von Margin kerning ist hängende
%  Zeichensetzung. Margin kerning ist notwendig für optische Ausrichtung der Ränder
%  eines gesetzten Textes, weil mechanisches Angleichen der Ränder diese eher stümperhaft
%  aussehen lässt. Einige Zeichen können eine Zeile für das menschliche Auge kürzer
%  erscheinen lassen als andere. Solche Zeichen um einen passenden Betrag zu den Rändern zu
%  verschieben würde das Aussehen des Textes massiv verbessern.
%
%  Mit Fontexpansion zu verfassen ist die Methode, eine weitere oder engere 
%  Variante des Fonts zu erschaffen, welche die Wortzwischenräume mehr ausgleichen. 
%  Eine Schriftart in einer losen Zeile kann durch eine weitere Variante ausgetauscht werden, sodass die Wortzwischenräume
%  weniger stark gestreckt werden. Gleichermaßen kann ein Font in einer dicht bepackten Zeile 
%  durch eine schmalern Variante ersetzt werden, um die Abstände zu verringern.
%  Es besteht mit Sicherheit die potentielle Gefahr der Fontdeformierung wenn 
%  solche Manipulationen vorgenommen werden, weshalb sie mit extremer Vorsicht vorgenommen
%  werden müssen. Das Potential, eine Zeilebreite mittels Fontexpansion zu justieren,
%  sollte bedacht werden, wenn ein Paragraph in Zeilen zerbrochen wird,
%  um bessere Stopppunkte zu wählen.' [\cite[p.~323]{ThanhThesis}]} ~\\
%
% Diesen beiden Features fehlte seit einiger Zeit eine einfache \LaTeX\ Benutzerschnittstelle.
% Dann wurde das \cite{pdfcprot} Paket veröffentlicht, welches
% \LaTeX\ Benutzern ermöglichte, Zeichenvorsprünge zu benutzen, ohne sich zu sehr 
% mit den Interna beschäftigen zu müssen.
%
% Fontexpansion allerdings war weiterhin schwierig zu utilisieren, da es erforderte,
% dass die Fontmetriken für alle Ebenen der Erweiterung verfügbar waren.
% Deswegen musste jeder, der von diesem Feature Gebrauch machen wollte, im Vorfeld
% multiple Ausführungen der Schriftarten anfertigen. Shellskripte, um den Benutzer wenigstens
% teilweise von dieser Last zu befreien, waren verfügbar~-- dennoch blieb es eine lästige Arbeit.
% Darüber hinaus mussten alle Fonts weiterhin physisch erstellt werden, wodurch Kompilierungszeit 
% und Speicherplatz auf der Festplatte verschwendet wurden.
%
% Im Sommer 2004 implementierte \thanh\ eine Besonderheit, welche sich als eine
% bedeutende Erleichterung für \TeX\ und \LaTeX\ Benutzer entpuppte: Fontexpansion kann nun
% automatisch stattfinden. Das heißt, \pdftex\ braucht nicht länger die Fontmetriken der expandierten
% Schriftart, sondern berechnet diese zur Laufzeit und komplett im Speicher.
%
%\bigskip\noindent
% Nach diesem großen Sprung in der Anwendbarkeit stoppte die Entwicklung nicht.
% Im Gegenteil, \pdftex\ wurde mit immer mehr besonderen Merkmalen ausgestattet: Version
% 1.30 führte die Möglichkeit ein, \emph{alle Ligaturen auszuschalten}, Version 1.40
% brachte ein robustes \emph{Letter-spacing} Kommando, die Möglichkeit
% \emph{zusätzliches Zeichen Kerning} zu spezifizieren und die \emph{Justierung von Zeichenabständen innerhalb Wörter}.
%
% Robustes und per Bindestrich trennbares \emph{Letter-spacing (Tracking)} war immer
% extrem schwierig in \TeX zu realisieren. Obwohl das \cite{soul} Paket
% große Mühen unternahm um es möglich zu machen, konnte es trotzdem weiterhin in 
% bestimmten Situationen scheitern; allein das Tracking einer Schriftart für das ganze
% Dokument blieb unmöglich. Wendet man die neue Erweiterung von \pdftex an, stellt dies
% nicht länger ein Problem dar. Das \microtype\ Paket stellt die Möglichkeit bereit,
% das Tracking anpassbarer Fontsets zu ändern, z.B., alle kleinen Kapitälchen.
% Es führt außerdem die zwei neuen Kommandos \cs{textls} und \cs{lsstyle}
% für ad-hoc Letter-spacing ein, welche wie normale Textkommandos benutzt werden können.
% Beachten Sie, dass Letter-spacing nur im <PDF> Modus funktioniert.
%
% \emph{Zusätzliches kerning} für Zeichen einer Schriftart einzustellen ist besonders
% nützliche für Sprachen, deren typographische Tradition es erfordert, bestimmte Zeichen
% durch ein Leerzeichen abzutrennen. Es ist zum Beispiel üblich, in französischer
% Typographie ein wenig Platz vor einem Fragezeichen, Ausrufezeichen und Semikolon zu lassen,
% und ein wenig mehr Platz vorm Doppelpunkt und den Guillemets. Bis jetzt konnte das nur 
% erreicht werden, indem man diese Zeichen aktivierte (z.B.
% mit dem \pkg{babel} Paket), was nicht immer eine praxistaugliche Lösung sein kann.
% Im Kontrast zum Standard Kerning, welches in die Schriftarten eingebaut ist
% (und welches natürlich wie üblich greift), basiert dieses Kerning auf einzelnen Zeichen
% nicht auf Zeichenpaaren.
%
% \emph{Wortzwischenräume zu justieren} basiert auf der Idee, dass - um eine 
% uniforme Grauheit in einem Text zu erreichen - die Wortzwischenräume auch von den
% Zeichen in der direkten Umgebung abhängen sollten. Wenn zum Beispiel ein Wort mit 
% einem `r' endet, sollte der folgende Abstand ein kleines bisschen kleiner sein als z.B. nach
% einem `m'. Man kann von diesem Konzept wie von einer Erweiterung von \TeX s `space
% factors' denken. Allerdings, während space factors alle drei Parameter dieser
% Wortzwischenräume (oder Haftung) um den selben Betrag beeinflusst~-- das Kerning, den maximalen
% Betrag, um den der Zwischenraum gestreckt oder geschrumpft werden kann
% ~-- stellt \pdftex\ die Möglichkeit bereit, diese Parameter unabhängig voneinander
% zu modifizieren. Darüber hinaus können die Werte für jeden Font anders eingestellt werden.
% Außerdem -- und vielleicht am wichtigsten -- können diese Parameter nicht nur erhöht sondern
% auch erniedrigt werden. Dieses Merkmal wird das Aussehen von Paragraphen vielleicht noch
% mehr aufwerten.
% Die Betonung liegt im letzten Satz auf dem Wort `vielleicht': diese Erweiterung ist immer 
% noch sehr experimentell -- speziell haben nur die letzten Zeichen im Moment Einfluss auf die Wortzwischenräume.
% Außerdem sind die mit \microtype\ gelieferten Einstellungen nicht mehr als eine erste Annäherung,
% weshalb ich es begrüßen würde, wenn Sie Korrekturen und Verbesserungen vornehmen.
% Ich würde vorschlagen, die Begründung für die Einstellungen in Abschnitt~\ref{sub:conf-spacing} durchzulesen.
%
% Abschließend mag die Möglichkeit, für einen Font \emph{alle Ligaturen auszuschalten},
% nützlich für Schreibmaschinenschriftarten sein.
%
%\emptypdfpageresources ^^A layers of the sample
%\bigskip\noindent
% Das \microtype\ Paket stellt für all diese mikrotypographischen
% Erweiterungen eine Schnittstelle bereit. Alle mikrotypographischen Aspekte können individuell und einfach angepasst werden.
% Die nächsten Kapitel werden einen Abriss aller Optionen und Anpassungsmöglichkeiten präsentieren. 
%
%
%\section{Loslegen}
%
% Es gibt keine Überraschungen beim Laden des Paketes:
%\begin{verbatim}[morekeywords={[1]{microtype}}]
%\usepackage{microtype}
%\end{verbatim}
% In den meisten Fällen ist das ausreichend, und falls Sie nicht an der Feinabstimmung
% des mikrotypographischen Aussehens ihres Dokumentes (was unwahrscheinlich erscheint
% da Sie dieses Paket benutzen, was ihr Interesse an typographischen Problemen bestätigt)
% interessiert sind, können Sie den Rest dieses Dokumentes auslassen.
%^^A
% Falls Sie dies andererseits nicht befriedigt -- sei es aus theoretischen oder praktischen Gründen
% -- wird Sie dieses Handbuch auf den Weg zu den erwünschten Ergebnissen und folgenden
% Meilensteinen bringen:
%
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/06/06}{add overview}
%\begin{itemize}
%  \item Das entsprechende mikrotypograpische Feature einschalten, entweder
%        mittels der respektiven package Option oder mittels des \cs{microtypesetup} Kommandos
%        (Abschnitt~\ref{sec:options}).
%  \item Wählen Sie die Schriftarten aus, auf welche dieses Feature angwendet werden soll, indem
%        Sie `Font Sets' deklarieren und aktivieren. Einige Sets sind vorerstellt und können direkt
%        in den Paketoptionen aktiviert werden
%        (Abschnitt~\ref{sec:font-sets}).
%  \item Feinabstimmen der mikrotypographischen Einstellungen an den Schriftarten oder Sets von Schriftarten
%        (Abschnitt~\ref{sec:fine-tuning}).
%  \item Falls sie der Typ sind, der immer weiter marschiert, werden
%        Sie sicher an der Möglichkeit zu Context-abhängigen Einstellungen interessiert sein
%        (Abschnitt~\ref{sec:context}).
%  \item Wir ermutigen Sie sogar, den Pfad typographischer Tugend zu verlassen 
%        und ein paar Schafe zu stehlen (section~\ref{sec:lettersp}) oder auf andere Weise einzudringen
%        (section~\ref{sec:disable-ligatures}).
%  \item Sollten sich Ihnen ein Hindernis auftun, folgen Sie den Tipps und Warnungen
%        (Abschnitt~\ref{sec:caveats}).
%\end{itemize}
%
%
%\section{Optionen}\label{sec:options}
%
% Wie viele andere \LaTeX\ Pakete auch akzeptiert das \microtype\ Paket Optionen
% über die bekannte |Schlüssel=Wert| Syntax. Im Folgenden finden sie eine Beschreibung aller
% \key{Schlüssel} und ihrer möglichen |Werte|
% (`|true|' kann ausgelassen werden; multiple Werte (falls erlaubt) müssen eingeklammert
% werden; der Standardwert wirds rechts gezeigt, angeführt von einem Sternchen 
% falls es abhängig von der \pdftex\ Version und/oder dem Output Modus ist).
%
%
%\subsection{Die mikro-typographischen Features anschalten}\label{sub:options-microtype}
%
%\Describe{Option}{protrusion}
%                 {*true,false,compatibility,nocompatibility,:Name des Font Sets}
%\DescribeOption{expansion}
% Dies sind die hauptsächlichen Optionen um die Ebene mikro-typographischer Verfeinerung,
% welche die Schriftarten in ihrem Dokument erhalten sollten, zu kontrollieren. 
% Standardmäßig ist das Paket recht gierig; Character Protrusion ist aktiviert, Fontexpansion
% wird nur in Situationen abgeschaltet, in denen \pdftex\ die Fonts nicht automatisch expandieren
% kann, also falls es entweder zu alt ist (Versionen vor 1.20) 
% oder falls der Output Modus <DVI> ist (siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sub:options-misc}).
% Anders  gesagt wird \microtype\ versuchen, soviel Mikrotypographie anzuschalten wie
% es sicher als funktionierend unter den gegebenen Bedingungen erwarten kann
% (und normalerweise ist es nicht nötig, das Paket mit anderen Optionen für die <PDF>
% bzw. <DVI> Modi zu laden).
%
% Protrusion und Expansion können getrennt (de)aktiviert werden, indem man den betreffenden
% Schlüssel auf |true| bzw. |false| setzt. Die
% \opt{activate} Option
%\DescribeOption{activate}
% kürzt das Setzen beider Optionen zur gleichen Zeit ab. Deswegen haben die folgenden Zeilen
% alle denselben Effekt (wenn man <PDF> Dateien mit einer aktuellen Version
% von \pdftex erstellt):
%\begin{verbatim}
%\usepackage[protrusion=true,expansion]{microtype}
%\end{verbatim}
%\begin{verbatim}
%\usepackage[activate={true,nocompatibility}]{microtype}
%\end{verbatim}
%\begin{verbatim}
%\usepackage{microtype}
%\end{verbatim}
%\smallskip
% Wenn \pdftex\ Fontexpansion und Character Protrusion verwendet, können Zeilenumbrüche
% (und konsequenterweise auch Seitenumbrüche) unterschiedlich ausfallen. Wenn das nicht gewünscht ist
%  -- weil sie z.B. ein Buch neu setzen, dessen Seitenumbrüche sich nicht ändern dürfen --
%  können Sie den Wert |compatibility| an die \opt{protrusion}
% und/oder \opt{expansion} Optionen hängen. Aus typographischer Sicht jedoch werden die Ergebnisse
% suboptimal sein, weshalb der Wert standardmäßig |nocompatibility| ist.
%
% Abschließend können Sie auch den Namen eines Font Sets angeben, auf welches
% Character Protrusion und/oder Fontexpansion beschränkt werden sollten, siehe auch
% Abschnitt~\ref{sec:font-sets} für eine detaillierte Beschreibung. Spezifizieren eines Font Sets
% für ein Features aktiviert dieses Features implizit mit.
%
%\medskip
%\Describe{Option}{tracking}{true,!false,:font set name}
%\DescribeOption{kerning}
%\DescribeOption{spacing}
% Es existiert keine Kompatibilitätsebene für die neuen Erweiterungen Tracking,
% zusätzliches Kerning und Wortzwischenräume (interword spacing). Deshalb können sie nur an-
% oder ausgeschaltet werden, oder sie können aktiviert werden indem man einen Setnamen an die
% Option leitet. Standardmäßig ist keines der Features angeschaltet.
%
%\begin{table}\small
%\changes{v2.3a}{2008/02/25}{add table of available and enabled features}
%\caption{Verfügbarkeit mikro-typographischer Features}\label{tab:available-features}
%\catcode`\!=13 \def!{\textcolor{thegreen}{\hskip.9em $\bigstar$}}
%\catcode`\?=13 \def?{\textcolor{theblue} {\hskip 1em $\boxtimes$}}
%\catcode`\_=13 \def_{\textcolor{thered}  {\hskip 1em $\varnothing$}}
%\setlength\fboxsep{4pt}
%\leavevmode\kern-\dimexpr\fboxsep+\fboxrule\relax
%\fcolorbox{theframe}{white}{^^A
%\begin{minipage}{\textwidth}
%\def\arraystretch{1.2}
%\begin{tabular}{*3{@{}L{40pt}}*2{@{}L{43pt}}*4{@{}L{37pt}}@{}}
%      \multicolumn{3}{@{}l}{\footnotesize \TeX\ engine}
%    & \multicolumn{6}{@{}l}{\footnotesize Mikrotypographische Features}\\
%\cmidrule(r){1-3}\cmidrule{4-9}
%      \footnotesize Engine
%    & \footnotesize Version
%    & \footnotesize Output
%    & \footnotesize Protrusion
%    & \footnotesize Expansion
%    & \footnotesize (= auto)
%    & \footnotesize Kerning
%    & \footnotesize Spacing
%    & \footnotesize Tracking\\
%\cmidrule(r){1-1}\cmidrule(r){2-2}\cmidrule(r){3-3}\cmidrule(r){4-4}
%\cmidrule(r){5-5}\cmidrule(r){6-6}\cmidrule(r){7-7}\cmidrule(r){8-8}\cmidrule{9-9}
% \pdftex
%    & $\less$ 0.14f & <DVI>/<PDF> & _ & _ & _ & _ & _ & _\\
%    & $\geq$  0.14f & <DVI>/<PDF> & ! & ? & _ & _ & _ & _\\
%    & $\geq$  1.20  & <DVI>       & ! & ? & _ & _ & _ & _\\
%    &               & <PDF>       & ! & ! & ! & _ & _ & _\\
%    & $\geq$  1.40  & <DVI>       & ! & ? & _ & ? & ? & _\\
%    &               & <PDF>       & ! & ! & ! & ? & ? & ?\,\textsuperscript{\itshape a}\\
% \luatex ^^A we will have to re-model kerning, spacing and tracking with \luatex:
%    & $\geq$  0.25  & <DVI>       & ! & ? & _ & _ & _ & _\\
%    &               & <PDF>       & ! & ! & ! & _ & _ & _\\
%\bottomrule
%\end{tabular}^^A
%\vskip4pt\footnotesize
%\hskip-.8em
% ! = aktiviert\quad
% ? = nicht aktiviert\quad
% _ = nicht verfügbar
%\hfill
% \textit{a}\quad $\geq$ 1.40.4 empfohlen
%\vskip3pt
%\end{minipage}^^A
%}\kern-\dimexpr\fboxsep+\fboxrule\relax ^^A end \fcolorbox
%\end{table}
%
%\medskip\noindent
% In Tabelle~\ref{tab:available-features} erhalten Sie einen Überblick über die verfügbaren
% und standardmäßig aktivierten mikro-typographischen Features für die
% relevanten \pdftex\ Versionen und Output Modi.
%
%\medskip\noindent
% Ob Ligaturen deaktiviert werden sollten kann nicht mittels einer Option kontrolliert werden,
% sondern per \cs{DisableLigatures} Kommando, welches in 
% Abschnitt~\ref{sec:disable-ligatures} erklärt wird.
%
%
%\subsection{Zeichenvorsprünge}\label{sub:options-protrusion}
%
%\Describe{Option}{factor}{:integer}[1000]
% Benutzen Sie diese Option, um global einzustellen, um welchen Betrag die Zeichen
% hervorragen sollen. Während ein Wert von 1000 bedeutet, dass der volle Vorsprung 
% wie in der Konfiguration (siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sub:protrusion}) spezifiziert benutzt wird,
% bedeutet ein Wert von 500 entsprechend die Halbierung der Protrusion.
% Dies kann nützlich sein, falls Sie grundsätzlich zufrieden mit den Einstellungen sind,
% aber bevorzugen, wenn die Zeichenhervorragungen weniger oder mehr zu sehen sind.
% (z.B. wenn sie so stolz darauf sind, dieses Feature nutzen zu können, dass sie es jedem 
% zeigen wollen, oder -- um eine Motivation zu nennen, die in Einverständnis mit typographischer
% Korrektheit steht -- falls sie eine große Schriftart nutzen, die gemäßigtere Vorsprünge verlangt).
%
%\medskip
%\Describe{Option}{unit}{!character,:dimension}
% Diese Option wird in Abschnitt~\ref{sub:protrusion} erklärt, ebenso das Kommando
% \cs{SetProtrusion}. Seien sie vorsichtig bei Benutzung dieser Optionen!
%
%
%\subsection{Fontexpansion}\label{sub:options-expansion}
%
%\Describe{Option}{auto}{*true,false}
% Wie bereits im Kapitel~\ref{sec:micro-type} angemerkt, können die expandierten Versionen
% der Fonts automatisch erstellt werden. Diese Option ist standardmäßig an, wenn
% \pdftex Version 1.20 oder höher beträgt und der Output Modus <PDF> ist;
% ansonsten ist die Option deaktiviert.
% Falls \opt{auto} auf false gesetzt ist, müssen die einzelnen Fonts aller Expansionsstufen
% bereits existieren (mit nach dem Schema \meta{font~name}\texttt{\textpm}\meta{expansion value} benannten Dateien,
% z.B. \file{cmr12+10}, wie beschrieben in \cite{pdftexman}).
%\iffalse ^^A no longer true (1.40?)
% Falls expandierte Instanzen der Fonts verfügbar sind, werden sie verwendet,
% egal ob \opt{auto} auf true oder false gesetzt ist.
%\fi
%
%\changes{v1.9}{2005/08/27}{add remark about Type\,1 fonts required for
%                           automatic font expansion}
% Automatische Fontexpansion funktioniert nicht mit Bitmap Fonts, weswegen Sie, falls Sie
% die Computer Modern Roman Fonts in <T1> Kodierung\footnote{
%     Beiläufig bemerkt, Type\,1 Format und <T1> Encoding hängen in keiner
%     Weise miteinander zusammen, abgesehen davon, dass beide mit einem `T' anfangen und mit einer `1' enden.},
% nutzen, entweder \pkg{cm-super} Fonts installieren oder die Latin Modern
% Fonts (package \pkg{lmodern}) benutzen sollten.
%
%\medskip
%\Describe{Option}{stretch}{:integer}[20]
%\DescribeOption{shrink}
% Sie können bestimmen, wie sehr ein Font maximal gestreckt bzw. geschrumpft werden kann.
% Die Zahl wird durch 1000 dividiert, sodass ein Stretch Limit von 10 bedeutet,
% dass ein Font um bis zu ~1\% expandiert werden kann. 
% Das standardmäßige Stretch Limit ist 20; das Shrink Limit ist standardmäßig gleich
% dem Stretch Limit.
%
%\medskip
%\Describe{Option}{step}{:integer}[\MaybeDefault{1}]
% Fonts werden nicht um beliebige Mengen expandiert, sondern nur um gewisse bestimmte
% Schritte innerhalb der Expansionslimits.Mit aktuellen Version von \pdftex\ (1.40 oder
% neuer) ist diese Option standardmäßig auf 1 gesetzt, damit \pdftex\ die
% maximale Anzahl an Instanzen der jeweiligen Fonts ausprobieren kann und somit den bestmöglichen
% Output garantiert.\footnote{
%   Die Kehrseite an dieser Standardeinstellung ist, dass \pdftex\ vielleicht bei großen Dokumenten
%   nicht genügend Speicher zur Verfügung hat; in diesem Falle sollten Sie über die Fehlermeldungen in der `Hints
%   and caveats' Abschnitt~(\ref{sec:caveats}) nachlesen oder es mit einem größeren \opt{step} probieren.}
% Ältere \pdftex\ Versionen jedoch mussten jede einzelne Fontinstanz in der
% <PDF> Datei einfügen, wodurch die Dateigröße teils dramatisch erhöht wurde. Deswegen --
% sollten Sie eine pre-1.40 \pdftex\ Version nutzen -- ist \opt{step} standardmäßig
% auf ein Fünftel des kleineren Wertes von \opt{stretch} und \opt{shrink} gesetzt.
%
%\medskip
%\Describe{Option}{selected}{true,!false}
% Wenn Fontexpansion angewendet wird ist es möglich, die Expansion einiger sensibler Zeichen,
% welche schnell deformiert erscheinen können (z.B. das `O' im Kontrast zum `I'), zu begrenzen.
% Das nennt sich \emph{selected expansion} und seine Benutzung erlaubt, die Stretch und Shrink
% Limits zu erhöhen (auf z.B. 30 anstelle von 20); allerdings ist der Zuwachs limitiert, da
% gleichzeitig die durchschnittliche Stretch Varianz verringert wird
% Deswegen ist diese Option standardmäßig auf
% |false| gesetzt, sodass alle Zeichen um denselben Betrag expandiert werden.
% Siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sub:expansion} für eine detailliertere Beschreibung.
%
%
%\subsection{Tracking/Letterspacing}\label{sub:option-tracking}
%
%\Describe{Option}{letterspace}{:integer}[100]
% Diese Option verändert den Standardbetrag fürs Tracking (siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sub:tracking})
% sowie Letterspacing (siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sec:lettersp}). Der Betrag wird in Tausendsteln
% von 1\,em angegeben; zulässige Werte sind im Bereich von \textminus1000
% bis +1000.
%
%
%\subsection{Verschiedene Optionen}\label{sub:options-misc}
%
%\Describe{Option}{DVIoutput}{true,*false}
% \pdftex\ ist nicht bloß in der Lage, <PDF> Dateien zu erstellen, sondern kann auch <DVI>
% Dateien erzeugen.\footnote{
%    Neuere \TeX\ Systeme benutzen \pdftex\ als Standard Engine auch für
%    <DVI> Ausgaben.}
% Letztere können mit der Option \opt{DVIoutput} erzwungen werden, was 
% \cmd\pdfoutput\ auf Null setzt.
%
%\changes{v1.5}{2004/12/15}{add note about \opt{DVIoutput} option}
% Beachten Sie, dass dies Pakete verwirren wird, die auf den Wert von
% \cmd\pdfoutput\ angewiesen sind, falls diese früher geladen wurden; so erwarten sie,
% dass sie aufgerufen wurden um eine <PDF> Ausgabe zu erzeugen, obwohl das nicht der Fall ist.
% Diese Pakete sind u.a.: \pkg{graphics}, \pkg{color},
% \pkg{hyperref}, \pkg{pstricks} und natürlich \pkg{ifpdf}. Entweder laden sie diese Pakete nach
% \microtype\ oder benutzen die Anweisung |\pdfoutput=0| früher
% -- in letzterem Fall ist die \opt{DVIoutput} Option redundant.
%
% Wenn man <DVI> Dateien erstellt, muss Fontexpansion explizit aktiviert werden.
% Weder Letterspacing noch \emph{automatische} Fontexpansion werden funktionieren, da
% die postprocessing Treiber (|dvips|, |dvipdfm| etc.) sowie die <DVI> Betrachter
% nicht in der Lage sind, die Fonts on the fly zu generieren.
%
%\changes{v2.0}{2006/11/28}{add remark about `\opt{draft}' option disabling \microtype\
%               (noted by \contributor Michalis Miatidis <miatidis\at informatik.rwth-aachen.de>)}
%                                                                    ^^A private mail, 2006/11/26
%\medskip
%\Describe{Option}{draft}{true,!false}
%\DescribeOption{final}
% Falls die \opt{draft} Option an das Paket geleitet wird, werden \emph{alle
% mikro-typographischen Erweiterungen ausgeschaltet}, was zu unterschiedlichen Zeilen-
% und somit Seitenumbrüchen führen kann. Die \opt{draft} und \opt{final} Optionen können
% außerdem von den Optionen der Klasse geerbt werden; natürlich kann man diese mit den
% Optionen der Pakete überschreiben. Falls man z.B. die Klassenoption |draft| verwendet, um
% jegliche übervollen Boxen anzuzeigen, sollte man \microtype\ mit der |final|
% Option laden.
%
%\medskip
%\Describe{Option}{verbose}{true,!false,errors,silent}
% Informationen bzgl. der Einstellungen an jeglichen Fonts werden in die Log Datei
% geschrieben, sofern man die \opt{verbose} Option aktiviert. Wenn \microtype\ auf ein nicht-fatales Problem trifft
% (z.B. ein unbekanntes Zeichen in den Einstellungen oder nicht-existente Einstellungen),
% gibt es standardmäßig nur eine Warnung aus und versucht weiterzumachen.
% Lädt man das Paket mit |verbose=errors| werden alle Warnungen in Fehler verwandelt, sodass
% man sicher sein kann, dass kein Problem unerkannt bleibt. Falls man
% andererseits allen Warnungen nachgegangen ist und sich entscheidet, diese zu ignorieren,
% kann man \microtype\ mittels |verbose=silent| zum Schweigen bringen.
%
%\medskip
%\Describe{Option}{babel}{true,!false}
% Das Paket mit der \opt{babel} Option zu laden wird die Zeichensetzung 
% der jeweiligen ausgewählten Sprache anpassen. Mehr Information hierzu in Abschnitt~\ref{sec:context}.
%
%\medskip
%\Describe{Option}{config}{:file name}[microtype]
% Verschiedene Einstellungen für dieses Paket werden aus einer Hauptkonfigurationsdatei geladen,
% standardmäßig ist dies \file{microtype.cfg} (siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sub:config-file}).
% Sie können eine andere Konfigurationsdatei wählen, indem sie deren Name
% mittels \emph{ohne die Dateiendung} angeben, z.B. |config=mycrotype|.
%
%\iffalse ^^A ... waiting for bug reports before documenting yet another option ...
%\medskip
%\Describe{Option}{defersetup}{!true,false}
% Anders als in früheren Versionen verzögert \microtype\ seit Version 1.9a sein
% Setup bis zum Ende der Präambel. Dies hat mindestens 2 Vorteile: Das unten
% beschriebene Kommando \cs{microtypesetup} kann genutzt werden um Paketoptionen später
% zu ändern und es ist nicht länger notwendig, die Standardfonts und Enkodierungen
% noch vor \microtype zu laden. Es gibt nur ein mögliches Problem: Falls eine Box
% innerhalb der Präambel konstruiert wird \emph{und} diese Box eine Schriftart enthält, 
% die nicht geladen wird bevor die Box im Dokument verwendet wird, so wird diese Schriftart
% nicht eingerichtet. Sollte dieser extrem unwahrscheinliche Fall auftreten, sollten Sie
% |defersetup=false| setzen. Dann greifen jedoch die angesprochenen Restriktionen.
%
%\medskip
%\Describe{Option}{copyfonts}{true,!false} ^^A and another one ...
% There are some restrictions as to what \pdftex\ can do with a font: Firstly,
% it cannot expand a single font with different parameters, secondly, it cannot
% apply different protrusion settings to one font within the same paragraph.
% Both restrictions, which only matter with a context-sensitive setup
% (cf.~section~\ref{sec:context}), can be circumvented with the \opt{copyfonts}
% option: when it is set to |true|, \microtype\ will use font copies to work
% on. This option will automatically be set to |true|, whenever protrusion or
% expansion settings with a |context| keyword are encountered. If these
% settings are loaded after the preamble, however, it is too late, and you
% should set the \opt{copyfonts} option manually.
% This only works with \pdftex\ 1.40.4 or later.
%\fi
%
%
%\ifcmr\else\pagebreak\markright{}\fi ^^A layout
%\subsection{Changing options later}\label{sub:options-cmd}
%
%\Describe{Macro}{\microtypesetup}{key\,|=|\,value list}
% Innerhalb der Präambel akzeptiert dieses Kommando alle oben genannten Paketoptionen
% (außer |config|).
% Im Dokumentkörper kann dieser Aufruf verwendet werden, um grundlegende Einstellungen
% der mikro-typographischen Erweiterungen zu verändern. Es akzeptiert dann alle Optionen aus
% Abschnitt~\ref{sub:options-microtype}: \key{expansion}, \key{protrusion} und
% \key{activate}, welche wiederum die Werte |true|, |false|,
% |compatibility| oder |nocompatibility| erhalten können, \key{tracking}, \key{kerning} und
% \key{spacing} mit den zulässigen Werten |true| oder |false|.
% Den Namen eines Fonts an die Option zu leiten ist nicht erlaubt.
% Benutzt man dieses Kommando, so könnte man z.B. temporär Fontexpansion ausschalten
% indem man wie folgt verfährt:
%\begin{verbatim}
%\microtypesetup{expansion=false}
%\end{verbatim}
%
%
%\section{Fonts für Mikrotypographie auswählen}\label{sec:font-sets}
%
% Standardmäßig wird Character Protrusion auf alle Textschriftarten angewandt, die
% im Dokument genutzt werden, und eine grundlegende Auswahl an Fonts wird Fontexpansion
% unterzogen. Sie wollen vielleicht anpassen, welche Schriftarten den Vorzug bekommen sollten,
% mikro-typographisch behandelt zu werden. Dies kann geschehen, indem man 
% `Font Sets' deklariert und auswählt; diese Font Sets werden mittels Font Attributen spezifiziert,
% die zutreffen müssen.
%
%\medskip
%\Describe{Macro}{\DeclareMicrotypeSet}{?features,set name,set of fonts}
%\DescribeMacro{\DeclareMicrotypeSet*}
% Dieses Kommando deklariert ein neues Font Set, auf welches die the mikro-typographischen
% Erweiterungen angewendet werden. Das optionale Argument kann eine mit Komma separierte
% Liste von Features enthalten, auf die das jeweilige Set beschränkt werden soll.
% Die mit Stern versehene Variante deklariert \emph{und} aktiviert das Font Set
% gleichzeitig.
%
% \paragraph{Das Font Set} wird durch den <NFSS> Font Attributen zugewiesene Werte definiert:
% Kodierung, Familie, Serie, Form und Größe (siehe auch~\cite{fntguide}).
% Wir fangen mit einem Beispiel an. Dieses Paket definiert einen Font namens
% `|basictext|' in der Hauptkonfigurationsdatei wie folgt:
%\begin{verbatim}
%\DeclareMicrotypeSet{basictext}
%   { encoding = {OT1,T1,T2A,LY1,OT4,QX,T5},
%     family   = {rm*,sf*},
%     series   = {md*},
%     size     = {normalsize,footnotesize,small,large}
%   }
%\end{verbatim}
% Wenn Sie nun 
%\begin{verbatim}[deletekeywords={[1]{protrusion}}]
%\UseMicrotypeSet[protrusion]{basictext}
%\end{verbatim}
% in der Präambel des Dokuments aufrufen, werden nur Fonts mit den Kodierungen <OT1>, <T1>,
% <T2A>, <LY1>, <OT4>, <QX> oder <T5> aus Roman oder Sans Serif Familien, normalen (oder
% `medium') Serien und in per \cmd\normalsize, \cmd\footnotesize, \cmd\small\ oder \cmd\large 
%  aufgerufenen Größen hervorragen. Mathematische Schriftarten andererseits
% werden das nicht, da sie anderen Kodierungen angehören; gleiches gilt für 
% fettgedruckte oder große Schriftarten etc.
%
% Falls eine Attributsliste leer ist oder fehlt -- wie das `shape' Attribut
% im obigen Beispiel -- führt dies zu keiner Einschränkung, sprich, es ist äquivalent dazu
% \emph{alle} möglichen Werte für dieses Attribut einzusetzen.
% Deswegen ist das vordefinierte Set `|alltext|', welches wie folgt deklariert ist:
%\begin{verbatim}
%\DeclareMicrotypeSet{alltext}
%   { encoding = {OT1,T1,T2A,LY1,OT4,QX,T5,TS1} }
%\end{verbatim}
% viel weniger restriktiv. Die einzige Bedingung lautet, dass die Kodierung stimmen muss.
%
% Folgt einem Wert ein Asterisk (wie `|rm*|' und `|sf*|' im ersten Beispiel),
% kennzeichnet dieser keinen <NFSS> Code, sondern wird in das
% |\|\meta{value}|default| des Dokuments übersetzt, z.B. \cmd\rmdefault.\footnote{
%   Diese Übersetzungen geschehen zum \cmd\AtBeginDocument, was bedeutet, dass
%   Änderungen an den Standardwerten innerhalb der Präambel auch berücksichtigt werden.
%   Nur falls Font Standards \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ vom Benutzer selbst geändert werden,
%   müssen Sie \microtype\ nach diesen Änderungen laden.}
% Ein einzelner Asterisk bedeutet |\|\meta{attribute}|default|, z.B.
% \cmd\encodingdefault, gleichermaßen \cmd\normalsize\ für die Größenachse.
% Größen können entweder als Dimension angegeben werden (`|10|' oder `|10pt|') oder
% als Größenwahlkommando \emph{ohne} den Backslash. Sie können sogar Bereiche
% (z.B. `|small-Large|') wählen; während die untere Grenze im Bereich enthalten ist, gilt
% dies nicht für die obere Grenze. Deshalb würde `|12-16|' beispielsweise 12\,pt,
% 13.5\,pt und 15.999\,pt enthalten, aber nicht 16\,pt. Es ist nicht erlaubt, die untere
% oder obere Grenze auszulassen (`|-10|', `|large-|').
%
% Zusätzlich zu diesem Deklarationsschema können sie einzelne Schriften zu einem
% Set hinzufügen, indem Sie den `|font|' Schlüssel nutzen, welcher die Aneinanderreihung aller
% Fontattribute, getrennt durch Slashes, erwartet, das heißt,
%`|font|\,|=|\,\meta{encoding}|/|\meta{family}|/|\meta{series}|/|\meta{shape}|/|\meta{size}'.
% Das erlaubt uns, Font Sets zu Sets hinzuzufügen, von denen sie sonst disjunkt sind.
% Falls Sie zum Beispiel wollen, dass die Roman Familie in allen Größen hervorragt,
% aber nur die normal große, möglicherweise kursive typewriter Font (im Kontrast zum
% z.B. kleinen Font), so könnten sie das Set so deklarieren:
%\begin{verbatim}[deletekeywords={[1]{protrusion}}]
%\DeclareMicrotypeSet[protrusion]
%   { myset }
%   { encoding = T1,
%     family   = rm*,
%     font     = {T1/tt*/m/n/*,
%                 T1/tt*/m/it/*} }
%\end{verbatim}
% Wie Sie dem Beispiel entnehmen können, ist die Asterisk Notation auch für
% den |font| Schlüssel zulässig. Ein einzelner Asterisk ist äquivalent zu `|*/*/*/*/*|', also dem
% normalen Font. Befehle zur Größenwahl sind auch möglich, allerdings sind keine Bereiche erlaubt. 
%
%\medskip\noindent
% Tabelle~\ref{tab:predefined-font-sets} listet die 9 vordefinierten Font Sets auf.
% Diese können ebenfalls aktiviert werden, indem ihr Name an die Optionen
% \opt{protrusion}, \opt{expansion}, \opt{tracking}, \opt{kerning} und
% \opt{spacing} der Features geleitet wird, wenn das Paket geladen wird, z.B.:
%\begin{verbatim}
%\usepackage[protrusion=allmath,tracking=smallcaps]{microtype}
%\end{verbatim}
%
%\begin{table}\microtypesetup{protrusion=false}\small
%\caption{Vordefinierte Font Sets}\label{tab:predefined-font-sets}
%\catcode`\!=13 \def!{\textcolor{thered}{$\varnothing$}}
%\catcode`\/=13 \def/#1/{\textcolor{thegreen}{#1}}
%\def<#1>{\textcolor{theblue}{\acronym{#1}}}
%\setlength\fboxsep{4pt}
%\leavevmode\kern-\dimexpr\fboxsep+\fboxrule\relax
%\fcolorbox{theframe}{white}{^^A
%\begin{minipage}{\textwidth}
%\begin{tabular}{@{}L{65pt}L{80pt}*3{L{41pt}}L{67pt}@{}}
%      \footnotesize Set Name
%    & \multicolumn{5}{l}{\footnotesize Font attributes}\\
%\cmidrule{2-6}
%    & \footnotesize Kodierung
%    & \footnotesize Familie
%    & \footnotesize Serie
%    & \footnotesize Shape
%    & \footnotesize Größe\\
%\cmidrule(r){1-1}\cmidrule(r){2-2}\cmidrule(r){3-3}
%\cmidrule(r){4-4}\cmidrule(r){5-5}\cmidrule{6-6}
% |all|
%    & !
%    & !
%    & !
%    & !
%    & ! \\
%\cmidrule(r){1-1}
% |alltext|\linebreak(|allmath|)
%    & Textkodierungen, <TS1>\linebreak (<OML>, <OMS>, <U>)
%    & !
%    & !
%    & !
%    & ! \\
%\cmidrule(r){1-1}
% |basictext|\linebreak(|basicmath|)
%    & Textkodierungen \linebreak (<OML>, <OMS>)
%    & /\cmd\rm|*|/,\linebreak /\cmd\sf|*|/
%    & /\cmd\md|*|/
%    & !
%    & /\cmd\normalsize/, /\cmd\footnotesize/, /\cmd\small/, /\cmd\large/\\
%\cmidrule(r){1-1}
% |smallcaps|
%    & Textkodierungen
%    & !
%    & !
%    & /\cmd\sc|*|/
%    & ! \\
%\cmidrule(r){1-1}
% |footnotesize|
%    & Textkodierungen, <TS1>
%    & !
%    & !
%    & !
%    & |-|/\cmd\small/\\
%\cmidrule(r){1-1}
% |scriptsize|
%    & Textkodierungen, <TS1>
%    & !
%    & !
%    & !
%    & |-|/\cmd\footnotesize/\\
%\cmidrule(r){1-1}
% |normalfont|
%    & /\cmd\encoding|*|/
%    & /\cmd\family|*|/
%    & /\cmd\series|*|/
%    & /\cmd\shape|*|/
%    & /\cmd\normalsize/\\
%\bottomrule
%\end{tabular}
%\vskip4pt\footnotesize
% `Textkodierungen' = <OT1>, <T1>, <T2A>, <LY1>, <OT4>, <QX>, <T5>
%\hfill
% `/\bslash\,\dots|*|/' = `/\bslash\,\dots|default|/'
%\vskip3pt
%\end{minipage}^^A
%}\kern-\dimexpr\fboxsep+\fboxrule\relax ^^A end \fcolorbox
%\end{table}
%
%\medskip
%\Describe{Macro}{\UseMicrotypeSet}{?features,set name}
% Dieses Kommando aktiviert ein vorher durch \cs{DeclareMicrotypeSet} deklariertes Font Set.
% Nutzt man das optionale Argument, so kann man begrenzen, wieviele Features auf das Set angewendet werden.
% Diese Anweisung hat nur einen Effekt, wenn das Features in den Paketoptionen aktiviert wurde. 
%
%\medskip
%\Describe{Macro}{\DeclareMicrotypeSetDefault}{?features,set name}
% Falls ein Feature aktiviert ist, aber kein Font Set explizit gewählt wurde, so
% werden die von diesem Befehl deklarierten Sets aktiviert. Standardmäßig wird das `|alltext|' Font
% Set für Zeichenhervorhebungen und zusätzliches Kerning genutzt, das
% `|basictext|' Set für Fontexpansion und Wortzwischenräume und das
% `|smallcaps|' Set für Tracking.
%
%\medskip\noindent
% Diese Anweisungen können nur in der Präambel oder der Hauptkonfigurationsdatei
% verwendet werden. Ihre Bandbreite gilt global für das Dokument. Nur ein Set pro Feature
% kann aktiviert werden.
%
%
%\section{Micro Feinabstimmung}\label{sec:fine-tuning}
%
% Jedes Zeichen bedarf eines bestimmten Betrags an Protrusion, Kerning oder Spacing.
% Es kann ebenso wünschenswert sein, die maximale Expansion bestimmter Zeichen zu
% begrenzen. Überdies, da jeder Font anders aussieht, müssen Einstellungen speziell
% auf eine Schriftart oder ein Set von Fonts zutreffen. Dieses Paket enthält flexible und
% einfache Methoden, um diese feineren Aspekte der Mikrotypographie
% anzupassen.
%
% Alle Anweisungen zur Feinabstimmung folgen prinzipiell derselben Syntax: Sie benötigen alle
% 3 argumente; das Erste ist optional und kann zusätzliche Optionen enthalten;
% im zweiten Argument werden Font Sets spezifiziert, auf welche die Einstellungen angewendet
% werden sollen; das dritte Argument enthält die eigentlichen Einstellungen.
%
% Das Font Set, für welches die Einstellungen greifen sollen, wird mit der selben
% Syntax von \meta{font axis}\,|=|\,\meta{Werteliste} Paaren deklariert wie für das 
% Kommando \cs{DeclareMicrotypeSet} (siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sec:font-sets}). Der einzige 
% Unterschied liegt darin, dass Werte mit anführendem Asterisk sofort übersetzt werden,
% nicht am Ende der Präambel.
%^^A
%\ifcmr\else\enlargethispage{3\baselineskip}\fi ^^A layout
%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/23}{remove table of match order}^^A
% Um die passenden Einstellungen für eine gegebene Schriftart zu finden, versucht das Paket alle
% Kombinationen von Fontkodierung, Familie, Serie, Form und Größe, mit abnehmendem 
% Stellenwert in dieser Reihenfolge. Existieren zum Beispiel sowohl Einstellungen für die
% momentanen Familien (z.B. |T1/cmr///|) als auch Einstellungen für kursive Fonts mit normalem Gewicht
% (|T1//m/it/|), so würden die Einstellungen für die |cmr| Familie benutzt.\footnote{
%    Für alle Interessierten stellt Tabelle~\ref{tab:match-order} auf
%    Seite~\pageref{tab:match-order} die exakte Reihenfolge dar.}
% Die Kodierung muss immer stimmen.
%
%\subsection{Character Protrusion}\label{sub:protrusion}
%
%\Describe{Macro}{\SetProtrusion}{?options,set of fonts,protrusion settings}
% Benutzt man dieses Kommando, so kann man die Protrusionsfaktoren jedes einzelnen Zeichens
% einer Schriftart oder eines Font Sets verändern. Ein sehr unvollständiges Beispiel wäre das folgende:
%\begin{verbatim}
%\SetProtrusion
%   { encoding = T1,
%     family   = cmr }
%   { A              = {50,50},
%     \textquoteleft = {700, } }
%\end{verbatim}
% Dies würde darin resultieren, dass der Buchstabe `A' um 5\% seiner Breite
% auf beiden Seiten hervorragt; das linke Anführungszeichen würde hier um 70\% seiner Breite zum linken Rand hin
% hervorragen. Angewandt wird das Beispiel auf alle Font Formen, Serien und Größen der
% <T1>~kodierten Computer Modern Roman Familie.
%
%\paragraph{Die Protrusionseinstellungen}
% bestehen aus \meta{Zeichen}\,|=|\,\meta{Protrusionsfaktoren} Paaren.
%
% Die Zeichen können entweder einzeln als solche angegeben werden (`|A|'),
% als ein Symbolkommando (`\cmd\textquoteleft'), oder als Slotnummer: 3 Stellen
% für dezimale Notation, angeführt von~|"| für hexadezimal, mit~|'| für
% oktal (z.B. die `fl' Ligatur in <T1> Kodierung:~|029|, |"1D|, |'35|).
% \mbox{8-bit} (und sogar <UTF-8>) Zeichen können direkt oder in
% \LaTeX's traditioneller \mbox{7-bit} Notation eingegeben werden: sowohl |\"A| als auch \expandafter|\"A|
% sind zulässig, vorausgesetzt, dass das Zeichen sowohl in der Input- als auch
% der Fontkodierung deklariert wird. Sie haben ebenfalls die Möglichkeit, Zeichenlisten anzugeben,
% für welche die Einstellungen übernommen werden sollen (siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sub:inherit}).
%
% Die Protrusionsfaktoren weisen einem Zeichen den Betrag zu,
% um den sie zum linken Rand hin (erster Wert) bzw. rechten Rand hin (zweiter Wert) hervorragen
% sollen. Standardmäßig sind die Werte relativ zur Breite des Zeichens zu verstehen,
% sodass ein Wert von 1000 bedeutet, dass das Zeichen vollständig zwischen die Ränder
% gelegt werden sollte, während es z.B. bei einem Wert von 50 
% um 5\% seiner Breite hervorragen würde. Negative Werte sind erlaubt, ebenso Zahlen größer
% als 1000 (effektiv jedoch nicht mehr als 1\,em der Schriftart).
% Sie können jede der beiden Zahlen auslassen, wenn Sie nicht wollen, dass
% das jeweilige Zeichen zu dieser Seite hervorragen sollte. Das abtrennende Komma jedoch
% dürfen Sie nicht auslassen.
%
%\paragraph{Optionen:}
%\begin{options}
%  \item[\key{name}] Sie können den Protrusionseinstellungen einen Namen zuweisen, sodass
%       Sie in der Lage sind, es aus einer anderen Liste zu laden.
%  \item[\key{load}] Sie können eine andere Liste laden (vorausgesetzt, dass Sie dieser zuvor
%       einen Namen zugewiesen haben) bevor die aktuelle Liste geladen wird, wodurch die Fonts die
%       Werte der geladenen Liste erben.
%      \par
%       Dadurch kann die Konfiguration beträchtlich erleichtert werden. Sie können
%       zum Beispiel eine Standardliste für eine Schriftarte erstllen; Einstellungen für andere
%       Formen oder Serien können diese Einstellungen laden, sie erweitern und überschreiben
%       (da der jeweils letzte Wert Vorrang hat). Font Einstellungen werden
%       rekursiv geladen.
%       Die folgenden Optionen werden alle geladenen Listen beeinflussen:
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/06/23}{add example for \texttt{factor} option}
%  \item[\key{factor}] Diese Option kann genutzt werden, um alle Protrusionsfaktoren
%       der Liste zu beeinflussen, was alle globalen \opt{factor} Einstellungen überschreibt (siehe
%       Abschnitt~\ref{sub:options-protrusion}). Wollen sie zum Beispiel, dass Fonts mit größeren Abmaßen
%       weniger hervorragen, könnten Sie die normalen Listen laden, allerdings
%       könnten Sie kleinere Faktoren darauf anwenden:
%\begin{verbatim}
%\SetProtrusion
%   [ factor   = 700
%     load     = cmr-T1 ]
%   { encoding = T1,
%     family   = cmr,
%     size     = large- }
%   { }
%\end{verbatim}
%  \item[\key{unit}] Standardmäßig sind die Protrusionsfaktoren relativ zur Breite
%       des jeweiligen Zeichens. Die |unit| Option kann genutzt werden, um dieses Verhalten
%       zu überschreiben, sodass \microtype\ diese Werte als Tausendstel der
%       angegeben Werte deutet. Gibt man z.B. die Anweisung `|unit=1em|' hätte dies den Effekt, dass
%       ein Wert von 50 nun darin resultieren würde, dass ein ein Zeichen um
%       5\% eines em des Fonts hervorragen würde (und somit die interne
%       Vermessung von \pdftex's \cmd\lpcode\ und \cmd\rpcode\ primitives simuliert).
%       Das normale Verhalten kann mittels |unit=character| wiederhergestellt werden.\footnote{
%          Die |unit| Option kann auch global an das Paket geleitet werden (siehe
%          Abschnitt~\ref{sub:options-protrusion}).
%          Allerdings werden alle vorliegenden Einstellungen unter der Annahme,
%          dass die Werte relativ zur Zeichenbreite sind, erstellt. Deshalb
%          sollten Sie es nur ändern wenn Sie sich sicher sind, dass
%          die Standardeinstellungen im Dokument nicht verwendet werden.}
%  \item[\key{preset}] Setzt die Protrusions Codes aller Zeichen auf die angegebenen
%       Werte (|={|\meta{left}|,|\meta{right}|}|), u.U. skaliert mit
%       einem |factor|. Eine |unit| Einstellung wird nur berücksichtigt, wenn sie
%       nicht |=character| ist.
%  \item[\key{inputenc}] Wählt eine Inputkodierung aus, die auf die Liste angewendet
%       werden soll, unabhängig von der Eingabekodierung des Dokuments selbst. Sie können jede
%       Kodierung angeben, die per \pkg{inputenc} geladen werden könnte,
%       also u.a. |ansinew|, |koi8-r|, |utf8|.
%  \item[\key{context}] Die Bandbreite der Liste kann auf einen gewissen Kontext limitiert
%       werden. Schauen Sie in Abschnitt~\ref{sec:context} für ein Anwendungsbeispiel nach.
%\end{options}
%
%
%\subsection{Fontexpansion}\label{sub:expansion}
%
%\Describe{Macro}{\SetExpansion}{?options,set of fonts,expansion settings}
% Standardmäßig können alle Zeichen eines Fonts um denselben Betrag gestrecht
% oder geschrumpft werden. Man kann aber auch die Expansionslimits für bestimmte
% einzelne Zeichen festlegen, wenn diese sensibler auf Deformation reagieren. Das ist der
% Zweck des \cs{SetExpansion} Kommandos. Beachten Sie, dass dies nur einen Effekt hat,
% wenn das Paket mit der Option \opt{selected} geladen wurde (siehe
% Abschnitt~\ref{sub:options-expansion}). Ansonsten werden die Expansionseinstellungen
% ignoriert~-- anders als die Optionen im optionalen ersten Argument, welche
% trotzdem ausgewertet werden.
%
% Falls das Paket mit der \opt{selected} Option geladen wurde und Einstellungen für einen Font
% nicht existieren, wird Fontexpansion gar nicht auf diesen Font angewendet.
% Sollte die außergewöhnliche Situation aufkommen, dass sie die ausgewählte Expansion
% generell verwenden wollen, aber dass alle Zeichen eines bestimmten Font (Sets)
% um denselben Betrag geschrumpft oder expandiert werden sollten, so müssen sie eine
% leere Liste für diese Fonts erstellen.
%
%\ifcmr\else\enlargethispage\baselineskip\fi ^^A layout
%\paragraph{Die Expansionseinstellungen}
% bestehen aus Paaren der Form \meta{character}\,|=|\,\meta{expansion factor}.
% Sie können eine Zahl für jedes Zeichen festlegen, die den Betrag bestimmt, um den
% ein Zeichen expandiert werden kann. Die Zahlen bezeichnen Tausendstel
% der vollen Expansion.
% Setzt man zum Beispiel den Expansionsfaktor des Zeichens `O' auf 500,
% wird dieses nur um die Hälfte des Betrages geschrumpft oder expandiert, um
% den die anderen Zeichen expandiert werden.
% Während der Standardwert für Character Protrusion auf 0 gesetzt ist -- sofern Sie
% keine Zeichen angegeben haben, wird auch keines hervorspringen ~-- ist der Standardwert
% für Expansion 1000, was bedeutet, dass alle Zeichen um denselben Betrag
% expandiert werden.
%
%\paragraph{Optionen:}
%\begin{options}
%  \item[\key{name}, \key{load}, \key{preset}, \key{inputenc}, \key{context}]
%       Analog zu \cs{SetProtrusion} kann dieses optionale Argument genutzt werden,
%       um einer Liste einen Namen zuzuweisen, eine andere Liste zu laden, alle Expansionsfaktoren
%       voreinzustellen, die Eingabekodierung festzulegen oder den Kontext der Liste
%       zu bestimmen (Expansionskontexte sind nur möglich mit \pdftex\
%       Version 1.40.4 oder neuer).
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/12}{add example of how to get rid of a widow
%               (suggested by \contributor Adam Kucharczyk <adamk\at ijp-pan.krakow.pl>)}
%                                                          ^^A private mail, 2005/04/09
%  \item[\key{auto}, \key{stretch}, \key{shrink}, \key{step}]
%       Diese Schlüssel können genutzt werden um die globalen Einstellungen der Paketoptionen
%       zu überschreiben (siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sub:options-expansion}). Wenn Sie keine
%       der Optionen |stretch|, |shrink| und |step| angeben, wird ihr jeweiliger globaler
%       Wert genutzt (es findet also keine Berechnung statt).
%
%       Ein praktisches Beispiel: Nehmen wir an, wir haben einen Paragraphen, der eine
%       Witwe enthält, die man einfach hätte verhindern können, indem man den Font ein wenig
%       mehr geschrumpft hätte. In Verbindung mit der |context| Option (siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sec:context}
%       für weitere Details) könnte man mit diesem speziellen Paragraphen mehr Expansion erlauben:
%\begin{verbatim}[gobble=2]
% \SetExpansion
%    [ context = sloppy,
%      stretch = 30,
%      shrink  = 60,
%      step    =  5  ]
%    { encoding = {OT1,T1,TS1} }
%    { }
% % ... END PREAMBLE
% {\microtypecontext{expansion=sloppy}%
%  Dieser Paragraph enthält eine `unnötige' Witwe.}
%\end{verbatim}
%       Diese Methode, Kontext anzuwenden um vorübergehend verschiedene
%       Expansionsparameter zu setzen funktioniert nur mit \pdftex\ 1.40.4 oder neuer
%       (für ältere Versionen wird ein schmutziger Trick in
%       Abschnitt~\ref{ssec:font-setup} auf Seite~\pageref{exp-hack} beschrieben). Bedenken Sie auch,
%       dass \pdftex\ die Nutzung von Fonts mit verschiedenen Expansionslimits oder -stufen
%       (sogar für verschiedene Fonts) innerhalb eines Paragraphs verbietet, weswegen
%       der saloppe Kontext benutzt werden muss, um Paragraphen zu komplettieren.
%  \item[\key{factor}]
%       Diese Option stelle eine andere Methode bereit, um Expansionseinstellungen für
%       bestimmte Fonts zu verändern, arbeitet aber um die eben beschriebenen Restriktionen herum. Die
%       |factor| Option beeinflusst die Expansionsfaktoren aller Zeichen (in
%       Kontrast zur allgemeinen Streckbarkeit) des Fonts. Wollten sie z.B. die
%       kursive Form weniger expandieren lassen, würden sie vereinbaren:
%\begin{verbatim}
%\SetExpansion
%   [ factor   = 500 ]
%   { encoding = *,
%     shape    = it }
%   { }
%\end{verbatim}
%       Die |factor| Option kann nur genutzt werden, um die Streckbarkeit der Zeichen 
%       zu \emph{verringern}, weshalb sie nur Werte kleiner als 1000 erhalten darf.
%       Außerdem kann sie nur für einzelne Fonts oder Font Sets genutzt werden;
%       die Option global in den Paketoptionen zu setzen macht wenig Sinn --
%       dafür nutzt man die Optionen \opt{stretch} und
%       \opt{shrink} des Pakets.
%\end{options}
%
%
%\subsection{Tracking}\label{sub:tracking}
%\Describe{Macro}{\SetTracking}{?options,set of fonts,tracking amount}
% Eine bedeutende typographische Technik -- welche lange in \TeX\ fehlte --
% ist die Anpassung des Trackings, sprich die uniforme Addition oder Subtraktion
% von Sperrsatz zu/von allen Zeichen eines Fonts. Zum Beispiel ist es ein 
% normal üblicher, typographischer Brauch, komplett in Kapitälchen
% (wie in diesem Dokument) ein wenig zu sperren. Die Lesbarkeit kann auch verbessert
% werden, indem man das Tracking von kleinerer Typen minimal erhöht und das größerer
% Typen minimal erhöht.\footnote{
%     Für Fonts mit vollem Funktionsumfang wie Computer Modern ist das für gewöhnlich
%     nicht nötig, da sie in optischen Größen kommen und das Tracking der Kapitälchen
%     bereits angepasst ist.}
% Das \cs{SetTracking} Kommando erlaubt, die Menge des Trackings für verschiedene
% Fonts oder Font Sets zu setzen. Es wird vom \cs{textls} Kommando ausgewertet,
% welches genutzt werden kann, um kleinere Textpassagen zu sperren (siehe
% Abschnitt~\ref{sec:lettersp}).
%
%\paragraph{Die Menge des Tracking}
% wird festgelegt in Tausendsteln von 1\,em (oder der gegebenen Einheit); negative Werte
% sind ebenfalls erlaubt.
%
%\paragraph{Optionen:}
%\begin{options}
%  \item[\key{name}, \key{unit}, \key{context}]
%       Diese Optionen dienen derselben Funktionalität wie bei den vorigen
%       Konfigurationskommandos. Die Einheit kann jegliche Dimension annehmen, 
%       der Standard beträgt 1\,em.
%  \item[\key{spacing}]
%       Werden die \emph{Zeichen}zwischenräume verändert, müssen auch die \emph{Wort}zwischenräume
%       vielleicht angepasst werden. Diese Option erwartet drei Zahlen für Wortzwischenraum,
%       bzw. Streckung und Schrumpfung, welche in Tausendsteln eines 1\,em
%       angegeben werden (oder in der aktuellen Einheit (\texttt{unit})). Folgt 
%       einem Wert ein Asterisk, so zeigt es an, dass Tausendstel der jeweiligen
%       Fontdimension zu dieser hinzuaddiert werden. Zum Beispiel werden durch
%\begin{verbatim}
%\SetTracking[ spacing = {25*,166, } ]{ encoding = *, shape = sc }{ 25 }
%\end{verbatim}
%       die Wortzwischenräume um 2.5\% erhöht, die Streckung wird auf einen Betrag
%       von 0.166\,em gesetzt, an den Schrumpf-Einstellungen wird nichts geändert. Falls
%       sie die \texttt{spacing} Option nicht angeben, wird der Wortzwischenraum
%       über die aktuelle Größe der Sperrsatzabstände skaliert (wie in obigem Beispiel),
%       wobei stretch und shrink unberührt bleiben.
%  \item[\key{outer spacing}]
%       Falls ein Wortzwischenraum direkt auf Sperrsatz folgt (oder umgekehrt),
%       wird er standardmäßig gleich den Zwischenräumen im gesperrten Text behandelt.
%       Mit dieser Option, welche dieselben Werte wie \texttt{spacing} akzeptiert, 
%       kann sie unabhängig eingestellt werden.
%  \item[\key{outer kerning}]
%       Falls andererseits kein Wortzwischenraum folgt oder vorgeht, können Sie
%       immer noch die ersten und letzten Buchstaben von angrenzenden Buchstaben 
%       abtrennen. Diese Option erwartet durch Komma abgretrennte Kerning Beträge 
%       für die linke und rechte Seite, in Tausendsteln eines 1\,em (oder der aktuellen
%       \texttt{unit}). Folgt einem Wert ein Asterisk, bezeichnet dies Tausendstel 
%       der aktuellen Abstandsgröße des Sperrsatzes. Ein einzelner Asterisk bedeutet
%       `|500*|'; das ist ebenso der Standard, sprich die Summe des äußeren Kerns beträgt
%       standardmäßig soviel wie die aktuelle Größe der Abstände des Sperrsatzes. Um kerning auf
%       beiden Seiten zu entfernen, verwendet man `|outer kerning={0,0}|'.
%  \item[\key{no ligatures}]
%       Soweit \pdftex\ betroffen ist, werden Ligaturen in gesperrten Fonts 
%       wie gewöhnlich konstruiert, was angebracht sein kann, wenn das Tracking
%       um einen kleinen Betrag geändert wird. Für größere Abstände andererseits
%       hätte der normale Abstand zwischen Zeichen innerhalb Ligaturen
%       enttäsuchende \textls[150]{E\lslig{ff}ekte}.
%       Dieser Schlüssel erwartet eine per Komma abgetrennte Liste von Zeichen, für welche
%       die Ligaturen abgeschaltet werden sollen; nur das Zeichen, mit welchem die Ligatur
%       beginnt, muss angegeben werden.
%       Wird der Schlüssel ohne Wert angegeben, so werden \emph{alle} Ligaturen des Fonts
%       abgeschaltet. Das wird jedoch nicht empfohlen, da es ebenso mit sich bringt, dass
%       Kerning ausgeschaltet wird.\footnote{
%         Die untrennbare Verbindung von Ligaturen und Kernen ist eine Begrenzung von
%         \TeX\, die nicht vor der Einführung \luatex beseitigt wird.}
%       Die Standardeinstellungen stellen Ligaturen nur für das Zeichen `|f|' ab,
%       sprich, `ff', `fi', ffi', etc.\footnote{
%         Mit \pdftex\ Versions vor 1.40.4 sind \emph{alle} Ligaturen und
%         somit jegliches Kerning abgeschaltet. Es wird deshalb empfohlen, wenigstens
%         Version 1.40.4 zu nutzen.}
%       In außergewöhnlichen Situationen könenn Sie manuell Ligaturen aufbrechen, indem
%       sie `|{\kern0pt}|' bzw. \pkg{babel}s \verb="|=
%       Kürzel verwenden, oder aber die Ligaturen schützen, indem Sie sie in \cs{lslig} einschließen (siehe
%       Abschnitt~\ref{sec:lettersp}).
%\end{options}
%
%\ifx\lssample\undefined
% \fallbacktext{Die originale Dokumentation\footnote{
%     \ctanurl{macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf}.}
%   enthält ein Bild, welches all diese Optionen illustriert.}
%\medskip\noindent
% Nehmen wir zum Beispiel an,
%\else
%\changes{v2.3}{2007/11/03}{add letterspacing illustration}
%\medskip\noindent
% Since a picture is worth a thousand words, probably even more if, in our
% case, it depicts a couple of letterspaced words, let's bring one to sum up
% these somewhat confusing options. Suppose you had the following settings
% (which I would in no way recommend; they are only for illustrative purposes):
%\begin{verbatim}
%\SetTracking
%  [ no ligatures  = {"\anchorarrow{nolig}"f},
%    spacing       = {60"\anchorarrow{ispace}"0*,-1"\anchorarrow{istretch}"00*, "\anchorarrow{ishrink}"},
%    outer spacing = {4"\anchorarrow{ospace}"50,2"\anchorarrow{ostretch}"50,1"\anchorarrow{oshrink}"50},
%    outer kerning = {"\anchorarrow{okernbegin}"*,"\anchorarrow{okernend}"*} ]
%  { encoding = * }
%  { 1"\anchorarrow{lsamount}"60 }
%\end{verbatim}
% and then write:
%\begin{verbatim}
%Stop \textls{stealing sheep}!
%\end{verbatim}
% this is the (typographically dubious) outcome:
%
% \lssample
%
%\noindent
% While the word `Stop' is not letterspaced, the space between the letters in
% the other two words is expanded by the \showarrow[tracking]{tracking~amount}{red}
% of 160/1000\,em\,=\allowbreak\,0.16\,em.
% The \showarrow[ispace]{inner~space}{green} within the letterspaced text is
% increased by 60\%, while its \showarrow[istretch]{stretch}{green} amount is
% decreased by 10\% and the \showarrow[ishrink]{shrink}{green} amount is left
% untouched.
% The \showarrow[ospace]{outer~space}{green} (of 0.45\,em) immediately before the
% piece of text may \showarrow[ostretch]{stretch}{green} by 0.25\,em and
% \showarrow[oshrink]{shrink}{green} by 0.15\,em.
% Note that there is no outer space after the text, since the exclamation mark
% immediately follows; instead, the default \showarrow[okern]{outer~kern}{red}
% of half the letterspace amount (0.08\,em) is added.
% Furthermore, one \showarrow{ligature}{grey} wasn't broken up, because we
% neglected to specify the `|s|' in the |no ligatures| key.
%
%\medskip\noindent
% As another, more realistic
%\fi
%                            Sie wollen alle kleinen Kapitälchen um 50/1000\,em
% sperren, Fonts kleiner \cmd\small\ um 0.02\,em, und das Tracking großer Typen
% um 0.02\,em erhöhen. Sie können das mit folgenden Einstellungen erreichen:
%^^A there's a \nobreakspace ahead!
%\begin{verbatim}
%\usepackage[tracking=true]{microtype}
%\DeclareMicrotypeSet*[tracking]{my}
%   { encoding = *,
%     size     = {-small,Large-},
%     font     = */*/*/sc/* }
%\SetTracking[ no ligatures = f ]{ encoding = *, shape = sc}{ 50 }
%\SetTracking{ encoding = *, size = -small }{  20 }
%\SetTracking{ encoding = *, size = Large- }{ -20 }
%\end{verbatim}
%
%\medskip\noindent
% Gesperrte Schriftarten, für welche keine Einstellungen vorliegen, werden um den
% den Standard von 0.1\,em gesperrt (einstellbar mit der Paketoption \opt{letterspace}, siehe
% Abschnitt~\ref{sub:options-misc}). Setzen wir voraus, ihr Herausgeber will, dass Sie ihre
% 1000 Seiten auf ein Meisterwerk von einer handvoll Seiten zusammenkürzen, dann könnten Sie
% (mit gekreuzten Fingern) \microtype\ laden:
%\begin{verbatim}
%\usepackage[tracking=alltext,letterspace=-40]{microtype}
%\end{verbatim}
%
%\emptypdfpageresources ^^A layers of letterspacing illustration
%
%
%\subsection{Zusätzliches Kerning}\label{sub:kerning}
%
%\Describe{Macro}{\SetExtraKerning}{?options,set of fonts,kerning settings}
% Mit diesem Befehl können sie das zusätzliche Kerning feinabstimmen. Im Vergleich zu
% herkömmlichem Kerning, welches immer mit einem \emph{Paar} von Zeichen assoziiert
% wird, und Tracking, welches den Zwischenraum zwischen \emph{allen}
% Zeichen eines Fonts angibt, bezieht sich zusätzliches Kerning nur auf einzelne Zeichen,
% soll heißen, immer wenn ein bestimmtes Zeichen im Text auftaucht, wird das angegebene
% Kerning eingefügt, unabhängig davon, welche Zeichen vorgehen oder folgen.
%
% Ich sollte nicht versäumen zu sagen, dass es eine Limitierung zusätzlichen Kernings gibt:
% Wörter, die solch einem Kern\emph{direkt folgen} (nicht von einem Leerzeichen getrennt),
% werden nicht mit Bindestrich versehen, solang man die Trennpunkte nicht selbst einstellt, 
% z.B. für Kerning nach dem Apostroph `|l'apos\-trophe|'. Diese Restriktion von \pdftex\
% wird hoffentlich bald abgeschafft.
%
%\paragraph{Die Einstellungen des Kerning}
% werden als Paare der Form \meta{Zeichen}\,|=|\,\meta{Kerning Werte} angegeben, wobei
% letzteres 2 Werte enthätl: das Kerning, welches vor und nach dem betreffenden Zeichen angefügt wird.
% Einmal mehr können Werte ausgelassen werden, nicht aber das Komma.
%
%\paragraph{Optionen:}
%\begin{options}
%  \item[\key{name}, \key{load}, \key{factor}, \key{preset}, \key{inputenc}]
%       Diese Optionen dienen der gleichen Funktionalität wie in den vorigen
%       Konfigurationsbefehlen.
%  \item[\key{unit}] Zulässige Werte sind: |space|, |character| und eine
%       \meta{Dimension}. Standardmäßig bezeichnen die Werte ein Tausendstel von 1\,em.
%  \item[\key{context}] Wenn es um Kerning Einstellungen geht, ist diese Option
%       besonders nützlich, da sie erlaubt, Einstellungen abhängig von der Sprache
%       anzuwenden.
%      \par
%       Zum Beispiel kann man die folgenden Einstellungen, angedacht für Dokumente in Französisch,
%       in der Hauptkonfigurationsdatei finden:
%\ifcmr\else\pagebreak\fi ^^A layout
%\begin{verbatim}[deletekeywords={[1]{unit}}]
%\SetExtraKerning
%   [ name     = french-default,
%     context  = french,
%     unit     = space   ]
%   { encoding = {OT1,T1,LY1} }
%   {
%     :  = {1000,}, % = \fontdimen2
%     ;  = {500, }, % ~ \thinspace
%     !  = {500, },
%     ?  = {500, }
%   }
%\end{verbatim}
%\changes{v2.3}{2007/11/20}{add kerning sample}
%\ifluatex
% \fallbacktext{Since this document was compiled with |luatex| instead of
%   |pdftex|, it does not\\include the sample that the original documentation
%   features.}
%\else
%      \begin{microtypecontext}{kerning=french}
%       Was ist das Ergebnis dieser Einstellungen? Wenn sie aktiv sind wie 
%       im vorliegenden Paragraphen, wird ein schmales Leerzeichen vor jedem Fragezeichen,
%       Ausrufezeichen und Semikolon eingefügt; ein normales Leerzeichen vorm Doppelpunkt.
%       In Abschnitt~\ref{sec:context} wird beschrieben, wie diese Einstellungen aktiviert
%       werden. Dieser Paragraph wurde eingegeben wie folgt:
%      \end{microtypecontext}
%\begin{verbatim}[deletekeywords={[1]{context,activate}}]
%\begin{microtypecontext}{kerning=french}
%       Was ist das Ergebnis dieser Einstellungen? Wenn sie aktiv sind wie 
%       im vorliegenden Paragraphen, wird ein schmales Leerzeichen vor jedem Fragezeichen,
%       Ausrufezeichen und Semikolon eingefügt; ein normales Leerzeichen vorm Doppelpunkt.
%       In Abschnitt~\ref{sec:context} wird beschrieben, wie diese Einstellungen aktiviert
%       werden. Dieser Paragraph wurde eingegeben wie folgt:
%\end{microtypecontext}
%\end{verbatim}
%\fi
%\end{options}
%
%
%\subsection{Wortzwischenräume}\label{sub:spacing}
%
%\Describe{Macro}{\SetExtraSpacing}{?Optionen,Font Set,Spacing Einstellungen}
% Dieser Befehl erlaubt Ihnen, die Wortzwischenräume fein abzustimmen (auch bekannt als
% glue). Eine vorausgehende Bemerkung darüber, was ein `Zwischenraum' ist, könnte angebracht sein: zwischen zwei
% Wörtern fügt \TeX\ sogenannten glue ein, welcher von drei Parametern charakterisiert wird
% -- der normale Abstand zwischen zwei Wörtern, der maximale Abstand, der dem angefügt
% werden darf, und das Maximum welches davon subtrahiert werden kann.
% Die letzteren beiden Parameter wirken wann immer \TeX\ versucht, einen Paragraphen
% in Zeilen zu zerlegen und dabei scheitert; es kann die Räume zwischen Wörtern strecken
% oder schrumpfen. Diese drei Parameter sind spezifisch für jeden Font.
%
% Obendrein beherrscht \TeX\ das Konzept von `space factors'.
% Sie können genutzt werden, um die Räume zwischen bestimmten Zeichen, besonders
% den Satzzeichen zu vergrößern. Falls \pdftex zusätzliche Zwischenräume
% in Betrieb sind, werden space factors ignoriert, da es als Erweiterung
% zu space factors mit viel präziserer Kontrolle betrachtet werden kann.
%
%\paragraph{Einstellungen an den Zwischenräumen}
% werden als Paare der Form \meta{Zeichen}\,|=|\,\meta{Zwischenraum Faktoren} deklariert, wobei
% letztere aus drei Zahlen bestehen: zuerst der zusätzliche Kern, der nach diesem Zeichen
% angefügt wird, wenn es vor einem Wortzwischenraum vorkommt, 2. der zusätzliche Streckungsbetrag
% und zuletzt der zusätzliche Schrumpfbetrag. Alle Werte können auch negativ sein,
% wodurch die Dimensionen verkleinert werden. Nicht alle Werte müssen angegeben werden,
% die Einstellungen müssen jedoch zwei abtrennende Kommas beinhalten.
%
%\paragraph{Optionen:}
%\begin{options}
%  \item[\key{name}, \key{load}, \key{factor}, \key{preset}, \key{inputenc}, \key{context}]
%       Diese Optionen dienen der gleichen Funktionalität wie in den vorigen
%       Konfigurationsbefehlen.
%  \item[\key{unit}] Sie können die Einheit wählen, in der die angegebenen Zahlen
%       gemessen werden. Mögliche Werte sind: |character|, eine \meta{Dimension} und
%       zusätzlich |space|. Letztere Einstellung misst die Werte in Tausendsteln der
%       jeweiligen Dimension, die vom Font eingestellt ist. Standardmäßig wird die Einheit
%       in Zwischenraumdimensionen gemessen. Mit folgenden (unsinnigen) Einstellungen z.B.:
%\begin{verbatim}
%\SetExtraSpacing
%   [ unit = space  ] % default
%   { font = */*/*/*/* }
%   {
%       .  = {1000,1000,1000},
%   }
%\end{verbatim}
%       würde der Raum nach einem Punkt verdoppelt (streng genommen:
%       2\,\texttimes\ \fontdim2),ebenso
%       die Schrumpfbeträge der Wortzwischenräume (\fontdim3 und~4). Umgekehrt
%       würde man, so alle drei Werte auf \textminus1000 setzt, das Leerzeichen
%       nach dem betreffenden Zeichen komplett aufheben.
%\end{options}
%
%
%\subsection{Zeichenvererbung}\label{sub:inherit}
%
% \Describe{Macro}{\DeclareCharacterInheritance}
%                 {?Features,Font Set,Vererbungslisten}
% In den meisten Fällen sollten akzentuierte Zeichen die Einstellungen ihres
% Ursprungszeichens erben. Zum Beispiel sollten vermutlich alle der Zeichen \`A, \'A, \^A,
% \~A, \"A, \r{A} und \u{A} um denselben (absoluten) Betrag hervorragen wie der
% Buchstabe A. Nutzt man den Befehl \cs{DeclareCharacterInheritance},
% so kann man Klassen von Zeichen benennen, wodurch man nur das betreffende
% Grundzeichen einstellen muss. Mit dem zusätzlichen Argument, welches eine per
% Komma abgetrennte Liste von Features enthalten kann, können Sie die Reichweite
% der Liste beschränken. Zusätzlich dazu akzeptiert es den |inputenc| Schlüssel, um die Eingabekodierung
% für diese Liste einzustellen. Das Font Set kann wie üblich eingestellt werden.
% Die einzige Ausnahme hierbei ist, dass exakt eine Kodierung gewählt werden muss. Die Vererbungslisten
% werden als Paare der Form \meta{base character}\,|=|\,\meta{Liste der erbenden
% Zeichen} deklariert. Solange Sie keine abweichende Kodierung oder einen sehr eigenartig
% geformten Font verwenden, sollte es keinen Grund geben, die standardmäßigen Vererbungseinstellungen
% zu ändern.
%
%\bigskip\noindent
% In der Hauptkonfigurationsdatei \file{microtype.cfg} und den anderen
% font-spezifischen Konfigurationsdateien können Sie Beispiele zu all
% diesen Befehlen finden.
%
%
%\subsection{Konfigurationsdateien}\label{sub:config-file}
%
% Die Standardkonfiguration beinhaltet Vererbungseinstellungen, Deklarationen von
% Font Sets und alias Fonts sowie generische Hervorragung, Expansion, Spacing und
% Kerning Einstellungen, und wird aus der Datei \file{microtype.cfg} geladen. Sie können
% diese Datei mit eigenen Einstellungen erweitern (oder eine andere Konfigurationsdatei
% mit der `\opt{config}' Option laden, siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sub:options-misc}).
%
% Wenn Sie den Weg einschlagen, neue Einstellungen für eine Fontfamilie zu treffen, sollten Sie
% diese in eine separate Datei stecken, deren Name `|mt-|\meta{Fontfamilie}|.cfg|' 
% (z.B. `\file{mt-cmr.cfg}') lauten muss, und welche alle Befehle enthalten muss,
% die in diesem Abschnitt~\ref{sec:fine-tuning} beschrieben. Diese Dateien werden
% automatisch geladen, wenn sie die betreffenden Fonts tatsächlich nutzen.
% Das Paket kommt mit mit Konfigurationsdateien für eine Reihe von Fontfamilien;
% Tabelle~\ref{tab:fonts} enthält sie alle.
%
%\begin{table}[t]\small
%\changes{v1.6a}{2005/02/02}{add table of fonts with tailored protrusion settings}
%\caption{Fonts mit zugeschnitten Hervorragungseinstellungen}\label{tab:fonts}
%\setlength\fboxsep{4pt}
%\leavevmode\kern-\dimexpr\fboxsep+\fboxrule\relax
%\fcolorbox{theframe}{white}{^^A
%\begin{minipage}{\textwidth}
%\def\arraystretch{1.2}
%\long\def\@makefntext#1{%
%  \leftskip 0pt
%  \parindent 0pt
%  \everypar{\parindent 0pt}%
%  \leavevmode\hbox to 15pt{\@thefnmark\hss}#1}
%\let\footnoterule\relax
%\def\fnref#1{\textsuperscript{\itshape\ifpdf\ref*{#1}\else\ref{#1}\fi}}
%\begin{tabular*}{\textwidth}{@{\extracolsep{\fill}}*3l@{}}
%       \footnotesize Fontfamilie (<NFSS> code)
%      & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\footnotesize Features}\\
%\cmidrule{2-3}
%      & \footnotesize Kodierungen
%      & \footnotesize Formen\\
%\cmidrule{1-1}\cmidrule{2-2}\cmidrule{3-3}
% Generic
%      & <OT1>, <T1>, <T2A>, <LY1>, <QX>, (<TS1>)\footnote{Unvollständig\label{fn:incmpl}}
%      & n, (it, sl, sc)\fnref{fn:incmpl} \\
% Computer Modern Roman (|cmr|)\footnote{Alias: Latin Modern (|lmr|),
%                                        \pkg{ae} (|aer|), \pkg{zefonts} (|zer|),
%                                        \pkg{eco} (|cmor|), \pkg{hfoldsty} (|hfor|)}
%      & <OT1>, <OT4>, <T1>, <T2A>, <T5>, <LY1>, <TS1>
%      & n, it, sl, sc \\
% Bitstream Charter (|bch|)\footnote{Alias: \pkg{mathdesign}/Charter (|mdbch|),
%                                    MicroPress's \pkg{chmath} (|chr|)}
%      & <OT1>, <T1>, <T5>, <LY1>, <TS1>
%      & n, it, (sl)\footnote{Einstellungen vererbt von kursiver Form\label{fn:it-sl}}, sc \\
% Adobe Garamond (|pad|, |padx|, |padj|)
%      & <OT1>, <T1>, <LY1>, <TS1>
%      & n, it, (sl)\fnref{fn:it-sl}, sc \\
% <URW> Garamond (|ugm|)\footnote{Alias: \pkg{mathdesign}/<URW> Garamond (|mdugm|)}
%      & <OT1>, <T1>, <TS1>
%      & n, it\\
% Bitstream Letter Gothic (|blg|)\footnote{Alias: \pkg{ulgothic} (|ulg|)}
%      & <OT1>, <T1>, <TS1>
%      & n, it \\
% Adobe Minion (|pmnx|, |pmnj|)
%      & <OT1>, <T1>, <T2A>, <LY1>, <TS1>
%      & n, it, (sl)\fnref{fn:it-sl}, sc, si\\
% Palatino (|ppl|, |pplx|, |pplj|)\footnote{Alias: \pkg{pxfonts} (|pxr|),
%                                           \pkg{qfonts}/QuasiPalatino, \TeX\ Gyre Pagella (|qpl|),
%                                           <FPL> Neu (|fp9x|, |fp9j|)}
%      & <OT1>, <OT4>, <T1>, <LY1>, (<TS1>)\fnref{fn:incmpl}
%      & n, it, (sl)\fnref{fn:it-sl}, sc \\
% Times (|ptm|, |ptmx|, |ptmj|)\footnote{Alias: \pkg{txfonts} (|txr|),
%                                        \pkg{qfonts}/QuasiTimes, \TeX\ Gyre Termes (|qtm|)}
%      & <OT1>, <OT4>, <T1>, <LY1>, <QX>, (<TS1>)\fnref{fn:incmpl}
%      & n, it, (sl)\fnref{fn:it-sl}, sc \\
% Computer Modern math (|cmsy|, |cmm|)
%      & <OML>/<OMS>
%      & n/it \\
% <AMS> symbols (|msa|, |msb|)
%      & <U>
%      & n\\
% Euler (|eur|, |eus|, |euf|)\footnote{Alias: \pkg{eulervm} (|zeur|, |zeus|)}
%      & <U>
%      & n\\
% Euro symbols (Adobe, <ITC>, \pkg{marvosym})
%      & <U>/<OT1>
%      & n, it \\
%\bottomrule
%\end{tabular*}^^A
%\end{minipage}^^A
%}\kern-\dimexpr\fboxsep+\fboxrule\relax ^^A end \fcolorbox
%\end{table}
%
%\medskip
%\Describe{Macro}{\DeclareMicrotypeVariants}{list of suffixes}
%\DescribeMacro{\DeclareMicrotypeVariants*}
% Auf seiner Suche nach einer Konfigurationsdatei versucht das Paket auch,
% Suffixe oder einen oder mehr Buchstaben von einem Fontnamen zu entfernen, welche auf eine `Variante'
% des Basisfonts hindeuten könnten (vergleiche Karl Berrys \cite{fontname}). Das erlaubt z.B.,
% Einstellungen für z.B. die Fonts |padx| (Experten Set), |padj| (altertümliche Numerale)
% und |pad| (einfach) in der selben Datei \file{mt-pad.cfg} vorzunehmen.
% Der Befehl erwartet eine durch Komma abgetrennte Liste von Suffixen für Varianten. Die Version
% mit Stern hängt die Suffixe der existierenden Liste an. Die Standard-Deklaration
% in \file{microtype.cfg} lautet:
%\begin{verbatim}
%\DeclareMicrotypeVariants{x,j,w,a,d,0,1}
%\end{verbatim}
%
%\medskip
%\Describe{Macro}{\DeclareMicrotypeAlias}{Fontname,alias Font}
% Dieser Befehle kann für Fonts genutzt werden, die sich sehr ähnlich
% oder gar gleich sind (falls sie sich zum Beispiel nicht an das Berry Namensgebungsschema beim
% Installieren der Fonts hielten). Ein Beispiel wären die Latin Modern Fonts, welche
% von Computer Modern abgeleitet sind, sodass es nicht notwendig ist, neue Einstellungen
% für diese vorzunehmen -- man könnte sagen:
%\begin{verbatim}
%\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{lmr}{cmr}
%\end{verbatim}
% wodurch das Paket -- wann immer der Font |lmr| vorkommt und keine Einstellungen
% dafür gefunden werden können -- auch den Font |cmr| ausprobiert. Tatsächlich werden Sie
% eben diese Zeile (mit einigen anderen) in der Standardkonfigurationsdatei vorfinden.
%
%\medskip
%\Describe{Macro}{\LoadMicrotypeFile}{Fontname}
% In wenigen Fällen kann es nötig sein, eine Fontkonfigurationsdatei manuell
% zu laden (z.B. aus einer anderen Konfigurationsdatei heraus), oder in der Lage
% zu sein, in einer Datei festgelegte Einstellungen zu erweitern, die sonst
% nicht automatisch oder zu spät geladen würden.\footnote{
%    Authoren von Fontpaketen sollten vielleicht einen Blick auf den hook
%    \cs{Microtype@Hook} werfen, beschrieben im Implementationsteil,
%     Abschnitt~\ref{sub:hook}.}
% Dieser Befehle lädt die Datei `|mt-|\meta{Fontname}|.cfg|'.
%
%
%\section{Kontext-sensitive Einstellungen}\label{sec:context}
%
% Das \microtype\ -Paket erlaubt zudem verschiedene Mikro-typografische 
% Einstellungen für die Schriftarten, die vom Zusammenhang abhängig sind, zu 
% verwenden.
% Dies eröffnet unendlich viele Möglichkeiten der Feinabstimmungen für das Aussehen 
% des Dokuments.
%
%\medskip
%\Describe{Macro}{\microtypecontext}{context assignments}
% Dieser Befehl kann überall im Dokument (auch in der Präambel) verwendet werden, 
% um den Mikro-typografischen Zusammenhang in der aktuellen Gruppe zu ändern. 
% Zu jeder Funktion (\key{protrusion}, \key{expansion}, \key{tracking}, 
% \key{spacing} und \key{kerning}), kann ein Kontext zugewiesen werden. Folglich 
% können nur Einstellungen mit dem entsprechenden 'Kontext'-Schlüsselwort verwendet 
% werden.
%
%\medskip
%\Describe{Env}{microtypecontext}{context assignments}
% Wieviele andere \LaTeX\ -Befehle ist der Befehl, in Form einer Umgebung 
% verfügbar.
%
%\medskip
%\Describe{Macro}{\textmicrotypecontext}{context assignments,general text}
% Als weitere Möglichkeit, ändert der Befehl \cs {textmicrotypecontext} den
% Kontext für den Text, der im zweiten Argument übergeben wird.
%
%\changes{v1.9c}{2006/01/25}{add example of how to increase protrusion of footnote markers
%                (suggested by \contributor Georg Verweyen <verweyen\at gmail.com>)}
%                                                     ^^A private mail, 2006/01/25
%\medskip\noindent
% Angenommen, Sie möchten eine größere Menge von Fussnotenzeichen im Text  
% erhalten, dann können die Einstellungen der Zahlen so definieret werden
%\begin{verbatim}
%\SetProtrusion
%   [ context = footnote ]
%   { font    = */*/*/*/scriptsize } % adapt if necessary
%   { 1 = { ,650}, 2 = { ,400}, 3 = { ,400}, 4 = { ,400}, 5 = { ,400},
%     6 = { ,400}, 7 = { ,500}, 8 = { ,400}, 9 = { ,400}, 0 = { ,400} }
%\end{verbatim}
%\ifcmr\else\enlargethispage{2\baselineskip}\fi ^^A layout
% um damit den Kontext im Fussnoten-Befehl zu ändern. Dieser Befehl 
% unterscheidet sich zwischen den verscheidenen Klassen. Für die Basisklassen z.B, % \pkg{article}, wäre es:
%\begin{verbatim}
%\newcommand*\new@makefnmark{\hbox{\@textsuperscript{\normalfont
%   \microtypecontext{protrusion=footnote}\@thefnmark}}}
%\renewcommand*\@footnotemark{%
%   \leavevmode \ifhmode\edef\@x@sf{\the\spacefactor}\nobreak\fi
%   \new@makefnmark \ifhmode\spacefactor\@x@sf\fi \relax}
%\end{verbatim}
% Für die \pkg{memoir} Klasse, müssten Sie zusätzlich die automatische Erkennung 
% mehrerer Fussnoten deaktivieren, welches ein hervorheben des Fussnotentextes 
% verhindert.
%\begin{verbatim}
%\renewcommand*\@makefnmark{\hbox{\@textsuperscript{\normalfont
%   \microtypecontext{protrusion=footnote}\@thefnmark}}}
%\let\m@mmf@prepare\relax
%\let\m@mmf@check\relax
%\end{verbatim}
% ^^A For other classes, the command would have to be changed in a similar way.
%
%\medskip\noindent
% Eine weitere Möglichkeit wäre es den Kontext für eine sprachabhängige Einstellung 
% zu verwenden. 
% Zum Beispiel, wenn Sie einen Text auf Französisch schreiben, können Sie
%\begin{verbatim}
%\microtypecontext{kerning=french}
%\end{verbatim}
% in der Präampel hinzufügen. Das hätte den Effekt, dass die 
% Abstandseinstellungen des französischen Kontextes, für das Dokument übernommen würden. Sollten Teile des Dokuments in Englisch sein, könnten Sie schreiben
%\begin{verbatim}
%\textmicrotypecontext{kerning=}{English text!}
%\end{verbatim}
% um den Kontext zurückzusetzen, so dass die Interpunktion in diesen 
% Teilen kein extra Zeichenabstand erhalten.
%
% Anstatt diese Befehle manuell zu Ihrem Dokument hinzuzufügen, können Sie  
% \microtype\	auch mit der \opt {Babel}-Funktion laden 
% (siehe Abteilung~\ref{sub:options-misc}).
% Die aktuelle Sprache wird dann automatisch erkannt und der Kontext
% dementsprechend angepasst.
%
%\medskip
%\Describe{Macro}{\DeclareMicrotypeBabelHook}
%                {list of \pkg{babel} languages,context list}
% Natürlich kennt \microtype\ nicht jede typografische Besonderheit, jeder einzelen 
% Sprache.
% Dieser Befehl ist ein Mittel, um zu lehren, wie man den Kontext anpassen 
% kann, wenn eine bestimmte Sprache ausgewählt ist. Die Hauptkonfigurationsdatei
% enthält unter anderen die folgende Deklaration:
%\begin{verbatim}
%\DeclareMicrotypeBabelHook
%   {french,francais,acadian,canadien}
%   {kerning=french, spacing=}
%\end{verbatim}
% Folglich, wann immer Sie auf französische Sprache umschalten, wird die 
% Abstandseinstellung im Kontext auf `|französisch|' geändert und der 
% Abstandskontext zurüchgesetzt.
% Dieser Effekt greift nur dann, wenn das Paket mit der \opt {babel} Option geladen % wurde. Derzeit unterstützt \microtype\ französische, türkische und englische 
% Buchstabenabstände (auch bekannt als \cmd\nonfrenchspacing). Für unbekannte 
% Sprachen werden alle Kontexte zurückgesetzt.

%
%\section{Erneute Betrachtung der Funktion Letterspacing}\label{sec:lettersp}
%
%\Describe{Macro}{\textls}{?amount,general text}
%\DescribeMacro{\textls*}
%\DescribeMacro{\lsstyle}
% Während die \opt{tracking} Funktion, die im Abschnitt~\ref{sub:tracking} 
% beschrieben wurde, für Sätze von Schriftarten gilt, können sie letterspace 
% benutzen um kürzere Stücke des Textes zu erzeugen, unabhängig von der Schriftart 
% in dem sich der Schriftsatz befindet.\footnote{
%   Letterspacing sollte vorsichtig verwendet werden, insbesondere der 
%		Zeichenabstand der Kleinbuchstaben wird mit Abscheu von einigen Typpgrafen 
% 	betrachtet. Falls sie wissen was sie tun, sollten Sie vielleicht kleine Kapitel % 	oder oder alle Kapitel nutzen. Eine andere Eigenschaft kann zur Betonung in 
% 	Texten von Schriftarten verwendet werden.}
% Für solche Ad-hoc-Zeichenabstände, bestizt \microtype\ zwei Befehle, (unabhängig 
% davon, ob die |tracking| Option aktiviert ist) die auf die gleiche Weise
% verwendet werden können wie die \LaTeX-Befehle: \cs{textls} -- welches auch im 
% Mathemodus funktioniert --  erwartet der Text im notwendigen Argument, während 
% \cs{lsstyle} `letterspacing' für alle nachfolgenden Schriften bis zum Ende der 
% aktuellen Gruppe aktiviert wird. Die Favoriten-Version von \cs{textls} fügt keine % zusätzlichen Buchstabenabstände, vor oder nachdem Text ein, was für z.B 
% Absatztitel nützlich sein  kann.
% Standardmäßig wird jedes Zeichen mit 100/1000 \,em \,= \,0.1 \,em von einander 
% getrennt, dieser Betrag kann im optionalen Argument von \cs {textls}, durch 
% Verwendung des \cs {SetTracking} Befehl oder global über die \opt {letterspace} 
% Paketoption, geändert werden, mit abnehmender Signifikanz in dieser Reihenfolge.
%
%\medskip
%\Describe{Macro}{\lslig}{ligature}
% Seitdem die Befehle \cs{textls} und \cs{lsstyle} auch die
% `\texttt{no ligatures}'-Schlüssel für die entsprechenden Schriftarten auswerten,
% brauchen Sie sich keine Gedanken mehr über das Schützen oder Trennen von Liganten % in den meisten Schriftarten zu machen. Jedoch, in bestimmten Situationen, kann es % zu einem Konflikt der Liganten, welche mit den gleichen Buchstaben beginnen, 
% kommen, wobei einige von diesen verhindert werden sollten, während das bei 
% anderen nicht geschehen soll. Beim letterspacing von Texten mit Textschriftsatz 
% in Frakturschriftarten, sollen zum Beispiel, die Liganten 'ch', 'ck', 'tz' und 
% 'sz' ~(`\textfrak {sz}') niemals getrennt werden, normalerweise sieht man auch 
% 'St.' ~(`\textfrak {St.}') Liganten im letterspacing-Text. Darüber hinaus 
% realisiert  das \pkg{yfonts} Paket das kurze ~s~(`\textfrak{s:}') als den
% Liganten~`|s:|' andererseits, wenn der `ct'~Ligant und die anderen `lang~s' 
% Liganten in Frakturschriftarten gefunden werden, unterdrückt werden. 
% Es gibt zwei Wege dieses Problem zu lösen: Entweder deaktivieren Sie nicht die
% "`| s | und/ oder | c |" Ligaturen und 
% trennen diejenigen, die getrennt werden müssen durch das Einfügen von 
% `|{\kern0pt}|' oder  \pkg{babel}'s Abkürzung oder deaktivieren Sie diese 
% und schützen jene Liganten welche geschützt werden müssen, durch umschließen mit % dem \cs{lslig} Befehl. Damit liefern folgende Lösungen das gleiche Ergebnis
% (nämlich, `\textfrak{\lsstyle Aus:s{\kern0pt}ichts:los{\kern0pt}igkeit}').
%
%\begin{verbatim}[morekeywords={[0]{\kern}}]
%\SetTracking[no ligatures={f}]{encoding = LY, family = yfrak}{100}
%\textfrak{\lsstyle Aus:s{\kern0pt}ichts:los{\kern0pt}igkeit}
%\end{verbatim}
%\begin{verbatim}
%\SetTracking[no ligatures={f,s,c}]{encoding = LY, family = yfrak}{100}
%\textfrak{\lsstyle Au\lslig{s:}si\lslig{ch}t\lslig{s:}losigkeit}
%\end{verbatim}
%
%\bigskip\noindent
%\DescribePackage{letterspace} 
% Diese drei Befehle (mitsamt der \opt{letterspace} -Option, beschrieben in
% Abschnitt~\ref{sub:option-tracking}) sind auch in dem alternativen
% \letterspace\ Paket enthalten, welches ansich eine sehr stark abgespeckte Version % von \microtype\ ist, das eine Unterstützung für alle anderen Erweiterungen 
% weglässt (zudem wurden die Möglichkeiten des \cs{SetTracking} Befehls weggelassen % und alle `|f|' Liganten werden deaktiviert, innere und äußere Abstände und der 
% äußere  Buchstabenabstand wurden auf ihre Standartwerte zurückgesetzt, so wie in 
% Abschnitt~\ref{sub:tracking} beschrieben). Wenn Sie es bevorzugen auf
% \microtype's Besonderheiten zu verzichten, können Sie stattdesen das 
% \letterspace\ Paket laden. Beide Pakete können nicht zur gleichen Zeit benutzt 
% werden.
%
% Im Gegensatz zu \microtype, welches \LaTeX\ verlangt, arbeitet das \letterspace\  
% Paket auch mit \pkg{eplain} oder auch nur mit \pkg{miniltx}: beim Gebrauch von
% \pkg{eplain}, laden Sie das Paket mit \cmd\usepackage\ innerhalb  
% \cmd\beginpackages~\dots\ \cmd\endpackages\ Umgebung, für \pkg{miniltx}
% (welches die Paketoptionen nicht unterstützt) einfach mit \cmd\input\ 
% \file{letterspace.sty} laden.
%
%
%\section{Deaktivieren von Ligaturen(Bindungen)}\label{sec:disable-ligatures}
%
%\Describe{Macro}{\DisableLigatures}{?characters,set of fonts}
% Beim vollständigen Deaktivieren aller Liganten einer Schriftart (welches auch 
% Kerning für diese Schriftart ausschaltet, senkt \textit{lowers} absichtlich die 
% mikro-typografische Qualität des Textes, anstatt diese zu erhöhen, dies ist 
% speziell für Schreibmaschine-Schriftarten nützlich, so dass, z.B. in einer <T1> 
% kodierten Schriftart, `|\texttt{--}|' natürlich als  `|--|', nicht als 
% `\texttt{--}'gedruckt wird. \cs{DisableLigatures} kann dazu verwendet werden, um % auf gewöhnlichem Weg, eine Reihe von Schriftarten zu spezifizieren, für welche 
% Liganten deaktiviert sein sollen, z.B für die Schriebmaschinenschrift kodiert in <T1>:
%\begin{verbatim}
%\DisableLigatures{encoding = T1, family = tt* }
%\end{verbatim}
% Es ist auch möglich nur ganz bestimmt Liganten zu deaktivieren. Das optionale 
% Argument, kann eine durch Komma getrennte Liste von Zeichen enthalten, für die 
% der Ligantenmechanismus unterbunden werden soll:
%\begin{verbatim}
%\DisableLigatures[?,!]{encoding = T1} % "\ifx\tagcode\undefined\else ^^A
%           \normalfont\color{thegrey}inhibit ?` and !`, but not fi, --, >>, etc.\fi"
%\end{verbatim}
% Dabei ist der Buchstabe, mit dem der Ligant beginnt von Bedeutung. Dieser Befehl 
% kann nur in der Präampel verwendet werden und auch nur einmal. Der Befehl 
% fortert \pdftex\ 1.30 oder eine aktuellere Version.
%
%
%\section{Hinweise und Warnungen}\label{sec:caveats}
%
%\paragraph{Verwenden Sie Einstellungen, die zu Ihrer Schriftart passen.}
% Obwohl die Standardeinstellungen akzeptable Ergebnisse für die meisten Schriften 
% liefern sollten, kann es sein das die spezielle Schriftart, welche Sie gerade 
% verwenden, verschiedene Schriftformen hat, so dass mehr oder weniger Hervorhebung 
% oder Vergrößerungen erforderlich sind. Insbesondere kursive Schriftformen 
% können sich deutlich in unterschiedlichen Schriftarten unterscheiden, deshalb
% habe Ich mich dageben entscheiden Standarthervorhebungseinstellungen für diese 
% anzubieten. Die Datei \file{test-microtype.tex} kann eine Hilfe, beim anpassen 
% der Hervorhebungseinstellungen für eine Schriftart sein.
%
%\paragraph{Verwenden Sie keinen zu großen Wert für die Vergrößerung.}
% Font-expansion (Schriftartenvergrößerung) ist eine Funktion, welche die 
% typographische Qualität des Dokuments verbessern soll, indem sie eine 
% gleichmäßige Graustufe des Textblocks erzeugt (und potenziell die Verringerung 
% der Zahl der erforderlichen Silbentrennungen).
% Wenn die Erweiterung oder Verkleinerung einer Schrift zu groß 
% oder zu klein wird, so wird der Effekt ins Gegenteil gewandelt. Die Vergrößerung 
% der Schriftarten um mehr als 2\%, d.h. der Wert der Einstellung \opt{Strecken}
% größer als 20 ist, erfordert ein geschultes Auge.
% Wenn Sie das Glück haben und im Besitz von mehreren Kopien einer 
% multiplen Master-Schriftart sind, können Sie die Vergrößerungsgrenze bis 
% auf 4\% erhöhen.
%
%\changes{v2.0}{2006/12/13}{Hinweis für Web-Dokumente im Hinblick auf ältere \pdftex\ Versionen}
%\paragraph{Verwenden Sie keine Schriftartvergrößerung für Web-Documente (mit 
% älteren \pdftex\ Versionen).}
% Mit \pdftex\ Versionen die älter als die 1.40 Version sind, wird jede vergrößerte % Kopie der Schriftart in der <PDF> Datei eingebettet, folglich kann die 
% Dateigröße stark zunehmen (abhängig von Vergrößerungsgrenze und -schritt). 
% Deshalb, für die Zuvorkommenheit und für Sparsamkeit der Bandbreite, aktivieren 
% Sie nicht die Schriftartenvergrößerung, beim Erstellen von Datein die 
% elektronisch verteilt werden. Mit \pdftex\ 1.40, 
% welches eine andere Technik der Vergrößerung nutzt, kann die Erhöhung der 
% Dateigröße vernachlässigt werden.
%
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/07/06}{add hint about extra <TOC> leader dot
%                           (first discovered by \contributor Morten H\o gholm <morten.hoegholm\at latex-project.org>)}
%                                                                                       ^^A private mail, 2006/08/26
%\paragraph{Möglicherweise möchten sie Hervorhebungen im Inhaltsverzeichnis deaktivieren.}
% In unglücklichen Fällen, könnte die aktivierte Hervorhebung, die Längenlinie im  im Inhaltsverzeichnis und ähnliche Listen auf eine Weise verändern, so dass ein Excess-Leader Punkte einfügeführt werden muss. Die Lösung ist Hervorhebungen vorübergehend im Inhaltsverzeichnis zu deaktivieren:
%\begin{verbatim}
%\microtypesetup{protrusion=false}
%\tableofcontents
%\microtypesetup{protrusion=true}
%\end{verbatim}
%
%\changes{v1.9}{2005/07/10}{Hinzufügen von Hinweisen in \texttt{verbatim} Umgebungen}
%\todo{introduce option to patch \texttt{verbatim}} ^^A for Karl
%\paragraph{Möglicherweise möchten Sie die Hervorhebungen in der \texttt{verbatim} % Umgebung deaktivieren.}
% Wie Sie bereits wissen, wird \microtype\ standartmäßig die Zeichenhervorhebung in % allen Schriftarten aktiviert, die im Schriftartenset `|alltext|' enthalten sind. % Das schließt auch die Schreibmaschinenschrift mit ein. Obwohl es wirklich Sinn 
% macht, die Schreibmaschine-Schriftart hervorzuheben, wenn Sie im laufenden Text 
% erscheint (wie, zum Beispiel, in diesem Handbuch), ist dies wahrscheinlich nicht 
% wünschenswert innerhalb der |verbatim| Umgebung. Jedoch hat
% \microtype\ kein Wissen über den Kontext, in dem eine Schriftart steht, dies wird % allein durch die Bestimmung der Attribute entschieden. 
% Deshalb müssen Sie sich um die Deaktivierung der Hervorhebung in der |verbatim| 
% Umgebung, selbst kümmern (d.h wenn Sie Hervorhebungen in der
% Schreibmaschinenschrift, nicht durch auswählen eines anderen Schriftsatzes 
% insgesamt deaktivieren  wollen). Obwohl der \cs{microtypesetup} Befehl natürlich % für Fälle wie diesen entwickelt wurde, könnten Sie es 
% anstrengend finden ihn jedesmal zu wiederholen, wenn Sie ihn in der |verbatim| 
% Umgebung öfters nutzen. Die folgende Zeile, die der Präampel hinzugefügt wird, 
% hätte den selben Effekt:
%\changes{v2.3e}{2009/07/21}{suggest to patch \cmd\@verbatim\ instead of \cmd\verbatim}
%\begin{verbatim}
%\g@addto@macro\@verbatim{\microtypesetup{activate=false}}
%\end{verbatim}
% Falls sie das \pkg{fancyvrb} oder das \pkg{listings} Paket verwenden, ist dies 
% nicht notwenig, da diese so konzipiert sind, das Sie in der entsprechenden 
% Umgebung, die Hervorhebung in jedem Fall hemmen.
%
%\changes{v1.9e}{2006/07/10}{add hint about unknown encodings}
%\paragraph{Einstellungen für Griechisch/Thailändisch/Amerikanisch usw. Kodierungen 
% sind bis jetzt noch nicht inbegriffen.}
% Die Standartsätze von Schriftarten, für welche die mikro-typrografischen 
% Funktionen aktiviert werden (siehe Tabelle~\ref{tab:predefined-font-sets}), 
% enthalten nur die Kodierungen für die auch  Konfigurationen existieren. Deshalb, % wenn Sie eine andere Kodierung verwenden (z.B. <LGR>, <T2B>, etc.), wird 
% \microtype\ nicht auf diese Schriftarten anwendbar sein. Sie müssen einen neuen 
% Schriftsatz, einschließlich der Kodierung, definieren und aktivieren um Sie 
% benutzen zu können(weitere Details, siehe 
% Abschnitt~\ref{sec:font-sets}). Spätestens für die Hervorhebungen müssten Sie
% Einstellungen für die Schriftarten die in Frage kommen erstellen (siehe 
% Abschnitt~\ref{sub:protrusion}). 
% Selbstverständlich sind Beiträge für diese Art von Kodierung mehr als willkommen.
%
%\paragraph{Nehmen Sie nur dann Kerning-Anpassungen vor, wenn es üblich in der typografischen Tradition der Sprache ist.}
% Im Gegensatz zu Hervorhebung und der Vergrößerung, trägt zusätzliche Kerning 
% nicht unbedingt zur Verbesserung der mikro-typographische Qualität des Dokuments % bei. Sie sollten das zusätzliche Kerning nur aktivieren, wenn Sie ein Dokument in % einer Sprache schreiben, dessen typografische Tradition ein solches Kerning 
% garantiert. Wenn Sie zum Beispiel einen englischen Text schreiben, würden die 
% Leser durch zusätzliche Leerzeichen vor dem Satzzeichen verwirrt werden.
%
%\changes{v2.3c}{2008/10/27}{add hint about spacing being experimental}
%\paragraph{Anpassung der Zwischenwortabstandes befindet sich noch in einem 
% experimentellen Stadium.}
% Die Umsetzung dieser Eigenschaft in \pdftex\ ist nicht vollständig und kann zu 
% den positiven Auswirkungen, auf die typographische Qualität, die Sie eventuell 
% erwarten, nicht beitragen. In bestimmten Situationen kann es sogar zu 
% unerwünschten Nebenwirkungen kommen.
% Deshalb, sollte die \opt {Abstand}option nicht blind gewählt werden. Es wird 
% empfohlen mit den Einstellungen zu experimentieren, um zuverstehen wie die 
% Eigenschaften funktionieren.
%
%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/23}{add hint about compatibility}
%\paragraph{Kompatibilität und Interaktion mit anderen Paketen:}
% Das \microtype\ -Paket sollte sehr gut mit anderen 
% \LaTeX\ -Paketen zusammen arbeiten (ausgenommen von \pkg{pdfcprot}). Jedoch da 
% das Leben nicht perfekt ist, sind Probleme zu erwarten. Momentan sind folgende 
% Probleme bekannt:
%\begin{itemize}
%  \item Wenn Sie 8-Bit-Zeichen in der Konfiguration verwenden möchten, müssen Sie %				zuerst das Paket \pkg{inputenc} laden. Das Verwenden von Unicode wird 
% 		 	 ebenfalls unterstützt (wenn Sie \pkg{inputenc} mit der |utf8| oder |utf8x| %				 option laden).
%        Bei der Verwendung von mehreren Input-Kodierungen in einem Dokument, 
%				 werden 8-Bit-Zeichen in den Einstellungen nur zuverlässig funktionieren, 
%				 wenn Sie den |inputenc| Schlüssel spezifizieren.
%\changes{v2.3a}{2008/02/25}{add hint about \pkg{babel} having to be loaded first}
%  \item Beim Laden des Pakets mit der \opt{babel}-Option, sollten Sie das
%        \pkg{babel}-Paket vor \microtype\ laden.
%\changes{v2.3c}{2008/11/11}{add hint about partial incompatibility with \pkg{CJK}}
%  \item Es ist derzeit nicht möglich, Charakter-spezifische Einstellungen für 
%				 chinesische\slash japanischen\slash koreanischen Schriften zu erstellen. 
%				 Deshalb, ist die einzige mikro-typografische Erweiterung, die mit dem 
%			   \pkg {CJK} Paket arbeiten kann, die Schriftartvergrößerung.
%\end{itemize}
%
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/06/23}{add hint about error messages}
%\paragraph{Mögliche Fehlermeldungen und wie man diese beseitigt:}
%\begin{itemize}
%\lstset{deletekeywords={[1]{expansion,auto}},belowskip=-\smallskipamount,frame=none,
%        xleftmargin=0pt,backgroundcolor=,basicstyle=\MacroFont\footnotesize}
%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/11/15}{add explanation for error message in <DVI> mode}
%  \item
%\begin{verbatim}
%! Font csnameendcsname=cmr10+20 at 10.0pt not loadable: Metric (TFM) file not found.
%\end{verbatim}
% Diese Fehlermeldung tritt auf, wenn Sie versuchen die Schriftartvergrößerung zu 
% verwenden, während Sie eine <DVI>- Ausgabe erstellen. Denken Sie daran, dass die % \emph{automatische} Schriftartenerweiterung nur als \pdftex\ im <PDF> Modus 
% funktioniert. Vergrößerung ist auch im <DVI> Modus möglich. Dies erfordert, dass % alle Instanzen der erweiterten Schriftarten auf Ihrem \TeX\ -System existieren.
%
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/06/13}{add hint about error message with \pdftex\ 1.40}
%  \item
%\begin{verbatim}
%! pdfTeX error (font expansion): auto expansion is only possible with scalable fonts.
%\end{verbatim}
% Die automatische Schriftartvergrößerung ist in \pdftex\ 1.40, darin verbessert 
% worden, 
% dass sie nicht nur mit Typ\,1 Schriften sondern, auch mit TrueType, OpenType und 
% sogar auch mit nicht-eingebetteten Schriftarten arbeitet. Die obige Fehlermeldung % bedeutet entweder, dass Sie versuchen die Vergrößerung, auf eine Bitmap~(|pk|) 
% Schriftart anzuwenden, die noch nicht möglich ist, oder dass die Schrift nicht 
% gefunden werden kann, da z.B. deren Einträge fehlen.
%
%\changes{v2.0}{2006/12/13}{qualify hints about expansion error messages with
%                           regard to older \pdftex\ versions}
%  \item
%\begin{verbatim}
% Warning: pdflatex: font ptmr8r cannot be expanded (not an included Type1 font)
%\end{verbatim}
% und der <PDF> Viewer beklagt sich über eine fehlende Schriftart, z.B der Adobe 
% Reader auf diese Weise:
%\begin{verbatim}[aboveskip=\smallskipamount]
% Could not find a font in the Resources dictionary - using Helvetica instead.
%\end{verbatim}
% Mit \pdftex\ Versionen, die älter sind als 1.40, kann Schriftartvergrößerung nur 
% dann angewandt werden, wenn die Schriftart in der <PDF> Datei eingebettet wird. 
% Falls Sie die obengenannte Fehlermeldung erhalten, kann Ihr \TeX\ System noch 
% nicht mit PostScript-Schriftarten (z.B Times, Helvetica, Courier) arbeiten, da 
% diese in die Basisdatei eingebettet werden müssen. In den meisten \TeX\
% Distributionen, kann diese in der Datei \file{updmap.cfg} durch Einstellungen der
% |pdftexDownloadBase14| in |true| geändert werden.
%
%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/11/15}{add explanation for error message with non-Type\,1  fonts}
%  \item
%\begin{verbatim}
% Warning: pdflatex (file ecrm1000+20): Font ecrm1000+20 at 1200 not found
%\end{verbatim}
% Außerdem erfordern \pdftex\ Versionen die älter als 1.40 sind, Typ \,1-Schriften 
% für die automatische Schriftarten-Vergrößerung. Wenn Sie eine Nachricht wie die 
% obengenannte erhalten, haben Sie wahrscheinlich versucht, die 
% Schriftartvergrößerung auf eine bitmap oder TrueType Schriftart anzuwenden. Bei 
% älteren \pdftex\ Versionen ist dies nur möglich, wenn Sie manuell erweiterte 
% Instanzen der Schriften erstellen.
%\ifcmr\else\pagebreak\fi ^^A layout
%\changes{v2.0}{2006/11/05}{add hint about how to increase \texttt{font\textunderscore max}
%               and \texttt{font\textunderscore mem\textunderscore size}}
% \item
%\begin{verbatim}
%! Font T1/cmr/m/n/10=ecrm1000 at 10.0pt not loaded: Not enough room left.
%\end{verbatim}
% Speicherparameter `|font_mem_size|` zu klein.
% \item
%\begin{verbatim}
%! TeX capacity exceeded, sorry [maximum internal font number (font_max)=2000].
%\end{verbatim}
% Speicherparameter `|font_max|` zu klein.
% \item
%\begin{verbatim}
%! TeX capacity exceeded, sorry [PDF memory size (pdf_mem_size)=65536].
%\end{verbatim}
% Speicherparameter `|pdf_mem_size|` zu klein (bei \pdftex\ Versionen, die älter 
% sind als 1.30).
%
% Bei Anwendung von mikro-typografischen Erweiterung eines großes Dokumentes mit 
% einer Menge von Schriftarten, kann die Speicherkapazität von \pdftex\ knapp 
% werden. Dies kann durch Setzen der entsprechenden Parameter, auf einen größeren 
% Wert erhöht werden. Für web2c-basierte Systeme, z.B \texlive, sollten Sie die 
% Einstellungen in der Datei \file{texmf.cnf}, und für MiK\TeX in der Datei 
% \file{miktex.ini} (für 2,4 Jahre ältere Versionen) bzw. \file{pdflatex.ini} (2,5 
% Jahre neuere Versionen) ändern.
%
%\changes{v2.0}{2007/01/05}{add hint about warning when tracking \emph{and}
%                           expansion is applied to a font}
%  \item
%\begin{verbatim}[deletekeywords={[1]{expansion}}]
%pdfTeX warning (font expansion): font should be expanded before its first use
%\end{verbatim}
% Diese Warnung wird bei \pdftex\ Versionen vorkommen, die älter sind als 1.40.4, 
% wenn Tracking \emph{und} Vergrößerung auf eine Schriftart angewendet werden. Sie 
% ist harmlos und kann ignoriert werden.
%\end{itemize}
%
%
%
%\section{Beiträge}
%
% Ich wäre froh, Konfigurationsdateien für mehr Schriftarten beizufügen. Das 
% Vorbereiten solcher Konfigurationen ist recht zeitaufwändig und erfordert viel 
% Geduld.
% Um diesen Prozess zu erleichtern, schließt dieses Paket auch eine Testdatei ein, 
% die verwendet werden kann, um zumindest die Hervorhebungseinstellungen überprüfen % zu können (\file{test-microtype.tex}).
%^^A
% Wenn Sie eine Konfigurationsdatei für eine andere Schriftart erstellt, oder 
% Anregungen für Verbesserungen in den Standardkonfigurations-Dateien haben, würde % Ich diese dankbar entgegennehmen: \mailtoRS.
%\iffalse\footnote{^^A ... OK, so nobody has any ...
%    Should you have lots of \pkg{pdfcprot} configuration files lying around,
%    I can also provide you with a \TeX\ conversion script. Just ask me.}
%\fi
%
%
%\section{Danksagungen}
%
% Dieses Paket wäre sinnlos, wenn \contributor\thanh{} <thanh\at pdftex.org>
% dieses \pdftex\ Programm überhautpt nicht erstellt hätte, welches die 
% mikro-typographische Erweiterung einführt und so für die \TeX\ -Welt verfügbar 
% macht. Darüber hinaus danke ich ihm für die Hilfe, dieses Paket zu 
% verbessern und nicht zuletzt für die Förderung in \cite{ThanhPracTeX} und 
% \cite{ThanhEuroTeX07} und anderswo. Also bedanke Ich mich bei ihm und dem Rest 
% der \pdftex\ Mannschaft für die Widerlegung der Idee, dass \TeX\ tot ist, und für % dass Fixen der Programmfehler die ich gefunden habe.
%
% \contributor Harald Harders <h.harders\at tu-bs.de> hat dazu beigetragen die 
% Vorsprungseinstellungen für Adobe Minion möglich zu machen. Ich möchste ihm auch % für eine Reihe an Fehlermeldungen und Vorschlägen danken, die er gemacht hat.
% \contributor Andreas B\"uhmann <andreas.buehmann\at web.de> hat die Möglichkeit 
% vorgeschlagen, Bereiche von Schriftgrößen anzugeben und geistreich bei der 
% Implementierung dieser zu helfen. Er hatte auch einige guten Ideen für das 
% Management von komplexen Konfigurationen.
% \contributor Ulrich Dirr <ud\at art-satz.de> hat zahlreiche Vorschläge gemacht, 
% besonders bezüglich der neuen Erweiterungen der Zwischenwortabstandsanpassung und % zum zusätzlichen Kerning.
% Mein Dank gilt auch \contributor Maciej Eder <maciej_eder\at poczta.onet.pl>
% für die beigetragenen Einstellungen der <QX> Kodierung, sowie 
% \contributor Karl Karlsson <karl-karlsson\at yandex.ru> zur Bereitstellung von 
% Einstellungen für die kyrillische <T2A> Kodierung.
% Ich bedanke mich bei \contributor \'Elie Roux <elie.roux\at telecom-bretagne.eu>,
% das sie das |lua| Modul erschaffen hat.
%
% Ich danke \contributor Philipp Lehman <plehman\at gmx.net> das er seinem
% \pkg{csquotes} Paket die Möglichkeit hinzugefügt hat, die ursprüngliche Bedeutung % aller aktivierten Zeichen wiederherzustellen, so dass diese für die Zeichen in 
% den Konfigurationsdateien verwendet werden können. 
% Freundlicherweise hat \contributor Peter Wilson <herries.press\at earthlink.net> 
% ein Häkchen in seinen \pkg{ledmac}/\pkg{ledpar} Paketen zur Verfügung gestellt, 
% so dass kritische Editionen, schließlich auch vom Charakter-Vorsprung profitieren.
%
% Zusätzlich haben die folgenden Personen Bugs gemeldet, Vorschläge gemacht oder 
% anders geholfen (in chronologischer Reihenfolge):
%  \contributor Tom Kink          <kink\at hia.rwth-aachen.de>,
%  \contributor Herb Schulz       <herbs\at wideopenwest.com>,
%  \contributor Michael Hoppe     <mh\at michael-hoppe.de>,
%  \contributor Gary~L. Gray      <gray\at engr.psu.edu>,
%  \contributor Georg Verweyen    <verweyen\at gmail.com>,
%  \contributor Christoph Bier    <christoph.bier\at web.de>,
%  \contributor Peter Muthesius   <Pemu\at gmx.de>,
%  \contributor Bernard Gaulle    <gaulle\at idris.fr>\,\textdagger,
%  \contributor Adam Kucharczyk   <adamk\at ijp-pan.krakow.pl>,
%  \contributor Mark Rossi        <mark.rossi\at de.bosch.com>,
%  \contributor Stephan Hennig    <stephanhennig\at arcor.de>,
%  \contributor Michael Zedler    <Michael.Zedler\at tum.de>,
%  \contributor Herbert Vo\ss{}   <Herbert.Voss\at gmx.net>,
%  \contributor Ralf Stubner      <ralf.stubner\at physik.uni-erlangen.de>,
%  \contributor Holger Uhr        <huhr\at uni-paderborn.de>,
%  \contributor Peter Dyballa     <Peter_Dyballa\at Web.DE>,
%  \contributor Morten H\o gholm  <morten.hoegholm\at latex-project.org>,
%  \contributor Steven Bath       <steven128\at iname.com>,
%  \contributor Daniel Flipo      <daniel.flipo\at univ-lille1.fr>,
%  \contributor Michalis Miatidis <miatidis\at informatik.rwth-aachen.de>,
%  \contributor Sven Naumann      <svenau\at gmx.net>,
%  \contributor Ross Hetherington <ross\at heth.eclipse.co.uk>,
%  \contributor Geoff Vallis      <gkv\at Princeton.EDU>,
%  \contributor Steven~E. Harris  <seh\at panix.com>,
%  \contributor Karl Berry        <karl\at freefriends.org>,
%  \contributor Peter Meier       <Peter.Meier998\at gmx.de>,
%  \contributor Nathan Rosenblum  <nater\at cs.wisc.edu>,
%  \contributor Wolfram Schaalo   <schaalo\at gmx.net>,
%  \contributor Vasile Gaburici   <vgaburici\at gmail.com>,
%  \contributor Sveinung Heggen   <sveinung.heggen\at orkla.no>,
%  \contributor Colin Rourke      <gt\at msp.warwick.ac.uk>,
%  \contributor Maverick Woo      <maverick\at cs.cmu.edu>,
%  \contributor Silas~S. Brown    <ssb22\at cam.ac.uk>,
%  \contributor Christian Stark   <cstark\at gmx.de>
% and
%  \contributor Marcin Borkowski  <mbork\at atos.wmid.amu.edu.pl>.
%
%
%\begin{thebibliography}{}
% \bibitem[Th\`anh 2000]{ThanhThesis}
%   \thanh, `Micro-typographic extensions to the \TeX\ typesetting system',
%   \newblock Diss. Masaryk University Brno 2000,
%   \newblock in: \textit{TUGBoat}, vol.~21 (2000), no.~4, pp.~317--434.
%   \newblock (Online at \url{http://www.tug.org/TUGboat/Articles/tb21-4/tb69thanh.pdf})
%
%\iffalse ^^A obsolete
% \bibitem[Th\`anh 2001]{ThanhTUG}
%   \thanh, `Margin Kerning and Font Expansion with \pdftex',
%   \newblock in: \textit{TUGBoat}, vol.~22 (2001), no.~3:
%             `Proceedings of the 2001 Annual Meeting', pp.~146--148.
%   \newblock (Online at \url{http://www.tug.org/TUGboat/Articles/tb22-3/tb72thanh.pdf})
%\fi
%
% \bibitem[Th\`anh 2004]{ThanhPracTeX}
%   \thanh, `Micro-typographic extensions of \pdftex\ in practice',
%   \newblock in: \textit{TUGBoat}, vol.~25 (2004), no.~1:
%             `Proceedings of the Practical \TeX\ 2004 Conference', pp.~35--38.
%   \newblock (Online at \url{http://www.tug.org/TUGboat/Articles/tb25-1/thanh.pdf})
%
%\iffalse
% \bibitem[Th\`anh 2005]{ThanhEuroTeX05}
%   \thanh, `Experiences with micro-typographic extensions of \pdftex\ in practice',
%   \newblock in: Euro\TeX\ 2005 Proceedings
%             ^^A 15th~Annual Meeting of the European \TeX\ Users,
%             ^^A March~7 -- March~11, 2005, Abbaye des Pr\'emontr\'es, Pont-\`a-Mousson,
%             [=~\textit{TUGBoat}, vol.~27 (2006), no.~0],
%             pp.~159--164.
%   \newblock (Online at \url{http://www.tug.org/TUGboat/Articles/tb27-0/thanh.pdf})
%                  ^^A = \url{http://www.dante.de/dante/events/eurotex/papers/TUT07.pdf}
%\fi
%
% \bibitem[Th\`anh 2008]{ThanhEuroTeX07}
%   \thanh, `Font-specific issues in \pdftex',
%   \newblock in: \textit{TUGBoat}, vol.~29 (2008), no.~1:
%             `EuroBacho\TeX\ 2007 Proceedings', pp.~36--41.
%   \newblock (Online at \url{http://www.tug.org/TUGboat/Articles/tb29-1/tb91thanh-fonts.pdf})
%
% \bibitem[\pdftex\ manual]{pdftexman}
%   \thanh, Sebastian Rahtz, Hans Hagen, Hartmut Henkel, Pawe\l\ Jackowski, Martin Schr\"oder,
%   \emph{The \pdftex\ user manual},
%   \newblock 25 January 2007.
%   \newblock (\ctanurl{systems/pdftex/};
%             latest version at \url{http://sarovar.org/projects/pdftex/})
%             ^^A or even \url{http://foundry.supelec.fr/scm/?group_id=23}
%
% \bibitem[Fontname]{fontname}
%   Karl Berry, \emph{Fontname. Filenames for \TeX\ fonts},
%   \newblock July 2009.
%   \newblock (\ctanurl{info/fontname/fontname.pdf})
%
% \bibitem[\LaTeXe\ font selection]{fntguide}
%   \LaTeX3 Project Team, \emph{\LaTeXe\ font selection},
%   \newblock 27 November 2005.
%   \newblock (\ctanurl{macros/latex/doc/fntguide.pdf})
%
% \bibitem[\pkg{pdfcprot}]{pdfcprot}
%   Carsten Schurig, Tobias Schlemmer, \emph{The \pkg{pdfcprot}|.sty| package},
%   \newblock 10 June 2005.
%   \newblock (\ctanurl{macros/latex/contrib/pdfcprot/})
%
% \bibitem[\pkg{soul}]{soul}
%   Melchior Franz, \emph{The \pkg{soul} package},
%   \newblock 17 November 2003.
%   \newblock (\ctanurl{macros/latex/contrib/soul/}).
%\changes{v2.3a}{2008/01/06}{mention \pkg{soulutf8}}
%   \newblock See also Heiko Oberdiek's extension of this package,
%             \pkg{soulutf8}, which adds Unicode support.
%   \newblock (\ctanurl{macros/latex/contrib/oberdiek/})
%\end{thebibliography}
%
%
%\section{Short history}
%\changes{v1.5}{2004/12/11}{add `Short history'}
%
% The comprehensive list of changes can be
% \expandafter\ifx\csname r@sec:changes\endcsname\relax
%     obtained by running `\texttt{makeindex \mbox{-s gglo.ist}
%                                  \mbox{-o microtype.gls} microtype.glo}'\else
%     found in appendix~\ref{sec:changes}\fi.
% The following is a list of all changes relevant in the user land; bug and
% compatibility fixes are swept under the rug. Numbers in brackets indicate
% the relevant section in this manual.
%
%\newenvironment{History}
%  {\list\labelitemi
%   {\leftmargin 0pt
%    \parsep 0pt
%    \def\refsection##1{[##1]}
%    \def\makelabel##1{\hss\llap{##1}}}}
%  {\endlist}
%\newcommand\Version[2]{
%  \VersionDate{#1}{#2}
%  \vskip\topsep
%  \pagebreak[2]
%  \item[#1](#2)
%  \vskip\topsep
%  \nopagebreak}
%\newcommand\VersionDate[2]{^^A needed in the Change history
%  \global\expandafter\def\csname MTversiondate#1\endcsname{#2}}
%
%\begin{History}
%
%\Version{\expandafter\@gobble\fileversion}{\filedate}
%  \item |lua| functions moved to a dedicated file
%  \item Protrusion settings for <T2A> encoded Minion
%
%\Version{2.3e}{2009/11/09}
%  \item Support for the Cyrillic <T2A> encoding (protrusion, expansion, spacing)
%
%\Version{2.3d}{2009/03/27}
%  \item New default for expansion option `\opt{step}': 1, if \pdftex\ $\geq$ 1.40
%        \refsection{\ref{sub:options-expansion}}
%
%\Version{2.3c}{2008/11/11}
%  \item Support for \luatex\ enabled by default
%
%\VersionDate{2.3b}{2008/06/04}
%
%\VersionDate{2.3a}{2008/02/29}
%
%\Version{2.3}{2007/12/23}
%  \item New key `|outer kerning|' for \cs{SetTracking} to customise outer kerning
%        \refsection{\ref{sub:tracking}}
%  \item Adjust protrusion settings for tracking even if protrusion is not enabled
%  \item New option `\opt{verbose}|=silent|' to turn all warnings into mere messages
%        \refsection{\ref{sub:options-misc}}
%  \item The \letterspace\ package also works with \pkg{eplain} or \pkg{miniltx}
%        \refsection{\ref{sec:lettersp}}
%
%\Version{2.2}{2007/07/14}
%  \item Improvements to tracking/letterspacing: retain kerning (\pdftex\ $\geq$ 1.40.4);
%        automatically adjust protrusion settings
%  \item New key `|no ligatures|' for \cs{SetTracking} to disable selected or
%        all ligatures (\pdftex\ $\geq$ 1.40.4)
%        \refsection{\ref{sub:tracking}}
%  \item New keys `|spacing|' and `|outer spacing|' for \cs{SetTracking} to
%        customise interword spacing
%        \refsection{\ref{sub:tracking}}
%  \item Possibility to expand a font with different parameters (\pdftex\ $\geq$ 1.40.4)
%    ^^A ; new option `\opt{copyfonts}'
%        \refsection{\ref{sub:expansion}}
%  \item New optional argument for \cs{DisableLigatures} to disable selected ligatures only
%        \refsection{\ref{sec:disable-ligatures}}
%  \item New command \cs{DeclareMicrotypeVariants} to specify variant suffixes
%        \refsection{\ref{sub:config-file}}
%  \item New command \cs{textmicrotypecontext} as a wrapper for \cs{microtypecontext}
%        \refsection{\ref{sec:context}}
%  \item Protrusion settings for Bitstream Letter Gothic
%^^A  \item Basic support for \luatex\ (if generated with the |lua| option)
%
%\Version{2.1}{2007/01/21}
%  \item New command \cs{lslig} to protect ligatures in letterspaced text
%        \refsection{\ref{sec:lettersp}}
%
%\Version{2.0}{2007/01/14}
%  \item Support for the new extensions of \pdftex\ $\geq$ 1.40:
%        tracking/letterspacing, adjustment of interword spacing (glue),
%        and additional kerning
%        (new commands \cs{SetTracking}, \cs{SetExtraSpacing}, \cs{SetExtraKerning};
%         new options `\opt{tracking}', `\opt{spacing}', `\opt{kerning}')
%        \refsection{\ref{sub:tracking}, \ref{sub:spacing}, \ref{sub:kerning}}
%  \item New commands \cs{textls} and \cs{lsstyle} for letterspacing,
%        new option `\opt{letterspace}'
%        \refsection{\ref{sub:option-tracking}, \ref{sec:lettersp}}
%  \item New option `\opt{babel}' for automatic micro-typographic adjustment to
%        the selected language
%        \refsection{\ref{sub:options-misc}, \ref{sec:context}}
%  \item New font sets: `|smallcaps|', `|footnotesize|', `|scriptsize|'
%        \refsection{\ref{sec:font-sets}, table~\ref{tab:predefined-font-sets}}
%  \item New package `\letterspace' providing the commands for robust and
%        hyphenatable letterspacing
%        \refsection{\ref{sec:lettersp}}
%
%\VersionDate{1.9f}{2006/09/09}
%
%\Version{1.9e}{2006/07/28}
%  \item New key `|inputenc|' to specify the lists' input encodings
%        \refsection{\ref{sec:fine-tuning}}
%  \item Protrusion settings for Euler math fonts
%
%\Version{1.9d}{2006/05/05}
%  \item Support for the Central European <QX> encoding
%        (protrusion, inheritance)
%  \item Protrusion settings for various Euro symbol fonts (Adobe, <ITC>, \pkg{marvosym})
%  \item Support for Unicode input in the configuration (\pkg{inputenc}/|utf8|)
%
%\Version{1.9c}{2006/02/02}
%  \item Protrusion settings for <URW> Garamond
%
%\VersionDate{1.9b}{2006/01/20}
%
%\Version{1.9a}{2005/12/05}
%  \item Defer setup until the end of the preamble
%   ^^A ; consequently, no need to
%   ^^A   change font defaults before loading \microtype, or to put it the other
%   ^^A   way round, \microtype\ may now be loaded at any time
%   ^^A ; new option `\opt{defersetup}'
%  \item Inside the preamble, \cs{microtypesetup} accepts all package options
%        \refsection{\ref{sub:options-cmd}}
%  \item Protrusion settings for <T5> encoded Charter
%
%\Version{1.9}{2005/10/28}
%  \item New command \cs{DisableLigatures} to disable ligatures of fonts
%        (\pdftex\ $\geq$ 1.30)
%        \refsection{\ref{sec:disable-ligatures}}
%  \item New command \cs{microtypecontext} to change the configuration context;
%        new key `|context|' for the configuration commands
%        \refsection{\ref{sec:context}}
%  \item New key `|font|' to add single fonts to the font sets
%        \refsection{\ref{sec:font-sets}}
%  \item New key `|preset|' to set all characters to the specified value before
%        loading the lists
%  \item Value `|relative|' renamed to `|character|' for `|unit|' keys
%  \item Support for the Polish <OT4> encoding (protrusion, expansion, inheritance)
%  \item Support for the Vietnamese <T5> encoding (protrusion, expansion, inheritance)
%^^A  \item `\opt{DVIoutput}' option will work with \texlive\ 2004
%
%\Version{1.8}{2005/06/23}
%^^A  \item If font substitution has occurred, the settings for the substitute will
%^^A        be used instead of those for the selected font
%  \item New command \cs{DeclareMicrotypeSetDefault} to declare the default font sets
%        \refsection{\ref{sec:font-sets}}
%  \item New option `\opt{config}' to load a different configuration file
%        \refsection{\ref{sub:options-misc}}
%  \item New option `\opt{unit}' to measure protrusion factors relative to a
%        dimension instead of the character width
%        \refsection{\ref{sub:protrusion}}
%  \item Renamed commands from \cs{..MicroType..} to \cs{..Microtype..}
%  \item Protrusion settings for <AMS> math fonts
%  \item Protrusion settings for Times in <LY1> encoding completed
%  \item The `|allmath|' font set also includes <U> encoding
%^^A  \item 8-bit characters in the configuration finally work as advertised,
%^^A        even if made active by the \pkg{csquotes} package
%  \item When using the \pkg{ledmac} package, character protrusion will work
%        for the first time ever (\pdftex\ $\geq$ 1.30)
%
%\Version{1.7}{2005/03/23}
%  \item Possibility to specify ranges of font sizes in the set declarations
%        and protrusion and expansion settings
%        \refsection{\ref{sec:font-sets}, \ref{sec:fine-tuning}}
%^^A  \item Always take font size into account when trying to find protrusion resp.
%^^A        expansion settings for a given font
%^^A        \refsection{\ref{sec:fine-tuning}}
%  \item New command \cs{LoadMicrotypeFile} to load a font configuration file manually
%        \refsection{\ref{sub:config-file}}
%  \item Hook \cs{Microtype@Hook} for font package authors
%        \refsection{\ref{sub:hook}}
%  \item New option `\opt{verbose}|=errors|' to turn all warnings into errors
%^^A  \item Disable expansion inside \cmd\showhyphens
%  \item Warning when running in draft mode
%
%\VersionDate{1.6a}{2005/02/02}
%
%\Version{1.6}{2005/01/24}
%  \item New option `\opt{factor}' to influence protrusion resp. expansion of
%        all characters of a font or font set
%        \refsection{\ref{sub:options-protrusion}, \ref{sec:fine-tuning}}
%  \item When \pdftex\ is too old to expand fonts automatically, expansion
%        has to be enabled explicitly, automatic expansion will be disabled
%        \refsection{\ref{sub:options-microtype}}
%^^A  \item Protrusion settings of digits improved
%  \item Use \etex\ extensions, if available
%
%\Version{1.5}{2004/12/15}
%  \item When output mode is <DVI>, font expansion has to be enabled explicitly,
%        automatic expansion will be disabled
%        \refsection{\ref{sub:options-microtype}}
%  \item New option `\opt{selected}' to enable selected expansion,
%        default: |false|
%        \refsection{\ref{sub:options-expansion}, \ref{sub:expansion}}
%  \item New default for expansion option `\opt{step}': 4 (min(\opt{stretch},\opt{shrink})/5)
%        \refsection{\ref{sub:options-expansion}}
%  \item Protrusion settings for Bitstream Charter
%
%\VersionDate{1.4b}{2004/11/26}
%^^A\Version{1.4b}{2004/11/26}
%^^A  \item \cs{UseMicrotypeSet} requires the set to be declared
%^^A        \refsection{\ref{sec:font-sets}}
%
%\VersionDate{1.4a}{2004/11/17}
%
%\Version{1.4}{2004/11/12}
%  \item Set up fonts independently from \LaTeX\ font loading
%^^A        (therefore, no risk of overlooking fonts anymore, and the package may
%^^A        be loaded at any time)
%^^A  \item \cs{microtypesetup} now sets the correct level of protrusion
%^^A        \refsection{\ref{sub:options-cmd}}
%  \item New option: `\opt{final}'
%        \refsection{\ref{sub:options-misc}}
%
%\VersionDate{1.3}{2004/10/27}
%
%\Version{1.2}{2004/10/03}
%  \item New font sets: `|allmath|' and `|basicmath|'
%        \refsection{\ref{sec:font-sets}, table~\ref{tab:predefined-font-sets}}
%  \item Protrusion settings for Computer Modern Roman math symbols
%  \item Protrusion settings for <TS1> encoding completed for Computer Modern
%        Roman and Adobe Garamond
%^^A  \item If an alias font name is specified, it will be used as an alternative,
%^^A        not as a replacement \refsection{\ref{sub:config-file}}
%
%\Version{1.1}{2004/09/21}
%  \item Protrusion settings for Adobe Minion
%  \item New command: \cs{DeclareCharacterInheritance}
%        \refsection{\ref{sub:inherit}}
%  \item Characters may also be specified as octal or hexadecimal numbers
%        \refsection{\ref{sec:fine-tuning}}
%^^A  \item Configuration file names in lowercase [\ref{sub:config-file}]
%
%\Version{1.0}{2004/09/11}
%  \item First <CTAN> release
%\end{History}
%
%
%\def\AppendixSettings{
%  \addtolength\textwidth{50pt}
%  \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-50pt}
%  \setlength{\columnwidth}{\textwidth}
%  \setlength{\hsize}{\textwidth}
%  \setlength{\linewidth}{\textwidth}
%  \footnotesize
%}
%\def\LPPLSettings{
%\changes{v1.9e}{2006/06/13}{include <LPPL>}
%  \let\LPPLicense\empty
%  \def\endLPPLicense{\endmulticols\endgroup}
%  \def\LPPLsection##1{\begin{multicols}{2}[\section{##1}][12\baselineskip]}
%  \def\LPPLsubsection##1{\end{multicols}\begin{multicols}{2}[\subsection*{##1}][6\baselineskip]}
%  \def\LPPLsubsubsection{\subsubsection*}
%  \let\LPPLparagraph\textit
%  \let\LPPLfile\file
%  \def\textsc##1{\acronym{\MakeUppercase{##1}}}
%  \lstset{gobble=2,basicstyle=\MacroFont\tiny,commentstyle=,aboveskip=\smallskipamount}
%  \let\oldmakeatletter\makeatletter
%  \long\def\makeatletter##1\makeatother{\let\makeatletter\oldmakeatletter}
%  \MakePercentComment
%}
%
%\StopEventually{
%  \GeneralChanges{Documentation}
%  \newpage
%  \appendix
%  \AppendixSettings
%  \typeout{:?1000} ^^A tell WinEdt not to bother about overfull boxes
%  \PrintChanges
%  \PrintIndex
%  \typeout{:?1111}
%  \InputIfFileExists{lppl.tex}\LPPLSettings\relax
%}
%
% \GeneralChanges*
%
% ^^A =========================================================================
%
% ^^A Heiko Oberdiek's fix from latexbugs (latex/3540):
%\begingroup
%  \def\x\begingroup#1\@nil{\endgroup
%    \def\DoNotIndex{\begingroup
%      \@tfor\@tempa:=\#\$\&\^\_\|\~\ \<\do{\expandafter\@makeother\@tempa}#1}}
%\expandafter\x\DoNotIndex\@nil
%\def\PercentIndex{}\def\LeftBraceIndex{}\def\RightBraceIndex{}
% ^^A also index new ifs:
%\def\@newif{newif}\newif\if@newif
%\def\macro@finish{\macro@namepart
%  \ifx\macro@namepart\@newif\@tempswatrue\else\@tempswafalse\fi
%  \ifnot@excluded
%    \edef\@tempa{\noexpand\SpecialIndex{\bslash\macro@namepart}}\@tempa
%  \fi
%  \if@newif
%    \edef\@tempa{\noexpand\SpecialMainIndex
%       {\bslash\expandafter\@gobbletwo\macro@namepart true}}\@tempa
%    \edef\@tempa{\noexpand\SpecialMainIndex
%       {\bslash\expandafter\@gobbletwo\macro@namepart false}}\@tempa
%  \fi
%  \if@tempswa\@newiftrue\else\@newiffalse\fi
%}
%
%
%\DoNotIndex{\!,\",\',\(,\),\*,\+,\,,\-,\.,\/,\:,\;,\<,\=,\>,\?,\[,\\,\],\`,
%  \#,\$,\&,\^,\_,\|,\~,\ ,
%  \advance,\afterassignment,\aftergroup,\begingroup,\bgroup,\catcode,\char,
%  \chardef,\csname,\def,\divide,\edef,\egroup,\else,\endcsname,\endgroup,
%  \endinput,\escapechar,\everypar,\expandafter,\fi,\futurelet,\gdef,\global,
%  \hbadness,\hbox,\hsize,\hskip,\if,\ifcase,\ifcat,\ifdim,\iffalse,\ifhbox,
%  \ifhmode,\ifmmode,\ifnum,\iftrue,\ifx,\immediate,\input,\inputlineno,\jobname,
%  \kern,\lastskip,\let,\lowercase,\meaning,\multiply,\newlinechar,\noexpand,
%  \number,\or,\parfillskip,\pretolerance,\relax,\setbox,\showboxdepth,\string,
%  \the,\tolerance,\unkern,\unskip,\uppercase,\vbox,\wd,\write,\xdef}
%^^A\DoNotIndex{\font,\fontdimen,\nullfont,\sfcode,\spacefactor,\spaceskip,
%^^A  \xspaceskip}                                                           ^^A tex
%\DoNotIndex{\currentgrouptype,\detokenize,\dimexpr,\eTeXversion,\ifcsname,
%  \ifdefined,\numexpr}
%^^A\DoNotIndex{\fontcharwd,\iffontchar}                                     ^^A e-tex
%\DoNotIndex{\pdfannot,\pdfescapestring,\pdfmatch,\pdfoutput,\pdfstrcmp,
%  \pdftexrevision,\pdftexversion}
%^^A\DoNotIndex{\(ef,lp,rp,kn(ac,bc),(kn,sh,st)bs)code,\(left,right)marginkern,
%^^A  \tagcode,\letterspacefont,\pdfcopyfont,\pdffontexpand,\pdfnoligatures,
%^^A  \pdfprotrudechars,\pdfadjust(interwordglue,spacing),\pdf(app,prep)endkern,
%^^A  \pdftracingfonts}                                                      ^^A pdftex
%\DoNotIndex{\directlua,\luatexversion}                                      ^^A luatex
%\DoNotIndex{\eplain,\usepkg@pkg}                                            ^^A eplain
%\DoNotIndex{\@backslashchar,\@cclv,\@cclvi,\@classoptionslist,\@currext,
%  \@currname,\@defaultunits,\@empty,\@expandtwoargs,\@firstofone,\@firstoftwo,
%  \@gobble,\@gobbletwo,\@ifl@aded,\@ifpackagelater,\@ifpackageloaded,\@ifstar,
%  \@ifundefined,\@let@token,\@m,\@makeother,\@minus,\@nameuse,\@ne,\@nil,\@nnil,
%  \@onelevel@sanitize,\@onlypreamble,\@percentchar,\@pkgextension,\@plus,
%  \@ptionlist,\@removeelement,\@secondoftwo,\@spaces,\@sptoken,\@tempa,\@tempb,
%  \@tempc,\@tempcnta,\@tempcntb,\@tempdima,\@typeset@protect,\@undefined,
%  \@unprocessedoptions,\@unusedoptionlist,\@xobeysp,\check@icr,\color@begingroup,
%  \color@endgroup,\g@addto@macro,\hmode@bgroup,\m@ne,\maybe@ic,\maybe@ic@,
%  \nfss@text,\not@math@alphabet,\on@line,\p@,\set@display@protect,\strip@prefix,
%  \strip@pt,\tw@,\z@,\z@skip,\active,\documentclass,\leavevmode,\makeatletter,
%  \maxdimen,\newcommand,\newcount,\newdimen,\newif,\newskip,\newtoks,\nobreak,
%  \nonfrenchspacing,\normalsize,\renewcommand,\space,
%  \AtBeginDocument,\AtEndOfPackage,\CheckCommand,\CurrentOption,
%  \DeclareRobustCommand,\IfFileExists,\InputIfFileExists,\MessageBreak,
%  \PackageError,\PackageInfo,\PackageWarning,\RequirePackage,
%  \@@enc@update,\cf@encoding,\f@encoding}
%^^A\DoNotIndex{\add@accent,\curr@fontshape,\define@newfont,\do@subst@correction,
%^^A  \f@size,\font@name,\normalfont,\pickup@font,\selectfont,\set@fontsize,
%^^A  \showhyphens}                                                          ^^A latex
%\DoNotIndex{\XeTeXversion}                                                  ^^A xetex
%\DoNotIndex{\normalpdfoutput,\normalpdftexversion,\normalpdftexrevision}    ^^A tex live
%\DoNotIndex{\foreign@language,\languagename,\select@language,\shorthandoff} ^^A babel
%\DoNotIndex{\percentsign}                                                   ^^A babel/spanish,galician,mexican
%\DoNotIndex{\CJK@ifundefined,\CJK@plane,\CJK@temp,\CJK@addcmap}             ^^A CJK,CJKutf8
%\DoNotIndex{\@disablequotes}                                                ^^A csquotes
%\DoNotIndex{\pdfstringdefDisableCommands,\pdfstringdefWarn}                 ^^A hyperref
%\DoNotIndex{\ifpdf}                                                         ^^A ifpdf
%\DoNotIndex{\@inpenc@undefined@,\IeC,\inputencoding,\inputencodingname}     ^^A inputenc
%\DoNotIndex{\UTFviii@defined}                                               ^^A inputenc/utf8
%\DoNotIndex{\PrerenderUnicode,\unicode@charfilter}                          ^^A inputenc/utf8x
%\DoNotIndex{\define@key,\KV@@sp@def,\setkeys}                               ^^A keyval
%\DoNotIndex{\l@dunhbox@line}                                                ^^A ledmac,ledpar
%\DoNotIndex{\lst@ProcessLetter}                                             ^^A listings
%\DoNotIndex{\pdf@escapestring}                                              ^^A pdftexcmds
%\DoNotIndex{\py@macron}                                                     ^^A pinyin
%\DoNotIndex{\SOUL@,\soulregister}                                           ^^A soul
%\DoNotIndex{\tikz@expandcount}                                              ^^A tikz
%\DoNotIndex{\conditionally@traceoff}                                        ^^A trace
%\DoNotIndex{\x,\MT@dinfo,\MT@dinfo@nl,\tracingmicrotype,\tracingmicrotypeinpdf,
%  \ifMT@inannot,\MT@inannottrue,\MT@inannotfalse,\MT@addto@annot,\MT@pdf@annot,
%  \MT@show@pdfannot,\iftracingmicrotypeinpdfall,\tracingmicrotypeinpdfalltrue,
%  \tracingmicrotypeinpdfallfalse,\DeclareMicroTypeSet,\DeclareMicroTypeAlias,
%  \UseMicroTypeSet,\LoadMicroTypeFile,\MicroType@Hook}                      ^^A microtype
%
% ^^A -------------------------------------------------------------------------
%
%\newpage
%\ImplementationSettings
%\ifpdf\hypersetup{bookmarksopen=false}\fi
%
%\section{Implementation}
%
% The \pkg{docstrip} modules in this file are:
% \begin{description}
%  \item[|driver|]  The documentation driver, only visible in the \file{dtx} file.
%  \item[|package|] The code for the \microtype\ package (\file{microtype.sty}).
%   \begin{description}
%    \item[|letterspace|] The code for the \letterspace\ package (\file{letterspace.sty}).
%    \item[|lua|]    Code for \luatex\ (\microtype\ only).
%    \item[|plain|]  Code for \pkg{eplain}, \pkg{miniltx} (\letterspace\ only).
%    \item[|debug|]  Code for additional output in the log file.
%                   \\Used for -- surprise! -- debugging purposes.
%   \end{description}
%  \item[|config|]  Surrounds all configuration modules.
%   \begin{description}
%    \item[|cfg-t|]  Surrounds (Latin) text configurations.
%     \begin{description}
%      \item[|m-t|]   The main configuration file (\file{microtype.cfg}).
%      \item[|bch|]   Settings for Bitstream Charter (\file{mt-bch.cfg}).
%      \item[|blg|]   Settings for Bitstream Letter Gothic (\file{mt-blg.cfg}).
%      \item[|cmr|]   Settings for Computer Modern Roman (\file{mt-cmr.cfg}).
%      \item[|pad|]   Settings for Adobe Garamond (\file{mt-pad.cfg}).
%      \item[|ppl|]   Settings for Palatino (\file{mt-ppl.cfg}).
%      \item[|ptm|]   Settings for Times (\file{mt-ptm.cfg}).
%      \item[|pmn|]   Settings for Adobe Minion (\file{mt-pmn.cfg}).
%                    \\Contributed by \contributor Harald Harders <h.harders\at tu-bs.de>.
%      \item[|ugm|]   Settings for <URW> Garamond (\file{mt-ugm.cfg}).
%     \end{description}
%    \item[|cfg-u|]  Surrounds non-text configurations (<U> encoding).
%     \begin{description}
%      \item[|msa|]   Settings for <AMS> `a' symbol font (\file{mt-msa.cfg}).
%      \item[|msb|]   Settings for <AMS> `b' symbol font (\file{mt-msb.cfg}).
%      \item[|euf|]   Settings for Euler Fraktur font (\file{mt-euf.cfg}).
%      \item[|eur|]   Settings for Euler Roman font (\file{mt-eur.cfg}).
%      \item[|eus|]   Settings for Euler Script font (\file{mt-eus.cfg}).
%     \end{description}
%    \item[|cfg-e|]  Surrounds Euro symbol configurations.
%     \begin{description}
%      \item[|zpeu|]  Settings for Adobe Euro symbol fonts (\file{mt-zpeu.cfg}).
%      \item[|euroitc|] Settings for <ITC> Euro symbol fonts (\file{mt-euroitc.cfg}).
%      \item[|mvs|]   Settings for \pkg{marvosym} Euro symbol (\file{mt-mvs.cfg}).
%     \end{description}
%   \end{description}
%  \item[|test|]    A helper file that may be used to create and test
%                    protrusion settings\\(\file{test-microtype.tex}).
% \end{description}
% And now for something completely different.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*package|letterspace>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\subsection{Preliminaries}
%
%\begin{macro}{\MT@MT}
% This is us.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@MT
%<package>  {microtype}
%<letterspace>  {letterspace}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@fix@catcode}
%\changes{v1.3}{2004/10/27}{check some category codes (compatibility with \pkg{german})}
%\changes{v1.5}{2004/12/03}{reset catcode of `\texttt{\^}' (compatibility with \pkg{chemsym})}
%\changes{v2.3a}{2007/12/29}{fix catcodes earlier, and also for the \letterspace\ package}
% We have to make sure that the category codes of some characters are correct
% (the \pkg{german} package, for instance, makes |"| active). Probably overly
% cautious. Ceterum censeo: it should be forbidden for packages to change
% catcodes within the preamble.
%\begin{macro}{\MT@restore@catcodes}
% Polite as we are, we'll restore them afterwards.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\MT@restore@catcodes\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@fix@catcode#1#2{%
  \edef\MT@restore@catcodes{%
    \MT@restore@catcodes
    \catcode#1 \the\catcode#1\relax
  }%
  \catcode#1 #2\relax
}
%<package>\MT@fix@catcode{17}{14}% ^^Q (comment)
\MT@fix@catcode{24} {9}% ^^X (ignore)
%<package>\MT@fix@catcode{33}{12}% !
%<package>\MT@fix@catcode{34}{12}% "
\MT@fix@catcode{36} {3}% $ (math shift)
\MT@fix@catcode{39}{12}% '
\MT@fix@catcode{42}{12}% *
\MT@fix@catcode{43}{12}% +
\MT@fix@catcode{44}{12}% ,
\MT@fix@catcode{45}{12}% -
\MT@fix@catcode{58}{12}% :
\MT@fix@catcode{60}{12}% <
\MT@fix@catcode{61}{12}% =
\MT@fix@catcode{62}{12}% >
%<package>\MT@fix@catcode{63}{12}% ?
\MT@fix@catcode{94} {7}% ^ (superscript)
\MT@fix@catcode{96}{12}% `
%<package>\MT@fix@catcode{124}{12}% |
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% These are all commands for the outside world. We define them here as blank
% commands, so that they won't generate an error if we are not running \pdftex.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*package>
\newcommand*\DeclareMicrotypeSet[3][]{}
\newcommand*\UseMicrotypeSet[2][]{}
\newcommand*\DeclareMicrotypeSetDefault[2][]{}
\newcommand*\SetProtrusion[3][]{}
\newcommand*\SetExpansion[3][]{}
\newcommand*\SetTracking[3][]{}
\newcommand*\SetExtraKerning[3][]{}
\newcommand*\SetExtraSpacing[3][]{}
\newcommand*\DisableLigatures[2][]{}
\newcommand*\DeclareCharacterInheritance[3][]{}
\newcommand*\DeclareMicrotypeVariants[1]{}
\newcommand*\DeclareMicrotypeAlias[2]{}
\newcommand*\LoadMicrotypeFile[1]{}
\newcommand*\DeclareMicrotypeBabelHook[2]{}
\newcommand*\microtypesetup[1]{}
\newcommand*\microtypecontext[1]{}
\newcommand*\textmicrotypecontext[2]{#2}
\@ifpackageloaded{letterspace}{\let\MT@textls\relax}{%
%</package>
\newcommand*\lsstyle{}
\newcommand\textls[2][]{}
\def\textls#1#{}
\newcommand*\lslig[1]{#1}
%<*package>
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% These commands also have a starred version.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\DeclareMicrotypeSet#1#{\@gobbletwo}
\def\DeclareMicrotypeVariants#1#{\@gobble}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set declarations are only allowed in the preamble (resp. the main
% configuration file). The configuration commands, on the other hand, must be
% allowed in the document, too, since they may be called inside font
% configuration files, which, in principle, may be loaded at any time.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@onlypreamble\DeclareMicrotypeSet
\@onlypreamble\UseMicrotypeSet
\@onlypreamble\DeclareMicrotypeSetDefault
\@onlypreamble\DisableLigatures
\@onlypreamble\DeclareMicrotypeVariants
\@onlypreamble\DeclareMicrotypeBabelHook
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@old@cmd}
% The old command names had one more hunch.
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/28}{renamed commands from \cs{..MicroType..} to \cs{..Microtype..}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@old@cmd#1#2{%
  \newcommand*#1{\MT@warning{%
    \string#1 is deprecated. Please use\MessageBreak
    \string#2 instead}%
    \let #1#2#2}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@old@cmd\DeclareMicroTypeAlias\DeclareMicrotypeAlias
\MT@old@cmd\DeclareMicroTypeSet  \DeclareMicrotypeSet
\MT@old@cmd\UseMicroTypeSet      \UseMicrotypeSet
\MT@old@cmd\LoadMicroTypeFile    \LoadMicrotypeFile
%</package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@warning}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@warning@nl}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@info}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@info@nl}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@vinfo}
%\changes{v1.6}{2005/01/06}{new macro instead of \cs{ifMT@verbose}}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@error}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@warn@err}
%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/16}{new macro: for \opt{verbose}\texttt{\quotechar=errors}}
% Communicate.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@warning{\PackageWarning\MT@MT}
\def\MT@warning@nl#1{\MT@warning{#1\@gobble}}
%<*package>
\def\MT@info{\PackageInfo\MT@MT}
\def\MT@info@nl#1{\MT@info{#1\@gobble}}
\let\MT@vinfo\@gobble
\def\MT@error{\PackageError\MT@MT}
\def\MT@warn@err#1{\MT@error{#1}{%
  This error message appears because you loaded the `\MT@MT'\MessageBreak
  package with the option `verbose=errors'. Consult the documentation\MessageBreak
  in \MT@MT.pdf to find out what went wrong.}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%
%\subsubsection{Debugging}
%
%\begin{macro}{\tracingmicrotype}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@dinfo}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@dinfo@nl}
% Cases for \cs{tracingmicrotype}:
%\begin{enum}
%  \item almost none
%  \item + sets \& lists
%  \item + heirs
%  \item + slots
%  \item + factors
%\end{enum}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*debug>
\MT@warning@nl{This is the debug version}
\newcount\tracingmicrotype
\tracingmicrotype=2
\def\MT@info#1{\PackageInfo\MT@MT{#1}\MT@addto@annot{#1}}
\def\MT@info@nl#1{\PackageInfo\MT@MT{#1\@gobble}\MT@addto@annot{#1}}
\let\MT@vinfo\MT@info@nl
\def\MT@warning#1{\PackageWarning\MT@MT{#1}\MT@addto@annot{Warning: #1}}
\def\MT@warning@nl#1{\PackageWarning\MT@MT{#1\@gobble}\MT@addto@annot{Warning: #1}}
\def\MT@dinfo#1#2{\ifnum\tracingmicrotype<#1 \else\MT@info{#2}\fi}
\def\MT@dinfo@nl#1#2{\ifnum\tracingmicrotype<#1 \else\MT@info@nl{#2}\fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\tracingmicrotypeinpdf}
%\changes{v2.0}{2006/09/21}{new debug method: mark all fonts with <PDF> annotations}
% Another debug method: font switches can be marked in the <PDF> file with a
% small caret, an accompanying popup text box displaying all debug messages.
%
% Cases for \cs{tracingmicrotypeinpdf}:
%\begin{enum}[1]
%  \item show new fonts
%  \item + show known fonts
%\end{enum}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcount\tracingmicrotypeinpdf
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\ifpdf\ifx\tracingmicrotypeinpdf\undefined
% \fallbacktext{If \file{microtype.sty} had been generated with the `|debug|'
%   option,\\this method would be demonstrated here.}
%\else
% Let's see how it works~\dots
%\begin{verbatim}
%\tracingmicrotypeinpdf=2
%\end{verbatim}
%\tracingmicrotypeinpdf=2
%\fi\fi
%\begin{macro}{\MT@pdf@annot}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@addto@annot}
%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@inannot}
% During font setup, we save the text for the popup in \cs{MT@pdf@annot}.
% (This requires \pdftex\ $\geq$~1.30.)
% The \pkg{pdftexcmds} package provides \pdftex's utility commands in \luatex, too.
%\changes{v2.3d}{2009/02/27}{use \pkg{pdftexcmds} for debugging}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\RequirePackage{pdftexcmds}
\newif\ifMT@inannot \MT@inannottrue
\let\MT@pdf@annot\@empty
\def\MT@addto@annot#1{\ifnum\tracingmicrotypeinpdf>\z@ \ifMT@inannot
  {\def\MessageBreak{^^J\@spaces}%
   \MT@xadd\MT@pdf@annot{\pdf@escapestring{#1^^J}}}\fi\fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\iftracingmicrotypeinpdfall}
% With \cs{tracingmicrotypeinpdfallfalse}, the <PDF> output is (hopefully)
% identical, but some font switches will not be displayed; otherwise the output
% is affected, but \emph{all} font switches are visible. In the latter case, we
% also insert a small kern so that multiple font switches are discernable.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\iftracingmicrotypeinpdfall
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@show@pdfannot}
% A red caret is shown for fonts which are actually set up by
% {\ifpdf\ifx\tracingmicrotypeinpdf\undefined\else\fontfamily{pzc}\itshape\fi\fi
%  Microtype},
% a green one marks fonts that we have already seen. The |/Caret| annotation
% requires a viewer for <PDF> version 1.5 (you could use |/Text| if you're
% using an older <PDF> viewer).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@show@pdfannot#1{%
  \ifnum\tracingmicrotypeinpdf<#1 \else
    \iftracingmicrotypeinpdfall\leavevmode\fi
    \pdfannot height 4pt width 4pt depth 2pt {%
      /Subtype/Caret
      /T(\expandafter\string\font@name)
      \ifcase#1\or
      /Subj(New font)/C[1 0 0]
      \else
      /Subj(Known font)/C[0 1 0]
      \fi
      /Contents(\MT@pdf@annot)
    }%
    \iftracingmicrotypeinpdfall\kern1pt \fi
    \global\MT@inannotfalse
  \fi
}
%</debug>
%</package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\ifpdf\ifx\tracingmicrotypeinpdf\undefined\else
% \tracingmicrotypeinpdf0
% \tracingmicrotype0
%\fi\fi
%
%\subsubsection{Requirements}
%
%\begin{macro}{\MT@plain}
% The \letterspace\ package works with:
%\begin{enum}
%\changes{v2.3}{2007/11/07}{\letterspace: support for \pkg{eplain}/\pkg{miniltx}}
%  \item \pkg{miniltx}
%  \item \pkg{eplain} ^^A tested with eplain v3.1, 2006/12/03; v3.2, 2007/11/26; v3.3, 2009/07/21
%  \item \LaTeX
%\end{enum}
% For plain usage, we have to copy some commands from \file{latex.ltx}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*plain>
\def\MT@plain{2}
\ifx\documentclass\@undefined
  \def\MT@plain{1}
  \def\hmode@bgroup{\leavevmode\bgroup}
  \def\nfss@text#1{{\mbox{#1}}}
  \let\@typeset@protect\relax
  \ifx\eplain\@undefined
    \def\MT@plain{0}
    \def\PackageWarning#1#2{%
      \begingroup
        \newlinechar=10 %
        \def\MessageBreak{^^J(#1)\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces}%
        \immediate\write16{^^JPackage #1 Warning: #2\on@line.^^J}%
      \endgroup
    }
    \def\on@line{ on input line \the\inputlineno}
    \def\@spaces{\space\space\space\space}
  \fi
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@requires@latex}
%\changes{v2.3b}{2008/05/26}{new macro}
% Better use groups than plain ifs.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@requires@latex#1{%
  \ifnum\MT@plain<#1 \expandafter\@secondoftwo\else\expandafter\@firstoftwo\fi
}
%</plain>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@pdftex@no}
%\changes{v1.6a}{2005/02/02}{new macro}
% \pdftex's features for which we provide an interface here haven't always been
% available, and some specifics have changed over time. Therefore, we have to
% test which \pdftex\ we're using, if any. \cs{MT@pdftex@no} will be used
% throughout the package to respectively do the right thing.
%
% Currently, we have to distinguish seven cases for \pdftex:
%\begin{enum}
%  \item not running \pdftex
%  \item \pdftex\ ($\less$~0.14f)
%  \item + micro-typographic extensions (0.14f,g)
%  \item + protrusion relative to 1\,em ($\geq$~0.14h)
%  \item + automatic font expansion;
%          protrusion no longer has to be set up first;
%          scale factor fixed to 1000;
%          default \cmd\efcode\,=\,1000 ($\geq$~1.20)
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/15}{case 5: \pdftex\ 1.30}
%  \item + \cmd{\(left,right)marginkern};
%          \cmd\pdfnoligatures;
%          \cmd\pdfstrcmp;
%          \cmd\pdfescapestring\ ($\geq$~1.30)
%\changes{v2.0}{2005/08/20}{(beta:1) case 6: \pdftex\ 1.40}
%  \item + adjustment of interword spacing;
%          extra kerning;
%          \cmd\letterspacefont;
%          \cmd\pdfmatch\footnote{This command was actually introduced
%           in 1.30, but failed on strings longer than 1023 bytes.};
%          \cmd\pdftracingfonts;
%          always \etex\
%          ($\geq$~1.40)
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/02/23}{case 7: \pdftex\ 1.40.4}
%  \item + \cmd\letterspacefont\ doesn't disable ligatures and kerns;
%          \cmd\pdfcopyfont\
%          ($\geq$~1.40.4)
%\end{enum}
%\changes{v1.1}{2004/09/13}{fix: version check
%               (reported by \contributor Harald Harders <h.harders\at tu-bs.de>)}
%                                                   ^^A private mail, 2004/09/13
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@pdftex@no{0}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v1.9}{2005/08/29}{compatibility with \texlive\ hack
%               (reported by \contributor Herbert Vo\ss{} <Herbert.Voss\at gmx.net>)}
%                                      ^^A MID: <deprh8$c69$00$1@news.t-online.com>
% A hack circumventing the \texlive\ 2004 hack which undefines the \pdftex\
% primitives in the format in order to hide the fact that \pdftex\ is being run
% from the user. This has been \emph{fixed} in \texlive\ 2005.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\normalpdftexversion\@undefined \else
  \let\pdftexversion \normalpdftexversion
  \let\pdftexrevision\normalpdftexrevision
  \let\pdfoutput     \normalpdfoutput
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Old packages might have let \cmd\pdftexversion\ to \cmd\relax.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\pdftexversion\@undefined \else
  \ifx\pdftexversion\relax \else
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{0}{this is pdftex \the\pdftexversion(\pdftexrevision)}
    \def\MT@pdftex@no{7}
%<*package>
    \ifnum\pdftexversion = 140
      \ifnum\pdftexrevision < 4
        \def\MT@pdftex@no{6}
      \fi
    \else
%</package>
      \ifnum\pdftexversion < 140
        \def\MT@pdftex@no{5}
%<*package>
        \ifnum\pdftexversion < 130
          \def\MT@pdftex@no{4}
          \ifnum\pdftexversion < 120
            \def\MT@pdftex@no{3}
            \ifnum\pdftexversion = 14
              \ifnum \expandafter`\pdftexrevision < `h
                \def\MT@pdftex@no{2}
                \ifnum \expandafter`\pdftexrevision < `f
                  \def\MT@pdftex@no{1}
                \fi
              \fi
            \else
              \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
                \def\MT@pdftex@no{1}
              \fi
            \fi
          \fi
        \fi
      \fi
%</package>
    \fi
  \fi
\fi
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{0}{pdftex no.: \MT@pdftex@no}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@clear@options}
% If we are not using \pdftex\ or in case it is too old, we disable everything
% and exit.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@clear@options{%
%<plain>  \MT@requires@latex1{%
  \AtEndOfPackage{\let\@unprocessedoptions\relax}%
  \let\CurrentOption\@empty
%<plain>  }\relax
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifnum\MT@pdftex@no <
%<package>    2
%<letterspace>    6
  \MT@warning@nl{You
    \ifcase\MT@pdftex@no
      don't seem to be using pdftex.\MessageBreak
      `\MT@MT' only works with pdftex.\MessageBreak
      Try running `pdflatex' instead of
        `\ifx\XeTeXversion\@undefined\else xe\fi latex'%
    \else
      are using a pdftex version older than
%<package>      0.14f%
%<letterspace>      1.40%
      .\MessageBreak
      `\MT@MT' does not work with this version.\MessageBreak
      Please install a newer version of pdftex%
    \fi
  }
  \MT@clear@options\MT@restore@catcodes
\endinput\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v2.3c}{2008/09/09}{\luatex\ supported by default}
% Since \luatex\ is included in \texlive\ 2008, we now support it by default,
% even though it's still experimental. Letterspacing doesn't work at all yet,
% since \luatex\ doesn't know the \cmd\letterspacefont\ command.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*!lua|letterspace>
\ifx\directlua\@undefined \else
  \ifx\directlua\relax \else
%<!letterspace>    \MT@error
%<letterspace>    \MT@warning@nl
    {`\MT@MT'
%<!letterspace>     only works with luatex if you generate%
%<letterspace>     doesn't currently work with luatex.%
     \MessageBreak
%<!letterspace>     the package with the `lua' option%
%<letterspace>     Bye bye%
    }
%<!letterspace>    {}
%<letterspace>    \MT@clear@options\MT@restore@catcodes
%<letterspace>    \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\endinput
  \fi
\fi
%</!lua|letterspace>
%    \end{macrocode}
% Still there? Then we can begin:
% We need the \pkg{keyval} package, including the `new' \cmd\KV@@sp@def\
% implementation.
%\changes{v2.1}{2007/01/15}{fix: \letterspace\ package forgot to load \pkg{keyval}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\RequirePackage{keyval}[1997/11/10]
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@toks}
% We need a token register.
%\changes{v1.9}{2005/09/28}{use instead of \cmd\toks@}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newtoks\MT@toks
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@if@}
% A scratch if.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifMT@if@
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\subsubsection{Declarations}
%
%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@protrusion}
%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@expansion}
%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@auto}
%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@selected}
%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@noligatures}
%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@draft}
%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@spacing}
%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@kerning}
%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@tracking}
%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@babel}
% These are the global switches~\dots
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifMT@protrusion
\newif\ifMT@expansion
\newif\ifMT@auto
\newif\ifMT@selected
\newif\ifMT@noligatures
\newif\ifMT@draft
\newif\ifMT@spacing
\newif\ifMT@kerning
\newif\ifMT@tracking
\newif\ifMT@babel
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@pr@level}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@ex@level}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@pr@factor}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@ex@factor}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@sp@factor}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@kn@factor}
% \dots~and numbers.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\MT@pr@level\tw@
\let\MT@ex@level\tw@
\let\MT@pr@factor\@m
\let\MT@ex@factor\@m
\let\MT@sp@factor\@m
\let\MT@kn@factor\@m
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@pr@unit}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@sp@unit}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@kn@unit}
% Default unit for protrusion settings is character width, for spacing
% |space|, for kerning (and tracking) 1\,em.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\MT@pr@unit\@empty
\let\MT@sp@unit\m@ne
\def\MT@kn@unit{1em}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@stretch}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@shrink}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@step}
% Expansion settings.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\MT@stretch\m@ne
\let\MT@shrink \m@ne
\let\MT@step   \m@ne
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@pr@min}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@pr@max}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@ex@min}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@ex@max}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@sp@min}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@sp@max}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@kn@min}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@kn@max}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@min}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@max}
% Minimum and maximum values allowed by \pdftex.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@pr@min{-\@m}
\let\MT@pr@max\@m
\let\MT@ex@min\z@
\let\MT@ex@max\@m
\def\MT@sp@min{-\@m}
\let\MT@sp@max\@m
\def\MT@kn@min{-\@m}
\let\MT@kn@max\@m
%</package>
\def\MT@tr@min{-\@m}
\let\MT@tr@max\@m
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@factor@default}
% Default factor.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@factor@default{1000 }
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@stretch@default}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@shrink@default}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@step@default}
% Default values for expansion.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@stretch@default{20 }
\def\MT@shrink@default{20 }
\def\MT@step@default{4 }
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@letterspace}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@letterspace@default}
% Default value for letterspacing (in thousandths of 1\,em).
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package>
\let\MT@letterspace\m@ne
\def\MT@letterspace@default{100}
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@document}
% Our private test whether we're still in the preamble.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifMT@document
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\subsubsection{Auxiliary macros}
%
%\begin{macro}{\MT@maybe@etex}
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/05/01}{use catcode trickery}
%\changes{v2.3a}{2007/12/29}{removed}
% For definitions that depend on \etex\ features.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifcase 0%
  \ifx\eTeXversion\@undefined 1\else
    \ifx\eTeXversion\relax    1\else
      \ifcase\eTeXversion     1\fi
    \fi
  \fi
\else
  \catcode`\^^Q=9 \catcode`\^^X=14
\fi
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{0}{this is
%<debug>^^Q not
%<debug>  etex}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@requires@pdftex}
% For definitions that depend on a particular \pdftex\ version.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@requires@pdftex#1{%
  \ifnum\MT@pdftex@no<#1 \expandafter\@secondoftwo\else\expandafter\@firstoftwo\fi
}
%<debug>\MT@requires@pdftex6{\pdftracingfonts=1 }\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@requires@luatex}
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/05/10}{(basic) support for \luatex}
% For definitions that depend on \luatex.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*lua>
\let\MT@requires@luatex\@secondoftwo
\ifx\directlua\@undefined \else
  \ifx\directlua\relax \else
    \let\MT@requires@luatex\@firstoftwo
  \fi
\fi
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl0{this is \MT@requires@luatex{}{not }luatex}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@lua}
% Communicate with |lua|.
% Beginning with \luatex\ 0.36, \cmd\directlua\ no longer requires a state
% number.
%\changes{v2.3d}{2009/03/25}{update for \luatex\ 0.36}
% \cmd\luatexversion\ ought to have been enabled by the format.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@requires@luatex{
\ifnum\luatexversion<36
  \def\MT@lua{\directlua0}
\else
  \def\MT@lua{\directlua}
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Some functions are loaded from a dedicated |lua| file. This avoids character
% escaping problems and incompatibilities between versions of \luatex.
% If available, we'll use the \pkg{luatextra} package to load the module.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@lua{
  if (luatextra and luatextra.use_module) then
    luatextra.use_module("microtype")
  else
    dofile(kpse.find_file("microtype.lua"))
  end}
}\relax
%</lua>
%</package>
%</package|letterspace>
%    \end{macrocode}
% Here it begins. The module was contributed by \'Elie Roux.
%\changes{v2.4}{2009/11/12}{new file \file{microtype.lua} containing the \texttt{lua} functions
%                           (contributed by \contributor \'Elie Roux <elie.roux\at telecom-bretagne.eu>)}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*luafile>
if microtype then
  -- we simply don't load
else

microtype = {}

microtype.module = {
  name         = "microtype",
  version      = 2.4,
  date         = "2010/01/10",
  description  = "microtype module.",
  author       = "R Schlicht",
  copyright    = "R Schlicht",
  license      = "LPPL",
}

if luatextra and luatextra.provides_module then
  luatextra.provides_module(microtype.module)
end

%</luafile>
%    \end{macrocode}
% To be continued, but first back to primitives.
%\begin{macro}{\MT@glet}
%\changes{v1.9f}{2006/08/09}{new macro}
% Here's the forgotten one.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*package|letterspace>
\def\MT@glet{\global\let}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@exp@cs}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@exp@gcs}
%\changes{v2.3b}{2008/03/07}{new macro: reduce save stack size}
% Commands to create command sequences. Those that are going to be defined
% globally should be created inside a group so that the save stack won't
% explode.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@exp@cs#1#2{\expandafter#1\csname#2\endcsname}
%<*package>
\def\MT@exp@gcs#1#2{\begingroup\expandafter\endgroup\expandafter#1\csname#2\endcsname}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\changes{v1.4b}{2004/11/21}{optimisation: use less \cmd\expandafter s and \cmd\csname s}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@def@n}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@gdef@n}
%\changes{v1.9f}{2006/08/09}{new macros: global variants}
% This is \cmd\@namedef\ and global.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@def@n{\MT@exp@cs\def}
\def\MT@gdef@n{\MT@exp@gcs\gdef}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@edef@n}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@xdef@n}
% Its expanding versions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package>
\def\MT@edef@n{\MT@exp@cs\edef}
%<*package>
\def\MT@xdef@n{\MT@exp@gcs\xdef}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@let@nc}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@glet@nc}
% \cmd\let\ a \cmd\csname\ sequence to a command.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@let@nc{\MT@exp@cs\let}
\def\MT@glet@nc{\MT@exp@gcs\MT@glet}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@let@cn}
% \cmd\let\ a command to a \cmd\csname\ sequence.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@let@cn#1#2{\expandafter\let\expandafter#1\csname #2\endcsname}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@let@nn}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@glet@nn}
% \cmd\let\ a \cmd\csname\ sequence to a \cmd\csname\ sequence.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@let@nn{\MT@exp@cs\MT@let@cn}
\def\MT@glet@nn{\MT@exp@gcs{\global\expandafter\MT@let@cn}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@@font}
% Remove trailing space from the font name.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@@font{\expandafter\string\MT@font}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@exp@one@n}
% Expand the second token once and enclose it in braces.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package>
\def\MT@exp@one@n#1#2{\expandafter#1\expandafter{#2}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@exp@two@c}
% Expand the next two tokens after \meta{\#1} once.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@exp@two@c#1{\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter#1\expandafter}
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@exp@two@n}
%\changes{v1.9}{2005/09/28}{new macros: less \cmd\expandafter s}
% Expand the next two tokens after \meta{\#1} once and enclose them in braces.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@exp@two@n#1#2#3{%
  \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
    #1\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
      {\expandafter#2\expandafter}\expandafter{#3}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% You do not wonder why |\MT@exp@one@c| doesn't exist, do you?
%\changes{v1.6}{2005/01/19}{use \etex's \cs{ifcsname} and \cs{ifdefined} if defined}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@ifdefined@c@T}
%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/11/08}{new macros: true case only}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@ifdefined@c@TF}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@ifdefined@n@T}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@ifdefined@n@TF}
% Wrapper for testing whether command resp. \cmd\csname\ sequence is defined.
% If we are running \etex, we will use its primitives \cs{ifdefined} and
% \cs{ifcsname}, which decreases memory use substantially.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@ifdefined@c@T#1{%
^^X  \ifdefined#1\expandafter\@firstofone\else\expandafter\@gobble\fi
^^Q  \ifx#1\@undefined\expandafter\@gobble\else\expandafter\@firstofone\fi
}
%</package>
\def\MT@ifdefined@c@TF#1{%
^^X  \ifdefined#1\expandafter\@firstoftwo\else\expandafter\@secondoftwo\fi
%<package>^^Q  \ifx#1\@undefined
%<package>^^Q    \expandafter\@secondoftwo\else\expandafter\@firstoftwo\fi
}
\def\MT@ifdefined@n@T#1{%
^^X  \ifcsname#1\endcsname\expandafter\@firstofone\else\expandafter\@gobble\fi
%<package>^^Q  \begingroup\MT@exp@two@c\endgroup\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax
%<package>^^Q    \expandafter\@gobble\else\expandafter\@firstofone\fi
}
%<*package>
\def\MT@ifdefined@n@TF#1{%
^^X  \ifcsname#1\endcsname\expandafter\@firstoftwo\else\expandafter\@secondoftwo\fi
^^Q  \begingroup\MT@exp@two@c\endgroup\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax
^^Q    \expandafter\@secondoftwo\else\expandafter\@firstoftwo\fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@detokenize@n}
%\changes{v1.9d}{2006/03/08}{new macro: use \cmd\detokenize\ if available}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@detokenize@c}
%\changes{v1.9}{2005/08/17}{fix the \nonetex\ version}
%\changes{v2.3c}{2008/08/23}{fix: remove last space only
%                            (reported by \contributor Ulrich Dirr <ud\at mucschach.de>)}
%                                                         ^^A private mail, 2008/08/22
%\begin{macro}{\MT@rem@last@space}
% Translate a macro into a token list. With \etex, we can use \cmd\detokenize.
% We also need to remove the last trailing space; and only the last one --
% therefore the fiddling (and the \cmd\string\ isn't perfect, of course).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@detokenize@n#1{%
^^X  \expandafter\MT@rem@last@space\detokenize{#1} \@nil
^^Q  \string#1%
}
\def\MT@detokenize@c#1{%
^^X  \MT@exp@one@n\MT@detokenize@n#1%
^^Q  \MT@exp@two@c\MT@rem@last@space\strip@prefix\meaning#1 \@nil
}
\def\MT@rem@last@space#1 #2{#1%
  \ifx\@nil#2\else \space
  \expandafter\MT@rem@last@space\expandafter#2\fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@ifempty}
% Test whether argument is empty.
%\changes{v1.1}{2004/09/15}{fix: use category code 12 for the percent character
%               (reported by \contributor Tom Kink <kink\at hia.rwth-aachen.de>)}
%                                      ^^A MID: <2qrkp9F134l6lU1@uni-berlin.de>
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package>
\begingroup
\catcode`\%=12
\catcode`\&=14
\gdef\MT@ifempty#1{&
  \if %#1%&
    \expandafter\@firstoftwo
  \else
    \expandafter\@secondoftwo
  \fi
}
\endgroup
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@ifint}
% Test whether argument is an integer, using an old trick by Mr. Arseneau,
%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/11/03}{use \cmd\pdfmatch\ if available}
% or the latest and greatest from \pdftex\
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/05/10}{employ \luatex\ features if available}
% or \luatex\ (which also allows negative numbers, as required by the
% \opt{letterspace} option).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@requires@pdftex6{
%<*lua>
  \MT@requires@luatex{
    \def\MT@ifint#1{\csname\MT@lua{microtype.ifint([[#1]])}\endcsname}
  }{
%</lua>
%</package>
    \def\MT@ifint#1{%
      \ifcase\pdfmatch{^-*[0-9]+ *$}{#1}\relax
        \expandafter\@secondoftwo
      \else
        \expandafter\@firstoftwo
      \fi
    }
%<*package>
%<lua>  }
}{
  \def\MT@ifint#1{%
    \if!\ifnum9<1#1!\else?\fi
      \expandafter\@firstoftwo
    \else
      \expandafter\@secondoftwo
    \fi
  }
}
%</package>
%</package|letterspace>
%<*luafile>
function microtype.ifint(s)
  if string.find(s,"^-*[0-9]+ *$") then
    tex.write("@firstoftwo")
  else
    tex.write("@secondoftwo")
  end
end

%</luafile>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@ifdimen}
% Test whether argument is dimension (or number).
%\changes{v1.4b}{2004/11/22}{don't set \cs{MT@count} globally (save stack problem)}
%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/15}{comparison with 1 to allow size smaller than 1
%               (suggested by \contributor Andreas B\"uhmann <andreas.buehmann\at web.de>)}
%                                                            ^^A private mail, 2005/03/15
%\changes{v1.9b}{2006/01/05}{use \cmd\pdfmatch\ if available}
% (|nd| and |nc| are new Didot resp. Cicero, added in \pdftex\ 1.30; |px| is a pixel.)
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/05/10}{employ \luatex\ features if available}
%\todo{fix \texttt{lua} expression}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*package>
\MT@requires@pdftex6{
%<*lua>
  \MT@requires@luatex{
    \def\MT@ifdimen#1{\csname\MT@lua{microtype.ifdimen([[#1]])}\endcsname}
  }{
%</lua>
    \def\MT@ifdimen#1{%
      \ifcase\pdfmatch{^([0-9]+([.,][0-9]+)?|[.,][0-9]+)%
                        (em|ex|cm|mm|in|pc|pt|dd|cc|bp|sp|nd|nc|px)? *$}{#1}\relax
        \expandafter\@secondoftwo
      \else
        \expandafter\@firstoftwo
      \fi
    }
%<lua>  }
}{
  \def\MT@ifdimen#1{%
    \setbox\z@=\hbox{%
      \MT@count=1#1\relax
      \ifnum\MT@count=\@ne
        \aftergroup\@secondoftwo
      \else
        \aftergroup\@firstoftwo
      \fi
    }%
  }
}
%</package>
%<*luafile>
function microtype.ifdimen(s)
  if (string.find(s, "^-*[0-9]+(%a*) *$") or
      string.find(s, "^-*[0-9]*[.,][0-9]+(%a*) *$")) then
    tex.write("@firstoftwo")
  else
    tex.write("@secondoftwo")
  end
end

%</luafile>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@ifdim}
% Test floating point numbers.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*package>
\def\MT@ifdim#1#2#3{%
  \ifdim #1\p@ #2 #3\p@
    \expandafter\@firstoftwo
  \else
    \expandafter\@secondoftwo
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@ifstreq}
% Test whether two strings (fully expanded) are equal.
%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/11/03}{use \cmd\pdfstrcmp\ if available}
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/03/07}{fix: \nonetex\ version shouldn't use \cmd\x\ and \cmd\y\
%                           (found by \contributor Wiebke Petersen <petersew\at uni-duesseldorf.de>)}
%                                               ^^A MID: <esmd6k$954$1@news1.rz.uni-duesseldorf.de>
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/05/10}{employ \luatex\ features if available}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@requires@pdftex5{
%<*lua>
  \MT@requires@luatex{
    \def\MT@ifstreq#1#2{\csname\MT@lua{microtype.ifstreq([[#1]],[[#2]])}\endcsname}
  }{
%</lua>
    \def\MT@ifstreq#1#2{%
      \ifcase\pdfstrcmp{#1}{#2}\relax
        \expandafter\@firstoftwo
      \else
        \expandafter\@secondoftwo
      \fi
    }
%<lua>  }
}{
  \def\MT@ifstreq#1#2{%
    \edef\MT@res@a{#1}%
    \edef\MT@res@b{#2}%
    \ifx\MT@res@a\MT@res@b
      \expandafter\@firstoftwo
    \else
      \expandafter\@secondoftwo
    \fi
  }
}
%</package>
%<*luafile>
function microtype.ifstreq(s1, s2)
  if s1 == s2 then
    tex.write("@firstoftwo")
  else
    tex.write("@secondoftwo")
  end
end

%    \end{macrocode}
% And here we end the |lua| file.
%    \begin{macrocode}
end
%</luafile>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@xadd}
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/17}{simplified}
% Add item to a list.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*package>
\def\MT@xadd#1#2{%
  \ifx#1\relax
    \xdef#1{#2}%
  \else
    \xdef#1{#1#2}%
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@xaddb}
% Add item to the beginning.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@xaddb#1#2{%
  \ifx#1\relax
    \xdef#1{#2}%
  \else
    \xdef#1{#2#1}%
  \fi
}
%</package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@map@clist@n}
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/17}{new macro: used instead of \cmd\@for}
%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/11/03}{following \LaTeX3}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@map@clist@c}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@map@clist@}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@clist@function}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@clist@break}
% Run \meta{\#2} on all elements of the comma list \meta{\#1}. This and the
% following is modelled after \LaTeX3 commands.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*package|letterspace>
\def\MT@map@clist@n#1#2{%
  \ifx\@empty#1\else
    \def\MT@clist@function##1{#2}%
    \MT@map@clist@#1,\@nil,\@nnil
  \fi
}
\def\MT@map@clist@c#1{\MT@exp@one@n\MT@map@clist@n#1}
\def\MT@map@clist@#1,{%
  \ifx\@nil#1%
    \expandafter\MT@clist@break
  \fi
  \MT@clist@function{#1}%
  \MT@map@clist@
}
\let\MT@clist@function\@gobble
\def\MT@clist@break#1\@nnil{}
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@map@tlist@n}
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/16}{new macro: used instead of \cmd\@tfor}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@map@tlist@c}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@map@tlist@}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@tlist@break}
% Execute \meta{\#2} on all elements of the token list \meta{\#1}.
% \cs{MT@tlist@break} can be used to jump out of the loop.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@map@tlist@n#1#2{\MT@map@tlist@#2#1\@nnil}
\def\MT@map@tlist@c#1#2{\expandafter\MT@map@tlist@\expandafter#2#1\@nnil}
\def\MT@map@tlist@#1#2{%
  \ifx\@nnil#2\else
    #1{#2}%
    \expandafter\MT@map@tlist@
    \expandafter#1%
  \fi
}
\def\MT@tlist@break#1\@nnil{\fi}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@inlist@}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@in@clist}
% Test whether item \meta{\#1} is in comma list \meta{\#2}.
%^^A\changes{v1.4b}{2004/11/22}{fix: compare with \cmd\\ instead of \cmd\relax\
%^^A                (discovered by \contributor Herb Schulz <herbs\at wideopenwest.com>)}
%^^A                                    ^^A MID: <BDBFA967.C01F%herbs@wideopenwest.com>
% Using \cmd\pdfmatch\ would be slower.
%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/11/03}{fix}
%\changes{v2.3}{2007/11/14}{fix: don't use \cmd\x\
%                           (reported by \contributor Peter Meier <Peter.Meier998\at gmx.de>)}
%                                                                ^^A private mail, 2007/11/12
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifMT@inlist@
\def\MT@in@clist#1#2{%
  \def\MT@res@a##1,#1,##2##3\@nnil{%
    \ifx##2\@empty
      \MT@inlist@false
    \else
      \MT@inlist@true
    \fi
  }%
  \expandafter\MT@res@a\expandafter,#2,#1,\@empty\@nnil
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@rem@from@clist}
% Remove item \meta{\#1} from comma list \meta{\#2}. This is basically
% \cmd\@removeelement\ from \file{ltcntrl.dtx}.
%\changes{v1.9}{2005/10/28}{new macro: remove an item from a comma list}
%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/11/03}{fix}
%\changes{v1.9e}{2006/07/26}{model after \cmd\@removeelement}
% Using \cmd\pdfmatch\ and \cmd\pdflastmatch\ here would be really slow!
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@rem@from@clist#1#2{%
  \def\MT@res@a##1,#1,##2\MT@res@a{##1,##2\MT@res@b}%
  \def\MT@res@b##1,\MT@res@b##2\MT@res@b{\ifx,##1\@empty\else##1\fi}%
  \xdef#2{\MT@exp@two@c\MT@res@b\MT@res@a\expandafter,#2,\MT@res@b,#1,\MT@res@a}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@in@tlist}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@in@tlist@}
% Test whether item is in token list. Since this isn't too elegant, I thought
% that at least here, \cmd\pdfmatch\ would be more efficient -- however, it
% turned out to be even slower than this solution.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@in@tlist#1#2{%
  \MT@inlist@false
  \def\MT@res@a{#1}%
  \MT@map@tlist@c#2\MT@in@tlist@
}
\def\MT@in@tlist@#1{%
  \edef\MT@res@b{#1}%
  \ifx\MT@res@a\MT@res@b
    \MT@inlist@true
    \expandafter\MT@tlist@break
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@in@rlist}
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/20}{made recursive}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@in@rlist@}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@in@rlist@@}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@size@name}
% Test whether size \cs{MT@size} is in a list of ranges. Store the name of the
% list in \cs{MT@size@name}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@in@rlist#1{%
  \MT@inlist@false
  \MT@map@tlist@c#1\MT@in@rlist@
}
\def\MT@in@rlist@#1{\expandafter\MT@in@rlist@@#1}
\def\MT@in@rlist@@#1#2#3{%
  \MT@ifdim{#2}=\m@ne{%
    \MT@ifdim{#1}=\MT@size
      \MT@inlist@true
      \relax
  }{%
    \MT@ifdim\MT@size<{#1}\relax{%
      \MT@ifdim\MT@size<{#2}%
        \MT@inlist@true
        \relax
    }%
  }%
  \ifMT@inlist@
    \def\MT@size@name{#3}%
    \expandafter\MT@tlist@break
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@loop}
%\changes{v1.2}{2004/09/23}{fix: new macro, used instead of \cmd\loop}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@iterate}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@repeat}
% This is the same as \LaTeX's \cmd\loop, which we mustn't use, since this
% could confuse an outer \cmd\loop\ in the document.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package>
\def\MT@loop#1\MT@repeat{%
  \def\MT@iterate{#1\relax\expandafter\MT@iterate\fi}%
  \MT@iterate \let\MT@iterate\relax
}
\let\MT@repeat\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@while@num}
% Execute \meta{\#3} from \meta{\#1} up to (excluding) \meta{\#2} (much faster
% than \LaTeX's \cmd\@whilenum).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@while@num#1#2#3{%
  \@tempcnta#1\relax
  \MT@loop #3%
    \advance\@tempcnta \@ne
    \ifnum\@tempcnta < #2\MT@repeat
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@do@font}
% Execute \meta{\#1} 256 times.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@do@font{\MT@while@num\z@\@cclvi}
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\changes{v1.4}{2004/11/12}{use one instead of five counters}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@count}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@increment}
% Increment macro \meta{\#1} by one. Saves using up too many counters.
%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/07}{use \etex's \cmd\numexpr\ if available}
% The \etex\ way is slightly faster.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcount\MT@count
\def\MT@increment#1{%
^^X  \edef#1{\number\numexpr #1 + 1\relax}%
^^Q  \MT@count=#1\relax
^^Q  \advance\MT@count \@ne
^^Q  \edef#1{\number\MT@count}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@scale}
%\changes{v1.7}{2005/02/12}{new macro: use \etex's \cs{numexpr} if available}
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/03/30}{fix: remove spaces in \nonetex\ variant
%               (reported by \contributor Mark Rossi <mark.rossi\at de.bosch.com>)}
%                               ^^A MID: <d6uhag$qoi$1@ns2.fe.internet.bosch.com>
% Multiply and divide a counter. If we are using \etex, we will use its
% \cmd\numexpr\ primitive. This has the advantage that it is less likely to
% run into arithmetic overflow. The result of the division will be rounded
% instead of truncated. Therefore, we'll get a different (more accurate)
% result in about half of the cases.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@scale#1#2#3{%
^^Q  \multiply #1 #2\relax
  \ifnum #3 = \z@
^^X    #1=\numexpr #1 * #2\relax
  \else
^^X    #1=\numexpr #1 * #2 / #3\relax
^^Q    \divide #1 #3\relax
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/07}{shorter command names}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@abbr@pr}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@abbr@ex}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@abbr@pr@c}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@abbr@ex@c}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@abbr@pr@inh}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@abbr@ex@inh}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@abbr@nl}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@abbr@sp}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@abbr@sp@c}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@abbr@sp@inh}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@abbr@kn}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@abbr@kn@c}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@abbr@kn@inh}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@abbr@tr}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@abbr@tr@c}
% Some abbreviations. Thus, we can have short command names but full-length
% log output.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@abbr@pr{protrusion}
\def\MT@abbr@ex{expansion}
\def\MT@abbr@pr@c{protrusion codes}
\def\MT@abbr@ex@c{expansion codes}
\def\MT@abbr@pr@inh{protrusion inheritance}
\def\MT@abbr@ex@inh{expansion inheritance}
\def\MT@abbr@nl{noligatures}
\def\MT@abbr@sp{spacing}
\def\MT@abbr@sp@c{interword spacing codes}
\def\MT@abbr@sp@inh{interword spacing inheritance}
\def\MT@abbr@kn{kerning}
\def\MT@abbr@kn@c{kerning codes}
\def\MT@abbr@kn@inh{kerning inheritance}
\def\MT@abbr@tr{tracking}
\def\MT@abbr@tr@c{tracking amount}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@rbba@protrusion}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@rbba@expansion}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@rbba@spacing}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@rbba@kerning}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@rbba@tracking}
% These we also need the other way round.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@rbba@protrusion{pr}
\def\MT@rbba@expansion{ex}
\def\MT@rbba@spacing{sp}
\def\MT@rbba@kerning{kn}
\def\MT@rbba@tracking{tr}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@features}
%\changes{v1.9b}{2006/01/17}{use throughout the package to adjust to beta-ness}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@features@long}
% We can work on these lists to save some guards in the \file{dtx} file.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@features{pr,ex,sp,kn,tr}
\def\MT@features@long{protrusion,expansion,spacing,kerning,tracking}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@is@feature}
%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/11/03}{new macro: check for \pdftex\ feature}
% Whenever an optional argument accepts a list of features, we can use this
% command to check whether a feature exists in order to prevent a rather
% confusing `|Missing \endcsname inserted|' error message. The feature (long
% form) must be in \cmd\@tempa, the type of list to ignore in \meta{\#1},
% then comes the action.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@is@feature#1{%
  \MT@exp@one@n\MT@in@clist\@tempa\MT@features@long
  \ifMT@inlist@
    \expandafter\@firstofone
  \else
    \MT@error{`\@tempa' is not an available micro-typographic\MessageBreak
      feature. Ignoring #1}{Available features are: `\MT@features@long'.}%
    \expandafter\@gobble
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\subsubsection{Compatibility}\label{sub:compatibility}
%
% For the record, the following \LaTeX\ kernel commands will be modified by
% \microtype:
%\begin{itemize}
%  \item \cmd\pickup@font
%  \item \cmd\do@subst@correction
%  \item \cmd\add@accent\ (all in section~\ref{sssec:impl.hook})
%  \item \cmd\showhyphens\ (in section~\ref{sssec:impl.options})
%\end{itemize}
%
% The \pkg{wordcount} package redefines the font-switching commands, which will
% break \microtype. Since \microtype\ doesn't have an effect on the number of
% words in the document anyway, we will simply disable ourselves.
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/02/11}{disable \microtype\ if \pkg{wordcount} is loaded
%                           (reported by \contributor Ross Hetherington <ross\at heth.eclipse.co.uk>)}
%                                         ^^A MID: <A9-dnaHX5LxN01LYnZ2dnUVZ8tqqnZ2d@eclipse.net.uk>
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifl@aded{tex}{wordcount}{%
  \MT@warning@nl{Detected the `wordcount' utility.\MessageBreak
    Disabling `\MT@MT', since it wouldn't work}%
  \MT@clear@options\MT@restore@catcodes\endinput}\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@setup@}
%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/11/21}{defer setup until the end of the preamble}
%\changes{v1.9e}{2006/07/06}{empty \cs{MT@setup@} after use
%                            (compatibility with the \pkg{combine} class)}
%\changes{v2.3e}{2009/08/31}{make space-unaware
%                            (requested by \contributor Marcin Borkowski <mbork\at atos.wmid.amu.edu.pl>)}
%                               ^^A private mail, 2009/08/31
% The setup is deferred until the end of the preamble. This has a couple of
% advantages: \cs{microtypesetup} can be used to change options later on in the
% preamble, and fonts don't have to be set up before \microtype.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package>
%<plain>\MT@requires@latex1{
\let\MT@setup@\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@addto@setup}
% We use our private hook to have better control over the timing.
% This will also work with \pkg{eplain}, but not with \pkg{miniltx} alone.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@addto@setup{\g@addto@macro\MT@setup@}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Don't hesitate with \pkg{miniltx}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<plain>}{\let\MT@addto@setup\@firstofone}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@with@package@T}
% We almost never do anything if a package is not loaded.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@with@package@T#1{\@ifpackageloaded{#1}\@firstofone\@gobble}
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@with@babel@and@T}
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/05/25}{also inspect class options}
% \LaTeX's \cmd\@ifpackagewith\ ignores the class options.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@with@babel@and@T#1{%
  \MT@ifdefined@n@T{opt@babel.\@pkgextension}{%
    \@expandtwoargs\MT@in@clist{#1}
      {\csname opt@babel.\@pkgextension\endcsname,\@classoptionslist}%
    \ifMT@inlist@\expandafter\@gobble\fi
  }\@gobble
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Don't load \letterspace.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@let@nc{ver@letterspace.sty}\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@ledmac@setup}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@led@unhbox@line}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@led@kern}
% The \pkg{ledmac} package first saves each paragraph in a box, from which it
% then splits off the lines one by one. This will destroy character protrusion.
% (There aren't any problems with the \pkg{lineno} package, since it takes a
% different approach.)
%\iffalse
% We issue a warning, so that nobody can say they didn't know.
%\changes{v1.6}{2004/12/29}{warning when using the \pkg{ledmac} package}
% --- This is fixed in \pdftex\ 1.21a, so we no longer warn.
%\changes{v1.6a}{2005/02/02}{no warning when using the \pkg{ledmac} package}
% --- Actually, it was completely broken in 1.21a, but 1.21b provides a work-around.
%\fi
% ---~\dots~---
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/15}{character protrusion with \pkg{ledmac}}
% After much to and fro, the situation has finally settled and there is a fix.
% Beginning with \pdftex\ version 1.21b together with \file{ledpatch.sty} as of
% 2005/06/02 (v0.4), character protrusion will work at last.
%
% Peter Wilson was so kind to provide the \cmd\l@dunhbox@line\ hook in
% \pkg{ledmac} to allow for protrusion. \cmd\leftmarginkern\ and
% \cmd\rightmarginkern\ are new primitives of \pdftex\ 1.21b (aka. 1.30.0).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@requires@pdftex5{
  \def\MT@ledmac@setup{%
    \ifMT@protrusion
      \MT@ifdefined@c@TF\l@dunhbox@line{%
        \MT@info@nl{Patching ledmac to enable character protrusion}%
        \newdimen\MT@led@kern
        \let\MT@led@unhbox@line\l@dunhbox@line
        \renewcommand*{\l@dunhbox@line}[1]{%
          \ifhbox##1%
            \MT@led@kern=\rightmarginkern##1%
            \kern\leftmarginkern##1%
            \MT@led@unhbox@line##1%
            \kern\MT@led@kern
          \fi
        }%
      }{%
        \MT@warning@nl{%
          Character protrusion in paragraphs with line\MessageBreak
          numbering will only work if you update ledmac}%
      }%
    \fi
  }
}{
  \def\MT@ledmac@setup{%
    \ifMT@protrusion
      \MT@warning@nl{%
        The pdftex version you are using does not allow\MessageBreak
        character protrusion in paragraphs with line\MessageBreak
        numbering by the `ledmac' package.\MessageBreak
        Upgrade pdftex to version 1.30 or later}%
    \fi
  }
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@restore@p@h}
% Restore meaning of \cmd\% and \cmd\#.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@restore@p@h{\chardef\%`\% \chardef\#`\# }
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@setupfont@hook}
% This hook will be executed every time a font is set up (inside a group).
%
% In the preamble, we check for the packages each time a font is set up.
% Thus, it will work regardless when the packages are loaded.
%
% Even for packages that don't activate any characters in the preamble (like
% \pkg{babel} and \pkg{csquotes}), we have to check here, too, in case they were
% loaded before \microtype, and a font is loaded \cmd\AtBeginDocument, before
% \microtype.
% (This is no longer needed, since the complete setup is now deferred until the
% end of the preamble. However, it is still necessary for \opt{defersetup}|=false|.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@setupfont@hook{%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\iffalse
%\changes{v1.7}{2005/02/06}{compatibility with the \pkg{chemsym} package}
% The \pkg{chemsym} package redefines, among other commands, the Hungarian
% umlaut \cmd\H\ in a way that cannot be parsed by \microtype. As a work-around,
% we restore the usual definition of \cmd\H\ before setting up the font (which
% will be done inside a group).
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/03/24}{remove superfluous \pkg{chemsym} hook}
% --- Since version 1.7, this is no longer needed, since our character parsing
% is robust enough now.
%
%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/10}{compatibility with the \pkg{statex} package}
% Same for \pkg{statex}.
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/03/24}{remove superfluous \pkg{statex} hook}
% --- No longer needed, either.
%\fi
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/03/30}{restore percent character if Spanish \pkg{babel} is loaded}
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/02/02}{restore percent character if Galician \pkg{babel} is loaded}
%\changes{v2.3a}{2008/01/29}{restore percent character if Mexican \pkg{babel} is loaded}
% Spanish (and Galician and Mexican) \pkg{babel} modify \cmd\%, storing the
% original meaning in \cmd\percentsign.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \MT@if@false
  \MT@with@babel@and@T{spanish} \MT@if@true
  \MT@with@babel@and@T{galician}\MT@if@true
  \MT@with@babel@and@T{mexican} \MT@if@true
  \ifMT@if@\MT@ifdefined@c@T\percentsign{\let\%\percentsign}\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/22}{restore \pkg{csquotes}'s active characters}
% Using \cmd\@disablequotes, we can restore the original meaning of all
% characters made active by \pkg{csquotes}.
% (It would be doable for older versions, too, but we won't bother.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \MT@with@package@T{csquotes}{%
    \@ifpackagelater{csquotes}{2005/05/11}\@disablequotes\relax}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \pkg{hyperref} redefines \cmd\% and \cmd\# inside a \cmd\url. We restore
% the original meanings (which we can only hope are correct).
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/05/20}{restore \cmd\% and \cmd\# when \pkg{hyperref} is loaded}
% Same for \pkg{tex4ht}.
%\changes{v1.9d}{2006/02/27}{restore \cmd\% and \cmd\# when \pkg{tex4ht} is loaded
%                            (reported by \contributor Peter Dyballa <Peter_Dyballa\at Web.DE>)}
%                                                                  ^^A private mail, 2006/02/26
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \MT@if@false
  \MT@with@package@T{hyperref}\MT@if@true
  \MT@with@package@T{tex4ht}  \MT@if@true
  \ifMT@if@\MT@restore@p@h\fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Check again at the end of the preamble.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package>
\MT@addto@setup{%
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v1.4}{2004/11/04}{check for \pkg{pdfcprot}}
% Our competitor, the \pkg{pdfcprot} package, must not be tolerated!
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \MT@with@package@T{pdfcprot}{%
    \MT@error{Detected the `pdfcprot' package!\MessageBreak
              `\MT@MT' and `pdfcprot' may not be used together}{%
The `pdfcprot' package provides an interface to character protrusion.\MessageBreak
So does the `\MT@MT' package. Using both packages at the same\MessageBreak
time will almost certainly lead to undesired results. Have your choice!}%
  }%
  \MT@with@package@T{ledmac}\MT@ledmac@setup
%    \end{macrocode}
% We can clean up \cs{MT@setupfont@hook} now.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \let\MT@setupfont@hook\@empty
  \MT@if@false
  \MT@with@babel@and@T{spanish} \MT@if@true
  \MT@with@babel@and@T{galician}\MT@if@true
  \MT@with@babel@and@T{mexican} \MT@if@true
  \ifMT@if@
    \g@addto@macro\MT@setupfont@hook{%
      \MT@ifdefined@c@T\percentsign{\let\%\percentsign}}%
  \fi
  \MT@with@package@T{csquotes}{%
    \@ifpackagelater{csquotes}{2005/05/11}{%
      \g@addto@macro\MT@setupfont@hook\@disablequotes
    }{%
      \MT@warning@nl{%
        Should you receive warnings about unknown slot\MessageBreak
        numbers, try upgrading the `csquotes' package}%
    }%
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% We disable \microtype's additions inside \pkg{hyperref}'s \cmd\pdfstringdef,
% which redefines lots of commands.
%\changes{v1.9}{2005/09/10}{disable \microtype\ setup inside \pkg{hyperref}'s \cmd\pdfstringdef\
%               (reported by \contributor\thanh{} <hanthethanh\at gmail.com>)}
%                                                  ^^A private mail, 2005/09/10
%\changes{v2.3}{2007/11/11}{disable \cs{microtypecontext} in \pkg{hyperref}'s \cmd\pdfstringdef}
% \pkg{hyperref} doesn't work with plain \TeX, so in that case we don't bother.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \MT@if@false
%</package>
%<plain>  \MT@requires@latex2{
  \MT@with@package@T{hyperref}{%
    \pdfstringdefDisableCommands{%
%<*package>
      \let\pickup@font\MT@orig@pickupfont
      \let\textmicrotypecontext\@secondoftwo
      \let\microtypecontext\@gobble
%</package>
      \def\lsstyle{\pdfstringdefWarn\lsstyle}%
      \def\textls#1#{\pdfstringdefWarn\textls}%
    }%
%<package>    \MT@if@true
  }%
%<plain>  }\relax
%<*package>
  \MT@with@package@T{tex4ht}\MT@if@true
  \ifMT@if@\g@addto@macro\MT@setupfont@hook\MT@restore@p@h\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v1.9b}{2005/12/19}{compatibility with \pkg{listings}: sanitise more catcodes
%                            (reported by \contributor Holger Uhr <huhr\at uni-paderborn.de>)}
%                                               ^^A MID: <do4gvo$tv$1@news.uni-paderborn.de>
% The \pkg{listings} package makes numbers and letters active,
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \MT@with@package@T{listings}{%
    \g@addto@macro\MT@cfg@catcodes{%
      \MT@while@num{"30}{"3A}{\catcode\@tempcnta 12\relax}%
      \MT@while@num{"41}{"5B}{\catcode\@tempcnta 11\relax}%
      \MT@while@num{"61}{"7B}{\catcode\@tempcnta 11\relax}%
    }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \dots~and the backslash (which would lead to problems in \cs{MT@get@slot}).
%\changes{v2.0}{2006/09/15}{compatibility with \pkg{listings}: set catcode of backslash to zero
%                           (reported by \contributor Steven Bath <steven128\at iname.com>)}
%                                                     ^^A private mail, 2006/09/15
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \g@addto@macro\MT@setupfont@hook{%
      \catcode`\\\z@
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v1.9b}{2005/12/23}{compatibility with the \texttt{extendedchar} option of
%                            the \pkg{listings} package}
% When loaded with the |extendedchar| option, \pkg{listings} will also redefine
% 8-bit active characters (\pkg{inputenc}). Luckily, this simple redefinition
% will make them expand to their original definition, so that they could be used
% in the configuration.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \let\lst@ProcessLetter\@empty
    }%
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v2.0}{2005/12/21}{(beta:3) compatibility with \pkg{soul}: register \cs{textls} and \cs{lsstyle}}
% Of course, using both \pkg{soul}'s and \microtype's letterspacing mechanisms
% at the same time doesn't make much sense. But \pkg{soul} can do more, \eg,
% underlining. The optional argument to \cs{textls} may not be used.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package>
%<plain>  \MT@requires@latex2{
  \MT@with@package@T{soul}{%
    \soulregister\lsstyle 0%
    \soulregister\textls  1%
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v2.3a}{2008/01/06}{fix test for \pkg{soul} under plain \TeX}
% Under plain \TeX, \pkg{soul} doesn't register itself the \LaTeX\ way, hence
% we have to use a different test in this case.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*plain>
  }{\ifx\SOUL@\@undefined\else
      \soulregister\lsstyle 0%
      \soulregister\textls  1%
    \fi}%
%</plain>
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v2.1}{2007/01/15}{compatibility with \pkg{pinyin}: disable \microtype\ in \cmd\py@macron\
%                           (reported by \contributor Sven Naumann <svenau\at gmx.net>)}
%                                                 ^^A MID: <87d55hxxdd.fsf@linux.site>
% Compatibility with the \pkg{pinyin} package (from \pkg{CJK}): disable
% \microtype\ in \cmd\py@macron, which loads a different font for the accent.
% In older versions of \pkg{pinyin} (pre-4.6.0),
%\changes{v2.3d}{2009/03/19}{fix \pkg{pinyin} compatibility check
%                            (reported by \contributor Silas~S. Brown <ssb22\at cam.ac.uk>)}
%                                                            ^^A private mail, 2009/03/19
% \cmd\py@macron\ had only one argument.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \MT@with@package@T{pinyin}{%
    \let\MT@orig@py@macron\py@macron
    \@ifpackagelater{pinyin}{2005/08/11}{% 4.6.0
      \def\py@macron#1#2{%
        \let\pickup@font\MT@orig@pickupfont
        \MT@orig@py@macron{#1}{#2}%
        \let\pickup@font\MT@pickupfont}%
    }{%
      \def\py@macron#1{%
        \let\pickup@font\MT@orig@pickupfont
        \MT@orig@py@macron{#1}%
        \let\pickup@font\MT@pickupfont}%
    }%
  }%
%</package>
}
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v1.6}{2005/01/19}{load a font if none is selected}
% We need a font (the \pkg{minimal} class doesn't load one).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\ifx\the\font\nullfont\normalfont\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\subsection{Font setup}\label{ssec:font-setup}
%
%\begin{macro}{\MT@setupfont}
% Setting up a font entails checking for each feature whether it should be
% applied to the current font (\cs{MT@font}).
% But first, we might have to disable stuff when used together with adventurous
% packages.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@setupfont{\MT@setupfont@hook}
%    \end{macrocode}
% This will use a copy of the font (allowing for expansion parameter variation
% and the use of more than one set of protrusion factors for a font within one
% paragraph).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@requires@pdftex7
  {\g@addto@macro\MT@setupfont\MT@copy@font}\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% The font properties must be extracted from \cs{MT@font}, since the current
% value of \cmd\f@encoding\ and friends may be wrong!
%    \begin{macrocode}
\g@addto@macro\MT@setupfont{%
  \MT@exp@two@c\MT@split@name\string\MT@font/\@nil
%    \end{macrocode}
% Try to find a configuration file for the current font family.
%\changes{v1.2}{2004/09/29}{also search for alias font file}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \MT@exp@one@n\MT@find@file\MT@family
  \ifx\MT@familyalias\@empty \else
    \MT@exp@one@n\MT@find@file\MT@familyalias\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v1.2}{2004/09/26}{fix: call \cmd\@@enc@update\ if necessary}
% We have to make sure that \cmd\cf@encoding\ expands to the correct value (for
% later, in \cs{MT@get@slot}), which isn't the case when \cmd\selectfont\
% chooses a new encoding (this would be done a second later in
% \cmd\selectfont, anyway -- three lines, to be exact).
% (I think, I do not need this anymore -- however, I'm too afraid to remove it.
% \dots\ Oops, I did it. Let's see whether anybody complains.)
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/04/15}{don't call \cmd\@@enc@update\ anymore}
%    \begin{macrocode}
% \ifx\f@encoding\cf@encoding\else\@@enc@update\fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Tracking has to come first, since it means actually loading a different font.
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/04/15}{only add features that are available with the respective \pdftex}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@requires@pdftex6
  {\g@addto@macro\MT@setupfont\MT@tracking}\relax
\g@addto@macro\MT@setupfont{%
  \MT@check@font
  \ifMT@inlist@
%<debug>\MT@show@pdfannot2%
  \else
    \MT@vinfo{Setting up font `\MT@@font'\on@line}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Now we can begin setting up the font for all features that the current
% \pdftex\ provides. The following commands are \cmd\let\ to \cmd\relax\ if the
% respective feature is disabled via package options.
%
% For versions older than 1.20, protrusion has to be set up first, beginning
% with 1.20, the order doesn't matter.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \MT@protrusion
  \MT@expansion
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Interword spacing and kerning (\pdftex\ 1.40).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@requires@pdftex6
  {\g@addto@macro\MT@setupfont{\MT@spacing\MT@kerning}}\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% Disable ligatures (\pdftex\ 1.30).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@requires@pdftex5
  {\g@addto@macro\MT@setupfont\MT@noligatures}\relax
\g@addto@macro\MT@setupfont{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Debugging.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<debug>\MT@show@pdfannot1%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Finally, register the font so that we don't set it up anew each time.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \MT@register@font
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@copy@font}
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/07/03}{optionally work on copies of fonts}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@copy@font@}
% The new (1.40.4) \cmd\pdfcopyfont\ command allows to expand a font with
% different parameters, or to use more than one set of protrusion factors for a
% given font within one paragraph. It will be used when we find a context for
% \cs{SetProtrusion} or \cs{SetExpansion} in the preamble, or when the package
% has been loaded with the \opt{copyfonts} option.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\MT@copy@font\relax
\MT@requires@pdftex7{
\def\MT@copy@font@{%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@font@copy}
% For every new protrusion and expansion contexts, we create a new copy.
%\changes{v2.3b}{2008/04/15}{enable font copies also with protrusion contexts
%                            (reported by \contributor Nathan Rosenblum <nater\at cs.wisc.edu>)}
%                                                               ^^A private mail, 2008/04/14
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \xdef\MT@font@copy{\csname\MT@@font/\MT@pr@context/\MT@ex@context\endcsname}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@font@orig}
% \pdftex\ doesn't allow to copy a font that has already been copied and
% expanded\slash letterspaced. Hence, we have to get the original.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \expandafter\ifx\MT@font@copy\relax
    \edef\MT@font@orig{\csname\expandafter\string\font@name @orig\endcsname}%
    \expandafter\ifx\MT@font@orig\relax
      \MT@exp@two@c\MT@glet\MT@font@orig\font@name
    \else
      \MT@exp@two@c\let\font@name\MT@font@orig
    \fi
    \global\MT@exp@two@c\pdfcopyfont\MT@font@copy\font@name
%<debug>\MT@dinfo1{creating new copy: \MT@font@copy}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Since it's a new font, we have to remove it from the context lists.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \MT@map@clist@c\MT@active@features{%
      \MT@exp@cs\ifx{MT@\@nameuse{MT@abbr@##1}}\relax\else
        \def\@tempa{##1}%
        \MT@exp@cs\MT@map@tlist@c{MT@##1@doc@contexts}\MT@rem@from@list
      \fi
    }%
  \fi
  \MT@exp@two@c\let\MT@font\MT@font@copy
%    \end{macrocode}
% We only need the font identifier for letterspacing.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \let\font@name\MT@font@copy
%    \end{macrocode}
% But we have to properly substitute the font after we're done.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \aftergroup\let\aftergroup\font@name\aftergroup\MT@font@copy
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@rem@from@list}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@rem@from@list#1{%
  \MT@exp@cs\ifx{MT@\@tempa @#1font@list}\relax\else
    \expandafter\MT@exp@one@n\expandafter\MT@rem@from@clist\expandafter
       \MT@font \csname MT@\@tempa @#1font@list\endcsname
  \fi
}
}\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\ifpdf\phantomsection\fi\label{exp-hack}
%\paragraph{Here's the promised dirty trick}
% for users of older \pdftex\ versions, which works around the problem that the
% use of the same font with different expansion parameters is prohibited. If
% you do not want to create a clone of the font setup (this would require
% duplicating the \file{tfm}/\file{vf} files under a new name, and writing new
% \file{fd} files and \file{map} entries), you can load a minimally larger font
% for the paragraph in question. E.\,g., for a document typeset in 10\,pt:
%\begin{verbatim}[gobble=2,morekeywords={[0]{\expandpar}}]
% \SetExpansion
%    [ stretch = 30,
%      shrink  = 60,
%      step    =  5 ]
%    { encoding = *,
%      size = 10.001 }
%    { }
% \newcommand{\expandpar}[1]{{%
%    \fontsize{10.001}{\baselineskip}\selectfont #1\par}}
% % ...
% \expandpar{This paragraph contains an `unnecessary' widow.}
%\end{verbatim}
% Note that the \cmd\expandpar\ command can only be applied to complete
% paragraphs. If you are using Computer Modern Roman, you have to load the
% \pkg{fix-cm} package to be able to select fonts in arbitrary sizes. Finally,
% the reason I suggest to use a larger font, and not a smaller one, is to
% prevent a different design size being selected.
%
%\bigskip
%\begin{macro}{\MT@split@name}
%\changes{v1.7}{2005/02/27}{don't define \cs{MT@encoding} \&c. \cmd\global ly}
%\changes{v2.0}{2006/12/19}{adjust to possible letterspacing}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@encoding}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@family}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@series}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@shape}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@size}
% Split up the font name (\meta{\#6} may be a protrusion\slash expansion
% context and/or a letterspacing amount). ^^A really?
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@split@name#1/#2/#3/#4/#5/#6\@nil{%
  \def\MT@encoding{#1}%
  \def\MT@family  {#2}%
  \def\MT@series  {#3}%
  \def\MT@shape   {#4}%
  \def\MT@size    {#5}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@familyalias}
% Alias family?
%\changes{v1.2}{2004/09/29}{define alias font name as an alternative, not
%                          as a replacement}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{MT@\MT@family @alias}%
    {\MT@let@cn\MT@familyalias{MT@\MT@family @alias}}%
    {\let\MT@familyalias\@empty}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@do}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@feat}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@maybe@do}
% We check all features of the current font against the lists of the currently
% active font set, and set \cs{ifMT@do} accordingly.
%\changes{v1.2}{2004/09/29}{also check for alias font name}
%\changes{v1.9}{2005/09/28}{redone}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifMT@do
\def\MT@maybe@do#1{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% (but only if the feature isn't globally set to false)
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \csname ifMT@\csname MT@abbr@#1\endcsname\endcsname
%    \end{macrocode}
% Begin with setting micro-typography to true for this font. The
% \cs{MT@checklist@...} tests will set it to false if the property is not in
% the list. The first non-empty list that does not contain a match will stop us
% (except for |font|).
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \MT@dotrue
    \edef\@tempa{\csname MT@#1@setname\endcsname}%
    \MT@map@clist@n{font,encoding,family,series,shape,size}{%
      \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{MT@checklist@##1}%
        {\csname MT@checklist@##1\endcsname}%
        {\MT@checklist@{##1}}%
      {#1}%
    }%
  \else
    \MT@dofalse
  \fi
  \ifMT@do
%    \end{macrocode}
% \cs{MT@feat} stores the current feature.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\MT@feat{#1}%
    \csname MT@set@#1@codes\endcsname
  \else
    \MT@vinfo{... No \@nameuse{MT@abbr@#1}}%
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@dinfo@list}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<debug>\def\MT@dinfo@list#1#2#3{\MT@dinfo@nl{1}{\@nameuse{MT@abbr@#1}: #2
%<debug>  \ifx\\#3\\list empty\else `\@nameuse{MT@#2}' #3 list\fi}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@checklist@}
% The generic test (\meta{\#1} is the axis, \meta{\#2} the feature, \cmd\@tempa\
% contains the set name).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@checklist@#1#2{%
%<!debug>  \MT@ifdefined@n@T
%<debug>  \MT@ifdefined@n@TF
      {MT@#2list@#1@\@tempa}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Begin a (masqueraded) \cmd\expandafter\ orgy to test whether the font
% attribute is in the list.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \expandafter\MT@exp@one@n\expandafter\MT@in@clist
      \csname MT@#1\expandafter\endcsname
      \csname MT@#2list@#1@\@tempa\endcsname
    \ifMT@inlist@
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@list{#2}{#1}{in}%
      \MT@dotrue
    \else
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@list{#2}{#1}{not in}%
      \MT@dofalse
      \expandafter\MT@clist@break
    \fi
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% If no limitations have been specified, \ie, the list for a font attribute
% has not been defined at all, the font should be set up.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<debug>  {\MT@dinfo@list{#2}{#1}{}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@checklist@family}
% Also test for the alias font, if the original font is not in the list.
%\changes{v1.4b}{2004/11/22}{fix: don't try alias family name if encoding failed}
%\changes{v1.9}{2005/07/12}{fix: add two missing \cmd\expandafter s}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@checklist@family#1{%
%<!debug>  \MT@ifdefined@n@T
%<debug>  \MT@ifdefined@n@TF
      {MT@#1list@family@\@tempa}{%
    \MT@exp@two@n\MT@in@clist
        \MT@family{\csname MT@#1list@family@\@tempa\endcsname}%
    \ifMT@inlist@
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@list{#1}{family}{in}%
      \MT@dotrue
    \else
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@list{#1}{family}{not in}%
      \MT@dofalse
      \ifx\MT@familyalias\@empty \else
        \MT@exp@two@n\MT@in@clist
            \MT@familyalias{\csname MT@#1list@family@\@tempa\endcsname}%
        \ifMT@inlist@
%<debug>  \MT@dinfo@list{#1}{family alias}{in}%
          \MT@dotrue
%<debug>\else\MT@dinfo@list{#1}{family alias}{not in}%
        \fi
      \fi
    \fi
    \ifMT@do \else
      \expandafter\MT@clist@break
    \fi
  }%
%<debug>  {\MT@dinfo@list{#1}{family}{}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@checklist@size}
% Test whether font size is in list of size ranges.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@checklist@size#1{%
%<!debug>  \MT@ifdefined@n@T
%<debug>  \MT@ifdefined@n@TF
      {MT@#1list@size@\@tempa}{%
    \MT@exp@cs\MT@in@rlist{MT@#1list@size@\@tempa}%
    \ifMT@inlist@
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@list{#1}{size}{in}%
      \MT@dotrue
    \else
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@list{#1}{size}{not in}%
      \MT@dofalse
      \expandafter\MT@clist@break
    \fi
  }%
%<debug>  {\MT@dinfo@list{#1}{size}{}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@checklist@font}
% If the font matches, we skip the rest of the test.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@checklist@font#1{%
%<!debug>  \MT@ifdefined@n@T
%<debug>  \MT@ifdefined@n@TF
      {MT@#1list@font@\@tempa}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Since \cs{MT@font} may be appended with context and/or letterspacing specs,
% we construct the name from the font characteristics.
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/07/03}{fix: construct font name from characteristics}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \edef\@tempb{\MT@encoding/\MT@family/\MT@series/\MT@shape/\MT@size}%
    \expandafter\MT@exp@one@n\expandafter\MT@in@clist\expandafter
      \@tempb \csname MT@#1list@font@\@tempa\endcsname
    \ifMT@inlist@
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@list{#1}{font}{in}%
      \expandafter\MT@clist@break
    \else
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@list{#1}{font}{not in}%
      \MT@dofalse
    \fi
  }%
%<debug>  {\MT@dinfo@list{#1}{font}{}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\subsubsection{Protrusion}
%
%\begin{macro}{\MT@protrusion}
% Set up for protrusion?
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@protrusion{\MT@maybe@do{pr}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@pr@codes}
% This macro is called by \cs{MT@setupfont}, and does all the work for setting
% up a font for protrusion.
%\changes{v1.5}{2004/12/10}{adjust protrusion factors before setting the inheriting
%                           characters}
%\changes{v1.6}{2004/12/18}{introduce \texttt{factor} option}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@set@pr@codes{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Check whether and if, which list should be applied to the current font.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \MT@if@list@exists{%
    \MT@get@font@dimen@six{%
      \MT@get@opt
      \MT@reset@pr@codes
%    \end{macrocode}
% Get the name of the inheritance list and parse it.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \MT@get@inh@list
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set an input encoding?
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \MT@set@inputenc{c}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Load additional lists?
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \MT@load@list\MT@pr@c@name
      \MT@set@listname
%    \end{macrocode}
% Load the main list.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \MT@let@cn\@tempc{MT@pr@c@\MT@pr@c@name}%
      \expandafter\MT@set@codes\@tempc,\relax,}%
  }\MT@reset@pr@codes
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@font@dimen@six}
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/05/03}{new macro: test whether \fontdim6 is defined}
%\changes{v2.3e}{2009/08/31}{fix: gobbling settings with tracking failed
%                            (reported by \contributor Leo <sdl.web\at gmail.com>)}
%                                             ^^A MID: <m0vdk4g8t2.fsf@cam.ac.uk>
%\begin{macro}{\MT@dimen@six}
% If \fontdim6 is zero, character protrusion, spacing, kerning and tracking
% won't work, and we can skip the settings (for example, the \pkg{dsfont} and
% \pkg{fourier} fonts don't specify this dimension; this is probably a bug in
% the fonts).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@get@font@dimen@six{%
  \ifnum\fontdimen6\MT@font=\z@
    \MT@warning@nl{%
      Font `\MT@@font' does not specify its\MessageBreak
      \@backslashchar fontdimen 6 (width of an `em')! Therefore,\MessageBreak
      \@nameuse{MT@abbr@\MT@feat} will not work with this font}%
    \expandafter\@gobble
  \else
    \edef\MT@dimen@six{\number\fontdimen6\MT@font}%
    \expandafter\@firstofone
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@all@pr}
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/06/16}{(et al.) allow empty values}
% Set all protrusion codes of the font.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@set@all@pr#1#2{%
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{3}{-- lp/rp: setting all to #1/#2}%
  \let\MT@temp\@empty
  \MT@ifempty{#1}\relax{\g@addto@macro\MT@temp{\lpcode\MT@font\@tempcnta=#1\relax}}%
  \MT@ifempty{#2}\relax{\g@addto@macro\MT@temp{\rpcode\MT@font\@tempcnta=#2\relax}}%
  \MT@do@font\MT@temp
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@reset@pr@codes@}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@reset@pr@codes}
% All protrusion codes are zero for new fonts. However, if we have to reload
% the font due to different contexts, we have to reset them.
% This command will be changed by \cs{microtypecontext} if necessary.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@reset@pr@codes@{\MT@set@all@pr\z@\z@}
\let\MT@reset@pr@codes\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@the@pr@code}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@the@pr@code@tr}
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/04/05}{adjust protrusion of letterspaced fonts}
% If the font is letterspaced, we have to add half the letterspacing amount to
% the margin kerns. This will be activated in \cs{MT@set@tr@codes}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@the@pr@code{\@tempcntb}
\MT@requires@pdftex6{
  \def\MT@the@pr@code@tr{%
    \numexpr\@tempcntb+\MT@letterspace@/2\relax
  }
}\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@codes}
%\changes{v2.3a}{2007/12/29}{generalised}
% Split up the values and set the codes.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@set@codes#1,{%
  \ifx\relax#1\@empty\else
    \MT@split@codes #1==\relax
    \expandafter\MT@set@codes
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@split@codes}
%\changes{v1.1}{2004/09/13}{fix: allow zero and negative values}
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/05/25}{get character width once only}
% The \pkg{keyval} package would remove spaces here, which we needn't do since
% \cs{SetProtrusion} ignores spaces in the protrusion list anyway.
% \cs{MT@get@char@unit} may mean different things.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@split@codes#1=#2=#3\relax{%
  \def\@tempa{#1}%
  \ifx\@tempa\@empty \else
    \MT@get@slot
    \ifnum\MT@char > \m@ne
      \MT@get@char@unit
      \csname MT@\MT@feat @split@val\endcsname#2\relax
    \fi
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@pr@split@val}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@pr@split@val#1,#2\relax{%
  \def\@tempb{#1}%
  \MT@ifempty\@tempb\relax{%
    \MT@scale@to@em
    \lpcode\MT@font\MT@char=\MT@the@pr@code
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{4}{;;; lp (\MT@char): \number\lpcode\MT@font\MT@char: [#1]}%
  }%
  \def\@tempb{#2}%
  \MT@ifempty\@tempb\relax{%
    \MT@scale@to@em
    \rpcode\MT@font\MT@char=\MT@the@pr@code
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{4}{;;; rp (\MT@char): \number\rpcode\MT@font\MT@char: [#2]}%
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Now we can set the values for the inheriting characters. Their slot numbers
% are saved in the macro |\MT@inh@|\meta{list name}|@|\meta{slot number}|@|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \MT@ifdefined@c@T\MT@pr@inh@name{%
    \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@inh@\MT@pr@inh@name @\MT@char @}{%
      \MT@exp@cs\MT@map@tlist@c
        {MT@inh@\MT@pr@inh@name @\MT@char @}%
        \MT@set@pr@heirs
    }%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@scale@to@em}
% Since \pdftex\ version 0.14h, we have to adjust the protrusion factors (\ie,
% convert numbers from thousandths of character width to thousandths of an em
% of the font). We have to do this \emph{before} setting the inheriting
% characters, so that the latter inherit the absolute value, not the relative
% one if they have a differing width (\eg, the `ff' ligature).
%\changes{v1.5}{2004/12/10}{don't use \cmd\lpcode\ and \cmd\rpcode\ for the
%                           calculation}
% Unlike \file{protcode.tex} and \pkg{pdfcprot}, we do not calculate with
% \cs{lpcode} resp. \cs{rpcode}, since this would disallow protrusion factors
% larger than the character width (since \cs{[lr]pcode}'s limit is 1000). Now,
% the maximum protrusion is 1\,em of the font.
%
% The unit is in \cs{MT@count}, the desired factor in \cmd\@tempb, and the
% result will be returned in \cmd\@tempcntb.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@requires@pdftex3{
  \def\MT@scale@to@em{%
    \@tempcntb=\MT@count\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% For really huge fonts (100\,pt or so), an arithmetic overflow could occur
% with vanilla \TeX. Using \etex, this can't happen, since the intermediate
% value is 64\,bit, which could only be reached with a character width larger
% than \cs{maxdimen}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \MT@scale\@tempcntb \@tempb \MT@dimen@six
    \ifnum\@tempcntb=\z@ \else
      \MT@scale@factor
    \fi
  }
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@charwd}
% Get the width of the character. When using \etex, we can employ
% \cmd\fontcharwd\ instead of building scratch boxes.
%\changes{v1.6}{2005/01/19}{use \etex's \cmd\fontcharwd, if available}
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/05/25}{warning for missing (resp. zero-width) characters}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\MT@get@charwd{%
^^X    \MT@count=\fontcharwd\MT@font\MT@char\relax
^^Q    \setbox\z@=\hbox{\MT@font \char\MT@char}%
^^Q    \MT@count=\wd\z@
    \ifnum\MT@count=\z@ \MT@info@missing@char \fi
  }
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/04/05}{subtract letterspacing amount from width}
% For letterspaced fonts, we have to subtract the letterspacing amount from the
% characters' widths. The protrusion amounts will be adjusted in
% \cs{MT@set@pr@codes}.
% The letterspaced font is already loaded so that 1\,em = \fontdim6.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \MT@requires@pdftex6{
    \g@addto@macro\MT@get@charwd{%
      \MT@ifdefined@c@T\MT@letterspace@
        {\advance\MT@count -\dimexpr\MT@letterspace@ sp *\dimexpr 1em/1000\relax}%
    }
  }\relax
}{
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% No adjustment with versions 0.14f and 0.14g.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\MT@scale@to@em{%
    \MT@count=\@tempb\relax
    \ifnum\MT@count=\z@ \else
      \MT@scale@factor
    \fi
  }
%    \end{macrocode}
% We need this in \cs{MT@warn@code@too@large} (neutralised).
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\MT@get@charwd{\MT@count=\MT@dimen@six}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@font@dimen}
% For the |space| unit.
%\changes{v1.9d}{2006/02/13}{warning for zero fontdimen}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@get@font@dimen#1{%
  \ifnum\fontdimen#1\MT@font=\z@
    \MT@warning@nl{Font `\MT@@font' does not specify its\MessageBreak
      \@backslashchar fontdimen #1 (it's zero)!\MessageBreak
      You should use a different `unit' for \MT@curr@list@name}%
  \else
    \MT@count=\fontdimen#1\MT@font
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@info@missing@char}
%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/11/17}{info instead of warning
%                (after \contributor Michael Hoppe <mh\at michael-hoppe.de> reported that
%                 the `fl' ligature is missing in Palatino <SC>)}
%                 ^^A MID: <1h64d0x.16xsx9n1151dieN%mh@michael-hoppe.de>
% Info about missing characters, or characters with zero width.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@info@missing@char{%
  \MT@info@nl{Character `\the\MT@toks'
^^X    \iffontchar\MT@font\MT@char
      has a width of 0pt
^^X    \else is missing\fi
^^Q    \MessageBreak (it's probably missing)
    \MessageBreak in font `\MT@@font'.\MessageBreak
    Ignoring protrusion settings for this character}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@scale@factor}
%\changes{v1.5}{2004/12/10}{warning for factors outside limits}
%\changes{v1.9}{2005/09/28}{generalised}
% Furthermore, we might have to multiply with a factor.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@scale@factor{%
  \ifnum\csname MT@\MT@feat @factor@\endcsname=\@m \else
    \expandafter\MT@scale\expandafter \@tempcntb
      \csname MT@\MT@feat @factor@\endcsname \@m
  \fi
  \ifnum\@tempcntb>\csname MT@\MT@feat @max\endcsname\relax
    \MT@exp@cs\MT@warn@code@too@large{MT@\MT@feat @max}%
  \else
    \ifnum\@tempcntb<\csname MT@\MT@feat @min\endcsname\relax
      \MT@exp@cs\MT@warn@code@too@large{MT@\MT@feat @min}%
    \fi
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@warn@code@too@large}
% Type out a warning if a chosen protrusion factor is too large after the
% conversion. As a special service, we also type out the maximum amount that
% may be specified in the configuration.
%\changes{v1.7}{2005/02/17}{new macro: type out maximum protrusion factor}
%\changes{v1.9b}{2006/01/03}{fix calculation with present factor}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@warn@code@too@large#1{%
  \@tempcnta=#1\relax
  \ifnum\csname MT@\MT@feat @factor@\endcsname=\@m \else
    \expandafter\MT@scale\expandafter\@tempcnta\expandafter
      \@m \csname MT@\MT@feat @factor@\endcsname
  \fi
  \MT@scale\@tempcnta \MT@dimen@six \MT@count
  \MT@warning@nl{The \@nameuse{MT@abbr@\MT@feat} code \@tempb\space
    is too large for character\MessageBreak
    `\the\MT@toks' in \MT@curr@list@name.\MessageBreak
    Setting it to the maximum of \number\@tempcnta}%
  \@tempcntb=#1\relax
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@opt}
% The optional argument to the configuration commands (except for
% \cs{SetExpansion}, which is being dealt with in \cs{MT@get@ex@opt}).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@get@opt{%
  \MT@set@listname
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@pr@factor@}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@sp@factor@}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@kn@factor@}
% Apply a factor?
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{MT@\MT@feat @c@\csname MT@\MT@feat @c@name\endcsname @factor}{%
    \MT@let@nn{MT@\MT@feat @factor@}
        {MT@\MT@feat @c@\csname MT@\MT@feat @c@name\endcsname @factor}%
    \MT@vinfo{... : Multiplying \@nameuse{MT@abbr@\MT@feat} codes by
                    \number\csname MT@\MT@feat @factor@\endcsname/1000}%
  }{%
    \MT@let@nn{MT@\MT@feat @factor@}{MT@\MT@feat @factor}%
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@pr@unit@}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@sp@unit@}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@kn@unit@}
% The |unit| can only be evaluated here, since it might be font-specific.
% If it's \cmd\@empty, it's relative to character widths, if it's \textminus1,
% relative to space dimensions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{MT@\MT@feat @c@\csname MT@\MT@feat @c@name\endcsname @unit}{%
    \MT@let@nn{MT@\MT@feat @unit@}%
        {MT@\MT@feat @c@\csname MT@\MT@feat @c@name\endcsname @unit}%
    \MT@exp@cs\ifx{MT@\MT@feat @unit@}\@empty
      \MT@vinfo{... : Setting \@nameuse{MT@abbr@\MT@feat} codes
                      relative to character widths}%
    \else
      \MT@exp@cs\ifx{MT@\MT@feat @unit@}\m@ne
        \MT@vinfo{... : Setting \@nameuse{MT@abbr@\MT@feat} codes
                        relative to width of space}%
      \fi
    \fi
  }{%
    \MT@let@nn{MT@\MT@feat @unit@}{MT@\MT@feat @unit}%
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@space@unit}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@char@unit}
% The codes are either relative to character widths, or to a fixed width.
% For spacing and kerning lists, they may also be relative to the width of
% the interword glue.
% Only the setting from the top list will be taken into account.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \let\MT@get@char@unit\relax
  \let\MT@get@space@unit\@gobble
  \MT@exp@cs\ifx{MT@\MT@feat @unit@}\@empty
    \let\MT@get@char@unit\MT@get@charwd
  \else
    \MT@exp@cs\ifx{MT@\MT@feat @unit@}\m@ne
      \let\MT@get@space@unit\MT@get@font@dimen
    \else
      \MT@exp@cs\MT@get@unit{MT@\MT@feat @unit@}%
    \fi
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
% Preset all characters? If so, we surely don't need to reset, too.
%\changes{v1.9}{2005/10/08}{new key `\texttt{preset}' to set all characters to
%                           the specified value before loading the lists}
%\changes{v1.9d}{2006/02/13}{set list name before presetting}
%\changes{v1.9d}{2006/02/18}{optimise: don't reset when \texttt{preset} option is set}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@\MT@feat @c@\csname MT@\MT@feat @c@name\endcsname @preset}{%
    \csname MT@preset@\MT@feat\endcsname
    \MT@let@nc{MT@reset@\MT@feat @codes}\relax
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@unit}
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/14}{new macro: get unit for codes}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@unit@}
% If |unit| contains an |em| or |ex|, we use the corresponding \cmd\fontdimen\
% to obtain the real size. Simply converting the em into points might give a
% wrong result, since the font probably isn't set up yet, so that these
% dimensions haven't been updated, either.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@get@unit#1{%
  \expandafter\MT@get@unit@#1 e!\@nil
  \ifx\x\@empty\else\let#1\x\fi
  \@defaultunits\@tempdima#1 pt\relax\@nnil
  \ifdim\@tempdima=\z@
    \MT@warning@nl{%
      Cannot set \@nameuse{MT@abbr@\MT@feat} factors relative to zero\MessageBreak
      width. Setting factors of list `\@nameuse{MT@\MT@feat @c@name}'\MessageBreak
      relative to character widths instead}%
    \let#1\@empty
    \let\MT@get@char@unit\MT@get@charwd
  \else
    \MT@vinfo{... : Setting \@nameuse{MT@abbr@\MT@feat} factors relative
                    to \the\@tempdima}%
    \MT@count=\@tempdima\relax
  \fi
}
\def\MT@get@unit@#1e#2#3\@nil{%
  \ifx\\#3\\\let\x\@empty \else
    \if m#2%
      \edef\x{#1\fontdimen6\MT@font}%
    \else
      \if x#2%
        \edef\x{#1\fontdimen5\MT@font}%
      \fi
    \fi
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@inputenc}
% The configurations may be under the regime of an input encoding.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@set@inputenc#1{%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@cat}
% We remember the current category (|c| or |inh|), in case of warnings later.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\MT@cat{#1}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \edef\@tempa{MT@\MT@feat @#1@\csname MT@\MT@feat @#1@name\endcsname @inputenc}%
  \MT@ifdefined@n@T\@tempa\MT@set@inputenc@
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@inputenc@}
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/06/08}{only load \pkg{inputenc} files if necessary}
% More recent versions of \pkg{inputenc} remember the current encoding, so that
% we can test whether we really have to load the encoding file.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@addto@setup{%
  \@ifpackageloaded{inputenc}{%
    \@ifpackagelater{inputenc}{2006/02/22}{%
      \def\MT@set@inputenc@{%
        \MT@ifstreq\inputencodingname{\csname\@tempa\endcsname}\relax
          \MT@load@inputenc
      }%
    }{%
      \let\MT@set@inputenc@\MT@load@inputenc
    }%
  }{%
    \def\MT@set@inputenc@{%
      \MT@warning@nl{Key `inputenc' used in \MT@curr@list@name, but the `inputenc'
          \MessageBreak package isn't loaded. Ignoring input encoding}%
    }%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@load@inputenc}
% Set up normal catcodes, since, \eg, \pkg{listings} would otherwise want to
% actually typeset the \pkg{inputenc} file when it is being loaded inside a
% listing.
%\changes{v2.0}{2006/09/15}{sanitise catcodes before loading input encoding
%                            (problem with \pkg{listings})}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@load@inputenc{%
  \MT@cfg@catcodes
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{1}{loading input encoding: \@nameuse{\@tempa}}%
  \inputencoding{\@nameuse{\@tempa}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@pr@heirs}
% Set the inheriting characters.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@set@pr@heirs#1{%
  \lpcode\MT@font#1=\lpcode\MT@font\MT@char
  \rpcode\MT@font#1=\rpcode\MT@font\MT@char
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{2}{-- heir of \MT@char: #1}%
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{4}{;;; lp/rp (#1): \number\lpcode\MT@font\MT@char/%
%<debug>                                \number\rpcode\MT@font\MT@char}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@preset@pr}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@preset@pr@}
% Preset characters. Presetting them relative to their widths is not allowed.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@preset@pr{%
  \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\MT@preset@pr@
    \csname MT@pr@c@\MT@pr@c@name @preset\endcsname\@nil
}
\def\MT@preset@pr@#1,#2\@nil{%
  \ifx\MT@pr@unit@\@empty
    \MT@warn@preset@towidth{pr}%
    \let\MT@preset@aux\MT@preset@aux@factor
  \else
    \def\MT@preset@aux{\MT@preset@aux@space2}%
  \fi
  \MT@ifempty{#1}{\let\@tempa\@empty}{\MT@preset@aux{#1}\@tempa}%
  \MT@ifempty{#2}{\let\@tempb\@empty}{\MT@preset@aux{#2}\@tempb}%
  \MT@set@all@pr\@tempa\@tempb
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@preset@aux}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@preset@aux@factor}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@preset@aux@space}
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/06/16}{generalised}
% Auxiliary macro for presetting. Store value \meta{\#1} in macro \meta{\#2}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@preset@aux@factor#1#2{%
  \@tempcntb=#1\relax
  \MT@scale@factor
  \edef#2{\number\@tempcntb}%
}
\def\MT@preset@aux@space#1#2#3{%
  \def\@tempb{#2}%
  \MT@get@space@unit#1%
  \MT@scale@to@em
  \edef#3{\number\@tempcntb}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@warn@preset@towidth}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@warn@preset@towidth#1{%
  \MT@warning@nl{%
    Cannot preset characters relative to their widths\MessageBreak
    for \@nameuse{MT@abbr@#1} list `\@nameuse{MT@#1@c@name}'. Presetting them%
    \MessageBreak relative to 1em instead}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\subsubsection{Expansion}
%
%\begin{macro}{\MT@expansion}
% Set up for expansion?
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@expansion{\MT@maybe@do{ex}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@ex@codes@s}
% Setting up font expansion is a bit different because of the \opt{selected} option.
% There are two versions of this macro.
%
% If \opt{selected}|=true|, we only apply font expansion to those fonts for which a
% list has been declared (\ie, like for protrusion).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@set@ex@codes@s{%
  \MT@if@list@exists{%
    \MT@get@ex@opt
    \let\MT@get@char@unit\relax
    \MT@reset@ef@codes
    \MT@get@inh@list
    \MT@set@inputenc{c}%
    \MT@load@list\MT@ex@c@name
    \MT@set@listname
    \MT@let@cn\@tempc{MT@ex@c@\MT@ex@c@name}%
    \expandafter\MT@set@codes\@tempc,\relax,%
    \MT@expandfont
  }\relax
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@ex@codes@n}
% If, on the other hand, all characters should be expanded by the same amount,
% we only take the first optional argument to \cs{SetExpansion} into account.
%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@nonselected}
% We need this boolean in \cs{MT@if@list@exists} so that no warning for missing
% lists will be issued.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifMT@nonselected
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@set@ex@codes@n{%
  \MT@nonselectedtrue
  \MT@if@list@exists
    \MT@get@ex@opt
  {%
    \let\MT@stretch@  \MT@stretch
    \let\MT@shrink@   \MT@shrink
    \let\MT@step@     \MT@step
    \let\MT@auto@     \MT@auto
    \let\MT@ex@factor@\MT@ex@factor
  }%
  \MT@reset@ef@codes
  \MT@expandfont
  \MT@nonselectedfalse
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@ex@codes}
%\changes{v1.5}{2004/12/02}{allow non-selected font expansion}
%\changes{v1.6}{2004/12/26}{introduce \texttt{factor} option}
%\changes{v1.7}{2005/02/06}{two versions of this macro}
% Default is non-selected. It can be changed in the package options.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\MT@set@ex@codes\MT@set@ex@codes@n
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@expandfont}
% Expand the font.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@expandfont{%
  \pdffontexpand\MT@font \MT@stretch@ \MT@shrink@ \MT@step@ \MT@auto@\relax
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@all@ex}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@reset@ef@codes@}
% At first, all expansion factors for the characters will be set to 1000
% (respectively the |factor| of this font).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@set@all@ex#1{%
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{3}{-- ex: setting all to \number#1}%
  \MT@do@font{\efcode\MT@font\@tempcnta=#1\relax}%
}
\def\MT@reset@ef@codes@{\MT@set@all@ex\MT@ex@factor@}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@reset@ef@codes}
% However, this is only necessary for versions prior to~1.20.
%\changes{v1.6a}{2005/01/30}{only reset \cmd\efcode s for older \pdftex\ versions}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@requires@pdftex4{
  \def\MT@reset@ef@codes{%
    \ifnum\MT@ex@factor@=\@m \else
      \MT@reset@ef@codes@
    \fi
  }
}{
  \let\MT@reset@ef@codes\MT@reset@ef@codes@
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@ex@split@val}
% There's only one number per character.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@ex@split@val#1\relax{%
  \@tempcntb=#1\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% Take an optional factor into account.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifnum\MT@ex@factor@=\@m \else
    \MT@scale\@tempcntb \MT@ex@factor@ \@m
  \fi
  \ifnum\@tempcntb > \MT@ex@max
    \MT@warn@ex@too@large\MT@ex@max
  \else
    \ifnum\@tempcntb < \MT@ex@min
      \MT@warn@ex@too@large\MT@ex@min
    \fi
  \fi
  \efcode\MT@font\MT@char=\@tempcntb
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{4}{::: ef (\MT@char): \number\efcode\MT@font\MT@char: [#1]}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Heirs, heirs, I love thy heirs.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \MT@ifdefined@c@T\MT@ex@inh@name{%
    \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@inh@\MT@ex@inh@name @\MT@char @}{%
      \MT@exp@cs\MT@map@tlist@c{MT@inh@\MT@ex@inh@name @\MT@char @}\MT@set@ex@heirs
    }%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@warn@ex@too@large}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@warn@ex@too@large#1{%
  \MT@warning@nl{Expansion factor \number\@tempcntb\space too large for
    character\MessageBreak `\the\MT@toks' in \MT@curr@list@name.\MessageBreak
    Setting it to the maximum of \number#1}%
  \@tempcntb=#1\relax
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@ex@opt}
%\changes{v1.9d}{2006/02/13}{fix: evaluate \texttt{preset}}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@ex@factor@}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@stretch@}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@shrink@}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@step@}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@auto@}
% Apply different values to this font?
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@get@ex@opt{%
  \MT@set@listname
  \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{MT@ex@c@\MT@ex@c@name @factor}{%
    \MT@let@cn\MT@ex@factor@{MT@ex@c@\MT@ex@c@name @factor}%
    \MT@vinfo{... : Multiplying expansion factors by \number\MT@ex@factor@/1000}%
  }{%
    \let\MT@ex@factor@\MT@ex@factor
  }%
  \MT@get@ex@opt@{stretch}{Setting stretch limit to \number\MT@stretch@}%
  \MT@get@ex@opt@{shrink} {Setting shrink limit to \number\MT@shrink@}%
  \MT@get@ex@opt@{step}   {Setting expansion step to \number\MT@step@}%
  \def\@tempa{autoexpand}%
  \MT@get@ex@opt@{auto}{\ifx\@tempa\MT@auto@ En\else Dis\fi abling automatic expansion}%
  \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@ex@c@\MT@ex@c@name @preset}{%
    \MT@preset@ex
    \let\MT@reset@ef@codes\relax
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@ex@opt@}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@get@ex@opt@#1#2{%
  \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{MT@ex@c@\MT@ex@c@name @#1}{%
    \MT@let@nn{MT@#1@}{MT@ex@c@\MT@ex@c@name @#1}%
    \MT@vinfo{... : #2}%
  }{%
    \MT@let@nn{MT@#1@}{MT@#1}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@ex@heirs}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@set@ex@heirs#1{%
  \efcode\MT@font#1=\efcode\MT@font\MT@char
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{2}{-- heir of \MT@char: #1}%
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{4}{::: ef (#1) \number\efcode\MT@font\MT@char}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@preset@ex}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@preset@ex{%
  \@tempcntb=\csname MT@ex@c@\MT@ex@c@name @preset\endcsname\relax
  \MT@scale@factor
  \MT@set@all@ex\@tempcntb
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\subsubsection{Interword spacing (glue)}
%
%\begin{macro}{\MT@spacing}
% Adjustment of interword spacing?
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@requires@pdftex6{
\def\MT@spacing{\MT@maybe@do{sp}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@sp@codes}
% This is all the same.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@set@sp@codes{%
  \MT@if@list@exists{%
    \MT@get@font@dimen@six{%
      \MT@get@opt
      \MT@reset@sp@codes
      \MT@get@inh@list
      \MT@set@inputenc{c}%
      \MT@load@list\MT@sp@c@name
      \MT@set@listname
      \MT@let@cn\@tempc{MT@sp@c@\MT@sp@c@name}%
      \expandafter\MT@set@codes\@tempc,\relax,}%
  }\MT@reset@sp@codes
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@sp@split@val}
% If |unit=space|, \cs{MT@get@space@unit} will be defined to fetch the
% corresponding fontdimen (2 for the first, 3 for the second and 4 for the
% third argument).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@sp@split@val#1,#2,#3\relax{%
  \def\@tempb{#1}%
  \MT@ifempty\@tempb\relax{%
    \MT@get@space@unit2%
    \MT@scale@to@em
    \knbscode\MT@font\MT@char=\@tempcntb
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{4}{;;; knbs (\MT@char): \number\knbscode\MT@font\MT@char: [#1]}%
  }%
  \def\@tempb{#2}%
  \MT@ifempty\@tempb\relax{%
    \MT@get@space@unit3%
    \MT@scale@to@em
    \stbscode\MT@font\MT@char=\@tempcntb
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{4}{;;; stbs (\MT@char): \number\stbscode\MT@font\MT@char: [#2]}%
  }%
  \def\@tempb{#3}%
  \MT@ifempty\@tempb\relax{%
    \MT@get@space@unit4%
    \MT@scale@to@em
    \shbscode\MT@font\MT@char=\@tempcntb
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{4}{;;; shbs (\MT@char): \number\shbscode\MT@font\MT@char: [#3]}%
  }%
  \MT@ifdefined@c@T\MT@sp@inh@name{%
    \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@inh@\MT@sp@inh@name @\MT@char @}{%
      \MT@exp@cs\MT@map@tlist@c{MT@inh@\MT@sp@inh@name @\MT@char @}\MT@set@sp@heirs
    }%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@sp@heirs}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@set@sp@heirs#1{%
  \knbscode\MT@font#1=\knbscode\MT@font\MT@char
  \stbscode\MT@font#1=\stbscode\MT@font\MT@char
  \shbscode\MT@font#1=\shbscode\MT@font\MT@char
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{2}{-- heir of \MT@char: #1}%
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{4}{;;; knbs/stbs/shbs (#1): \number\knbscode\MT@font\MT@char/%
%<debug>        \number\stbscode\MT@font\MT@char/\number\shbscode\MT@font\MT@char}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@all@sp}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@reset@sp@codes}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@reset@sp@codes@}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@set@all@sp#1#2#3{%
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{3}{-- knbs/stbs/shbs: setting all to #1/#2/#3}%
  \let\MT@temp\@empty
  \MT@ifempty{#1}\relax{\g@addto@macro\MT@temp{\knbscode\MT@font\@tempcnta=#1\relax}}%
  \MT@ifempty{#2}\relax{\g@addto@macro\MT@temp{\stbscode\MT@font\@tempcnta=#2\relax}}%
  \MT@ifempty{#3}\relax{\g@addto@macro\MT@temp{\shbscode\MT@font\@tempcnta=#3\relax}}%
  \MT@do@font\MT@temp
}
\def\MT@reset@sp@codes@{\MT@set@all@sp\z@\z@\z@}
\let\MT@reset@sp@codes\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@preset@sp}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@preset@sp@}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@preset@sp{%
  \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\MT@preset@sp@
    \csname MT@sp@c@\MT@sp@c@name @preset\endcsname\@nil
}
\def\MT@preset@sp@#1,#2,#3\@nil{%
  \ifx\MT@sp@unit@\@empty
    \MT@warn@preset@towidth{sp}%
    \MT@ifempty{#1}{\let\@tempa\@empty}{\MT@preset@aux@factor{#1}\@tempa}%
    \MT@ifempty{#2}{\let\@tempc\@empty}{\MT@preset@aux@factor{#2}\@tempc}%
    \MT@ifempty{#3}{\let\@tempb\@empty}{\MT@preset@aux@factor{#3}\@tempb}%
  \else
    \MT@ifempty{#1}{\let\@tempa\@empty}{\MT@preset@aux@space2{#1}\@tempa}%
    \MT@ifempty{#2}{\let\@tempc\@empty}{\MT@preset@aux@space3{#2}\@tempc}%
    \MT@ifempty{#3}{\let\@tempb\@empty}{\MT@preset@aux@space4{#3}\@tempb}%
  \fi
  \MT@set@all@sp\@tempa\@tempc\@tempb
}
}\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%
%\subsubsection{Additional kerning}
%
%\begin{macro}{\MT@kerning}
% Again, only check for additional kerning for new versions of \pdftex.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@requires@pdftex6{
\def\MT@kerning{\MT@maybe@do{kn}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@kn@codes}
% It's getting boring, I know.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@set@kn@codes{%
  \MT@if@list@exists{%
    \MT@get@font@dimen@six{%
      \MT@get@opt
      \MT@reset@kn@codes
      \MT@get@inh@list
      \MT@set@inputenc{c}%
      \MT@load@list\MT@kn@c@name
      \MT@set@listname
      \MT@let@cn\@tempc{MT@kn@c@\MT@kn@c@name}%
      \expandafter\MT@set@codes\@tempc,\relax,}%
  }\MT@reset@kn@codes
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@kn@split@val}
% Again, the unit may be measured in the space dimension; this time only
% \fontdim2.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@kn@split@val#1,#2\relax{%
  \def\@tempb{#1}%
  \MT@ifempty\@tempb\relax{%
    \MT@get@space@unit2%
    \MT@scale@to@em
    \knbccode\MT@font\MT@char=\@tempcntb
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{4}{;;; knbc (\MT@char): \number\knbccode\MT@font\MT@char: [#1]}%
  }%
  \def\@tempb{#2}%
  \MT@ifempty\@tempb\relax{%
    \MT@get@space@unit2%
    \MT@scale@to@em
    \knaccode\MT@font\MT@char=\@tempcntb
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{4}{;;; knac (\MT@char): \number\knaccode\MT@font\MT@char: [#2]}%
  }%
  \MT@ifdefined@c@T\MT@kn@inh@name{%
    \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@inh@\MT@kn@inh@name @\MT@char @}{%
      \MT@exp@cs\MT@map@tlist@c{MT@inh@\MT@kn@inh@name @\MT@char @}\MT@set@kn@heirs
    }%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@kn@heirs}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@set@kn@heirs#1{%
  \knbccode\MT@font#1=\knbccode\MT@font\MT@char
  \knaccode\MT@font#1=\knaccode\MT@font\MT@char
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{2}{-- heir of \MT@char: #1}%
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{4}{;;; knbc (#1): \number\knbccode\MT@font\MT@char/%
%<debug>                               \number\knaccode\MT@font\MT@char}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@all@kn}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@reset@kn@codes}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@reset@kn@codes@}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@set@all@kn#1#2{%
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{3}{-- knac/knbc: setting all to #1/#2}%
  \let\MT@temp\@empty
  \MT@ifempty{#1}\relax{\g@addto@macro\MT@temp{\knbccode\MT@font\@tempcnta=#1\relax}}%
  \MT@ifempty{#2}\relax{\g@addto@macro\MT@temp{\knaccode\MT@font\@tempcnta=#2\relax}}%
  \MT@do@font\MT@temp
}
\def\MT@reset@kn@codes@{\MT@set@all@kn\z@\z@}
\let\MT@reset@kn@codes\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@preset@kn}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@preset@kn@}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@preset@kn{%
  \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\MT@preset@kn@
    \csname MT@kn@c@\MT@kn@c@name @preset\endcsname\@nil
}
\def\MT@preset@kn@#1,#2\@nil{%
  \ifx\MT@kn@unit@\@empty
    \MT@warn@preset@towidth{kn}%
    \let\MT@preset@aux\MT@preset@aux@factor
  \else
    \def\MT@preset@aux{\MT@preset@aux@space2}%
  \fi
  \MT@ifempty{#1}{\let\@tempa\@empty}{\MT@preset@aux{#1}\@tempa}%
  \MT@ifempty{#2}{\let\@tempb\@empty}{\MT@preset@aux{#2}\@tempb}%
  \MT@set@all@kn\@tempa\@tempb
}
}\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%
%\subsubsection{\lsstyle Tracking}
%
% This only works with \pdftex\ 1.40.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@requires@pdftex6{
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@tracking}
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/02/23}{remember fonts that shouldn't be letterspaced}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@tracking@}
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/06/16}{fix: tracking couldn't be re-enabled}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@font@list}
% We only check whether a font should not be letterspaced at all, not whether
% we've already done that (because we have to do it again).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\MT@tr@font@list\@empty
\def\MT@tracking@{%
  \MT@exp@one@n\MT@in@clist\MT@font\MT@tr@font@list
  \ifMT@inlist@\else
    \MT@maybe@do{tr}%
    \ifMT@do\else
      \xdef\MT@tr@font@list{\MT@tr@font@list\MT@font,}%
    \fi
  \fi
}
%</package>
\let\MT@tracking
%<package>  \MT@tracking@
%<letterspace>  \relax
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@tr@codes}
% The tracking amount is determined by the optional argument to \cs{textls},
% settings from \cs{SetTracking}, or the global \opt{letterspace} option, in
% this order.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@set@tr@codes{%
%<*package>
  \MT@vinfo{Tracking font `\MT@@font'\on@line}%
  \MT@get@font@dimen@six{%
  \MT@if@list@exists
    \MT@get@tr@opt
    \relax
%</package>
  \MT@ifdefined@c@TF\MT@letterspace@\relax{\let\MT@letterspace@\MT@letterspace}%
  \ifnum\MT@letterspace@=\z@
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v2.3d}{2009/03/05}{allow zero tracking}
% Zero tracking requires special treatment.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \MT@set@tr@zero
  \else
%<package>    \MT@vinfo{... Tracking by \number\MT@letterspace@}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Letterspacing only works in <PDF> mode.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \MT@warn@tracking@DVI
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@lsfont}
% The letterspaced font instances are saved in macros
% |\|\meta{font name}|/|\meta{letterspacing amount}|ls|.
%
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/03/07}{use \cmd\font@name, not \cs{MT@font}}
% In contrast to \cs{MT@font}, which may reflect the font characteristics more
% accurately (taking substitutions into account), \cmd\font@name\ is guaranteed
% to correspond to an actual font identifier.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \xdef\MT@lsfont{\csname\expandafter\string\font@name
                           /\number\MT@letterspace@ ls\endcsname}%
    \expandafter\ifx\MT@lsfont\relax
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{1}{... new letterspacing instance}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% In case of nested letterspacing with different amounts, we have to extract
% the base font again.
%\todo{outer spacing/kerning for nested letterspaced text}
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \MT@get@ls@basefont
      \global\expandafter\letterspacefont\MT@lsfont\font@name\MT@letterspace@
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/06/16}{possibility to customise interword spacing}
% Scale interword spacing (not configurable in \letterspace).
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*package>
      \MT@ifdefined@c@TF\MT@tr@ispace
        {\let\@tempa\MT@tr@ispace}%
        {\edef\@tempa{\MT@letterspace@*,,}}%
      \MT@ifdefined@c@TF\MT@tr@ospace
        {\edef\@tempa{\@tempa,\MT@tr@ospace}}%
        {\edef\@tempa{\@tempa,,,}}%
      \expandafter\MT@tr@set@space\@tempa,%
%</package>
%<*letterspace>
      % spacing = {<letterspace amount>*,,}
      \fontdimen2\MT@lsfont=\dimexpr\numexpr 1000+\MT@letterspace@\relax sp
                                            * \fontdimen2\MT@lsfont/1000\relax
%</letterspace>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v2.3}{2007/11/03}{possibility to customise outer kerning
%                           (suggested by \contributor Stephan Hennig <stephanhennig\at arcor.de>)}
%                            ^^A MID: <46aa1cbb$0$31620$9b4e6d93@newsspool3.arcor-online.net>
% Adjust outer kerning (\microtype\ only).
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*package>
      \MT@ifdefined@c@TF\MT@tr@okern{\let\@tempa\MT@tr@okern}{\def\@tempa{*,*}}%
      \expandafter\MT@tr@set@okern\@tempa,%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/02/23}{disable ligatures in letterspaced fonts manually
%                           (due to change in \pdftex\ 1.40.4)}
% Disable ligatures (not configurable in \letterspace).
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \MT@ifdefined@c@T\MT@tr@ligatures\MT@tr@noligatures
%</package>
%<*letterspace>
      % no ligatures = {f}
      \tagcode\MT@lsfont`f=\m@ne
%</letterspace>
%    \end{macrocode}
% Adjust protrusion values now, and maybe later (in \cs{MT@pr@split@val}).
%\changes{v2.3}{2007/07/27}{also adjust tracking if protrusion is not enabled,
%                           and even for \letterspace\
%                           (reported by \contributor Stephan Hennig <stephanhennig\at arcor.de>)}
%                               ^^A MID: <46a9c6c6$0$21005$9b4e6d93@newsspool1.arcor-online.net>
%\changes{v2.3b}{2008/05/12}{fix: protrusion adjustment only for new fonts
%                            (reported by \contributor Wolfram Schaalo <schaalo\at gmx.net>)}
%                                                              ^^A private mail, 2008/05/12
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{2}{... compensating for tracking (\number\MT@letterspace@)}%
      \MT@do@font{\lpcode\MT@lsfont\@tempcnta=\numexpr\MT@letterspace@/2\relax
                  \rpcode\MT@lsfont\@tempcnta=\numexpr\MT@letterspace@/2\relax}%
%<package>      \let\MT@the@pr@code\MT@the@pr@code@tr
    \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Finally, let the letterspaced font propagate.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \aftergroup\MT@set@lsfont
%<package>    \let\MT@font\MT@lsfont
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@curr@ls}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@curr@ls}
% We need to remember the current letterspacing amount (for \cs{lslig}).
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \xdef\MT@set@curr@ls{\def\noexpand\MT@curr@ls{\MT@letterspace@}}%
    \aftergroup\MT@set@curr@ls
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
% Adjust surrounding spacing and kerning.
%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@curr@os}
%\changes{v2.3}{2007/11/03}{adjusting spaces made more reliable}
% We get the current outer spacing and adjust it, then, after the end of the
% current outer group, set the current outer spacing, again, and adjust.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*package>
    \MT@outer@space=\csname MT@outer@space\expandafter\string\font@name\endcsname\relax
    \xdef\MT@set@curr@os{\MT@outer@space=\the\MT@outer@space\relax}%
    \MT@tr@outer@l
%</package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% If \cs{MT@ls@adjust} is empty, it's the starred version of \cs{textls}.
% Use scaling to avoid a `Dimension too large'.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifx\MT@ls@adjust\@empty
%<letterspace>      % \textls : outer kerning = {*,*} ; \textls* : outer kerning = {0,0}
      \MT@outer@kern=-\dimexpr\MT@letterspace@ sp * \fontdimen6\font@name/2000\relax
      \MT@ls@outer@k
%<*letterspace>
      \xdef\MT@set@curr@ok{\MT@outer@kern=\the\MT@outer@kern\relax}%
      \aftergroup\aftergroup\aftergroup\MT@ls@aftergroup
%</letterspace>
%    \end{macrocode}
% Otherwise, get the current outer kerning and adjust it, for left and right
% side (\microtype\ only).
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*package>
    \else
      \MT@outer@kern=\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\@firstoftwo
                      \csname MT@outer@kern\expandafter\string\font@name\endcsname\relax
      \ifdim\MT@outer@kern=\z@\else \MT@ls@outer@k \fi
      \MT@outer@kern=\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\@secondoftwo
                      \csname MT@outer@kern\expandafter\string\font@name\endcsname\relax
%</package>
    \fi
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@curr@ok}
% Carry the outer kerning amount to outside the next group, then set outer
% spacing (which will set kerning, if no space follows).
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \xdef\MT@set@curr@ok{\MT@outer@kern=\the\MT@outer@kern\relax}%
    \aftergroup\aftergroup\aftergroup\MT@ls@aftergroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package>
  \fi
%<package>  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@ls@aftergroup}
% Stuff to be done after the letterspace group. The \letterspace\ package
% only adjusts the  kerning.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<letterspace>\def\MT@ls@aftergroup{\MT@set@curr@ok\MT@ls@outer@k}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v2.3e}{2009/11/02}{compatibility with \pkg{tikz} (first reported by
%                           \contributor Christian Stark <cstark\at gmx.de>)}       ^^A MID: <7d81lgF2ad3ckU1@mid.dfncis.de>, 2009/07/28
%^^A                  Also: \contributor Karl Karlsson <karl-karlsson\at yandex.ru> ^^A privat mail, 2009/10/29
%^^A                        \contributor hscm <henkmetselaar\at gmail.com>          ^^A MID: <6a24e972-b1a7-4172-a5a0-d2707e016301@12g2000pri.googlegroups.com>, 2009/11/02
% \microtype\ also adjusts spacing.
% If \cmd\tikz@expandcount\ is greater than zero, we're inside or at the end of
% a \pkg{tikz} node, where we don't want to do anything, lest we disturb
% \pkg{tikz}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*package>
\MT@addto@setup{%
  \@ifpackageloaded{tikz}
    {\def\MT@ls@aftergroup{%
       \ifnum\tikz@expandcount>\z@ \else
         \MT@set@curr@os\MT@set@curr@ok\expandafter\MT@tr@outer@r\fi}}
    {\def\MT@ls@aftergroup{\MT@set@curr@os\MT@set@curr@ok\MT@tr@outer@r}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@tr@opt}
% Various settings (only for the \microtype\ version).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@get@tr@opt{%
  \MT@set@listname
  \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@tr@c@\MT@tr@c@name}{%
    \MT@let@cn\MT@letterspace{MT@tr@c@\MT@tr@c@name}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@unit@}
% Different unit?
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@tr@c@\MT@tr@c@name @unit}{%
      \MT@let@cn\MT@tr@unit@{MT@tr@c@\MT@tr@c@name @unit}%
      \ifdim\MT@tr@unit@=1em
        \let\MT@tr@unit@\@undefined
      \else
        \MT@let@cn\@tempb{MT@tr@c@\MT@tr@c@name}%
        \MT@get@unit\MT@tr@unit@
        \let\MT@tr@factor@\@m
        \MT@scale@to@em
        \edef\MT@letterspace{\number\@tempcntb}%
      \fi
    }%
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@ispace}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@ospace}
% Adjust interword spacing.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \MT@get@tr@opt@{spacing}     {ispace}%
  \MT@get@tr@opt@{outerspacing}{ospace}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@okern}
% Adjust outer kerning.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \MT@get@tr@opt@{outerkerning}{okern}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@ligatures}
% Which ligatures should we disable (empty means all, undefined none)?
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \MT@get@tr@opt@{noligatures} {ligatures}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@tr@opt@}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@get@tr@opt@#1#2{%
  \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@tr@c@\MT@tr@c@name @#1}%
    {\MT@let@nn{MT@tr@#2}{MT@tr@c@\MT@tr@c@name @#1}}%
}
%</package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@lsfont}
% Redefine \cmd\font@name, which will be called a second later (in
% \cmd\selectfont).
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<plain>\MT@requires@latex2{
\def\MT@set@lsfont{\MT@exp@two@c\let\font@name\MT@lsfont}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\lsstyle}
%\changes{v2.0}{2005/09/21}{(beta:1) new command: letterspacing}
%\changes{v2.0}{2006/09/19}{(beta:8) fix: font switches don't pose a problem anymore}
%\changes{v2.0}{2006/09/21}{(beta:8) fix: letterspacing commands may be nested}
%\changes{v2.0}{2006/12/28}{totally redone, using the new \cmd\letterspacefont}
%\changes{v2.3d}{2008/11/16}{make invalid in math mode}
%\changes{v2.3d}{2009/01/07}{disable for \luatex}
% Disable the tests whether the font should be letterspaced, then trigger the
% setup.
% Only \cs{textls} can be used in math mode (\cs{lsstyle} may be used inside
% another text switch, of course).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand\lsstyle{%
  \not@math@alphabet\lsstyle\textls
%<package>  \def\MT@feat{tr}%
  \let\MT@tracking\MT@set@tr@codes
  \selectfont
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Now the definitions for the \letterspace\ package with plain \TeX.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*plain>
}{
\def\MT@set@lsfont{\MT@lsfont}
\def\lsstyle{%
  \begingroup
  \escapechar\m@ne
  \xdef\font@name{\csname\expandafter\string\the\font\endcsname}%
  \MT@set@tr@codes
  \endgroup
}
\let\textls\@undefined
\let\lslig\@undefined
}
%</plain>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\lslig}
%\changes{v2.1}{2007/01/17}{new command: protect ligatures in letterspaced text}
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/02/25}{always defined}
%\changes{v2.3}{2007/11/03}{redone: extract outer kerns from current letterspacing
%                           amount}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@lslig}
% For Fraktur fonts, some ligatures shouldn't be broken up. This command will
% temporarily select the base font and insert the correct kerning.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand\lslig[1]{%
  {\MT@ifdefined@c@TF\MT@curr@ls{%
     \escapechar\m@ne
     \MT@get@ls@basefont
     \MT@outer@kern=\dimexpr\MT@curr@ls sp * \fontdimen6\font@name/2000\relax
     \kern\MT@outer@kern
     \font@name #1%
     \kern\MT@outer@kern%
  }{#1}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@ls@basefont}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@ls@basefont}
%\changes{v2.1}{2007/01/19}{redone: use \cmd\pdfmatch\ to make it bullet-proof}
% \pdftex\ cannot letterspace fonts that already are letterspaced. Therefore,
% we have to save the base font in |\|\meta{font name}|@base|.
%
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/02/18}{fix again: remember base font in a macro}
% The previous solution (checking the macro's meaning with \cmd\pdfmatch),
% where we were loading the base font via the \cmd\font\ primitive again,
% would destroy all previously set up micro-typographic features of the font.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@get@ls@basefont{%
  \xdef\MT@ls@basefont{\csname\expandafter\string\font@name @base\endcsname}%
  \expandafter\ifx\MT@ls@basefont\relax
    \MT@exp@two@c\MT@glet\MT@ls@basefont\font@name
  \else
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{1}{... fixing base font}%
    \MT@exp@two@c\let\font@name\MT@ls@basefont
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@lsbasefont}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@tr@zero}
%\changes{v2.3d}{2009/03/05}{fix: allow switching off tracking
%                            (reported by \contributor Ulrich Dirr <ud\at mucschach.de>)}
%                                                          ^^A private mail, 2009/02/22
% If tracking is switched off in the middle of the document, or if \cs{textls}
% is called with a zero letterspacing amount, we have to retrieve the base font
% and select it.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@set@lsbasefont{\MT@exp@two@c\let\font@name\MT@ls@basefont}
\def\MT@set@tr@zero{%
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{1}{... zero tracking}%
  \xdef\MT@ls@basefont{\csname\expandafter\string\font@name @base\endcsname}%
  \expandafter\ifx\MT@ls@basefont\relax \else
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{1}{... fixing base font}%
    \aftergroup\MT@set@lsbasefont
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@noligatures}
% \pdftex\ 1.40.0--1.40.3 disabled all ligatures in letterspaced fonts.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*package>
\MT@requires@pdftex7{
  \def\MT@tr@noligatures{%
    \ifx\MT@tr@ligatures\@empty
      \MT@noligatures@\MT@lsfont\@undefined
    \else
      \MT@noligatures@\MT@lsfont\MT@tr@ligatures
    \fi
  }
}{
  \def\MT@tr@noligatures{%
    \MT@warning@nl{%
      Disabling selected ligatures is only possible since\MessageBreak
      pdftex 1.40.4. Disabling all ligatures instead}%
    \MT@glet\MT@tr@noligatures\relax
  }
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@outer@space}
% A new skip for outer spacing.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newskip\MT@outer@space
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@set@space}
% Adjust interword spacing (\fontdim2--4) for inner and outer space.
% For inner spacing, the font dimensions will be adjusted, the settings for
% outer spacing will be remembered in a macro.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@tr@set@space#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6,{%
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl2{... orig. space: \the\fontdimen2\MT@lsfont,
%<debug>    \the\fontdimen3\MT@lsfont, \the\fontdimen4\MT@lsfont
%<debug>    \MessageBreak... (#1,#2,#3) (#4,#5,#6)}%
  \let\MT@temp\@empty
  \MT@tr@set@space@{#1}{#4}{2}\@empty
  \MT@tr@set@space@{#2}{#5}{3}\@plus
  \MT@tr@set@space@{#3}{#6}{4}\@minus
  \MT@glet@nc{MT@outer@space\expandafter\string\font@name}\MT@temp
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl2{... inner space: \the\fontdimen2\MT@lsfont,
%<debug>    \the\fontdimen3\MT@lsfont, \the\fontdimen4\MT@lsfont}%
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl2{... outer space: \MT@temp}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@set@space@}
% If outer spacing settings don't exist, they will be inherited from the inner
% spacing settings.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@tr@set@space@#1#2#3#4{%
  \MT@ifempty{#2}{%
    \MT@ifempty{#1}{%
      \edef\MT@temp{\MT@temp#4\the\fontdimen#3\MT@lsfont}%
    }{%
      \MT@tr@set@space@@{#1}{#3}{1000}%
      \edef\MT@temp{\MT@temp#4\the\@tempdima}%
      \fontdimen#3\MT@lsfont=\@tempdima
    }%
  }{%
    \MT@tr@set@space@@{#2}{#3}{2000}%
    \edef\MT@temp{\MT@temp#4\the\@tempdima}%
    \MT@ifempty{#1}\relax{%
      \MT@tr@set@space@@{#1}{#3}{1000}%
      \fontdimen#3\MT@lsfont=\@tempdima
    }%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@set@space@@}
% If the value is followed by an asterisk, the fontdimen will be scaled by the
% respective amount, otherwise the value denotes the desired dimension in the
% respective unit.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@tr@set@space@@#1#2#3{%
  \MT@test@ast#1*\@nil{%
    \MT@ifdefined@c@TF\MT@tr@unit@
      {\edef\@tempb{#1}\MT@scale@to@em}
      {\@tempcntb=#1\relax}%
    \@tempdima=\dimexpr \dimexpr\@tempcntb sp*\MT@dimen@six/1000\relax
                       -\fontdimen#2\MT@lsfont\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% For \fontdim2, we also have to subtract the kerning that letterspacing adds
% to the sides of the characters (only half if it's for outer spacing).
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifnum#2=\tw@
      \advance\@tempdima -\dimexpr\MT@letterspace@ sp*\MT@dimen@six/#3\relax
    \fi
    \@tempdima=\dimexpr \fontdimen#2\MT@lsfont+\@tempdima\relax
  }{%
    \MT@ifempty\@tempa{\let\@tempa\MT@letterspace@}\relax
    \@tempdima=\dimexpr \numexpr1000+\@tempa sp *\fontdimen#2\MT@lsfont/1000\relax
  }%
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl3{... : font dimen #2 (#1): \the\@tempdima}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@outer@l}
% Recall the last skip (must really be an interword space, not just a marker,
%\changes{v2.3}{2007/10/23}{only change pre outer space if it contains shrink}
% nor a `hard' space, \ie, one that doesn't contain stretch or shrink parts).
%\changes{v2.3b}{2008/05/12}{fix: only in horizontal mode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@tr@outer@l{%
  \ifhmode
    \ifdim\lastskip>5sp
      \edef\x{\the\lastskip minus 0pt}%
      \setbox\z@\hbox{\MT@outer@space=\x}%
      \ifdim\wd\z@>\z@
%<debug>\MT@dinfo2{[[[ adjusting pre space: \the\MT@outer@space}%
        \unskip \hskip\MT@outer@space\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% Disable left outer kerning.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \let\MT@ls@outer@k\relax
      \else
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v2.3b}{2008/05/18}{make \cmd\spaceskip-aware (\pkg{ragged2e})}
% The \pkg{ragged2e} package sets \cmd\spaceskip\ without glue.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \ifdim\lastskip=%
            \ifnum\spacefactor<2000
              \spaceskip
            \else
              \ifdim\xspaceskip=\z@
                \dimexpr\spaceskip+\fontdimen7\font@name\relax
              \else
                \xspaceskip
              \fi
            \fi
%<debug>\MT@dinfo2{[[[ adjusting pre space (skip): \the\MT@outer@space}%
          \unskip \hskip\MT@outer@space\relax
          \let\MT@ls@outer@k\relax
        \fi
      \fi
    \fi
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@outer@next}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@outer@r}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@outer@r@}
% The following is borrowed from \pkg{soul}. I've added the cases for italic
% correction, since tracking may also be triggered by text commands (\eg,
% \cmd\textsc).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@tr@outer@r{%
  \futurelet\MT@tr@outer@next\MT@tr@outer@r@
}
\def\MT@tr@outer@r@{%
  \def\MT@temp*{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Don't adjust in math mode.
%\changes{v2.3d}{2008/11/16}{fix: don't adjust in math mode
%                            (reported by \contributor Christoph Bier <christoph.bier\at web.de>)}
%                                                   ^^A MID: <6oapk7F2lvo6U1@mid.individual.net>
% There was a tricky bug when \cs{textls} was the last command in a
% \cmd\mathchoice\ group.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifmmode \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% A similar bug occurred when adjustment would happen inside a discretionary
% group, which we prevent here.
%\changes{v2.3d}{2009/02/08}{fix: don't adjust inside discretionary
%                            (reported by \contributor Maverick Woo <maverick\at cs.cmu.edu>)}
%                                                  ^^A private mail, 2009/02/07
% This only works with \etex\ (which we know is available).
%\changes{v2.3b}{2008/05/18}{additional test for horizontal mode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifnum\currentgrouptype=10 \else
      \def\MT@temp*##1{\ifhmode\hskip\MT@outer@space
%<debug>\MT@dinfo2{]]] adjusting post space (1): \the\MT@outer@space}%
        \fi}%
      \ifcat\egroup\noexpand\MT@tr@outer@next
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v2.3c}{2008/09/18}{additional test for horizontal mode
%                            (reported by \contributor Sveinung Heggen <sveinung.heggen\at orkla.no>)}
%                                                                       ^^A private mail, 2008/09/18
%\todo{fix problem with tikz}
%^^A \path[->] (N0) edge node {\textls{abc}} (N1);
%^^A    reported by \contributor Christian Stark <cstark\at gmx.de>
%^^A                  ^^A 2009/07/28, MID: <7d81lgF2ad3ckU1@mid.dfncis.de>
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \ifhmode\unkern\fi\egroup
        \MT@set@curr@ok \MT@set@curr@os
        \def\MT@temp*{\afterassignment\MT@tr@outer@r\let\MT@temp=}%
      \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% If the next token is \cmd\maybe@ic\ (from an enclosing text command), we
% gobble it, read the next one, feed it to \cmd\maybe@ic@\ (via
% \cs{MT@tr@outer@icr}) and then call ourselves again.
%\changes{v2.3d}{2009/02/25}{don't use \cmd\x\
%                            (reported by \contributor Ulrich Dirr <ud\at mucschach.de>)}
%                                 ^^A private mail, 2009/02/22
%\changes{v2.3e}{2009/05/29}{fix: set current kerning and spacing again
%                            (found by \contributor Lars R\"onnb\"ack <lars.ronnback\at affecto.com>)}
%                                 ^^A <http://code.google.com/p/tufte-latex/issues/detail?id=25>
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \ifx\maybe@ic\MT@tr@outer@next
          \MT@set@curr@ok \MT@set@curr@os
          \def\MT@temp*{\afterassignment\MT@tr@outer@icr\let\MT@temp=}%
        \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% If the next token is \cmd\check@icr\ (from an inner text command), we insert
% ourselves just before it. This will then call \cmd\maybe@ic\ again the next
% round (which however will always insert an italic correction, since it
% doesn't read beyond our group).
%    \begin{macrocode}
          \ifx\check@icr\MT@tr@outer@next
            \def\MT@temp*{\aftergroup\MT@tr@outer@r\check@icr\let\MT@temp=}%
          \else
            \ifx\@sptoken\MT@tr@outer@next
              \def\MT@temp* {\ifhmode\hskip\MT@outer@space
%<debug>\MT@dinfo2{]]] adjusting post spaces (2): \the\MT@outer@space}%
                \fi}%
            \else
              \ifx~\MT@tr@outer@next
                \def\MT@temp*~{\nobreak\hskip\MT@outer@space
%<debug>\MT@dinfo2{]]] adjusting post spaces (3): \the\MT@outer@space}%
                  }%
              \else
                \ifx\ \MT@tr@outer@next \else
                  \ifx\space\MT@tr@outer@next \else
                    \ifx\@xobeysp\MT@tr@outer@next \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% If there's no outer spacing, there may be outer kerning.
%    \begin{macrocode}
                      \def\MT@temp*{\ifdim\MT@outer@kern=\z@\else\MT@ls@outer@k
%<debug>\MT@dinfo2{--- adjusting post kern: \the\MT@outer@kern}%
                        \fi}%
                      \let\MT@tr@outer@next\relax
  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
  \MT@temp*%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@outer@icr}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@outer@icr@}
% Helper macros for the italic correction mess.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@tr@outer@icr{\afterassignment\MT@tr@outer@icr@\MT@tr@outer@r}
\def\MT@tr@outer@icr@{%
  \let\@let@token= \MT@tr@outer@next
  \maybe@ic@
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
% For older \pdftex\ versions, throw an error.
%    \begin{macrocode}
}{
  \DeclareRobustCommand\lsstyle{%
    \MT@error{Letterspacing only works with pdftex version 1.40\MessageBreak
      or newer}{Upgrade pdftex, or use the `soul' package instead.}%
    \MT@glet\lsstyle\relax
  }
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% And for \luatex, too.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*lua>
\MT@requires@luatex{
  \DeclareRobustCommand\lsstyle{%
    \MT@error{Letterspacing currently doesn't work with luatex}
             {Run pdftex, or use the `soul' package instead.}%
    \MT@glet\lsstyle\relax
  }
}\relax
%</lua>
%</package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\textls}
%\changes{v2.0}{2005/09/21}{(beta:1) new command: letterspacing}
%\changes{v2.0}{2006/12/28}{starred version: remove spaces around text}
%\changes{v2.1}{2007/01/19}{fix: use \cmd\hmode@bgroup}
%\changes{v2.3d}{2008/11/16}{make math mode aware}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@ls@adjust@}
% This command may be used like the other text commands.
% The starred version removes kerning on the sides.
% The optional argument changes the letterspacing factor.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand\textls{%
  \@ifstar{\let\MT@ls@adjust@\MT@ls@adjust@empty\MT@textls}%
          {\let\MT@ls@adjust@\MT@ls@adjust@relax\MT@textls}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@textls}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@letterspace@}
% This is now almost \LaTeX's \cmd\DeclareTextFontCommand, with the difference
% that we adjust the outer spacing and kerning also for \cs{lsstyle}, while
% \LaTeX's text \emph{switches} don't bother about italic correction.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\MT@textls[2][]{%
  \ifmmode
    \nfss@text{\MT@ls@set@ls{#1}\lsstyle#2}%
  \else
    \hmode@bgroup
      \MT@ls@set@ls{#1}%
      \lsstyle #2%
      \expandafter
    \egroup
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@ls@adjust}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@ls@adjust@empty}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@ls@adjust@relax}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@ls@set@ls}
% Set current letterspacing amount and outer kerning. This has to be done inside
% the same group as the letterspacing command.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@ls@adjust@empty{\let\MT@ls@adjust\@empty}
\def\MT@ls@adjust@relax{\let\MT@ls@adjust\relax}
\def\MT@ls@set@ls#1{%
  \MT@ifempty{#1}%
    {\let\MT@letterspace@\@undefined}%
    {\KV@@sp@def\MT@letterspace@{#1}%
     \MT@ls@too@large\MT@letterspace@}%
  \MT@ls@adjust@
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@ls@too@large}
% Test whether letterspacing amount is too large.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@ls@too@large#1{%
  \ifnum#1>\MT@tr@max
    \MT@warning{Maximum for option `letterspace' is \number\MT@tr@max}%
    \let#1\MT@tr@max
  \else
    \ifnum#1<\MT@tr@min
      \MT@warning{Minimum for option `letterspace' is \number\MT@tr@min}%
      \let#1\MT@tr@min
    \fi
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@outer@kern}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@set@okern}
%\changes{v2.3d}{2008/12/19}{allow empty value for \texttt{outer kerning}}
% This dimen is used for the starred version of \cs{textls}, for \cs{lslig}
% and for adjusted outer kerning.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\MT@outer@kern
%<*package>
\def\MT@tr@set@okern#1,#2,{%
  \let\MT@temp\@empty
  \MT@ifempty{#1}{\MT@tr@set@okern@{*}}{\MT@tr@set@okern@{#1}}%
  \MT@ifempty{#2}{\MT@tr@set@okern@{*}}{\MT@tr@set@okern@{#2}}%
  \MT@glet@nc{MT@outer@kern\expandafter\string\font@name}\MT@temp
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl2{... outer kerning: (#1,#2)
%<debug>              = \@nameuse{MT@outer@kern\expandafter\string\font@name}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@set@okern@}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@tr@set@okern@#1{%
  \MT@test@ast#1*\@nil{%
    \MT@ifdefined@c@TF\MT@tr@unit@
      {\edef\@tempb{#1}\MT@scale@to@em}
      {\@tempcntb=#1\relax}%
    \@tempdima=\dimexpr \@tempcntb sp * \MT@dimen@six/1000\relax
  }{%
    \MT@ifempty\@tempa{\let\@tempa\@m}\relax
    \@tempdima=\dimexpr \numexpr\@tempa*\MT@letterspace@/1000\relax sp
                      * \fontdimen6\MT@lsfont/2000\relax
  }%
  \advance\@tempdima -\dimexpr \MT@letterspace@ sp
                             * \fontdimen6\MT@lsfont/2000\relax
  \edef\MT@temp{\MT@temp{\the\@tempdima}}%
}
%</package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@ls@outer@k}
% Adjust outer kerning.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@ls@outer@k{\ifhmode\kern\MT@outer@kern\relax\fi}
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\subsubsection{Disabling ligatures}
%
%\begin{macro}{\MT@noligatures}
% The possibility to disable ligatures is a new features of \pdftex\ 1.30.
%\changes{v2.3}{2007/10/23}{fix: set evaluation didn't work (bug introduced in 2.2)}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@requires@pdftex5{
\def\MT@noligatures{%
  \MT@dotrue
  \let\@tempa\MT@nl@setname
  \MT@map@clist@n{font,encoding,family,series,shape,size}{%
    \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{MT@checklist@##1}%
      {\csname MT@checklist@##1\endcsname}%
      {\MT@checklist@{##1}}%
    {nl}%
  }%
  \ifMT@do
    \MT@noligatures@\MT@font\MT@nl@ligatures
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@noligatures@}
% This is also used by \cs{MT@set@tr@codes}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@noligatures@#1#2{%
  \MT@ifdefined@c@TF#2{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Early MiK\TeX\ versions (before 2.5.2579) didn't know \cmd\tagcode.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \MT@ifdefined@c@TF\tagcode{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% No `|inputenc|' key.
%\changes{v2.3b}{2008/03/27}{fix: warning messages for unknown slots}
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \let\MT@warn@maybe@inputenc\@empty
      \def\MT@curr@list@name{\@backslashchar DisableLigatures}%
      \MT@map@clist@c#2{%
        \KV@@sp@def\@tempa{##1}\MT@get@slot
        \ifnum\MT@char>\m@ne \tagcode#1\MT@char=\m@ne \fi}%
      \MT@vinfo{... Disabling ligatures for characters: #2}%
    }{%
      \pdfnoligatures#1%
      \MT@warning{Cannot disable selected ligatures (pdftex doesn't\MessageBreak
          know \@backslashchar tagcode). Disabling all ligatures of\MessageBreak
          the font instead}%
    }%
  }{%
    \pdfnoligatures#1%
    \MT@vinfo{... Disabling ligatures}%
  }%
}
}\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%
%\subsubsection{Loading the configuration}
%
%\begin{macro}{\MT@load@list}
% Recurse through the lists to be loaded.
%\changes{v1.3}{2004/10/27}{check whether list exists}
%\todo{load more than one list}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@load@list#1{%
  \edef\@tempa{#1}%
  \MT@let@cn\@tempb{MT@\MT@feat @c@\@tempa @load}%
  \MT@ifstreq\@tempa\@tempb{%
    \MT@error{\@nameuse{MT@abbr@\MT@feat} list `\@tempa' cannot load itself}{}%
  }{%
    \ifx\@tempb\relax \else
      \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{MT@\MT@feat @c@\@tempb}{%
        \MT@vinfo{... : First loading \@nameuse{MT@abbr@\MT@feat} list `\@tempb'}%
        \begingroup
          \MT@load@list\@tempb
        \endgroup
        \edef\MT@curr@list@name{\@nameuse{MT@abbr@\MT@feat} list
          \noexpand\MessageBreak`\@tempb'}%
        \MT@let@cn\@tempc{MT@\MT@feat @c@\@tempb}%
        \expandafter\MT@set@codes\@tempc,\relax,%
      }{%
        \MT@error{\@nameuse{MT@abbr@\MT@feat} list `\@tempb' undefined.\MessageBreak
                    Cannot load it from list `\@tempa'}{}%
      }%
    \fi
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\changes{v1.1}{2004/09/13}{configuration file names in lowercase
%               (suggested by \contributor Harald Harders <h.harders\at tu-bs.de>)}
%                                                    ^^A private mail, 2004/09/13
%\begin{macro}{\MT@find@file}
%\changes{v1.1}{2004/09/14}{fix: also check whether the file for the base
%                           font family has already been loaded}
% Micro-typographic settings may be written into a file |mt-|\meta{font family}|.cfg|.
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/16}{no longer wrap names in commands}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@file@list}
% We must also record whether we've already loaded the file.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\MT@file@list\@empty
\def\MT@find@file#1{%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Check for existence of the file only once.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \MT@in@clist{#1}\MT@file@list
  \ifMT@inlist@ \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% Don't forget that because reading the files takes place inside a group, all
% commands that may be used there have to be defined globally.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \MT@begin@catcodes
      \let\MT@begin@catcodes\relax
      \let\MT@end@catcodes\relax
      \InputIfFileExists{mt-#1.cfg}{%
        \edef\MT@curr@file{mt-#1.cfg}%
        \MT@vinfo{... Loading configuration file \MT@curr@file}%
        \MT@xadd\MT@file@list{#1,}%
      }{%
        \MT@get@basefamily#1\@empty\@empty\@empty\@nil
        \MT@exp@one@n\MT@in@clist\@tempa\MT@file@list
        \ifMT@inlist@
          \MT@xadd\MT@file@list{#1,}%
        \else
          \InputIfFileExists{mt-\@tempa.cfg}{%
            \edef\MT@curr@file{mt-\@tempa.cfg}%
            \MT@vinfo{... Loading configuration file \MT@curr@file}%
            \MT@xadd\MT@file@list{\@tempa,#1,}%
          }{%
            \MT@vinfo{... No configuration file mt-#1.cfg}%
            \MT@xadd\MT@file@list{#1,}%
          }%
        \fi
      }%
    \endgroup
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@cfg@catcodes}
% We have to make sure that all characters have the correct category code.
% Especially, new lines and spaces should be ignored, since files might be
% loaded in the middle of the document. This is basically \cmd\nfss@catcodes\
% (from the \LaTeX\ kernel). I've added:
%\changes{v1.4a}{2004/11/16}{fix: reset some more catcodes when reading files
%                (reported by \contributor Michael Hoppe <mh\at michael-hoppe.de>)}
%                                 ^^A MID: <p06002000bdbff1f93eb7@[192.168.0.34]>
% |&| (in |tabular|s), |!|, |?|, |;|,
%\changes{v1.7}{2005/02/06}{reset catcode of `\texttt{:}'
%                           (compatibility with \pkg{french}* packages)}
% |:| (|french|), |,|, |$|, |_|, |~|,
%\changes{v1.5}{2004/11/28}{reset catcode of `\texttt{\quotechar=}'
%                           (compatibility with Turkish \pkg{babel})}
% and |=| (Turkish \pkg{babel}).
%
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/03/29}{reset catcodes of the remaining <ASCII> characters}
% OK, now all printable characters up to 127 are `other'. We hope that letters
% are always letters and numbers other. (\pkg{listings} makes them active, see
% section~\ref{sub:compatibility}.)
%
% We leave |^| at catcode 7, so that stuff like `|^^ff|' remains possible.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@cfg@catcodes{%
  \makeatletter
  \catcode`\^7%
  \catcode`\ 9%
  \catcode`\^^I9%
  \catcode`\^^M9%
  \catcode`\\\z@
  \catcode`\{\@ne
  \catcode`\}\tw@
  \catcode`\#6%
  \catcode`\%14%
  \MT@map@tlist@n
    {\!\"\$\&\'\(\)\*\+\,\-\.\/\:\;\<\=\>\?\[\]\_\`\|\~}%
    \@makeother
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@begin@catcodes}
% This will be used before reading the files as well as in the configuration
% commands \cs{Set...}, and \cs{DeclareCharacterInheritance}, so that the
% catcodes are also harmless when these commands are used outside the
% configuration files.
%\changes{v1.7}{2005/02/17}{also use inside configuration commands}
%\changes{v2.3}{2007/11/20}{fix: don't disable \cmd\KV@@sp@def}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@begin@catcodes{%
  \begingroup
  \MT@cfg@catcodes
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@end@catcodes}
% End group if outside configuration file (otherwise relax).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\MT@end@catcodes\endgroup
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@basefamily}
% The family name might have a suffix
%\changes{v1.1}{2004/09/14}{only remove suffix if it is `\texttt{x}' or `\texttt{j}'}
% \eg, for expert set (|x|), old style numbers (|j|)
%\changes{v1.2}{2004/09/26}{also remove `w' (swash capitals)}
% swash capitals (|w|) etc. We mustn't simply remove the last letter, as this
% would make for instance |cms| out of |cmss| \textit{and} |cmsy| (OK, |cmex|
% will still become |cme|~\dots).
%\changes{v1.4b}{2004/11/25}{fix: failed for font names of the form \texttt{abczz}
%                (reported by \contributor Georg Verweyen <Georg.Verweyen\at WEB.DE>)}
%                                                 ^^A MID: <41A64DC7.7040404@web.de>
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/02/04}{redone, working on font names and suffixes of arbitrary length}
%
% We only work on the font name if it is longer than three characters.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@get@basefamily#1#2#3#4\@nil{%
  \ifx\@empty#4%
    \def\@tempa{#1#2#3}%
  \else
    \let\@tempa\@empty
    \edef\@tempb{#1#2#3#4}%
    \expandafter\MT@get@basefamily@\@tempb\@nil
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@basefamily@}
% This will only remove one suffix (the longest match), so that
% \emph{combinations} of suffixes would have be to added manually (\eg,
% |\DeclareMicrotypeVariants*{aw}|). But otherwise, something like `|padx|'
% would be truncated to `|p|'.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@get@basefamily@#1#2\@nil{%
  \edef\@tempa{\@tempa#1}%
  \ifx\\#2\\\expandafter\@gobble\else\expandafter\@firstofone\fi
  {\MT@in@tlist{#2}\MT@variants
   \ifMT@inlist@\else\MT@get@basefamily@#2\@nil\fi}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@listname}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@listname}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@listname@}
% Try all combinations of font family, series, shape and size to get a list for
% the current font.
%\changes{v1.1}{2004/09/15}{don't check for empty attributes list}
%\changes{v1.2}{2004/09/30}{alternatively check for alias font name}
%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/15}{use \cmd\@tfor\
%               (\contributor Andreas B\"uhmann <andreas.buehmann\at web.de>'s idea)}
%                                                      ^^A private mail, 2005/03/12
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/16}{made recursive}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@get@listname#1{%
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{1}{trying to find \@nameuse{MT@abbr@#1} list for font `\MT@@font'}%
  \let\MT@listname\@undefined
  \def\@tempb{#1}%
  \MT@map@tlist@c\MT@try@order\MT@get@listname@
}
\def\MT@get@listname@#1{%
  \expandafter\MT@next@listname#1%
  \ifx\MT@listname\@undefined \else
    \expandafter\MT@tlist@break
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@try@order}
%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/11}{fix: also check for //\meta{series}/\meta{shape}//
%               (reported by \contributor Andreas B\"uhmann <andreas.buehmann\at web.de>)}
%                                                           ^^A private mail, 2005/03/10
%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/11}{always check for size, too
%               (suggested by \contributor Andreas B\"uhmann <andreas.buehmann\at web.de>)}
%                                                           ^^A private mail, 2005/03/10
%
%\begin{table}\footnotesize
%\caption{Order for matching font attributes}\label{tab:match-order}
%\catcode`\!=13 \let!\match
%\setlength\fboxsep{4pt}
%\leavevmode\kern-\dimexpr\fboxsep+\fboxrule\relax
%\fcolorbox{theframe}{white}{^^A
%\begin{minipage}{\textwidth}
%\begin{tabular}{@{}L{38pt}*{16}{p{19.5pt}<{\centering}@{}}}
%          & 1.& 2.& 3.& 4.& 5.& 6.& 7.& 8.& 9.&10.&11.&12.&13.&14.&15.&16.\\
%\cmidrule(r){2-2}  \cmidrule(r){3-3}  \cmidrule(r){4-4}  \cmidrule(r){5-5}
%\cmidrule(r){6-6}  \cmidrule(r){7-7}  \cmidrule(r){8-8}  \cmidrule(r){9-9}
%\cmidrule(r){10-10}\cmidrule(r){11-11}\cmidrule(r){12-12}\cmidrule(r){13-13}
%\cmidrule(r){14-14}\cmidrule(r){15-15}\cmidrule(r){16-16}\cmidrule   {17-17}
% Encoding & ! & ! & ! & ! & ! & ! & ! & ! & ! & ! & ! & ! & ! & ! & ! & ! \\
% Family   & ! & ! & ! & ! & ! & ! & ! & ! & - & - & - & - & - & - & - & - \\
% Series   & ! & ! & ! & ! & - & - & - & - & ! & ! & ! & ! & - & - & - & - \\
% Shape    & ! & ! & - & - & ! & ! & - & - & ! & ! & - & - & ! & ! & - & - \\
% Size     & ! & - & ! & - & ! & - & ! & - & ! & - & ! & - & ! & - & ! & - \\
%\end{tabular}
%\end{minipage}^^A
%}\kern-\dimexpr\fboxsep+\fboxrule\relax ^^A end \fcolorbox
%\end{table}
%
% Beginning with version 1.7, we always check for the font size. Since the
% matching order has become more logical now, it can be described in words, so
% that we don't need table~\ref{tab:match-order} in the documentation part any
% longer and can cast it off here.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@try@order{%
  {1111}{1110}{1101}{1100}{1011}{1010}{1001}{1000}%
  {0111}{0110}{0101}{0100}{0011}{0010}{0001}{0000}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@next@listname}
% The current context is added to the font attributes. That is, the context must
% match.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@next@listname#1#2#3#4{%
  \edef\@tempa{\MT@encoding
              /\ifnum#1=\@ne \MT@family\fi
              /\ifnum#2=\@ne \MT@series\fi
              /\ifnum#3=\@ne \MT@shape\fi
              /\ifnum#4=\@ne *\fi
               \MT@context}%
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{1}{trying \@tempa}%
  \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{MT@\@tempb @\@tempa}{%
    \MT@next@listname@#4%
  }{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Also try with an alias family.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifnum#1=\@ne
      \ifx\MT@familyalias\@empty \else
        \edef\@tempa{\MT@encoding
                    /\MT@familyalias
                    /\ifnum#2=\@ne \MT@series\fi
                    /\ifnum#3=\@ne \MT@shape\fi
                    /\ifnum#4=\@ne *\fi
                     \MT@context}%
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{1}{(alias) \@tempa}%
        \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@\@tempb @\@tempa}{%
          \MT@next@listname@#4%
        }%
      \fi
    \fi
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@next@listname@}
% If size is to be evaluated, do that, otherwise use the current list.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@next@listname@#1{%
  \ifnum#1=\@ne
    \MT@exp@cs\MT@in@rlist{MT@\@tempb @\@tempa @sizes}%
    \ifMT@inlist@
      \let\MT@listname\MT@size@name
    \fi
  \else
    \MT@let@cn\MT@listname{MT@\@tempb @\@tempa}%
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@if@list@exists}
%\changes{v1.7}{2005/02/06}{don't define \cs{MT@\#1@c@name} \cmd\global ly,
%                           here and elsewhere}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@context}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@if@list@exists{%
  \MT@let@cn\MT@context{MT@\MT@feat @context}%
  \MT@ifstreq{@}\MT@context{\let\MT@context\@empty}\relax
  \MT@get@listname{\MT@feat @c}%
  \MT@ifdefined@c@TF\MT@listname{%
    \MT@edef@n{MT@\MT@feat @c@name}{\MT@listname}%
    \ifMT@nonselected
      \MT@vinfo{... Applying non-selected expansion (list `\MT@listname')}%
    \else
      \MT@vinfo{... Loading \@nameuse{MT@abbr@\MT@feat} list `\MT@listname'}%
    \fi
    \@firstoftwo
  }{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Since the name cannot be \cmd\@empty, this is a sound proof that no matching
% list exists.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \MT@let@nc{MT@\MT@feat @c@name}\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
% Don't warn if \opt{selected}|=false|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifMT@nonselected
      \MT@vinfo{... Applying non-selected expansion (no list)}%
    \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% Tracking doesn't require a list, either.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \MT@ifstreq\MT@feat{tr}\relax{%
        \MT@warning{I cannot find a \@nameuse{MT@abbr@\MT@feat} list
          for font\MessageBreak`\MT@@font'%
            \ifx\MT@context\@empty\else\space(context: `\MT@context')\fi.
          Switching off\MessageBreak\@nameuse{MT@abbr@\MT@feat} for this font}%
      }%
    \fi
    \@secondoftwo
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@inh@list}
%\changes{v1.6}{2004/12/18}{correct message if \opt{selected} is false}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@context}
% The inheritance lists are global (no context).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@get@inh@list{%
  \let\MT@context\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \MT@get@listname{\MT@feat @inh}%
  \MT@ifdefined@c@TF\MT@listname{%
    \MT@edef@n{MT@\MT@feat @inh@name}{\MT@listname}%
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{1}{... Using \@nameuse{MT@abbr@\MT@feat} inheritance list
%<debug>                `\MT@listname'}%
    \MT@let@cn\@tempc{MT@\MT@feat @inh@\MT@listname}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% If the list is \cmd\@empty, it has already been parsed.
%\changes{v1.2}{2004/09/26}{fix: set inheritance list \cmd\global ly to \cmd\@empty}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifx\@tempc\@empty \else
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{1}{parsing inheritance list ...}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% The group is only required in case an input encoding is given.
%\changes{v1.9f}{2006/08/03}{fix: input encoding must be set after the inheritance
%                            list has been parsed}
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \begingroup
      \edef\MT@curr@list@name{inheritance list\noexpand\MessageBreak`\MT@listname'}%
      \MT@set@inputenc{inh}%
      \expandafter\MT@inh@do\@tempc,\relax,%
      \MT@glet@nc{MT@\MT@feat @inh@\MT@listname}\@empty
      \endgroup
    \fi
  }{%
    \MT@let@nc{MT@\MT@feat @inh@name}\@undefined
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Translating characters into slots}
%
%\changes{v1.4}{2004/11/04}{don't use scratch registers in global definitions}
% Get the slot number of the character in the current encoding.
%
%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@slot}
%^^A\changes{v1.2}{2004/09/26}{fix: group must also include \cs{MT@get@composite}}
%\changes{v1.4b}{2004/11/22}{don't define \cs{MT@char} globally (save stack problem)}
%\changes{v1.6a}{2005/01/30}{completely redone, hopefully more robust
%                (compatible with \pkg{frenchpro}; problem reported by
%                 \contributor Bernard Gaulle <gaulle\at idris.fr>)}
%                                     ^^A private mail, 2005/01/28
%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/21}{remove backslash hack}
% There are lots of possibilities how a character may be specified in the
% configuration files, which makes translating them into slot numbers quite
% expensive. Also, we want to have this as robust as possible, so that the user
% does not have to solve a sphinx's riddle if anything goes wrong.
%
%\begin{macro}{\MT@char}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@char@}
% The character is in \cs{@tempa}, we want its slot number in \cs{MT@char}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@get@slot{%
  \escapechar`\\
  \let\MT@char@\m@ne
  \MT@noresttrue
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
% Save unexpanded string in case we need to issue a warning message.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \MT@toks=\expandafter{\@tempa}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Now, let's walk through (hopefully) all possible cases.
%\begin{itemize}
%  \item It's a letter, a character or a number.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \expandafter\MT@is@letter\@tempa\relax\relax
  \ifnum\MT@char@ < \z@
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/03/30}{fix: expand active characters}
%  \item It might be an active character, \ie, an 8-bit character defined by
%        \pkg{inputenc}. If so, we will expand it here to its <LICR> form.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \MT@exp@two@c\MT@is@active\string\@tempa\@nil
%    \end{macrocode}
%  \item OK, so it must be a macro. We do not allow random commands but only
%        those defined in \LaTeX's idiosyncratic font encoding scheme:
%
%        If |\|\meta{encoding}|\|\meta{command} (that's \emph{one} command) is
%        defined, we try to extract the slot number.
%\changes{v1.7}{2005/02/27}{test whether \cs{}\meta{encoding}\cs{}\meta{...} is defined}
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/04}{test whether \cs{}\meta{encoding}\cs{}\meta{...} is defined
%                           made more robust}
%
%        We must be cautious not to stumble over accented characters consisting
%        of two commands, like \cmd\`\cmd\i\ or \cmd\U\cmd\CYRI, hence,
%        \cmd\string\ wouldn't be safe enough.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{\MT@encoding\MT@detokenize@c\@tempa}%
      \MT@is@symbol
%    \end{macrocode}
%  \item Now, we'll catch the rest, which hopefully is an accented character
%        (\eg~|\"a|).
%    \begin{macrocode}
      {\expandafter\MT@is@composite\@tempa\relax\relax}%
    \ifnum\MT@char@ < \z@
%    \end{macrocode}
%  \item It could also be a \cmd\chardef ed command (\eg, the percent character).
%        This seems the least likely case, so it's last.
%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/20}{test for \cmd\chardef ed commands}
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \expandafter\MT@exp@two@c\expandafter\MT@is@char\expandafter
          \meaning\expandafter\@tempa\MT@charstring\relax\relax\relax
    \fi
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{itemize}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \let\MT@char\MT@char@
  \ifnum\MT@char < \z@
    \MT@warn@unknown
  \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% If the user has specified something like `|fi|', or wanted to define a number
% but forgot to use three digits, we'll have something left of the string. In
% this case, we issue a warning and forget the complete string.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifMT@norest \else
      \MT@warn@rest
      \let\MT@char\m@ne
    \fi
  \fi
  \escapechar\m@ne
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@norest}
% Test whether all of the string has been used up.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifMT@norest
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@is@letter}
% Input is a letter, a character or a number.
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/04}{warning for non-<ASCII> characters}
%\changes{v1.9}{2005/10/22}{using \cmd\catcode\ should be more efficient than
%                           inspecting the \cmd\meaning}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@is@letter#1#2\relax{%
  \ifcat a\noexpand#1\relax
    \edef\MT@char@{\number`#1}%
    \ifx\\#2\\%
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{3}{> `\the\MT@toks' is a letter (\MT@char@)}%
    \else
      \MT@norestfalse
    \fi
  \else
    \ifcat !\noexpand#1\relax
      \edef\MT@char@{\number`#1}%
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{3}{> `\the\MT@toks' is a character (\MT@char@)}%
      \ifx\\#2\\%
        \ifnum\MT@char@ > 127 \MT@warn@ascii \fi
      \else
        \MT@norestfalse
        \expandafter\MT@is@number#1#2\relax\relax
      \fi
    \fi
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@is@number}
% Numbers may be specified as a three-digit decimal number (|029|),
%\changes{v1.1}{2004/09/13}{numbers may also be specified in hexadecimal or octal
%               (suggested by \contributor Harald Harders <h.harders\at tu-bs.de>)}
%                                                    ^^A private mail, 2004/09/13
% as a hexadecimal number (prefixed with~|"|: |"1D|) or as a octal number
% (prefixed with~|'|: |'35|). They must consist of at least three characters
% (including the prefix), that is, |"F| is not permitted.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@is@number#1#2#3\relax{%
  \ifx\relax#3\relax \else
    \ifx\relax#2\relax \else
      \MT@noresttrue
      \if#1"\relax
        \def\x{\uppercase{\edef\MT@char@{\number#1#2#3}}}\x
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{3}{> ... a hexadecimal number: \MT@char@}%
      \else
        \if#1'\relax
          \def\MT@char@{\number#1#2#3}%
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{3}{> ... an octal number: \MT@char@}%
        \else
          \MT@ifint{#1#2#3}{%
            \def\MT@char@{\number#1#2#3}%
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{3}{> ... a decimal number: \MT@char@}%
          }\MT@norestfalse
        \fi
      \fi
      \ifnum\MT@char@ > \@cclv
        \MT@warn@number@too@large{\noexpand#1\noexpand#2\noexpand#3}%
        \let\MT@char@\m@ne
      \fi
    \fi
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@is@active}
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/03/30}{new macro: translate \pkg{inputenc}-defined characters}
% Expand an active character. (This was completely broken in v1.7, and only
% worked by chance before.)
%\changes{v1.9}{2005/09/08}{redone: use \cmd\set@display@protect}
% We \cmd\set@display@protect\ to translate, \eg, \expandafter|\"A| into |\"A|,
% that is to whatever it is defined in the \pkg{inputenc} encoding file.
%
%\iffalse
% Previous solution, slightly more robust (but doesn't understand Unicode):
%\begin{verbatim}
%\def\MT@is@active#1#2\@nil{%
%   \ifx\\#2\\%
%      \ifnum\catcode`#1 = \active
%         \toks@=\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{\@tempa}%
%         \expandafter\MT@active@inpenc\the\toks@\relax\relax
%         \edef\@tempa{\the\toks@}%
%         \edef\x{\MT@toks={\the\MT@toks\space(= \the\toks@)}}\x
%      \fi
%   \fi
%}
%\def\MT@active@inpenc#1#2#3\relax{%
%   \ifx#1\IeC
%      \def\IeC##1{\toks@={##1}}%
%      \the\toks@
%      \expandafter\MT@active@inpenc\the\toks@\relax\relax
%   \fi
%   \ifx#1\@tabacckludge
%      \def\@tabacckludge##1##2{%
%         \toks@=\expandafter{\csname\string##1\endcsname#3}}%
%      \the\toks@
%   \fi
%   \ifx#1\@inpenc@undefined@
%      \def\@inpenc@undefined@##1{%
%         \edef\x{\toks@={%
%            undefined^^J(\MT@MT)\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces
%            in input encoding ``##1''}}\x}%
%      \the\toks@
%   \fi
%}
%\end{verbatim}
%\fi
%
% Unfortunately, the (older) \pkg{inputenc} definitions prefer the
% protected\slash generic variants (\eg, \cmd\copyright\ instead of
% \cmd\textcopyright), which our parser won't be able to understand.
% (I'm fed up now, so you have to complain if you really, really want to be able
% to write `\expandafter|\textcopyright|' instead of \cmd\textcopyright, thus
% rendering your configuration files unportable.)
%
% Unicode characters (\pkg{inputenc}/|utf8|,|utf8x|) are also supported.
%\changes{v1.9d}{2006/03/06}{support for Unicode (\pkg{inputenc}\slash\texttt{utf8})}
%\changes{v2.3}{2007/11/11}{support for extended Unicode (\pkg{inputenc}\slash\texttt{utf8x} resp. \pkg{ucs}) -- experimental}
%
%\iffalse ^^A obsolete because of `inputenc' key
% We presume that only one input encoding is being used throughout the entire
% document. We could of course save the input encoding together with the list,
% but this would entail a couple of problems: (1)~the overhead of resetting the
% input encoding every time, (2)~the problem (or rather, impossibility) to
% decide which input encoding should be chosen -- the one active when the list
% was declared or the one active when the font is selected, and (3)~the
% improbability of multiple input encodings being used at all.
%\fi
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@is@active#1#2\@nil{%
  \ifnum\catcode`#1 = \active
    \begingroup
      \set@display@protect
      \let\IeC\@firstofone
      \let\@inpenc@undefined@\MT@undefined@char
%    \end{macrocode}
% We refrain from checking whether there is a sufficient number of octets.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \def\UTFviii@defined##1{\ifx ##1\relax
        \MT@undefined@char{utf8}\else\expandafter ##1\fi}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% For \pkg{ucs} (utf8x). Let's call it experimental~\dots
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \MT@ifdefined@c@T\PrerenderUnicode
        {\PrerenderUnicode{\@tempa}\let\unicode@charfilter\@firstofone}%
      \edef\x{\endgroup
        \def\noexpand\@tempa{\@tempa}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Append what we think the translation is to the token register we use for the
% log.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \MT@toks={\the\MT@toks\space(= \@tempa)}%
      }%
    \x
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@undefined@char}
% For characters not defined in the current input encoding.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@undefined@char#1{undefined in input encoding ``#1''}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@is@symbol}
% The symbol commands might expand to funny stuff, depending on context.
% Instead of simply expanding |\|\meta{command}, we construct the command
% |\|\meta{encoding}|\|\meta{command} and see whether its meaning is
% \cmd\char|"|\meta{hex number}, which is the case for everything that has
% been defined with \cs{DeclareTextSymbol} in the encoding definition files.
%\changes{v2.0}{2006/09/15}{made even more robust}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@is@symbol{%
  \expandafter\def\expandafter\MT@char\expandafter
      {\csname\MT@encoding\MT@detokenize@c\@tempa\endcsname}%
  \expandafter\MT@exp@two@c\expandafter\MT@is@char\expandafter
      \meaning\expandafter\MT@char\MT@charstring\relax\relax\relax
  \ifnum\MT@char@ < \z@
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/03/07}{expand once more (for \pkg{frenchpro})}
% \dots~or, if it hasn't been defined by \cs{DeclareTextSymbol}, a letter
% (\eg, \cmd\i, when using \pkg{frenchpro}). ^^A as noted by Bernard Gaulle
%                                              ^^A private mail, 2005/01/28
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\MT@is@letter\MT@char\relax\relax
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@is@char}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@charstring}
% A helper macro that inspects the \cmd\meaning\ of its argument.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\begingroup
  \catcode`\/=\z@
%    \end{macrocode}
%\SpecialEscapechar{\/}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  /MT@map@tlist@n{/\CHAR}/@makeother
  /lowercase{%
    /def/x{/endgroup
      /def/MT@charstring{\CHAR"}%
      /def/MT@is@char##1\CHAR"##2##3##4/relax{%
        /ifx/relax##1/relax
          /if##3\/relax
            /edef/MT@char@{/number"##2}%
            /MT@ifstreq/MT@charstring{##3##4}/relax/MT@norestfalse
          /else
            /edef/MT@char@{/number"##2##3}%
            /MT@ifstreq/MT@charstring{##4}/relax/MT@norestfalse
          /fi
%<debug>  /MT@dinfo@nl{3}{> `/the/MT@toks' is a \char (/MT@char@)}%
        /fi
      }%
    }%
  }
/x
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@is@composite}
% Here, we are dealing with accented characters, specified as two tokens.
%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/10}{new macro: construct command for composite character;
%                           no uncontrolled expansion}
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/06/08}{more robust: expand exactly once}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@is@composite#1#2\relax{%
  \ifx\\#2\\\else
%    \end{macrocode}
% Again, we construct a control sequence, this time of the form:
% |\\|\meta{encoding}\allowbreak|\|\meta{accent}|-|\meta{character}, \eg,
% |\\T1\"-a|, which we then expand once to see if it is a letter (if it has
% been defined by \cs{DeclareTextComposite}). This should be robust, finally,
% especially, since we also \cmd\detokenize\ the input instead of only
% \cmd\string ifying it. Thus, we will die gracefully even on wrong Unicode
% input without |utf8|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \expandafter\def\expandafter\MT@char\expandafter{\csname\expandafter
                    \string\csname\MT@encoding\endcsname
                    \MT@detokenize@n{#1}-\MT@detokenize@n{#2}\endcsname}%
    \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\MT@is@letter\MT@char\relax\relax
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% [What about math? Well, for a moment the following looked like a solution, with
% \cs{mt@is@mathchar} defined accordingly, analogous to \cs{MT@is@char} above,
% to pick up the last two tokens (the \cmd\meaning\ of a \cmd\mathchardef'ed
% command expands to its hexadecimal notation):
%\begin{verbatim}
%\def\MT@is@mathchar#1{%
%  \if\relax\noexpand#1% it's a macro
%    \let\x#1%
%  \else % it's a character
%    \mathchardef\x=\mathcode`#1\relax
%  \fi
%  \expandafter\MT@exp@two@c\expandafter\mt@is@mathchar\expandafter
%    \meaning\expandafter\x\mt@mathcharstring\relax\relax\relax
%}
%\end{verbatim}
% However, the problem is that \cmd\mathcode s and \cmd\mathchardef s have
% global scope. Therefore, if they are changed by a package that loads
% different math fonts, there is no guarantee whatsoever that things will still
% be correct (\eg, the minus in |cmsy| when the \pkg{euler} package is loaded).
% So, no way to go, unfortunately.]
%
% Some warning messages, for performance reasons separated here.
%\begin{macro}{\MT@curr@list@name}
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/06/08}{new macro: current list type and name}
%\changes{v1.9f}{2006/08/03}{fix: \cs{MessageBreak} must not be expanded}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@listname}
% The type and name of the current list, defined at various places.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@set@listname{%
  \edef\MT@curr@list@name{\@nameuse{MT@abbr@\MT@feat} list\noexpand\MessageBreak
    `\@nameuse{MT@\MT@feat @c@name}'}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@warn@ascii}
% For `other' characters \textgreater\ 127, we issue a warning (\pkg{inputenc}
% probably hasn't been loaded), since correspondence with the slot numbers
% would be purely coincidental.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@warn@ascii{%
  \MT@warning@nl{Character `\the\MT@toks' (= \MT@char@)
    is outside of ASCII range.\MessageBreak
    You must load the `inputenc' package before using\MessageBreak
    8-bit characters in \MT@curr@list@name}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@warn@number@too@large}
% Number too large.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@warn@number@too@large#1{%
  \MT@warning@nl{%
    Number #1 in encoding `\MT@encoding' too large!\MessageBreak
    Ignoring it in \MT@curr@list@name}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@warn@rest}
% Not all of the string has been parsed.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@warn@rest{%
  \MT@warning@nl{%
    Unknown slot number of character\MessageBreak`\the\MT@toks'%
    \MT@warn@maybe@inputenc\MessageBreak
    in font encoding `\MT@encoding'.\MessageBreak
    Make sure it's a single character\MessageBreak
    (or a number) in \MT@curr@list@name}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@warn@unknown}
% No idea what went wrong.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@warn@unknown{%
  \MT@warning@nl{%
    Unknown slot number of character\MessageBreak`\the\MT@toks'%
    \MT@warn@maybe@inputenc\MessageBreak
    in font encoding `\MT@encoding' in \MT@curr@list@name}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@warn@maybe@inputenc}
% In case an input encoding had been requested.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@warn@maybe@inputenc{%
  \MT@ifdefined@n@T
     {MT@\MT@feat @\MT@cat @\csname MT@\MT@feat @\MT@cat @name\endcsname @inputenc}%
    { (input encoding `\@nameuse
     {MT@\MT@feat @\MT@cat @\csname MT@\MT@feat @\MT@cat @name\endcsname @inputenc}')}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\subsubsection{Hook into \LaTeX's font selection}\label{sssec:impl.hook}
%
% We append \cs{MT@setupfont} to \cmd\pickup@font, which is called by \LaTeX\
% every time a font is selected. We then check whether we've already seen this
% font, and if not, set it up for micro-typography.
% This ensures that we will catch all fonts, and that we will not set up fonts
% more than once. The whole package really hangs on this command.
%
% In contrast to the \pkg{pdfcprot} package, it is not necessary to declare in
% advance which fonts should benefit from micro-typographic treatment. Also,
% only those fonts that are actually being used will be set up.
%
% For my reference:
%\begin{itemize}
%  \item \cmd\pickup@font\ is called by \cmd\selectfont, \cmd\wrong@fontshape,
%     or \\ \cmd\getanddefine@fonts\ (for math).
%  \item \cmd\pickup@font\ calls \cmd\define@newfont.
%  \item \cmd\define@newfont\ may call (inside a group!)
%  \begin{itemize}
%     \item \cmd\wrong@fontshape, which in turn will call \cmd\pickup@font,
%        and thus \\ \cmd\define@newfont\ again, or
%     \item \cmd\extract@font.
%  \end{itemize}
%  \item \cmd\get@external@font\ is called by \cmd\extract@font, by itself,
%        and by the substitution macros.
%\end{itemize}
%
%\iffalse
%\changes{v1.2}{2004/10/02}{check for packages that might load fonts}
%\changes{v1.4}{2004/11/04}{no need to check for packages that might load fonts anymore}
%\fi
%\changes{v1.4}{2004/11/04}{use \cmd\pickup@font\ instead of \cmd\define@newfont\
%                           as the hook for \cs{MT@setupfont}}
% Up to version 1.3 of this package, we were using \cmd\define@newfont\ as the
% hook, which is only called for \emph{new} fonts, and therefore seemed the
% natural choice. However, this meant that we had to take special care to catch
% all fonts: we additionally had to set up the default font, the error font (if
% it wasn't the default font), we had to check for some packages that might
% have been loaded before \microtype\ and were loading fonts, \eg,
% \pkg{jurabib}, \pkg{ledmac}, \pkg{pifont} (loaded by \pkg{hyperref}),
% \pkg{tipa}, and probably many more. Furthermore, we had to include a hack for
% the \pkg{IEEEtran} class which loads all fonts in the class file itself (to
% fine tune inter-word spacing), and the \pkg{memoir} class, too. To cut this
% short: it seemed to get out of hand, and I decided that it would be better to
% use \cmd\pickup@font\ and decide for ourselves whether we've already seen
% that font. I hope the overhead isn't too large.
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/05/15}{if font substitution has occurred, set up the
%                           substitute font, not the selected one}
%\changes{v1.9}{2005/10/03}{allow context-specific font setup}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@font@list}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@font}
% We use a comma separated list.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\MT@font@list\@empty
\let\MT@font\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
% All this is done at the beginning of the document.
% It doesn't work for plain, of course, which doesn't have \cmd\pickup@font.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package>
%<plain>\MT@requires@latex2{
\MT@addto@setup{%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v2.1}{2007/01/15}{compatibility with \pkg{CJK}: also check for its definition}
%\changes{v2.3b}{2008/05/26}{compatibility with \pkg{CJKutf8}: also check for its definition}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@orig@pickupfont}
% \microtype\ also works with \pkg{CJK} in the sense that nothing will break
% when both packages are used at the same time. However, since \pkg{CJK} has
% its own way of encoding, it is currently not possible to create
% character-specific settings. That is, the only feature available with
% \pkg{CJK} fonts is expansion.
% (Tracking doesn't really work for other reasons.)
%\todo{fix tracking with \pkg{CJK}, if worth the trouble}^^A
% Like us, \pkg{CJK} redefines \cmd\pickup@font.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \@ifpackageloaded{CJK}{%
    \@ifpackagelater{CJK}{2006/10/17}% 4.7.0
      {\def\MT@orig@pickupfont{\CJK@ifundefined\CJK@plane}}%
      {\def\MT@orig@pickupfont{\@ifundefined{CJK@plane}}}%
    \g@addto@macro\MT@orig@pickupfont
      {{\expandafter\ifx\font@name\relax\define@newfont\fi}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \pkg{CJKutf8} redefines \cmd\pickup@font\ once more (recent versions, in
% <PDF> mode, as determined by \pkg{ifpdf}, which \pkg{CJKutf8} loads).
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \@ifpackageloaded{CJKutf8}%
      {\@ifpackagelater{CJKutf8}{2008/05/22}% 4.8.0
        {\ifpdf\expandafter\@secondoftwo\else\expandafter\@firstoftwo\fi}%
        {\@firstoftwo}}%
      {\@firstoftwo}%
    {\g@addto@macro\MT@orig@pickupfont{%
      {\expandafter\ifx\csname\curr@fontshape/\f@size/\CJK@plane\endcsname\relax
         \define@newfont\else\xdef\font@name{%
           \csname \curr@fontshape/\f@size/\CJK@plane\endcsname}\fi}}}%
    {\g@addto@macro\MT@orig@pickupfont{%
      {\expandafter\ifx\csname \curr@fontshape/\f@size/\CJK@plane\endcsname\relax
         \define@newfont\def\CJK@temp{v}%
         \ifx\CJK@temp\CJK@plane
           \expandafter\ifx\csname CJK@cmap@\f@family\CJK@plane\endcsname\relax
           \else\csname CJK@cmap@\f@family\CJK@plane\endcsname\fi
         \else \CJK@addcmap\CJK@plane \fi
       \else\xdef\font@name{%
         \csname \curr@fontshape/\f@size/\CJK@plane\endcsname}\fi}}}%
  }{%
    \def\MT@orig@pickupfont{\expandafter\ifx\font@name\relax\define@newfont\fi}%
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Check whether \cmd\pickup@font\ is defined as expected.
% The warning issued by \cmd{\CheckCommand*} would be a bit too generic.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifx\pickup@font\MT@orig@pickupfont \else
    \MT@warning@nl{%
      Command \string\pickup@font\space is not defined as expected.%
      \MessageBreak Patching it anyway. Some things may break%
%<*package>
     .\MessageBreak Double-check whether micro-typography is indeed%
      \MessageBreak applied to the document.%
      \MessageBreak (Hint: Turn on `verbose' mode)%
%</package>
    }%
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\pickup@font}
% Then we append our stuff. Everything is done inside a group.
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/04/15}{\letterspace: setup inside group}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \g@addto@macro\pickup@font{\begingroup}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% If the \pkg{trace} package is loaded, we turn off tracing of \microtype's
% setup, which is extremely noisy.
%\changes{v1.9e}{2006/05/25}{no tracing with \pkg{trace} package}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \MT@with@package@T{trace}{\g@addto@macro\pickup@font{\conditionally@traceoff}}%
  \g@addto@macro\pickup@font{%
      \escapechar\m@ne
%<*package>
%<debug>      \global\MT@inannottrue
%<debug>      \MT@glet\MT@pdf@annot\@empty
%<debug>      \MT@addto@annot{(line \number\inputlineno)}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% If \cs{MT@font} is empty, no substitution has taken place, hence
% \cmd\font@name\ is correct. Otherwise, if they are different,
% \cmd\font@name\ does not describe the font actually used. This test will
% catch first order substitutions, like |bx| to |b|, but it will still fail if
% the substituting font is itself substituted.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \MT@let@cn\MT@font{MT@subst@\expandafter\string\font@name}%
      \ifx\MT@font\relax
        \let\MT@font\font@name
      \else
        \ifx\MT@font\font@name \else
%<debug>  \MT@addto@annot{= substituted with \MT@@font}%
          \MT@register@subst@font
        \fi
      \fi
      \MT@setupfont
%</package>
%<letterspace>      \MT@tracking
    \endgroup
  }%
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@pickupfont}
% Remember the patched command for later.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \let\MT@pickupfont\pickup@font
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\do@subst@correction}
% Additionally, we hook into \cmd\do@subst@correction, which is called if
% a substitution has taken place, to record the name of the ersatz font.
% Unfortunately, this will only work for one-level substitutions.
%\changes{v2.3}{2007/08/05}{remember substitute font for all times
%                           (reported by \contributor Stephan Hennig <stephanhennig\at arcor.de>)}
%                               ^^A MID: <46ab4fbb$0$31632$9b4e6d93@newsspool3.arcor-online.net>
% We have to remember the substitute for the rest of the document, not just for
% the first time it is called, since we need it every time a font is
% letterspaced.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \g@addto@macro\do@subst@correction
    {\edef\MT@font{\csname\curr@fontshape/\f@size\endcsname}%
     \MT@glet@nc{MT@subst@\expandafter\string\font@name}\MT@font}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\add@accent}
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/06/14}{fix: disable micro-typographic setup inside \cmd\add@accent\
%               (reported by \contributor Stephan Hennig <stephanhennig\at arcor.de>)}
%                    ^^A MID: <42adb0e3$0$27784$9b4e6d93@newsread2.arcor-online.net>
%\begin{macro}{\MT@orig@add@accent}
% Inside \cmd\add@accent, we have to disable \microtype's setup, since the
% grouping in the patched \cmd\pickup@font\ would break the accent if
% different fonts are used for the base character and the accent. Fortunately,
% \LaTeX\ takes care that the fonts used for the \cmd\accent\ are already set
% up, so that we cannot be overlooking them.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \let\MT@orig@add@accent\add@accent
  \def\add@accent#1#2{%
    \let\pickup@font\MT@orig@pickupfont
    \MT@orig@add@accent{#1}{#2}%
    \let\pickup@font\MT@pickupfont
  }%
%</package>
}
%<plain>}\relax
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
% Consequently (if all goes well), we are the last ones to change these
% commands, therefore there is no need to check whether our definition has
% survived.
%\changes{v1.6}{2004/12/29}{test whether \cmd\pickup@font\ has changed}
%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/11/21}{remove superfluous test whether \cmd\pickup@font\ has changed}
%
%\begin{macro}{\MT@check@font}
% Check whether we've already seen the current font.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@check@font{\MT@exp@one@n\MT@in@clist\MT@font\MT@font@list}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@register@subst@font}
% Register the substituted font.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@register@subst@font{\xdef\MT@font@list{\MT@font@list\font@name,}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@register@font}
% Register the current font.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@register@font{\xdef\MT@font@list{\MT@font@list\MT@font,}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\subsubsection{Context-sensitive setup}
%
% Here are the variants for context-sensitive setup.
%\begin{macro}{\MT@active@features}
% The activated features are stored in this command.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\MT@active@features\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@check@font@cx}
% Every feature has its own list of fonts that have already been dealt with. If
% the font needn't be set up for a feature, we temporarily disable the
% corresponding setup command.
%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/11/14}{optimise context-sensitive setup}
% This should be more efficient than book-keeping the fonts in lists associated
% with the combination of contexts, as we've done it before.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@check@font@cx{%
  \MT@if@true
  \MT@map@clist@c\MT@active@features{%
    \expandafter\MT@exp@one@n\expandafter\MT@in@clist\expandafter\MT@font
      \csname MT@##1@\csname MT@##1@context\endcsname font@list\endcsname
    \ifMT@inlist@
      \MT@let@nc{MT@\@nameuse{MT@abbr@##1}}\relax
    \else
      \MT@if@false
    \fi
  }%
  \ifMT@if@ \MT@inlist@true \else \MT@inlist@false \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@register@subst@font@cx}
% Add the substituted font to each feature list.
%\todo{remove from other lists?}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@register@subst@font@cx{%
  \MT@map@clist@c\MT@active@features{%
    \MT@exp@cs\MT@xadd
      {MT@##1@\csname MT@##1@context\endcsname font@list}%
      {\font@name,}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@register@font@cx}
% For each feature, add the current font to the list, unless we didn't set it
% up.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@register@font@cx{%
  \MT@map@clist@c\MT@active@features{%
    \MT@exp@cs\ifx{MT@\@nameuse{MT@abbr@##1}}\relax\else
      \MT@exp@cs\MT@xadd
        {MT@##1@\csname MT@##1@context\endcsname font@list}%
        {\MT@font,}%
      \def\@tempa{##1}%
      \MT@exp@cs\MT@map@tlist@c{MT@##1@doc@contexts}\MT@maybe@rem@from@list
    \fi
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@maybe@rem@from@list}
% Recurse through all context font lists of the document and remove the font,
% unless it's the current context.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@maybe@rem@from@list#1{%
  \MT@ifstreq{\@tempa/#1}{\@tempa/\csname MT@\@tempa @context\endcsname}\relax{%
    \expandafter\MT@exp@one@n\expandafter\MT@rem@from@clist\expandafter
       \MT@font \csname MT@\@tempa @#1font@list\endcsname
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\begin{macro}{\microtypecontext}
%\changes{v1.9}{2005/10/03}{new command: change setup context in the document}
%\changes{v2.3}{2007/08/05}{made robust (reported by \contributor Stephan Hennig <stephanhennig\at arcor.de>)}
%                                           ^^A MID: <46ab4fbb$0$31632$9b4e6d93@newsspool3.arcor-online.net>
% The user may change the context, so that different setups are possible. This
% is especially useful for multi-lingual documents.
%
% Inside the preamble, it shouldn't actually do anything but remember it for
% later.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\microtypecontext#1{\MT@addto@setup{\microtypecontext{#1}}}
\MT@addto@setup{%
  \DeclareRobustCommand\microtypecontext[1]{%
    \MT@setup@contexts
    \let\MT@reset@context\relax
    \setkeys{MTC}{#1}%
    \selectfont
    \MT@reset@context
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\textmicrotypecontext}
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/07/03}{new command: wrapper around \cs{microtypecontext}}
% This is just a wrapper around \cs{microtypecontext}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand\textmicrotypecontext[2]{{\microtypecontext{#1}#2}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@reset@context}
%\changes{v1.9f}{2006/08/03}{only reset context if it has actually been changed}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@reset@context@}
% We have to reset the font at the end of the group, provided there actually was
% a change.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@reset@context@{%
  \MT@vinfo{<<< Resetting contexts\on@line
%<debug>  \MessageBreak= \MT@pr@context/\MT@ex@context
%<debug>                /\MT@tr@context/\MT@kn@context/\MT@sp@context
  }%
  \selectfont
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@setup@contexts}
% The first time \cs{microtypecontext} is called, we initialise the context
% lists and redefine the commands used in \cmd\pickup@font.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@setup@contexts{%
  \MT@map@clist@c\MT@active@features
    {\MT@glet@nc{MT@##1@@font@list}\MT@font@list}%
  \MT@glet\MT@check@font\MT@check@font@cx
  \MT@glet\MT@register@font\MT@register@font@cx
  \MT@glet\MT@register@subst@font\MT@register@subst@font@cx
  \MT@glet\MT@setup@contexts\relax
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Define context keys.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@map@clist@c\MT@features@long{%
  \define@key{MTC}{#1}[]{%
    \edef\@tempb{\@nameuse{MT@rbba@#1}}%
    \MT@exp@one@n\MT@in@clist\@tempb\MT@active@features
    \ifMT@inlist@
%    \end{macrocode}
% Using an empty context is only asking for trouble, therefore we choose the
% `|@|' instead (hoping for the \LaTeX\ users' natural awe of this character).
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \MT@ifempty{##1}{\def\MT@val{@}}{\def\MT@val{##1}}%
      \MT@exp@cs\ifx{MT@\@tempb @context}\MT@val
%<debug>\MT@dinfo{1}{>>> no change of #1 context: `\MT@val'}%
      \else
        \MT@vinfo{>>> Changing #1 context to `\MT@val'\MessageBreak\on@line
%<debug>          \space(previous: `\@nameuse{MT@\@tempb @context}')%
                 }%
        \def\MT@reset@context{\aftergroup\MT@reset@context@}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% The next time we see the font, we have to reset \emph{all} factors.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \MT@glet@nn{MT@reset@\@tempb @codes}{MT@reset@\@tempb @codes@}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% We must also keep track of all contexts in the document.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \expandafter\MT@exp@one@n\expandafter\MT@in@tlist\expandafter
          \MT@val \csname MT@\@tempb @doc@contexts\endcsname
        \ifMT@inlist@ \else
          \MT@exp@cs\MT@xadd{MT@\@tempb @doc@contexts}{{\MT@val}}%
%<debug>  \MT@dinfo{1}{||| added #1 context: \@nameuse{MT@\@tempb @doc@contexts}}%
        \fi
        \MT@edef@n{MT@\@tempb @context}{\MT@val}%
      \fi
    \fi
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@pr@context}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@ex@context}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@context}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@sp@context}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@kn@context}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@pr@doc@contexts}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@ex@doc@contexts}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@doc@contexts}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@sp@doc@contexts}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@kn@doc@contexts}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@extra@context}
% Initialise the contexts.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@exp@one@n\MT@map@clist@n{\MT@features,nl}{%
  \MT@def@n{MT@#1@context}{@}%
  \MT@def@n{MT@#1@doc@contexts}{{@}}%
}
\let\MT@extra@context\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%
%\subsection{Configuration}
%
%\subsubsection{Font sets}
%\todo{allow for \texttt{load}ing and extending another set; or using more than one set?}
%
%\begin{macro}{\DeclareMicrotypeSet}
%\begin{macro}{\DeclareMicrotypeSet*}
% Calling this macro will create a comma list for every font attribute of the
% form: |\MT|\meta{feature}|list@|\meta{attribute}|@|\meta{set name}. If the
% optional argument is empty, lists for all available features will be created.
%
% The third argument must be a list of |key=value| pairs. If a font attribute
% is not specified, we define the corresponding list to \cmd\relax, so that it
% does not constitute a constraint.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\DeclareMicrotypeSet{%
  \@ifstar
    \MT@DeclareSetAndUseIt
    \MT@DeclareSet
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@DeclareSet}
%\changes{v1.1}{2004/09/15}{remove spaces around first argument}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\MT@DeclareSet[3][]{%
  \KV@@sp@def\@tempa{#1}%
  \MT@ifempty\@tempa{%
    \MT@map@clist@c\MT@features{{\MT@declare@sets{##1}{#2}{#3}}}%
  }{%
    \MT@map@clist@c\@tempa{{%
      \KV@@sp@def\@tempa{##1}%
      \MT@ifempty\@tempa\relax{%
        \MT@is@feature{set declaration `#2'}{%
          \MT@exp@one@n\MT@declare@sets
            {\csname MT@rbba@\@tempa\endcsname}{#2}{#3}%
        }%
      }%
    }}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@DeclareSetAndUseIt}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\MT@DeclareSetAndUseIt[3][]{%
  \MT@DeclareSet[#1]{#2}{#3}%
  \UseMicrotypeSet[#1]{#2}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@curr@set@name}
% We need to remember the name of the set currently being declared.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\MT@curr@set@name\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@declare@sets}
% Define the current set name and parse the keys.
%\changes{v1.1}{2004/09/20}{remove spaces around set name}
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/05/15}{warning when redefining a set}
%\changes{v2.0}{2006/10/16}{fix: empty size list when redefining set}
%\todo{share one set between features}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@declare@sets#1#2#3{%
  \KV@@sp@def\MT@curr@set@name{#2}%
  \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@#1@set@@\MT@curr@set@name}{%
    \MT@warning{Redefining \@nameuse{MT@abbr@#1} set `\MT@curr@set@name'}%
    \MT@glet@nc{MT@#1list@size@\MT@curr@set@name}\@empty
  }%
  \MT@glet@nc{MT@#1@set@@\MT@curr@set@name}\@empty
%<debug>\MT@dinfo{1}{declaring \@nameuse{MT@abbr@#1} set `\MT@curr@set@name'}%
  \setkeys{MT@#1@set}{#3}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@define@set@key@}
% \meta{\#1} = font axis, \meta{\#2} = feature.
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/16}{use comma lists instead of token lists}
%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/11/21}{don't expand variables immediately
%                (requested by \contributor Georg Verweyen <verweyen\at gmail.com>)}
%                   ^^A MID: <437a522d$0$7419$9b4e6d93@newsread4.arcor-online.net>
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@define@set@key@#1#2{%
  \define@key{MT@#2@set}{#1}[]{%
    \MT@glet@nc{MT@#2list@#1@\MT@curr@set@name}\@empty
    \MT@map@clist@n{##1}{%
      \KV@@sp@def\MT@val{####1}%
      \MT@get@highlevel{#1}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% We do not add the expanded value to the list~\dots
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \MT@exp@two@n\g@addto@macro
        {\csname MT@#2list@#1@\MT@curr@set@name\expandafter\endcsname}%
        {\MT@val,}%
    }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \dots~but keep in mind that the list has to be expanded at the end of the
% preamble.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \expandafter\g@addto@macro\expandafter\MT@font@sets
      \csname MT@#2list@#1@\MT@curr@set@name\endcsname
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{1}{-- #1: \@nameuse{MT@#2list@#1@\MT@curr@set@name}}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@highlevel}
% Saying, for instance, `|family=rm*|' or `|shape=bf*|' will expand to
% \cmd\rmdefault\ resp. \cmd\bfdefault.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@get@highlevel#1{%
  \expandafter\MT@test@ast\MT@val*\@nil\relax{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% And `|family = *|' will become \cmd\familydefault.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \MT@ifempty\@tempa{\def\@tempa{#1}}\relax
    \edef\MT@val{\expandafter\noexpand\csname \@tempa default\endcsname}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% In contrast to earlier version, these values will not be expanded immediately
% but at the end of the preamble.
%\changes{v1.2}{2004/09/26}{check whether defaults have changed}
%\changes{v1.5}{2004/12/02}{don't test defaults if called after begin document}
%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/11/21}{no longer check whether defaults have changed}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@test@ast}
% It the last character is an asterisk, execute the second argument, otherwise
% the first one.
%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/10}{make it simpler}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@test@ast#1*#2\@nil{%
  \def\@tempa{#1}%
  \MT@ifempty{#2}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@font@sets}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@fix@font@set}
% Fully expand the font specification and fix catcodes for all font sets.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\MT@font@sets\@empty
\def\MT@fix@font@set#1{%
  \xdef#1{#1}%
  \global\@onelevel@sanitize#1%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@define@set@key@size}
% |size| requires special treatment.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@define@set@key@size#1{%
  \define@key{MT@#1@set}{size}[]{%
    \MT@map@clist@n{##1}{%
      \KV@@sp@def\MT@val{####1}%
      \expandafter\MT@get@range\MT@val--\@nil
      \ifx\MT@val\relax \else
        \MT@exp@cs\MT@xadd
          {MT@#1list@size@\MT@curr@set@name}%
          {{{\MT@lower}{\MT@upper}\relax}}%
      \fi
    }%
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{1}{-- size: \@nameuse{MT@#1list@size@\MT@curr@set@name}}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/11}{allow specification of size ranges
%               (suggested by \contributor Andreas B\"uhmann <andreas.buehmann\at web.de>)}
%                                                            ^^A private mail, 2005/03/10
% Font sizes may also be specified as ranges. This has been requested by Andreas
% B\"uhmann, who has also offered valuable help in implementing this. Now, it
% is for instance possible to set up different lists for fonts with optical
% sizes. (The MinionPro project is trying to do this for the OpenType version
% of Adobe's Minion. See \url{http://developer.berlios.de/projects/minionpro/}.)
%
%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@range}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@upper}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@lower}
% Ranges will be stored as triplets of |{|\meta{lower bound}|}|\allowbreak
% |{|\meta{upper bound}|}|\allowbreak|{|\meta{list name}|}|.
% For simple sizes, the upper boundary is \textminus1.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@get@range#1-#2-#3\@nil{%
  \MT@ifempty{#1}{%
    \MT@ifempty{#2}{%
      \let\MT@val\relax
    }{%
      \def\MT@lower{0}%
      \def\MT@val{#2}%
      \MT@get@size
      \edef\MT@upper{\MT@val}%
    }%
  }{%
    \def\MT@val{#1}%
    \MT@get@size
    \ifx\MT@val\relax \else
      \edef\MT@lower{\MT@val}%
      \MT@ifempty{#2}{%
        \MT@ifempty{#3}%
          {\def\MT@upper{-1}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% 2048\,pt is \TeX's maximum font size.
%    \begin{macrocode}
          {\def\MT@upper{2048}}%
      }{%
        \def\MT@val{#2}%
        \MT@get@size
        \ifx\MT@val\relax \else
          \MT@ifdim\MT@lower>\MT@val{%
            \MT@error{%
              Invalid size range (\MT@lower\space > \MT@val) in font set
              `\MT@curr@set@name'.\MessageBreak Swapping sizes}{}%
            \edef\MT@upper{\MT@lower}%
            \edef\MT@lower{\MT@val}%
          }{%
            \edef\MT@upper{\MT@val}%
          }%
          \MT@ifdim\MT@lower=\MT@upper
            {\def\MT@upper{-1}}%
            \relax
        \fi
      }%
    \fi
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@size}
% Translate a size selection command and normalise it.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@get@size{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% A single star would mean \cs{sizedefault}, which doesn't exist, so we define
% it to be \cmd\normalsize.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \if*\MT@val\relax
    \def\@tempa{\normalsize}%
  \else
    \MT@let@cn\@tempa{\MT@val}%
  \fi
  \ifx\@tempa\relax \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% The \pkg{relsize} solution of parsing \cmd\@setfontsize\ does not work with the
% <AMS> classes, among others. I hope my hijacking doesn't do any harm.
%\changes{v1.2}{2004/09/26}{hijack \cmd\set@fontsize\ instead of \cmd\@setfontsize}
% We redefine \cmd\set@fontsize, and not \cmd\@setfontsize\ because some classes
% might define the size selection commands by simply using \cmd\fontsize\
% (\eg, the \pkg{a0poster} class).
%\changes{v2.3b}{2008/03/07}{grouping}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \begingroup
      \def\set@fontsize##1##2##3##4\@nil{\endgroup\def\MT@val{##2}}%
      \@tempa\@nil
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Test whether we finally got a number or dimension so that we can strip the
% `|pt|' (\cmd\@defaultunits\ and \cmd\strip@pt\ are kernel macros).
%\changes{v1.2}{2004/09/27}{additional magic to catch some errors}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \MT@ifdimen\MT@val{%
    \@defaultunits\@tempdima\MT@val pt\relax\@nnil
    \edef\MT@val{\strip@pt\@tempdima}%
  }{%
    \MT@warning{Could not parse font size `\MT@val'\MessageBreak
                in font set `\MT@curr@set@name'}%
    \let\MT@val\relax
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\changes{v1.9}{2005/07/13}{\cs{DeclareMicrotypeSet}: new key: \texttt{font}}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@define@set@key@font}
%\changes{v2.3}{2007/11/20}{\texttt{font}: single asterisk means normal font}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@define@set@key@font#1{%
  \define@key{MT@#1@set}{font}[]{%
    \MT@glet@nc{MT@#1list@font@\MT@curr@set@name}\@empty
    \MT@map@clist@n{##1}{%
      \KV@@sp@def\MT@val{####1}%
      \MT@ifstreq\MT@val*{\def\MT@val{*/*/*/*/*}}\relax
      \expandafter\MT@get@font\MT@val/////\@nil
      \MT@exp@two@n\g@addto@macro
        {\csname MT@#1list@font@\MT@curr@set@name\expandafter\endcsname}%
        {\MT@val,}%
    }%
    \expandafter\g@addto@macro\expandafter\MT@font@sets
      \csname MT@#1list@font@\MT@curr@set@name\endcsname
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{1}{-- font: \@nameuse{MT@#1list@font@\MT@curr@set@name}}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@font}
% Translate any asterisks.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@get@font#1/#2/#3/#4/#5/#6\@nil{%
  \MT@get@font@{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{0}%
  \ifx\MT@val\relax\def\MT@val{0}\fi
  \expandafter\g@addto@macro\expandafter\@tempb\expandafter{\MT@val}%
  \let\MT@val\@tempb
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@font@}
% Helper macro, also used by \cs{MT@get@font@and@size}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@get@font@#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
  \let\@tempb\@empty
  \def\MT@temp{#1/#2/#3/#4/#5}%
  \MT@get@axis{encoding}{#1}%
  \MT@get@axis{family}  {#2}%
  \MT@get@axis{series}  {#3}%
  \MT@get@axis{shape}   {#4}%
  \ifnum#6>\z@\edef\@tempb{\@tempb*}\fi
  \MT@ifempty{#5}{%
    \MT@warn@axis@empty{size}{\string\normalsize}%
    \def\MT@val{*}%
  }{%
    \def\MT@val{#5}%
  }%
  \MT@get@size
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@axis}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@get@axis#1#2{%
  \def\MT@val{#2}%
  \MT@get@highlevel{#1}%
  \MT@ifempty\MT@val{%
    \MT@warn@axis@empty{#1}{\csname #1default\endcsname}%
    \expandafter\def\expandafter\MT@val\expandafter{\csname #1default\endcsname}%
  }\relax
  \expandafter\g@addto@macro\expandafter\@tempb\expandafter{\MT@val/}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@warn@axis@empty}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@warn@axis@empty#1#2{%
  \MT@warning{#1 axis is empty in font specification\MessageBreak
    `\MT@temp'. Using `#2' instead}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% We can finally assemble all pieces to define \cs{DeclareMicrotypeSet}'s
% keys.
% They are also used for \cs{DisableLigatures}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@exp@one@n\MT@map@clist@n{\MT@features,nl}{%
  \MT@define@set@key@{encoding}{#1}%
  \MT@define@set@key@{family}  {#1}%
  \MT@define@set@key@{series}  {#1}%
  \MT@define@set@key@{shape}   {#1}%
  \MT@define@set@key@size      {#1}%
  \MT@define@set@key@font      {#1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\UseMicrotypeSet}
% To use a particular set we simply redefine |MT@|\meta{feature}|@setname|.
% If the optional argument is empty, set names for all features will be
% redefined.
%\changes{v1.1}{2004/09/20}{remove spaces around first argument}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand*\UseMicrotypeSet[2][]{%
  \KV@@sp@def\@tempa{#1}%
  \MT@ifempty\@tempa{%
    \MT@map@clist@c\MT@features{{\MT@use@set{##1}{#2}}}%
  }{%
    \MT@map@clist@c\@tempa{{%
      \KV@@sp@def\@tempa{##1}%
      \MT@ifempty\@tempa\relax{%
        \MT@is@feature{activation of set `#2'}{%
          \MT@exp@one@n\MT@use@set
            {\csname MT@rbba@\@tempa\endcsname}{#2}%
        }%
      }%
    }}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@pr@setname}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@ex@setname}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@setname}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@sp@setname}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@kn@setname}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@use@set}
% Only use sets that have been declared.
%\changes{v1.1}{2004/09/20}{remove spaces around set name}
%\changes{v1.4b}{2004/11/25}{don't use undeclared font sets}
%\changes{v1.6}{2005/01/19}{retain current set if new set is undeclared}
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/05/15}{fix: remove braces in first line}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@use@set#1#2{%
  \KV@@sp@def\@tempa{#2}%
  \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{MT@#1@set@@\@tempa}{%
    \MT@xdef@n{MT@#1@setname}{\@tempa}%
  }{%
    \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{MT@#1@setname}\relax{%
      \MT@xdef@n{MT@#1@setname}{\@nameuse{MT@default@#1@set}}%
    }%
    \MT@error{%
      The \@nameuse{MT@abbr@#1} set `\@tempa' is undeclared.\MessageBreak
      Using set `\@nameuse{MT@#1@setname}' instead}{}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\DeclareMicrotypeSetDefault}
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/05/15}{new command: set default font set}
% This command can be used in the main configuration file to declare the
% default font set, in case no set is specified in the package options.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand*\DeclareMicrotypeSetDefault[2][]{%
  \KV@@sp@def\@tempa{#1}%
  \MT@ifempty\@tempa{%
    \MT@map@clist@c\MT@features{{\MT@set@default@set{##1}{#2}}}%
  }{%
    \MT@map@clist@c\@tempa{{%
      \KV@@sp@def\@tempa{##1}%
      \MT@ifempty\@tempa\relax{%
        \MT@is@feature{declaration of default set `#2'}{%
          \MT@exp@one@n\MT@set@default@set
            {\csname MT@rbba@\@tempa\endcsname}{#2}%
        }%
      }%
    }}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@default@pr@set}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@default@ex@set}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@default@tr@set}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@default@sp@set}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@default@kn@set}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@default@set}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@set@default@set#1#2{%
  \KV@@sp@def\@tempa{#2}%
  \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{MT@#1@set@@\@tempa}{%
%<debug>\MT@dinfo{1}{declaring default \@nameuse{MT@abbr@#1} set `\@tempa'}%
    \MT@xdef@n{MT@default@#1@set}{\@tempa}%
  }{%
    \MT@error{%
      The \@nameuse{MT@abbr@#1} set `\@tempa' is not declared.\MessageBreak
      Cannot make it the default set. Using set\MessageBreak `all' instead}{}%
    \MT@xdef@n{MT@default@#1@set}{all}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%
%\subsubsection{Variants and aliases}
%
%\begin{macro}{\DeclareMicrotypeVariants}
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/02/04}{new command}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@variants}
% Specify suffixes for variants (see \file{fontname/variants.map}).
% The starred version appends to the list.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\MT@variants\@empty
\def\DeclareMicrotypeVariants{%
  \@ifstar
    \MT@DeclareVariants
    {\let\MT@variants\@empty\MT@DeclareVariants}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@DeclareVariants}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@DeclareVariants#1{%
  \MT@map@clist@n{#1}{%
    \KV@@sp@def\@tempa{##1}%
    \@onelevel@sanitize\@tempa
    \xdef\MT@variants{\MT@variants{\@tempa}}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\DeclareMicrotypeAlias}
% This can be used to set an alias name for a font, so that the file and the
% settings for the aliased font will be loaded.
%\changes{v1.5}{2004/12/03}{remove spaces around arguments}
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/05/09}{warning when overriding an alias font}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand*\DeclareMicrotypeAlias[2]{%
  \KV@@sp@def\@tempa{#1}%
  \KV@@sp@def\@tempb{#2}%
  \@onelevel@sanitize\@tempb
  \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@\@tempa @alias}{%
    \MT@warning{Alias font family `\@tempb' will override
      alias `\@nameuse{MT@\@tempa @alias}'\MessageBreak
      for font family `\@tempa'}}%
  \MT@xdef@n{MT@\@tempa @alias}{\@tempb}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% If we encounter this command while a font is being set up, we also set the
% alias for the current font so that if \cs{DeclareMicrotypeAlias} has been
% issued inside a configuration file, the configuration file for the alias font
% will be loaded, too.
%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/23}{may also be used inside configuration files}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \MT@ifdefined@c@T\MT@family{%
%<debug>\MT@dinfo{1}{Activating alias font `\@tempb' for `\MT@family'}%
    \MT@glet\MT@familyalias\@tempb
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\LoadMicrotypeFile}
%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/22}{new command (suggested by
%               \contributor Andreas B\"uhmann <andreas.buehmann\at web.de>)}
%                                              ^^A private mail, 2005/03/21
% May be used to load a configuration file manually.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\LoadMicrotypeFile#1{%
  \KV@@sp@def\@tempa{#1}%
  \@onelevel@sanitize\@tempa
  \MT@exp@one@n\MT@in@clist\@tempa\MT@file@list
  \ifMT@inlist@
    \MT@vinfo{... Configuration file mt-\@tempa.cfg already loaded}%
  \else
    \MT@xadd\MT@file@list{\@tempa,}%
    \MT@begin@catcodes
    \InputIfFileExists{mt-\@tempa.cfg}{%
      \edef\MT@curr@file{mt-\@tempa.cfg}%
      \MT@vinfo{... Loading configuration file \MT@curr@file}%
    }{%
      \MT@warning{... Configuration file mt-\@tempa.cfg\MessageBreak
                      does not exist}%
    }%
    \MT@end@catcodes
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\subsubsection{Disabling ligatures}
%
%\begin{macro}{\DisableLigatures}
%\changes{v1.9}{2005/07/11}{new command: disable ligatures (requires \pdftex\ 1.30)}
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/01/22}{new optional argument: disable selected ligatures only}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@DisableLigatures}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@nl@setname}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@nl@ligatures}
% This is really simple now: we can re-use the set definitions of
% \cs{DeclareMicrotypeSet}; there can only be one set, which we'll call
% `|no ligatures|'.
%
% The optional argument may be used to disable selected ligatures only.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@requires@pdftex5{
\def\DisableLigatures{%
  \MT@begin@catcodes
  \MT@DisableLigatures
}
\newcommand*\MT@DisableLigatures[2][]{%
  \MT@ifempty{#1}\relax{\gdef\MT@nl@ligatures{#1}}%
  \xdef\MT@active@features{\MT@active@features,nl}%
  \global\MT@noligaturestrue
  \MT@declare@sets{nl}{no ligatures}{#2}%
  \gdef\MT@nl@setname{no ligatures}%
  \MT@end@catcodes
}
}{
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
% If \pdftex\ is too old, we throw an error.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand*\DisableLigatures[2][]{%
  \MT@error{Disabling ligatures of a font is only possible\MessageBreak
    with pdftex version 1.30 or newer.\MessageBreak
    Ignoring \string\DisableLigatures}{Upgrade pdftex.}%
}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\subsubsection{Interaction with \pkg{babel}}
%
%\begin{macro}{\DeclareMicrotypeBabelHook}
% Declare the context that should be loaded when a \pkg{babel} language
% is selected. The command will not check whether a previous declaration will
% be overwritten.
%\changes{v2.0}{2005/10/04}{(beta:1) new command: interaction with \pkg{babel}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\DeclareMicrotypeBabelHook#1#2{%
  \MT@map@clist@n{#1}{%
    \KV@@sp@def\@tempa{##1}%
    \MT@gdef@n{MT@babel@\@tempa}{#2}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%
%\subsubsection{Fine tuning}
%
% The commands \cs{SetExpansion} and \cs{SetProtrusion} provide an interface for
% setting the character protrusion resp. expansion factors for a set of fonts.
%
%\begin{macro}{\SetProtrusion}
%\changes{v1.9}{2005/07/13}{(et al.) new key: \texttt{font}}
%\changes{v1.9d}{2006/02/23}{(et al.) split keys of optional and mandatory argument}
%\changes{v1.9d}{2006/02/23}{(et al.) optimise: unify keys for mandatory argument}
%\changes{v1.9e}{2006/07/26}{(et al.) new key: \texttt{inputenc}}
%\changes{v1.9f}{2006/08/10}{(et al.) set catcodes before parsing optional argument}
% This macro accepts three arguments: [options,] set of font attributes and
% list of character protrusion factors.
%
% A new macro called |\MT@pr@c@|\meta{name} will be defined to be \meta{\#3}
% (\ie, the list of characters, not expanded).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\SetProtrusion{%
  \MT@begin@catcodes
  \MT@SetProtrusion
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@SetProtrusion}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@pr@c@name}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@extra@context}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@permutelist}
% We want the catcodes to be correct even if this is called in the preamble.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\MT@SetProtrusion[3][]{%
  \let\MT@extra@context\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
% Parse the optional first argument. We first have to know the name before we
% can deal with the extra options.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \MT@set@named@keys{MT@pr@c}{#1}%
%<debug>\MT@dinfo{1}{creating protrusion list `\MT@pr@c@name'}%
  \def\MT@permutelist{pr@c}%
  \setkeys{MT@cfg}{#2}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% We have parsed the second argument, and can now define macros for all
% permutations of the font attributes to point to |\MT@pr@c@|\meta{name},~\dots
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \MT@permute
%    \end{macrocode}
% \dots~which we can now define to be \meta{\#3}.
% Here, as elsewhere, we have to make the definitions global, since they will
% occur inside a group.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \MT@gdef@n{MT@pr@c@\MT@pr@c@name}{#3}%
  \MT@end@catcodes
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\SetExpansion}
%\changes{v1.4}{2004/11/10}{fix: specifying extra options does no
%                           longer require to give a \texttt{name}, too}
%\changes{v1.9e}{2006/07/26}{new key: \texttt{inputenc}}
% \cs{SetExpansion} only differs in that it allows some extra options
% (|stretch|, |shrink|, |step|, |auto|).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\SetExpansion{%
  \MT@begin@catcodes
  \MT@SetExpansion
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@SetExpansion}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@ex@c@name}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@extra@context}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@permutelist}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\MT@SetExpansion[3][]{%
  \let\MT@extra@context\@empty
  \MT@set@named@keys{MT@ex@c}{#1}%
  \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@ex@c@\MT@ex@c@name @factor}{%
    \ifnum\csname MT@ex@c@\MT@ex@c@name @factor\endcsname > \@m
      \MT@warning@nl{Expansion factor \number\@nameuse{MT@ex@c@\MT@ex@c@name @factor}
        too large in list\MessageBreak `\MT@ex@c@name'. Setting it to the
        maximum of 1000}%
      \MT@glet@nc{MT@ex@c@\MT@ex@c@name @factor}\@m
    \fi
  }%
%<debug>\MT@dinfo{1}{creating expansion list `\MT@ex@c@name'}%
  \def\MT@permutelist{ex@c}%
  \setkeys{MT@cfg}{#2}%
  \MT@permute
  \MT@gdef@n{MT@ex@c@\MT@ex@c@name}{#3}%
  \MT@end@catcodes
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\SetTracking}
%\changes{v2.0}{2006/12/28}{new command: tracking}
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/02/23}{third argument may be empty}
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/02/23}{new key `\texttt{no ligatures}' to disable
%                           ligatures of letterspaced fonts}
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/06/16}{new keys `\texttt{spacing}' and `\texttt{outer spacing}'
%                           to adjust interword spacing
%                           (suggested by \contributor Steven~E. Harris <seh\at panix.com>)}
%                                                             ^^A private mail, 2007/06/15
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\SetTracking{%
  \MT@begin@catcodes
  \MT@SetTracking
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@SetTracking}
% Third argument may be empty.
%\changes{v2.3}{2007/11/20}{sanity check for value}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\MT@SetTracking[3][]{%
  \let\MT@extra@context\@empty
  \MT@set@named@keys{MT@tr@c}{#1}%
%<debug>\MT@dinfo{1}{creating tracking list `\MT@tr@c@name'}%
  \def\MT@permutelist{tr@c}%
  \setkeys{MT@cfg}{#2}%
  \MT@permute
  \KV@@sp@def\@tempa{#3}%
  \MT@ifempty\@tempa\relax{%
    \MT@ifint\@tempa
      {\MT@xdef@n{MT@tr@c@\MT@tr@c@name}{\@tempa}}%
      {\MT@warning{Value `\@tempa' is not a number in\MessageBreak
                   tracking set `\MT@curr@set@name'}}}%
  \MT@end@catcodes
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\SetExtraSpacing}
%\changes{v2.0}{2005/09/28}{(beta:1) new command: adjustment of interword spacing}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\SetExtraSpacing{%
  \MT@begin@catcodes
  \MT@SetExtraSpacing
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@SetExtraSpacing}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@sp@c@name}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@extra@context}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@permutelist}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\MT@SetExtraSpacing[3][]{%
  \let\MT@extra@context\@empty
  \MT@set@named@keys{MT@sp@c}{#1}%
%<debug>\MT@dinfo{1}{creating spacing list `\MT@sp@c@name'}%
  \def\MT@permutelist{sp@c}%
  \setkeys{MT@cfg}{#2}%
  \MT@permute
  \MT@gdef@n{MT@sp@c@\MT@sp@c@name}{#3}%
  \MT@end@catcodes
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\SetExtraKerning}
%\changes{v2.0}{2005/09/28}{(beta:1) new command: additional kerning}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\SetExtraKerning{%
  \MT@begin@catcodes
  \MT@SetExtraKerning
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@SetExtraKerning}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@kn@c@name}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@extra@context}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@permutelist}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand*\MT@SetExtraKerning[3][]{%
  \let\MT@extra@context\@empty
  \MT@set@named@keys{MT@kn@c}{#1}%
%<debug>\MT@dinfo{1}{creating kerning list `\MT@kn@c@name'}%
  \def\MT@permutelist{kn@c}%
  \setkeys{MT@cfg}{#2}%
  \MT@permute
  \MT@gdef@n{MT@kn@c@\MT@kn@c@name}{#3}%
  \MT@end@catcodes
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@named@keys}
%\changes{v1.9f}{2006/08/10}{new macro: set name first, simplify parsing of
%                            optional argument}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@options}
% We first set the name (if specified), then remove it from the list, and set
% the remaining keys.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@set@named@keys#1#2{%
  \def\x##1name=##2,##3\@nil{%
    \setkeys{#1}{name=##2}%
    \gdef\MT@options{##1##3}%
    \MT@rem@from@clist{name=}\MT@options
  }%
  \x#2,name=,\@nil
  \@expandtwoargs\setkeys{#1}\MT@options
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@define@code@key}
% Define the keys for the configuration lists (which are setting the codes, in
% \pdftex\ speak).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@define@code@key#1#2{%
  \define@key{MT@#2}{#1}[]{%
    \@tempcnta=\@ne
    \MT@map@clist@n{##1}{%
      \KV@@sp@def\MT@val{####1}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Here, too, we allow for something like `|bf*|'. It will be expanded
% immediately.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \MT@get@highlevel{#1}%
      \MT@edef@n{MT@temp#1\the\@tempcnta}{\MT@val}%
      \advance\@tempcnta \@ne
    }%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@define@code@key@size}
%\changes{v1.9c}{2006/01/25}{fix: embrace \cs{MT@tempsize} in \cmd\csname\
%                            (bug introduced in v1.9b)}
% \cs{MT@tempsize} must be in a \cmd\csname, so that it is at least
% \cmd\relax, not undefined.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@define@code@key@size#1{%
  \define@key{MT@#1}{size}[]{%
    \MT@map@clist@n{##1}{%
      \KV@@sp@def\MT@val{####1}%
      \expandafter\MT@get@range\MT@val--\@nil
      \ifx\MT@val\relax \else
        \MT@exp@cs\MT@xadd{MT@tempsize}%
           {{{\MT@lower}{\MT@upper}{\MT@curr@set@name}}}%
      \fi
    }%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@define@code@key@font}
%\changes{v1.9c}{2006/01/25}{fix: context was ignored}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@define@code@key@font#1{%
  \define@key{MT@#1}{font}[]{%
    \MT@map@clist@n{##1}{%
      \KV@@sp@def\MT@val{####1}%
      \MT@ifstreq\MT@val*{\def\MT@val{*/*/*/*/*}}\relax
      \expandafter\MT@get@font@and@size\MT@val/////\@nil
      \MT@xdef@n{MT@\MT@permutelist @\@tempb\MT@extra@context}%
        {\csname MT@\MT@permutelist @name\endcsname}%
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{1}{initialising: use list for font \@tempb=\MT@val
%<debug>                \ifx\MT@extra@context\@empty\else\MessageBreak
%<debug>                  (context: \MT@extra@context)\fi}%
      \MT@exp@cs\MT@xaddb
        {MT@\MT@permutelist @\@tempb\MT@extra@context @sizes}%
        {{{\MT@val}{\m@ne}{\MT@curr@set@name}}}%
    }%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@font@and@size}
% Translate any asterisks and split off the size.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@get@font@and@size#1/#2/#3/#4/#5/#6\@nil{%
  \MT@get@font@{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@define@code@key{encoding}{cfg}
\MT@define@code@key{family}  {cfg}
\MT@define@code@key{series}  {cfg}
\MT@define@code@key{shape}   {cfg}
\MT@define@code@key@size     {cfg}
\MT@define@code@key@font     {cfg}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@define@opt@key}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@define@opt@key#1#2{%
  \define@key{MT@#1@c}{#2}[]{\MT@ifempty{##1}\relax{%
    \MT@xdef@n{MT@#1@c@\MT@curr@set@name @#2}{##1}}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% The options in the optional first argument.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@map@clist@c\MT@features{%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/11/21}{`\meta{file name}\texttt{/}\meta{line number}' as default list name}
% Use file name and line number as the list name if the user didn't bother
% to invent one.
%\changes{v1.3}{2004/10/27}{fix: specifying \texttt{load} option does no
%                           longer require to give a \texttt{name}, too}
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/01/28}{simplify key declarations}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \define@key{MT@#1@c}{name}[]{%
    \MT@ifempty{##1}{%
      \MT@edef@n{MT@#1@c@name}{\MT@curr@file/\the\inputlineno}%
    }{%
      \MT@edef@n{MT@#1@c@name}{##1}%
      \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@#1@c@\csname MT@#1@c@name\endcsname}{%
        \MT@warning{Redefining \@nameuse{MT@abbr@#1} list `\@nameuse{MT@#1@c@name}'}%
      }%
    }%
    \MT@let@cn\MT@curr@set@name{MT@#1@c@name}%
  }%
  \MT@define@opt@key{#1}{load}%
  \MT@define@opt@key{#1}{factor}%
  \MT@define@opt@key{#1}{preset}%
  \MT@define@opt@key{#1}{inputenc}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Only one context is allowed. This might change in the future.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \define@key{MT@#1@c}{context}[]{\MT@ifempty{##1}\relax{\def\MT@extra@context{##1}}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Automatically enable font copying if we find a protrusion or expansion context.
% After the preamble, check whether font copying is enabled.
% For older \pdftex\ versions, disallow.
% Also disable for \luatex.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@requires@pdftex7{
%<*lua>
  \MT@requires@luatex{
    \define@key{MT@ex@c}{context}[]{%
      \MT@error{Expansion contexts currently don't work with luatex.\MessageBreak
          Ignoring `context' key\on@line}%
        {Use pdftex instead.}%
    }
  }{
%</lua>
    \define@key{MT@ex@c}{context}[]{%
      \MT@ifempty{#1}\relax{%
        \MT@glet\MT@copy@font\MT@copy@font@
        \def\MT@extra@context{#1}%
      }%
    }
    \MT@addto@setup{%
      \define@key{MT@ex@c}{context}[]{%
        \ifx\MT@copy@font\MT@copy@font@
          \MT@ifempty{#1}\relax{\def\MT@extra@context{#1}}%
        \else
          \MT@error{\MT@MT\space isn't set up for expansion contexts.\MessageBreak
             Ignoring `context' key\on@line}%
            {Either move the settings inside the preamble,\MessageBreak
             or load the package with the `copyfonts' option.}%
        \fi
      }%
    }
%    \end{macrocode}
% Protrusion contexts \emph{may} also work without copying the font, so we
% don't issue an error but only a warning. The problem is that \pdftex\ only
% allows one set of protrusion factors for a given font within one paragraph
% (those that are in effect at the end of the paragraph will be in effect for
% the whole paragraph). When different fonts are loaded -- like in the example
% with the footnote markers -- we don't need to copy the fonts.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \define@key{MT@pr@c}{context}[]{%
      \MT@ifempty{#1}\relax{%
        \MT@glet\MT@copy@font\MT@copy@font@
        \def\MT@extra@context{#1}%
      }%
    }
    \MT@addto@setup{%
      \define@key{MT@pr@c}{context}[]{%
        \MT@ifempty{#1}\relax{\def\MT@extra@context{#1}}%
        \ifx\MT@copy@font\MT@copy@font@\else
          \MT@warning@nl{If protrusion contexts don't work as expected,
            \MessageBreak load the package with the `copyfonts' option}%
        \fi
      }%
    }
%<lua>  }
}{
  \define@key{MT@ex@c}{context}[]{%
    \MT@error{Expansion contexts only work with pdftex 1.40.4\MessageBreak
        or later. Ignoring `context' key\on@line}%
      {Upgrade pdftex.}%
  }
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@warn@nodim}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@warn@nodim#1{%
  \MT@warning{`\@tempa' is not a dimension.\MessageBreak
              Ignoring it and setting values relative to\MessageBreak #1}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/14}{\cs{SetProtrusion}: new key: \texttt{unit}}
%\changes{v1.9}{2005/09/28}{\cs{SetProtrusion}: value `\texttt{relative}' renamed
%                           to `\texttt{character}' for key \texttt{unit}}
%\changes{v2.0}{2006/09/30}{option `\opt{unit}', \cs{SetProtrusion}:
%                           deprecate value `\texttt{relative}' completely}
% Protrusion codes may be relative to character width, or to any dimension.
%\todo{new key for unit: \texttt{dimen} (for \texttt{kerning}, especially)}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{MT@pr@c}{unit}[character]{%
  \MT@glet@nc{MT@pr@c@\MT@curr@set@name @unit}\@empty
  \def\@tempa{#1}%
  \MT@ifstreq\@tempa{character}\relax{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Test whether it's a dimension, but do not translate it into its final
% form here, since it may be font-specific.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \MT@ifdimen\@tempa
      {\MT@glet@nc{MT@pr@c@\MT@curr@set@name @unit}\@tempa}%
      {\MT@warn@nodim{character widths}}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Tracking may only be relative to a dimension.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{MT@tr@c}{unit}[1em]{%
  \MT@glet@nc{MT@tr@c@\MT@curr@set@name @unit}\@empty
  \def\@tempa{#1}%
  \MT@ifdimen\@tempa
    {\MT@glet@nc{MT@tr@c@\MT@curr@set@name @unit}\@tempa}%
    {\MT@warn@nodim{1em}%
     \MT@gdef@n{MT@tr@c@\MT@curr@set@name @unit}{1em}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Spacing and kerning codes may additionally be relative to space dimensions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@map@clist@n{sp,kn}{%
  \define@key{MT@#1@c}{unit}[space]{%
    \MT@glet@nc{MT@#1@c@\MT@curr@set@name @unit}\@empty
    \def\@tempa{##1}%
    \MT@ifstreq\@tempa{character}\relax{%
      \MT@glet@nc{MT@#1@c@\MT@curr@set@name @unit}\m@ne
      \MT@ifstreq\@tempa{space}\relax{%
        \MT@ifdimen\@tempa
          {\MT@glet@nc{MT@#1@c@\MT@curr@set@name @unit}\@tempa}%
          {\MT@warn@nodim{width of space}}%
      }%
    }%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The first argument to \cs{SetExpansion} accepts some more options.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@map@clist@n{stretch,shrink,step}{%
  \define@key{MT@ex@c}{#1}[]{%
    \MT@ifempty{##1}\relax{%
      \MT@ifint{##1}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% A space terminates the number.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \MT@gdef@n{MT@ex@c@\MT@curr@set@name @#1}{##1 }%
      }{%
        \MT@warning{%
          Value `##1' for option `#1' is not a number.\MessageBreak
          Ignoring it}%
      }%
    }%
  }%
}
\define@key{MT@ex@c}{auto}[true]{%
  \def\@tempa{#1}%
  \csname if\@tempa\endcsname
%    \end{macrocode}
% Don't use |autoexpand| for \pdftex\ version older than 1.20.
%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/07}{fix: remove space after \texttt{autoexpand}}
%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/07}{disallow automatic expansion if \pdftex\ too old}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \MT@requires@pdftex4{%
      \MT@gdef@n{MT@ex@c@\MT@curr@set@name @auto}{autoexpand}%
    }{%
      \MT@warning{pdftex too old for automatic font expansion}%
    }
  \else
    \MT@requires@pdftex4{%
      \MT@glet@nc{MT@ex@c@\MT@curr@set@name @auto}\@empty
    }\relax
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Tracking: Interword spacing and outer kerning.
% The variant with space in case \cs{SetTracking} is called inside an argument
% (\eg, to \cmd\IfFileExists).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@define@opt@key{tr}{spacing}
\MT@define@opt@key{tr}{outerspacing}
\MT@define@opt@key{tr}{outerkerning}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Which ligatures should be disabled?
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{MT@tr@c}{noligatures}[]%
  {\MT@xdef@n{MT@tr@c@\MT@curr@set@name @noligatures}{#1}}
\define@key{MT@tr@c}{outer spacing}[]{\setkeys{MT@tr@c}{outerspacing={#1}}}
\define@key{MT@tr@c}{outer kerning}[]{\setkeys{MT@tr@c}{outerkerning={#1}}}
\define@key{MT@tr@c}{no ligatures}[]{\setkeys{MT@tr@c}{noligatures={#1}}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\subsubsection{Character inheritance}
%
%\begin{macro}{\DeclareCharacterInheritance}
%\changes{v1.1}{2004/09/15}{new command: possibility to specify character inheritance}
%\changes{v1.9d}{2006/02/09}{fix: empty context}
%\changes{v1.9e}{2006/07/26}{new key `\texttt{inputenc}' to set the input encoding}
% This macro may be used in the configuration files to declare characters that
% should inherit protrusion resp. expansion values from other characters. Thus,
% there is no need to define all accented characters (\eg, |\`a|, |\'a|,
% |\^a|, |\~a|, |\"a|, |\r{a}|, |\k{a}|, |\u{a}|), which will make the
% configuration files look much nicer and easier to maintain. If a single
% character of an inheritance list should have a different value, one can
% simply override it.
%\begin{macro}{\MT@inh@feat}
% The optional argument may be used to restrict the list to some features,
%\begin{macro}{\MT@extra@inputenc}
% and to specify an input encoding.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand*\DeclareCharacterInheritance[1][]{%
  \let\MT@extra@context\@empty
  \let\MT@extra@inputenc\@undefined
  \let\MT@inh@feat\@empty
  \setkeys{MT@inh@}{#1}%
  \MT@begin@catcodes
  \MT@set@inh@list
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@inh@list}
% Safe category codes.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@set@inh@list#1#2{%
  \MT@ifempty\MT@inh@feat{%
    \MT@map@clist@c\MT@features{{\MT@declare@char@inh{##1}{#1}{#2}}}%
  }{%
    \MT@map@clist@c\MT@inh@feat{{%
      \KV@@sp@def\@tempa{##1}%
      \MT@ifempty\@tempa\relax{%
        \MT@exp@one@n\MT@declare@char@inh
          {\csname MT@rbba@\@tempa\endcsname}{#1}{#2}%
      }%
    }}%
  }%
  \MT@end@catcodes
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v1.9f}{2006/08/09}{fix: forgotten comma in the features list}
%\end{macro}
% The keys for the optional argument.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@map@clist@c\MT@features@long{%
  \define@key{MT@inh@}{#1}[]{\edef\MT@inh@feat{\MT@inh@feat#1,}}}
\define@key{MT@inh@}{inputenc}{\def\MT@extra@inputenc{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@declare@char@inh}
%\todo{share one list between features}
% The lists cannot be given a name by the user.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@declare@char@inh#1#2#3{%
  \MT@edef@n{MT@#1@inh@name}%
    {\MT@curr@file/\the\inputlineno (\@nameuse{MT@abbr@#1})}%
  \MT@let@cn\MT@curr@set@name{MT@#1@inh@name}%
  \MT@ifdefined@c@T\MT@extra@inputenc{%
    \MT@xdef@n{MT@#1@inh@\MT@curr@set@name @inputenc}{\MT@extra@inputenc}}%
%<debug>\MT@dinfo{1}{creating inheritance list `\@nameuse{MT@#1@inh@name}'}%
  \MT@gdef@n{MT@#1@inh@\csname MT@#1@inh@name\endcsname}{#3}%
  \def\MT@permutelist{#1@inh}%
  \setkeys{MT@inh}{#2}%
  \MT@permute
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Parse the second argument. \cs{DeclareCharacterInheritance} may also be set
% up for various combinations.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{MT@inh}{encoding}[]{%
  \def\MT@val{#1}%
  \expandafter\MT@encoding@check\MT@val,\@nil
  \MT@get@highlevel{encoding}%
  \MT@edef@n{MT@tempencoding1}{\MT@val}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@encoding@check}
%\changes{v1.2}{2004/09/29}{check whether only one encoding specified}
% But we only allow \emph{one} encoding.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@encoding@check#1,#2\@nil{%
  \MT@ifempty{#2}\relax{%
    \edef\MT@val{#1}%
    \MT@warning{You may only specify one encoding for character\MessageBreak
                inheritance lists. Ignoring encoding(s) #2}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% For the rest, we can reuse the key setup from the configuration lists
% (|\Set...|).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@define@code@key{family}{inh}
\MT@define@code@key{series}{inh}
\MT@define@code@key{shape} {inh}
\MT@define@code@key@size   {inh}
\MT@define@code@key@font   {inh}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@inh@do}
% Now parse the third argument, the inheritance lists. We define the commands
% |\MT@inh@|\meta{name}|@|\meta{slot}|@|, containing the inheriting characters.
% They will also be translated to slot numbers here, to save some time. The
% following will be executed only once, namely the first time this inheritance
% list is encountered (in |\MT@set@|\meta{feature}|@codes|).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@inh@do#1,{%
  \ifx\relax#1\@empty \else
    \MT@inh@split #1==\relax
    \expandafter\MT@inh@do
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@inh@split}
% Only gather the inheriting characters here. Their codes will actually be set
% in |\MT@set@|\meta{feature}|@codes|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@inh@split#1=#2=#3\relax{%
  \def\@tempa{#1}%
  \ifx\@tempa\@empty \else
    \MT@get@slot
    \ifnum\MT@char > \m@ne
      \let\MT@val\MT@char
      \MT@map@clist@n{#2}{%
        \def\@tempa{##1}%
        \ifx\@tempa\@empty \else
          \MT@get@slot
          \ifnum\MT@char > \m@ne
            \MT@exp@cs\MT@xadd{MT@inh@\MT@listname @\MT@val @}{{\MT@char}}%
          \fi
        \fi
      }%
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{2}{children of #1 (\MT@val):
%<debug>                \@nameuse{MT@inh@\MT@listname @\MT@val @}}%
    \fi
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\subsubsection{Permutation}
%
%\begin{macro}{\MT@permute}
%\changes{v1.1}{2004/09/15}{don't use sets for empty encoding}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@permute@}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@permute@@}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@permute@@@}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@permute@@@@}
% Calling \cs{MT@permute} will define commands for all permutations
% of the specified font attributes of the form
% |\MT@|\meta{list type}|@/|\allowbreak
%       \meta{encoding}|/|\allowbreak
%       \meta{family}|/|\allowbreak
%       \meta{series}|/|\allowbreak
%       \meta{shape}|/|\allowbreak
%       \meta{|\textbar*|}
% to be the expansion of |\MT@|\meta{list type}|@name|, \ie, the name of the
% currently defined list. Size ranges are held in a separate macro called
% |\MT@|\meta{list type}|@/|\allowbreak\meta{font axes}|@sizes|, which in turn
% contains the respective \meta{list name}s attached to the ranges.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@permute{%
  \let\MT@cnt@encoding\@ne
  \MT@permute@
%    \end{macrocode}
% Undefine commands for the next round.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \MT@map@tlist@n{{encoding}{family}{series}{shape}}\MT@permute@reset
  \MT@glet\MT@tempsize\@undefined
}
\def\MT@permute@{%
  \let\MT@cnt@family\@ne
  \MT@permute@@
  \MT@increment\MT@cnt@encoding
  \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@tempencoding\MT@cnt@encoding}%
    \MT@permute@
}
\def\MT@permute@@{%
  \let\MT@cnt@series\@ne
  \MT@permute@@@
  \MT@increment\MT@cnt@family
  \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@tempfamily\MT@cnt@family}%
    \MT@permute@@
}
\def\MT@permute@@@{%
  \let\MT@cnt@shape\@ne
  \MT@permute@@@@
  \MT@increment\MT@cnt@series
  \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@tempseries\MT@cnt@series}%
    \MT@permute@@@
}
\def\MT@permute@@@@{%
  \MT@permute@@@@@
  \MT@increment\MT@cnt@shape
  \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@tempshape\MT@cnt@shape}%
    \MT@permute@@@@
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@permute@@@@@}
%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/12/05}{don't define permutations for unused encodings}
% In order to save some memory, we can ignore unused encodings (inside the
% document).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@permute@@@@@{%
  \MT@permute@define{encoding}%
  \ifMT@document
    \ifx\MT@tempencoding\@empty \else
      \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{T@\MT@tempencoding}\relax
        {\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\@gobble}%
    \fi
  \fi
  \MT@permute@@@@@@
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@permute@@@@@@}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@permute@@@@@@{%
  \MT@permute@define{family}%
  \MT@permute@define{series}%
  \MT@permute@define{shape}%
  \edef\@tempa{\MT@tempencoding
              /\MT@tempfamily
              /\MT@tempseries
              /\MT@tempshape
              /\MT@ifdefined@c@T\MT@tempsize *}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v1.2}{2004/09/29}{more sanity checks for \cs{SetProtrusion} and
%                          \cs{SetExpansion}}
% Some sanity checks: an encoding must be specified (unless nothing else is).
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \MT@ifstreq\@tempa{////}\relax{%
    \ifx\MT@tempencoding\@empty
      \MT@warning{%
        You have to specify an encoding for\MessageBreak
        \@nameuse{MT@abbr@\MT@permutelist} list
        `\@nameuse{MT@\MT@permutelist @name}'.\MessageBreak
        Ignoring it}%
    \else
      \MT@ifdefined@c@TF\MT@tempsize{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Add the list of ranges to the beginning of the current combination, after
% checking for conflicts.
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/20}{add ranges to the beginning of the lists}
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@\MT@permutelist @\@tempa\MT@extra@context @sizes}{%
          \MT@map@tlist@c\MT@tempsize\MT@check@rlist
        }%
        \MT@exp@cs\MT@xaddb
          {MT@\MT@permutelist @\@tempa\MT@extra@context @sizes}%
          \MT@tempsize
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{1}{initialising: use list for font \@tempa,\MessageBreak
%<debug>         sizes: \csname MT@\MT@permutelist @\@tempa\MT@extra@context
%<debug>                        @sizes\endcsname}%
      }{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Only one list can apply to a given combination.
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@\MT@permutelist @\@tempa\MT@extra@context}{%
          \MT@warning{\@nameuse{MT@abbr@\MT@permutelist} list
            `\@nameuse{MT@\MT@permutelist @name}' will override list\MessageBreak
            `\@nameuse{MT@\MT@permutelist @\@tempa\MT@extra@context}'
            for font `\@tempa'}%
        }%
%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{1}{initialising: use list for font \@tempa
%<debug>                \ifx\MT@extra@context\@empty\else\MessageBreak
%<debug>                  (context: \MT@extra@context)\fi}%
      }%
      \MT@xdef@n{MT@\MT@permutelist @\@tempa\MT@extra@context}%
          {\csname MT@\MT@permutelist @name\endcsname}%
    \fi
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@permute@define}
% Define the commands.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@permute@define#1{%
  \@tempcnta=\csname MT@cnt@#1\endcsname\relax
  \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{MT@temp#1\the\@tempcnta}%
    {\MT@edef@n{MT@temp#1}{\csname MT@temp#1\the\@tempcnta\endcsname}}%
    {\MT@let@nc{MT@temp#1}\@empty}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@permute@reset}
% Reset the commands.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@permute@reset#1{%
  \@tempcnta=\@ne
  \MT@loop
    \MT@let@nc{MT@temp#1\the\@tempcnta}\@undefined
    \advance\@tempcnta\@ne
    \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{MT@temp#1\the\@tempcnta}%
      \iftrue
      \iffalse
  \MT@repeat
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@check@rlist}
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/20}{made recursive}
% For every new range item in \cs{MT@tempsize}, check whether it overlaps with
% ranges in the existing list.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@check@rlist#1{\expandafter\MT@check@rlist@ #1}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@check@rlist@}
% Define the current new range and~\dots
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@check@rlist@#1#2#3{%
  \def\@tempb{#1}%
  \def\@tempc{#2}%
  \MT@if@false
  \MT@exp@cs\MT@map@tlist@c
    {MT@\MT@permutelist @\@tempa\MT@extra@context @sizes}%
    \MT@check@range
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@check@range}
% \dots~recurse through the list of existing ranges.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@check@range#1{\expandafter\MT@check@range@ #1}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@check@range@}
% \cmd\@tempb\ and \cmd\@tempc\ are lower resp. upper bound of the new range,
% \meta{\#2} and \meta{\#3} those of the existing range.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@check@range@#1#2#3{%
  \MT@ifdim{#2}=\m@ne{%
    \MT@ifdim\@tempc=\m@ne{%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{itemize}
%  \item Both items are simple sizes.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \MT@ifdim\@tempb={#1}\MT@if@true\relax
    }{%
%    \end{macrocode}
%  \item Item in list is a simple size, new item is a range.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \MT@ifdim\@tempb>{#1}\relax{%
        \MT@ifdim\@tempc>{#1}{%
          \MT@if@true
          \edef\@tempb{#1 (with range: \@tempb\space to \@tempc)}%
        }\relax
      }%
    }%
  }{%
    \MT@ifdim\@tempc=\m@ne{%
%    \end{macrocode}
%  \item Item in list is a range, new item is a simple size.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \MT@ifdim\@tempb<{#2}{%
        \MT@ifdim\@tempb<{#1}\relax\MT@if@true
      }\relax
    }{%
%    \end{macrocode}
%  \item Both items are ranges.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \MT@ifdim\@tempb<{#2}{%
        \MT@ifdim\@tempc>{#1}{%
          \MT@if@true
          \edef\@tempb{#1 to #2 (with range: \@tempb\space to \@tempc)}%
        }\relax
      }\relax
    }%
  }%
  \ifMT@if@
    \MT@warning{\@nameuse{MT@abbr@\MT@permutelist} list
      `\@nameuse{MT@\MT@permutelist @name}' will override\MessageBreak
      list `#3' for font \@tempa,\MessageBreak size \@tempb}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% If we've already found a conflict with this item, we can skip the rest of the
% list.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \expandafter\MT@tlist@break
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{itemize}
%\end{macro}
%
%\subsection{Package options}
%
%\subsubsection{Declaring the options}
%
%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@opt@expansion}
%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@opt@auto}
%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@opt@DVI}
% Keep track of whether the user explicitly set these options.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifMT@opt@expansion
\newif\ifMT@opt@auto
\newif\ifMT@opt@DVI
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@optwarn@admissible}
% Some warnings.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@optwarn@admissible#1#2{%
  \MT@warning@nl{`#1' is not an admissible value for option\MessageBreak
                 `#2'. Assuming `false'}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@optwarn@nan}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package>
%<plain>\MT@requires@latex1{
\def\MT@optwarn@nan#1#2{%
  \MT@warning@nl{Value `#1' for option `#2' is not a\MessageBreak number.
                 Using default value of \number\@nameuse{MT@#2@default}}%
}
%<plain>}\relax
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@opt@def@set}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@opt@def@set#1{%
  \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{MT@\@tempb @set@@\MT@val}{%
    \MT@xdef@n{MT@\@tempb @setname}{\MT@val}%
  }{%
    \MT@xdef@n{MT@\@tempb @setname}{\@nameuse{MT@default@\@tempb @set}}%
    \MT@warning@nl{The #1 set `\MT@val' is undeclared.\MessageBreak
                   Using set `\@nameuse{MT@\@tempb @setname}' instead}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% \opt{expansion} and \opt{protrusion} may be |true|, |false|, |compatibility|,
% |nocompatibility| and/or a \meta{set name}.
%\changes{v1.9}{2005/10/06}{fix: use \texttt{true} as the default value}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@map@clist@n{protrusion,expansion}{%
  \define@key{MT}{#1}[true]{%
    \csname MT@opt@#1true\endcsname
    \MT@map@clist@n{##1}{%
      \KV@@sp@def\MT@val{####1}%
      \MT@ifempty\MT@val\relax{%
        \csname MT@#1true\endcsname
        \edef\@tempb{\csname MT@rbba@#1\endcsname}%
        \MT@ifstreq\MT@val{true}\relax
        {%
          \MT@ifstreq\MT@val{false}{%
            \csname MT@#1false\endcsname
          }{%
            \MT@ifstreq\MT@val{compatibility}{%
              \MT@let@nc{MT@\@tempb @level}\@ne
            }{%
              \MT@ifstreq\MT@val{nocompatibility}{%
                \MT@let@nc{MT@\@tempb @level}\tw@
              }{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% If everything failed, it should be a set name.
%    \begin{macrocode}
                \MT@opt@def@set{#1}%
              }%
            }%
          }%
        }%
      }%
    }%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \opt{activate} is a shortcut for \opt{protrusion} and \opt{expansion}.
%\changes{v1.9e}{2006/07/18}{fix: default value for \opt{activate}: \texttt{true}}
%\todo{add \opt{spacing} to \opt{activate}, when the feature has stabilised in \pdftex?}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{MT}{activate}[true]{%
   \setkeys{MT}{protrusion={#1}}%
   \setkeys{MT}{expansion={#1}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \opt{spacing}, \opt{kerning} and \opt{tracking} do not have a compatibility level.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@map@clist@n{spacing,kerning,tracking}{%
  \define@key{MT}{#1}[true]{%
    \MT@map@clist@n{##1}{%
      \KV@@sp@def\MT@val{####1}%
      \MT@ifempty\MT@val\relax{%
        \csname MT@#1true\endcsname
        \MT@ifstreq\MT@val{true}\relax
        {%
          \MT@ifstreq\MT@val{false}{%
            \csname MT@#1false\endcsname
          }{%
            \edef\@tempb{\csname MT@rbba@#1\endcsname}%
            \MT@opt@def@set{#1}%
          }%
        }%
      }%
    }%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v1.5}{2004/12/02}{new option: \opt{selected}, by default false
%               (suggested by \contributor \thanh{} <hanthethanh\at gmx.net>)}
%                                               ^^A private mail, 2004/11/30
%\changes{v2.0}{2005/10/04}{(beta:1) new option: \opt{babel}, by default false
%               (language-dependent setup suggested by \contributor Ulrich Dirr <ud\at art-satz.de>)}
%                                               ^^A private mail, 2005/08/27
%\begin{macro}{\MT@def@bool@opt}
% The |true|/|false| options:
% \opt{draft}, \opt{final} (may be inherited from the class options),
% \opt{auto},
% \opt{selected},
% \opt{babel},
% \opt{DVIoutput},
% \opt{defersetup},
% \opt{copyfonts}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@def@bool@opt#1#2{%
  \define@key{MT}{#1}[true]{%
    \def\@tempa{##1}%
    \MT@ifstreq\@tempa{true}\relax{%
      \MT@ifstreq\@tempa{false}\relax{%
        \MT@optwarn@admissible{##1}{#1}%
        \def\@tempa{false}%
      }%
    }%
    #2%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Boolean options that only set the switch.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@map@clist@n{draft,selected,babel}{%
  \MT@def@bool@opt{#1}{\csname MT@#1\@tempa\endcsname}}
\MT@def@bool@opt{auto}{\csname MT@auto\@tempa\endcsname \MT@opt@autotrue}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The \opt{DVIoutput} option will change \cmd\pdfoutput\ immediately to minimise
% the risk of confusing other packages.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@def@bool@opt{DVIoutput}{%
  \csname if\@tempa\endcsname
    \ifnum\pdfoutput>\z@ \MT@opt@DVItrue \fi
    \pdfoutput\z@
  \else
    \ifnum\pdfoutput<\@ne \MT@opt@DVItrue \fi
    \pdfoutput\@ne
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/11/21}{new option: \opt{defersetup}, by default true}
% Setting the \opt{defersetup} option to false will restore the old behaviour,
% where the setup took place at the time when the package was loaded. This is
% undocumented, since I would like to learn about the cases where this is
% necessary.
%
% The only problem with the new deferred setup I can think of is when a box
% is being constructed inside the preamble and this box contains a font that is
% not loaded before the box is being used.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@def@bool@opt{defersetup}{%
  \csname if\@tempa\endcsname \else
    \AtEndOfPackage{%
      \MT@setup@
      \let\MT@setup@\@empty
      \let\MT@addto@setup\@firstofone
    }%
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \opt{copyfonts} will copy all fonts before setting them up. This allows
% protrusion and expansion with different parameters.
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/07/03}{new option: \opt{copyfonts}}
% This options is also \emph{undocumented} in the hope that we can always find
% out automatically whether it's required.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@requires@pdftex7{
%<*lua>
  \MT@requires@luatex{
    \MT@def@bool@opt{copyfonts}{%
      \csname if\@tempa\endcsname
        \MT@error{The `copyfonts' option doesn't work with luatex}
                 {Use pdftex instead.}%
      \fi
    }
  }{
%</lua>
    \MT@def@bool@opt{copyfonts}{%
      \csname if\@tempa\endcsname
        \MT@glet\MT@copy@font\MT@copy@font@
      \else
        \MT@glet\MT@copy@font\relax
      \fi
    }
%<lua>  }
}{
  \MT@def@bool@opt{copyfonts}{%
    \csname if\@tempa\endcsname
      \MT@error{The pdftex version you are using is too old\MessageBreak
        to use the `copyfonts' option}{Upgrade pdftex.}%
    \fi
  }
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \opt{final} is the opposite to \opt{draft}.
%\changes{v1.4a}{2004/11/16}{new option: \opt{final}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@def@bool@opt{final}{%
  \csname if\@tempa\endcsname
    \MT@draftfalse
  \else
    \MT@drafttrue
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% For \opt{verbose} output, we redefine \cs{MT@vinfo}.
%\changes{v2.3}{2007/11/05}{turned some warnings into errors}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{MT}{verbose}[true]{%
  \let\MT@vinfo\MT@info@nl
  \def\@tempa{#1}%
  \MT@ifstreq\@tempa{true}\relax{%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/16}{new value for \opt{verbose} option: \texttt{errors}}
% Take problems seriously.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \MT@ifstreq\@tempa{errors}{%
      \let\MT@warning   \MT@warn@err
      \let\MT@warning@nl\MT@warn@err
    }{%
      \let\MT@vinfo\@gobble
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v2.3}{2007/11/05}{new value for \opt{verbose} option: \texttt{silent}
%                           (suggested by \contributor Karl Berry <karl\at freefriends.org>)}
%                                                              ^^A private mail, 2007/11/05
% Cast warnings to the winds.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \MT@ifstreq\@tempa{silent}{%
        \let\MT@warning   \MT@info
        \let\MT@warning@nl\MT@info@nl
      }{%
        \MT@ifstreq\@tempa{false}\relax{\MT@optwarn@admissible{#1}{verbose}}%
      }%
    }%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v1.5}{2004/12/02}{defaults: \opt{step}: 4
%               (suggested by \contributor \thanh{} <hanthethanh\at gmx.net>)}
%                                               ^^A private mail, 2004/11/30
%\changes{v1.6}{2004/12/18}{new option: \opt{factor}, by default 1000}
%\changes{v2.0}{2005/09/21}{(beta:1) new option: \opt{letterspace}, by default 100}
%^^A\changes{v2.0}{2007/01/05}{option `\texttt{letterspacing}' renamed to `\opt{letterspace}'}
% Options with numerical keys:
%   \opt{factor},
%   \opt{stretch},
%   \opt{shrink},
%   \opt{step},
%   \opt{letterspace}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package>
%<plain>\MT@requires@latex1{
\MT@map@clist@n{%
%<package>    stretch,shrink,step,%
    letterspace}{%
  \define@key{MT}{#1}[\csname MT@#1@default\endcsname]{%
    \def\@tempa{##1 }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% No nonsense in \cs{MT@factor} et al.?
%\changes{v1.6}{2005/01/06}{test whether numeric options receive a number}
% A space terminates the number.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \MT@ifint\@tempa
      {\MT@edef@n{MT@#1}{\@tempa}}%
      {\MT@optwarn@nan{##1}{#1}}%
  }%
}
%<plain>}\relax
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \opt{factor} will define the protrusion factor only.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{MT}{factor}[\MT@factor@default]{%
  \def\@tempa{#1 }%
  \MT@ifint\@tempa
    {\edef\MT@pr@factor{\@tempa}}
    {\MT@optwarn@nan{#1}{factor}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Unit for protrusion codes.
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/14}{new option: \opt{unit}, by default \texttt{character}}
%\changes{v1.9}{2005/09/28}{option \opt{unit}: rename value \texttt{relative} to \texttt{character}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{MT}{unit}[character]{%
  \def\@tempa{#1}%
  \MT@ifstreq\@tempa{character}\relax{%
    \MT@ifdimen\@tempa
      {\let\MT@pr@unit\@tempa}%
      {\MT@warning@nl{`\@tempa' is not a dimension.\MessageBreak
              Ignoring it and setting values relative to\MessageBreak
              character widths}}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsubsection{Reading the configuration file}
%
% The package should just work if called without any options. Therefore,
% expansion will be switched off by default if output is <DVI>, since it isn't
% likely that expanded fonts are available. (This grows more important as
% modern \TeX\ systems have switched to the \pdftex\ engine even for <DVI>
% output, so that the user might not even be aware of the fact that she's
% running \pdftex.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@protrusiontrue
\ifnum\pdfoutput<\@ne \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% Also, we only enable expansion by default if \pdftex\ can expand the fonts
% automatically.
%\changes{v1.6}{2004/12/23}{defaults: turn off expansion for old \pdftex\ versions}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \MT@requires@pdftex4{
    \MT@expansiontrue
    \MT@autotrue
  }\relax
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% The main configuration file will be loaded before processing the package
% options.
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/05/15}{new option: \opt{config} to load a different main
%                           configuration file}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@config@file}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@config}
% However, the \opt{config} option must of course be evaluated beforehand.
% We also have to define a no-op for the regular option processing later.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{MT}{config}[]{\relax}
\def\MT@get@config#1config=#2,#3\@nil{%
  \MT@ifempty{#2}%
    {\def\MT@config@file{\MT@MT.cfg}}%
    {\def\MT@config@file{#2.cfg}}%
}
\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\MT@get@config
  \csname opt@\@currname.\@currext\endcsname,config=,\@nil
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\changes{v1.4b}{2004/11/25}{fix: set catcodes before reading global configuration file
%                (reported by \contributor Christoph Bier <christoph.bier\at web.de>)}
%                                           ^^A MID: <30k2tqF30v483U1@uni-berlin.de>
% Load the file.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\IfFileExists{\MT@config@file}{%
  \MT@info@nl{Loading configuration file \MT@config@file}%
  \MT@begin@catcodes
    \let\MT@begin@catcodes\relax
    \let\MT@end@catcodes\relax
    \let\MT@curr@file\MT@config@file
    \input{\MT@config@file}%
  \endgroup
}{\MT@warning@nl{%
    Could not find configuration file `\MT@config@file'!\MessageBreak
    This will almost certainly cause undesired results.\MessageBreak
    Please fix your installation}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@check@active@set}
% We have to make sure that font sets are active. If the user didn't activate
% any, we use those sets declared by \cs{DeclareMicrotypeSetDefault} (this
% is done at the end of the preamble).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@check@active@set#1{%
  \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{MT@#1@setname}{%
    \MT@info@nl{Using \@nameuse{MT@abbr@#1} set `\@nameuse{MT@#1@setname}'}%
  }{%
    \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{MT@default@#1@set}{%
      \MT@glet@nn{MT@#1@setname}{MT@default@#1@set}%
      \MT@info@nl{Using default \@nameuse{MT@abbr@#1} set `\@nameuse{MT@#1@setname}'}%
    }{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% If no default font set has been declared in the main configuration file,
% we use the (empty, non-existent) set `|@|',
%\changes{v2.3d}{2008/11/24}{warning for missing default sets}
% and issue a warning.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \MT@gdef@n{MT@#1@setname}{@}%
      \MT@warning@nl{No \@nameuse{MT@abbr@#1} set chosen, no default set declared.
                     \MessageBreak Using empty set}%
    }%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\subsubsection{Hook for other packages}\label{sub:hook}
%
% {\let\special@index\index\SpecialIndex@{\Microtype@Hook}{\encapchar usage}}
%\begin{macro}{\Microtype@Hook}
%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/22}{new command for font package authors}
% This hook may be used by font package authors, \eg, to declare alias fonts. If
% it is defined, it will be executed here, \ie, after the main configuration
% file has been loaded, and before the package options are evaluated.
%
% This hook was needed in versions prior to 1.9a to overcome the situation that
% (1)~the \microtype\ package should be loaded after all font defaults have
% been set up (hence, using \cmd\@ifpackageloaded\ in the font package was not
% viable), and (2)~checking \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ could be too late, since
% fonts might already have been loaded, and consequently set up, in the
% preamble. With the new deferred setup, one could live without this command,
% however, it remains here since it's simpler than testing whether the package
% was loaded both in the preamble as well as at the beginning of the document
% (which is what one would have to do).
%
% Package authors should check whether the command is already defined so that
% existing definitions by other packages aren't overwritten. Example:
%\begin{verbatim}
%\def\MinionPro@MT@Hook{\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{MinionPro-LF}{MinionPro}}
%\@ifpackageloaded{microtype}
%  \MinionPro@MT@Hook
%  {\@ifundefined{Microtype@Hook}
%    {\let\Microtype@Hook\MinionPro@MT@Hook}
%    {\g@addto@macro\Microtype@Hook{\MinionPro@MT@Hook}}}
%\end{verbatim}
% \cs{MicroType@Hook} with a capital |T| (which only existed in version 1.7) is
% provided for compatibility reasons. At some point in the future, it will no
% longer be available, hence it should not be used.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@ifdefined@c@T\MicroType@Hook{\MT@warning{%
  Command \string\MicroType@Hook\space is deprecated.\MessageBreak
      Use \string\Microtype@Hook\space instead}\MicroType@Hook}
\MT@ifdefined@c@T\Microtype@Hook\Microtype@Hook
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%
%\subsubsection{Changing options later}
%
%\begin{macro}{\microtypesetup}
%\changes{v1.4}{2004/11/04}{fix: set the correct levels, and remember them;
%                           warning when enabling an option disabled in package options}
%\changes{v1.7}{2005/02/17}{fix: warning also when setting to \texttt{(no)compatibility}}
%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/11/21}{inside the preamble, accepts all package options}
%\changes{v2.3d}{2009/03/05}{select font after setup}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@define@optionX}
% Inside the preamble, \cs{microtypesetup} accepts the same options as the
% package (unless \opt{defersetup}|=false|).
% In the document body, it accepts the options:
% |protrusion|, |expansion|, |activate|, |tracking|, |spacing| and |kerning|.
% Specifying font sets is not allowed.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\microtypesetup{\setkeys{MT}}
\MT@addto@setup{\def\microtypesetup#1{\setkeys{MTX}{#1}\selectfont}}
\def\MT@define@optionX#1#2{%
  \define@key{MTX}{#1}[true]{%
    \edef\@tempb{\csname MT@rbba@#1\endcsname}%
    \MT@map@clist@n{##1}{%
      \KV@@sp@def\MT@val{####1}%
      \MT@ifempty\MT@val\relax{%
        \@tempcnta=\m@ne
        \MT@ifstreq\MT@val{true}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Enabling micro-typography in the middle of the document is not allowed if it
% has been disabled in the package options since fonts might already have been
% loaded and hence wouldn't be set up.
%    \begin{macrocode}
          \MT@checksetup{#1}{%
            \@tempcnta=\csname MT@\@tempb @level\endcsname
            \MT@vinfo{Enabling #1
                    (level \number\csname MT@\@tempb @level\endcsname)\on@line}%
          }%
        }{%
          \MT@ifstreq\MT@val{false}{%
            \@tempcnta=\z@
            \MT@vinfo{Disabling #1\on@line}%
          }{%
            \MT@ifstreq\MT@val{compatibility}{%
              \MT@checksetup{#1}{%
                \@tempcnta=\@ne
                \MT@let@nc{MT@\@tempb @level}\@ne
                \MT@vinfo{Setting #1 to level 1\on@line}%
              }%
            }{%
              \MT@ifstreq\MT@val{nocompatibility}{%
                \MT@checksetup{#1}{%
                  \@tempcnta=\tw@
                  \MT@let@nc{MT@\@tempb @level}\tw@
                  \MT@vinfo{Setting #1 to level 2\on@line}%
                }%
              }{\MT@error{Value `\MT@val' for key `#1' not recognised}
                         {Use any of `true', `false', `compatibility' or
                          `nocompatibility'.}%
              }%
            }%
          }%
        }%
        \ifnum\@tempcnta>\m@ne
          #2\@tempcnta\relax
        \fi
      }%
    }%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@checksetup}
% Test whether the feature wasn't disabled in the package options.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@checksetup#1{%
  \csname ifMT@#1\endcsname
    \expandafter\@firstofone
  \else
    \MT@error{You cannot enable #1 if it was disabled\MessageBreak
              in the package options}{Load microtype with #1 enabled.}%
    \expandafter\@gobble
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@define@optionX{protrusion}\pdfprotrudechars
\MT@define@optionX{expansion}\pdfadjustspacing
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@define@optionX@}
% The same for |tracking|, |spacing| and |kerning|, which do not have a
% |compatibility| level.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@requires@pdftex6{
%<lua>  \MT@requires@luatex\@firstofone{
  \def\MT@define@optionX@#1#2{%
    \define@key{MTX}{#1}[true]{%
      \MT@map@clist@n{##1}{%
        \KV@@sp@def\MT@val{####1}%
        \MT@ifempty\MT@val\relax{%
          \@tempcnta=\m@ne
          \MT@ifstreq\MT@val{true}{%
            \MT@checksetup{#1}{%
              \@tempcnta=\@ne
              \MT@vinfo{Enabling #1\on@line}%
            }%
          }{%
            \MT@ifstreq\MT@val{false}{%
              \@tempcnta=\z@
              \MT@vinfo{Disabling #1\on@line}%
            }{\MT@error{Value `\MT@val' for key `#1' not recognised}
                       {Use either `true' or `false'}%
            }%
          }%
          \ifnum\@tempcnta>\m@ne
            #2\relax
          \fi
        }%
      }%
    }%
  }
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% We cannot simply let \cs{MT@tracking} relax, since this may select the already
% letterspaced font instance.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \MT@define@optionX@{tracking}{\ifnum\@tempcnta=\z@ \let\MT@tracking\MT@set@tr@zero
                                \else \let\MT@tracking\MT@tracking@ \fi}
  \MT@define@optionX@{spacing}{\pdfadjustinterwordglue\@tempcnta}
  \MT@define@optionX@{kerning}{\pdfprependkern\@tempcnta
                               \pdfappendkern \@tempcnta}
  \@gobble
%<lua>  }
}\@firstofone
%    \end{macrocode}
% Disable for older \pdftex\ versions and for \luatex.
%    \begin{macrocode}
{\define@key{MTX}{tracking}[true]{\MT@warning{Ignoring tracking setup}}
 \define@key{MTX}{kerning}[true]{\MT@warning{Ignoring kerning setup}}
 \define@key{MTX}{spacing}[true]{\MT@warning{Ignoring spacing setup}}
}
\define@key{MTX}{activate}[true]{%
  \setkeys{MTX}{protrusion={#1}}%
  \setkeys{MTX}{expansion={#1}}%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@saved@setupfont}
% Disable everything -- may be used as a work-around in case setting up fonts
% doesn't work in certain environments. \emph{(Undocumented.)}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\MT@saved@setupfont\MT@setupfont
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\define@key{MTX}{disable}[]{%
  \MT@info{Inactivate `\MT@MT' package}%
  \let\MT@setupfont\relax
}
\define@key{MTX}{enable}[]{%
  \MT@info{Reactivate `\MT@MT' package}%
  \let\MT@setupfont\MT@saved@setupfont
}
%</package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\subsubsection{Processing the options}\label{sssec:impl.options}
%
%\begin{macro}{\MT@ProcessOptionsWithKV}
% Parse options.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<plain>\MT@requires@latex1{
\def\MT@ProcessOptionsWithKV#1{%
  \let\@tempc\relax
  \let\MT@temp\@empty
%<plain>  \MT@requires@latex2{
    \MT@map@clist@c\@classoptionslist{%
      \def\CurrentOption{##1}%
      \MT@ifdefined@n@T{KV@#1@\expandafter\MT@getkey\CurrentOption=\@nil}{%
        \edef\MT@temp{\MT@temp,\CurrentOption,}%
        \@expandtwoargs\@removeelement\CurrentOption
          \@unusedoptionlist\@unusedoptionlist
      }%
    }%
    \edef\MT@temp{\noexpand\setkeys{#1}%
                    {\MT@temp\@ptionlist{\@currname.\@currext}}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \pkg{eplain} can handle package options.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*plain>
  }{\edef\MT@temp{\noexpand\setkeys{#1}%
                    {\csname usepkg@options@\usepkg@pkg\endcsname}}}
%</plain>
  \MT@temp
  \MT@clear@options
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@getkey}
% For |key=val| in class options.
%\changes{v2.3a}{2008/02/09}{fix: \texttt{key\quotechar=val} in class options list}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@getkey#1=#2\@nil{#1}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@ProcessOptionsWithKV{MT}
%<plain>}\relax
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
% Now we can take the appropriate actions. We also tell the log file which
% options the user has chosen (in case it's interested).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@addto@setup{%
\ifMT@draft
%    \end{macrocode}
% We disable most of what we've just defined in the \arabic{CodelineNo} lines
% above if we are running in draft mode.
%\changes{v1.7}{2005/02/06}{warning when running in draft mode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \MT@warning@nl{`draft' option active.\MessageBreak
                 Disabling all micro-typographic extensions.\MessageBreak
                 This might lead to different line and page breaks}%
  \let\MT@setupfont\relax
  \renewcommand*\LoadMicrotypeFile[1]{}%
  \renewcommand*\microtypesetup[1]{}%
  \renewcommand*\microtypecontext[1]{}%
  \renewcommand*\lsstyle{}%
\else
%    \end{macrocode}
% For <DVI> output, the user must have explicitly passed the \opt{expansion}
% option to the package.
%\changes{v1.5}{2004/12/02}{defaults: turn off expansion for <DVI> output}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifnum\pdfoutput<\@ne
    \ifMT@opt@expansion \else
      \MT@expansionfalse
    \fi
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% \pdftex\ can create <DVI> output, too. However, both the <DVI> viewer and
% |dvips| need to find actual fonts. Therefore, expansion will only work if the
% fonts for different degrees of expansion are readily available.
%
%\changes{v1.4b}{2004/11/19}{new message if \cmd\pdfoutput\ is changed}
% Some packages depend on the value of \cmd\pdfoutput\ and will get confused if
% it is changed after they have been loaded. These packages are, among others:
% \pkg{color}, \pkg{graphics}, \pkg{hyperref}, \pkg{crop}, \pkg{contour},
% \pkg{pstricks} and, as a matter of course, \pkg{ifpdf}. Instead of testing
% for each package (that's not our job), we only say that it was \microtype\
% that changed it. This must be sufficient!
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \MT@info@nl{Generating \ifnum\pdfoutput<\@ne DVI \else PDF \fi output%
              \ifMT@opt@DVI\space (changed by \MT@MT)\fi}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Working on font copies?
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifx\MT@copy@font\relax\else \MT@info@nl{Using font copies for contexts}\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Fix the font sets.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \MT@map@tlist@c\MT@font@sets\MT@fix@font@set
%    \end{macrocode}
% Protrusion.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifMT@protrusion
    \edef\MT@active@features{\MT@active@features,pr}%
    \pdfprotrudechars\MT@pr@level
    \MT@info@nl{Character protrusion enabled (level \number\MT@pr@level)%
      \ifnum\MT@pr@factor=\MT@factor@default \else,\MessageBreak
        factor: \number\MT@pr@factor\fi
      \ifx\MT@pr@unit\@empty \else,\MessageBreak unit: \MT@pr@unit\fi}%
    \MT@check@active@set{pr}%
  \else
    \let\MT@protrusion\relax
    \MT@info@nl{No character protrusion}%
  \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Expansion.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifMT@expansion
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set up the values for font expansion: if \opt{stretch} has not been specified, we
% take the default value of 20.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifnum\MT@stretch=\m@ne
      \let\MT@stretch\MT@stretch@default
    \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% If \opt{shrink} has not been specified, it will inherit the value from \opt{stretch}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifnum\MT@shrink=\m@ne
      \let\MT@shrink\MT@stretch
    \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v2.3d}{2008/11/19}{default \texttt{step}: 1 for \pdftex\ versions $\geq$ 1.40}
% If \opt{step} has not been specified, we will just set it to 1 for recent
% \pdftex\ versions. My tests did not show much difference neither in
% compilation time (within the margin of error) nor in file size (less than
% 1\% difference for \file{microtype.pdf} with |step=1| compared to |step=5|).
%\changes{v1.5}{2004/12/02}{defaults: calculate \opt{step} as
%                           min(\texttt{stretch},\texttt{shrink})/5}
% With older versions, we set it to min(\opt{stretch},\opt{shrink})/5,
% rounded off, minimum value 1.
%\changes{v1.9}{2005/07/08}{warning if user requested zero \opt{step}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \MT@requires@pdftex6{\def\MT@step{1 }}{%
      \ifnum\MT@step=\m@ne
        \ifnum\MT@stretch>\MT@shrink
          \ifnum\MT@shrink=\z@
            \@tempcnta=\MT@stretch
          \else
            \@tempcnta=\MT@shrink
          \fi
        \else
          \ifnum\MT@stretch=\z@
            \@tempcnta=\MT@shrink
          \else
            \@tempcnta=\MT@stretch
          \fi
        \fi
        \divide\@tempcnta 5\relax
      \else
        \@tempcnta=\MT@step
        \ifnum\@tempcnta=\z@
          \MT@warning@nl{The expansion step cannot be set to zero.\MessageBreak
            Setting it to one}
        \fi
      \fi
      \ifnum\@tempcnta=\z@ \@tempcnta=\@ne \fi
      \edef\MT@step{\number\@tempcnta\space}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@auto}
% Automatic expansion of the font? This new feature of \pdftex\ 1.20 makes the
% \textit{\fontfamily{pzc}\selectfont hz}~programme really usable.
% It must be either `|autoexpand|' or empty (or `|1000|' for older versions of
% \pdftex).
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \let\MT@auto\@empty
    \ifMT@auto
      \MT@requires@pdftex4{%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% We turn off automatic expansion if output mode is <DVI>.
%\changes{v1.5}{2004/12/02}{disable automatic expansion for <DVI> output}
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \ifnum\pdfoutput<\@ne
          \ifMT@opt@auto
            \MT@error{%
              Automatic font expansion only works for PDF output.\MessageBreak
              However, you are creating a DVI file}
             {If you have created expanded fonts instances, remove `auto' from%
              \MessageBreak the package options. Otherwise, you have to switch
              off expansion\MessageBreak completely.}%
          \fi
          \MT@autofalse
        \else
          \def\MT@auto{autoexpand}%
        \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Also, if \pdftex\ is too old.
%\changes{v1.1}{2004/09/13}{issue an error instead of a warning, when \pdftex\
%                            version is too old for \texttt{autoexpand}}
%\changes{v1.6}{2004/12/23}{disable automatic expansion for old \pdftex\ versions}
%    \begin{macrocode}
      }{%
        \MT@error{%
          The pdftex version you are using is too old for\MessageBreak
          automatic font expansion}%
         {If you have created expanded fonts instances, remove `auto' from\MessageBreak
          the package options. Otherwise, you have to switch off expansion\MessageBreak
          completely, or upgrade pdftex to version 1.20 or newer.}%
        \MT@autofalse
        \def\MT@auto{1000 }%
      }%
    \else
%    \end{macrocode}
% No automatic expansion.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \MT@requires@pdftex4\relax{%
        \def\MT@auto{1000 }%
      }%
    \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Choose the appropriate macro for selected expansion.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifMT@selected
      \let\MT@set@ex@codes\MT@set@ex@codes@s
    \else
      \let\MT@set@ex@codes\MT@set@ex@codes@n
    \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Filter out |stretch=0,shrink=0|, since it would result in a \pdftex\ error.
%\changes{v1.9}{2005/07/08}{disable expansion if both \opt{step} and \opt{shrink} are zero}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifnum\MT@stretch=\z@
      \ifnum\MT@shrink=\z@
        \MT@warning@nl{%
          Both the stretch and shrink limit are set to zero.\MessageBreak
          Disabling font expansion}%
        \MT@expansionfalse
      \fi
    \fi
  \fi
  \ifMT@expansion
    \edef\MT@active@features{\MT@active@features,ex}%
    \pdfadjustspacing\MT@ex@level
    \MT@info@nl{\ifMT@auto A\else Non-a\fi utomatic font expansion enabled
                (level \number\MT@ex@level),\MessageBreak
                stretch: \number\MT@stretch, shrink: \number\MT@shrink,
                step: \number\MT@step, \ifMT@selected\else non-\fi selected}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/01/28}{warning if \opt{stretch} or \opt{shrink} aren't multiples of \opt{step}}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@check@step}
% Check whether \opt{stretch} and \opt{shrink} are multiples of \opt{step}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \def\MT@check@step#1{%
      \@tempcnta=\csname MT@#1\endcsname
      \divide\@tempcnta \MT@step
      \multiply\@tempcnta \MT@step
      \ifnum\@tempcnta=\csname MT@#1\endcsname\else
        \MT@warning@nl{The #1 amount is not a multiple of step.\MessageBreak
                       The effective maximum #1 is \the\@tempcnta\space
                       (step \number\MT@step)}%
      \fi
    }%
    \MT@check@step{stretch}%
    \MT@check@step{shrink}%
    \MT@check@active@set{ex}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/02}{modify \cmd\showhyphens}
% Inside \cmd\showhyphens, font expansion should be disabled.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \CheckCommand*\showhyphens[1]{\setbox0\vbox{%
      \color@begingroup\everypar{}\parfillskip\z@skip
      \hsize\maxdimen\normalfont\pretolerance\m@ne\tolerance\m@ne
      \hbadness\z@\showboxdepth\z@\ #1\color@endgroup}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\showhyphens}
% I wonder why it's defined globally (in \file{ltfssbas.dtx})?
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \gdef\showhyphens#1{\setbox0\vbox{%
      \color@begingroup\pdfadjustspacing\z@\everypar{}\parfillskip\z@skip
      \hsize\maxdimen\normalfont\pretolerance\m@ne\tolerance\m@ne
      \hbadness\z@\showboxdepth\z@\ #1\color@endgroup}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \else
    \let\MT@expansion\relax
    \MT@info@nl{No font expansion}%
  \fi
}
\MT@requires@pdftex6{
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@warn@lua}
% Switch off the features that don't work with \luatex.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*lua>
  \def\MT@warn@lua#1{%
    \MT@error{The `#1' feature doesn't currently work\MessageBreak with luatex}
             {Use pdftex instead.}%
    \csname MT@#1false\endcsname
    \MT@let@nc{MT@#1}\relax
  }
%</lua>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package>
  \MT@addto@setup{%
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
% Tracking, spacing and kerning.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifMT@tracking
%<lua>      \MT@requires@luatex{\MT@warn@lua{tracking}}{%
        \edef\MT@active@features{\MT@active@features,tr}%
        \MT@info@nl{Tracking enabled}%
        \MT@check@active@set{tr}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Enable protrusion for compensation at the line edges.
%\changes{v2.3}{2007/07/27}{enable protrusion when tracking is enabled}
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \ifMT@protrusion\else\pdfprotrudechars\@ne\fi
%<lua>      }%
    \else
      \let\MT@tracking\relax
      \MT@info@nl{No tracking}%
    \fi
    \ifMT@spacing
%<lua>      \MT@requires@luatex{\MT@warn@lua{spacing}}{%
        \edef\MT@active@features{\MT@active@features,sp}%
        \pdfadjustinterwordglue\@ne
        \MT@info@nl{Adjustment of interword spacing enabled}%
        \MT@check@active@set{sp}%
%<lua>      }%
    \else
      \let\MT@spacing\relax
      \MT@info@nl{No adjustment of interword spacing}%
    \fi
    \ifMT@kerning
%<lua>      \MT@requires@luatex{\MT@warn@lua{kerning}}{%
        \edef\MT@active@features{\MT@active@features,kn}%
        \pdfprependkern\@ne
        \pdfappendkern\@ne
        \MT@info@nl{Adjustment of character kerning enabled}%
        \MT@check@active@set{kn}%
%<lua>      }%
    \else
      \let\MT@kerning\relax
      \MT@info@nl{No adjustment of character kerning}%
    \fi
%</package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@warn@tracking@DVI}
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/02/11}{warning when letterspacing in DVI mode}
% We issue a warning, when letterspacing in <DVI> mode, since it will probably
% not work. We also switch on protrusion if it isn't already, to compensate for
% the letterspacing kerns.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifnum\pdfoutput<\@ne
      \def\MT@warn@tracking@DVI{%
        \MT@warning@nl{%
            You are using tracking/letterspacing in DVI mode.\MessageBreak
            This will probably not work, unless the post-\MessageBreak
            processing program (dvips, dvipdfm(x), ...) is\MessageBreak
            able to create the virtual fonts on the fly}%
        \MT@glet\MT@warn@tracking@DVI\relax
      }%
    \else
      \def\MT@warn@tracking@DVI{%
        \ifnum\pdfprotrudechars<\@ne \global\pdfprotrudechars\@ne \fi
        \MT@glet\MT@warn@tracking@DVI\relax
      }%
    \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifnum\MT@letterspace=\m@ne
      \let\MT@letterspace\MT@letterspace@default
    \else
      \MT@ls@too@large\MT@letterspace
    \fi
  }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% If \pdftex\ is too old, we disable tracking, spacing and kerning,
%\changes{v2.3a}{2008/02/16}{error messages if \pdftex\ is too old for extensions}
% and throw an error message.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*package>
}{
  \MT@addto@setup{%
    \ifMT@tracking
      \MT@error{Tracking only works with pdftex version 1.40\MessageBreak
        or newer. Switching it off}{Upgrade pdftex.}%
    \else
      \MT@info@nl{No tracking (pdftex too old)}%
    \fi
    \ifMT@spacing
      \MT@error{Adjustment of interword spacing only works with\MessageBreak
        pdftex version 1.40 or newer. Switching it off}{Upgrade pdftex.}%
    \else
      \MT@info@nl{No adjustment of interword spacing (pdftex too old)}%
    \fi
    \ifMT@kerning
      \MT@error{Character kerning only works with\MessageBreak
        pdftex version 1.40 or newer. Switching it off}{Upgrade pdftex.}%
    \else
      \MT@info@nl{No adjustment of character kerning (pdftex too old)}%
    \fi
  }
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \cs{DisableLigatures} is only admissible in the preamble, therefore we can
% now disable the corresponding macro, if it was never called.
%\changes{v2.0}{2006/12/14}{maybe disable \cs{MT@noligatures} after the preamble}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@requires@pdftex5{
  \MT@addto@setup{%
    \ifMT@noligatures \else
      \let\MT@noligatures\relax
    \fi
  }
}\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% Remove the leading comma in \cs{MT@active@features}, and set the
% document switch to true.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@addto@setup{%
  \ifx\MT@active@features\@empty \else
    \edef\MT@active@features{\expandafter\@gobble\MT@active@features}%
  \fi
  \MT@documenttrue
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@babel@context}
% Interaction with \pkg{babel}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\MT@set@babel@context#1{%
  \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{MT@babel@#1}{%
    \MT@vinfo{*** Changing to language context `#1'\MessageBreak\on@line}%
    \expandafter\MT@exp@one@n\expandafter\microtypecontext
      \csname MT@babel@#1\endcsname
  }{%
    \microtypecontext{protrusion=,expansion=,spacing=,kerning=}%
  }%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@shorthandoff}
% Active characters can only be switched off if \pkg{babel} isn't loaded after
% \microtype.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifpackageloaded{babel}{
  \def\MT@shorthandoff#1#2{%
    \MT@info@nl{Switching off #1 babel's active characters (#2)}%
    \shorthandoff{#2}}
}{
  \def\MT@shorthandoff#1#2{%
    \MT@error{You must load `babel' before `\MT@MT'}
             {Otherwise, `\MT@MT' cannot switch off #1 babel's\MessageBreak
              active characters.}}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% We patch the language switching commands to enable language-dependent setup.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@addto@setup{%
  \ifMT@babel
    \@ifpackageloaded{babel}{%
      \MT@info@nl{Redefining babel's language switching commands}%
      \let\MT@orig@select@language\select@language
      \def\select@language#1{%
        \MT@orig@select@language{#1}%
        \MT@set@babel@context{#1}%
      }%
      \let\MT@orig@foreign@language\foreign@language
      \def\foreign@language#1{%
        \MT@orig@foreign@language{#1}%
        \MT@set@babel@context{#1}%
      }%
      \ifMT@kerning
%    \end{macrocode}
%\todo{make switching off of babel's shorthands configurable}
% Disable French \pkg{babel}'s active characters.
%\changes{v2.0}{2006/10/10}{(beta:8) option `\opt{babel}': fix: switch off French
%                           \pkg{babel}'s shorthands properly
%                           (reported by \contributor Daniel Flipo <daniel.flipo\at univ-lille1.fr>)}
%                                                      ^^A private mail, 2006/10/09
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \MT@if@false
        \MT@with@babel@and@T{french}  \MT@if@true
        \MT@with@babel@and@T{frenchb} \MT@if@true
        \MT@with@babel@and@T{francais}\MT@if@true
        \MT@with@babel@and@T{canadien}\MT@if@true
        \MT@with@babel@and@T{acadian} \MT@if@true
        \ifMT@if@\MT@shorthandoff{French}{:;!?}\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Disable Turkish \pkg{babel}'s active characters.
%\changes{v2.0}{2006/10/10}{(beta:8) option `\opt{babel}': switch off Turkish \pkg{babel}'s shorthands}
%\changes{v2.3}{2007/10/03}{fix: really switch off Turkish shorthands}
%    \begin{macrocode}
        \MT@if@false
        \MT@with@babel@and@T{turkish} \MT@if@true
        \ifMT@if@\MT@shorthandoff{Turkish}{:!=}\fi
      \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% In case \pkg{babel} was loaded before \microtype:
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \MT@set@babel@context\languagename
    }{%
      \MT@warning@nl{You did not load the babel package.\MessageBreak
        The `babel' option won't have any effect}%
    }%
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Now we close the \cs{fi} from \cs{ifMT@draft}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@addto@setup{\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Set up the current font, most likely the normal font. This has to come after
% all of the setup (including anything from the preamble) has been dealt with.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \selectfont}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{macro}{\MT@curr@file}
% This is the current file (hopefully with the correct extension).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\edef\MT@curr@file{\jobname.tex}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{macro}
% Finally, execute the setup macro at the end of the preamble, and empty it
% (the \pkg{combine} class calls it repeatedly).
%\changes{v2.3d}{2009/02/05}{move setup to the very end
%                            (for \contributor Colin Rourke <gt\at msp.warwick.ac.uk>)}
%                                                       ^^A private mail, 2009/02/03
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package>
%<plain>\MT@requires@latex1{
\AtBeginDocument{\MT@setup@ \MT@glet\MT@setup@\@empty}
%<plain>}\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% Warning if \cmd\nonfrenchspacing\ is active, since space factors will be
% ignored with \cmd\pdfadjustinterwordglue\,|>|\,0. Why 1500? Because some
% packages redefine \cmd\frenchspacing.\footnote{
%   Cf. the \texttt{c.t.t.} thread `\cmd\frenchspacing\ with <AMS> packages
%   and babel', started by Philipp Lehman on 16~August 2005,
%   <MID>:~\nolinkurl{ddtbaj$rob$1@online.de}}
% This has to be checked after the setup has taken place. There still will be a
% false warning if \pkg{babel} is loaded after \microtype\ (without the
% \opt{babel} option).
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*package>
\MT@requires@pdftex6{
  \AtBeginDocument{%
    \ifMT@spacing
      \ifMT@babel \else
        \ifnum\sfcode`\. > 1500
          \MT@ifstreq\MT@sp@context{nonfrench}\relax{%
            \MT@warning@nl{%
              \string\nonfrenchspacing\space is active. Adjustment of\MessageBreak
              interword spacing will disable it. You might want\MessageBreak
              to add `\@backslashchar\MT@MT context{spacing=nonfrench}'\MessageBreak
              to your preamble}%
          }%
        \fi
      \fi
    \fi
  }
}\relax
%</package>
%    \end{macrocode}
% Restore catcodes.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\MT@restore@catcodes
%    \end{macrocode}
% That was that.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package|letterspace>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% ^^A -------------------------------------------------------------------------
%\NoIndexing  ^^A from now on, don't bother indexing
%
%\section{Configuration files}
%\changes{v1.6}{2005/01/24}{restructure \file{dtx} file}
%
% Let's now write the font configuration files.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*config>

%    \end{macrocode}
%\subsection{Font sets}
%\GeneralChanges{Font sets}
%
% We first declare some sets in the main configuration file.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*m-t>
%%% -----------------------------------------------------------------------
%%% FONT SETS

\DeclareMicrotypeSet{all}
   { }

%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v1.2}{2004/10/02}{new: \texttt{allmath} and \texttt{basicmath}}
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/05/25}{add <U> encoding to \texttt{allmath}}
%\changes{v1.9}{2005/08/17}{add <OT4> encoding to text sets}
%\changes{v1.9}{2005/08/17}{add <T5> encoding to text sets}
%\changes{v1.9d}{2006/04/20}{add <QX> encoding to text sets}
%\changes{v2.3e}{2009/10/28}{add <T2A> encoding}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareMicrotypeSet{allmath}
   { encoding = {OT1,T1,T2A,LY1,OT4,QX,T5,TS1,OML,OMS,U} }

\DeclareMicrotypeSet{alltext}
   { encoding = {OT1,T1,T2A,LY1,OT4,QX,T5,TS1} }

%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v1.9d}{2006/02/22}{\texttt{md*} instead of \texttt{m} series in basic sets}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareMicrotypeSet{basicmath}
   { encoding = {OT1,T1,T2A,LY1,OT4,QX,T5,OML,OMS},
     family   = {rm*,sf*},
     series   = {md*},
     size     = {normalsize,footnotesize,small,large}
   }

\DeclareMicrotypeSet{basictext}
   { encoding = {OT1,T1,T2A,LY1,OT4,QX,T5},
     family   = {rm*,sf*},
     series   = {md*},
     size     = {normalsize,footnotesize,small,large}
   }

%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v2.0}{2006/12/28}{add \texttt{smallcaps} set}
%\changes{v2.3e}{2009/06/01}{\texttt{sc*} instead of \texttt{sc} in \texttt{smallcaps} set}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareMicrotypeSet{smallcaps}
   { encoding = {OT1,T1,T2A,LY1,OT4,QX,T5,TS1},
     shape    = {sc*}
   }

%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v2.0}{2006/12/21}{add \texttt{footnotesize} and \texttt{scriptsize} sets}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareMicrotypeSet{footnotesize}
   { encoding = {OT1,T1,T2A,LY1,OT4,QX,T5,TS1},
     size     = {-small}
   }

\DeclareMicrotypeSet{scriptsize}
   { encoding = {OT1,T1,T2A,LY1,OT4,QX,T5,TS1},
     size     = {-footnotesize}
   }

\DeclareMicrotypeSet{normalfont}
   { font = */*/*/*/* }

%    \end{macrocode}
% The default sets.
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/04/15}{default set for tracking: \texttt{smallcaps}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%%% -----------------------------------------------------------------------
%%% DEFAULT SETS

\DeclareMicrotypeSetDefault[protrusion]{alltext}
\DeclareMicrotypeSetDefault[expansion] {basictext}
\DeclareMicrotypeSetDefault[spacing]   {basictext}
\DeclareMicrotypeSetDefault[kerning]   {alltext}
\DeclareMicrotypeSetDefault[tracking]  {smallcaps}

%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\subsection{Font variants and aliases}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%%% -----------------------------------------------------------------------
%%% FONT VARIANTS AND ALIASES

%    \end{macrocode}
% These are the variants I happen to be using (expert encoding, oldstyle
% numerals, swashes, alternative, display, inferior and superior numerals):
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareMicrotypeVariants{x,j,w,a,d,0,1}

%    \end{macrocode}
% Other candidates: |2|~(proportional digits), |e|~(engraved), |f|~(Fraktur),
% |g|~(small text), |h|~(shadow), |l|~(outline), |n|~(informal),
% |p|~(ornaments), |r|~(roman), |s|~(sans serif), |t|~(typewriter).
% I've omitted them since they seem hardly be used and/or they are actually
% more than a variant, \ie, they shouldn't share a file.
%
%\bigskip\noindent
% Fonts that are `the same': The Latin Modern fonts, the virtual fonts from the
% \pkg{ae} and \pkg{zefonts}, and the \pkg{eco} and \pkg{hfoldsty} packages
% (oldstyle numerals) all inherit the (basic) settings from Computer Modern
% Roman. Some of them are in part overwritten later.
%\changes{v1.2}{2004/10/03}{declare \texttt{cmor} as an alias of \texttt{cmr}}
%\changes{v1.3}{2004/10/22}{declare \texttt{aer}, \texttt{zer} and \texttt{hfor}
%                           as aliases of \texttt{cmr}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{lmr} {cmr}  % lmodern
\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{aer} {cmr}  % ae
\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{zer} {cmr}  % zefonts
\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{cmor}{cmr}  % eco
\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{hfor}{cmr}  % hfoldsty
%    \end{macrocode}
% The packages \pkg{pxfonts} and \pkg{txfonts} fonts inherit Palatino and Times
% settings respectively,
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/19}{declare \texttt{pxr} and \texttt{txr}
%                           as aliases of \texttt{ppl} resp. \texttt{ptm}}
% also the \TeX\ Gyre fonts Pagella and Termes (formerly: \pkg{qfonts}).
%\changes{v1.9}{2005/08/16}{declare \texttt{qpl} and \texttt{qtm} (\pkg{qfonts}, \TeX\ Gyre)
%                           as aliases of \texttt{ppl} resp. \texttt{ptm}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{pxr} {ppl}  % pxfonts
\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{qpl} {ppl}  % TeX Gyre Pagella (formerly: qfonts/QuasiPalatino)
%    \end{macrocode}
% The `<FPL> Neu' fonts, a `re-implementation' of Palatino.
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/05/27}{declare <FPL> Neu as an alias of Palatino}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{fp9x}{pplx} % FPL Neu
\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{fp9j}{pplj} %   "
\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{txr} {ptm}  % txfonts
\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{qtm} {ptm}  % TeX Gyre Termes (formerly: qfonts/QuasiTimes)
%    \end{macrocode}
%\todo{check Times variants}
% More Times variants, to be checked: |pns|, |mns| (TimesNewRomanPS); |mnt|
% (Times\-NewRomanMT, TimesNRSevenMT), |mtm| (TimesSmallTextMT); |pte|
% (TimesEuropa); |ptt| (TimesTen); TimesEighteen; TimesModernEF.
%
% The \pkg{eulervm} package virtually extends the Euler fonts.
%\changes{v1.9e}{2006/07/28}{declare \texttt{zeur} and \texttt{zeus} (\pkg{eulervm})
%                            as aliases of \texttt{eur} resp. \texttt{eus} (\pkg{euler})}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{zeur}{eur}  % Euler VM
\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{zeus}{eus}  %   "
%    \end{macrocode}
% MicroPress's Charter version (\pkg{chmath}).
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/06/08}{declare \texttt{chr} (\pkg{chmath}) as an alias of Charter
%                           (reported by \contributor Geoff Vallis <gkv\at Princeton.EDU>)}
%                                                            ^^A private mail, 2007/06/07
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{chr} {bch}  % CH Math
%    \end{macrocode}
% The \pkg{mathdesign} package provides math fonts matching Bitstream Charter
%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/10/31}{declare \texttt{mdbch} (\pkg{mathdesign})
%                            as an alias of Charter}
% and <URW> Garamond.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{mdbch}{bch} % mathdesign/Charter
\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{mdugm}{ugm} % mathdesign/URW Garamond
%    \end{macrocode}
% <URW> Letter Gothic is similar enough to Bitstream Letter Gothic to share the
% configuration.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{ulg} {blg}  % URW LetterGothic -> Bitstream LetterGothic12Pitch
%    \end{macrocode}
% Euro symbol fonts, to save some files.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{zpeus}   {zpeu}    % Adobe Euro sans -> serif
\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{eurosans}{zpeu}    % Adobe Euro sans -> serif
\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{euroitcs}{euroitc} % ITC Euro sans -> serif

%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\subsection{Interaction with \pkg{babel}}
%
% Contexts that are to be set when switching to a language.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%%% -----------------------------------------------------------------------
%%% INTERACTION WITH THE `babel' PACKAGE

\DeclareMicrotypeBabelHook
   {english,UKenglish,british,USenglish,american}
   {kerning=, spacing=nonfrench}

\DeclareMicrotypeBabelHook
   {french,francais,acadian,canadien}
   {kerning=french, spacing=}

\DeclareMicrotypeBabelHook
   {turkish}
   {kerning=turkish, spacing=}

%    \end{macrocode}
%\GeneralChanges*
%
% \subsection{Note on admissible characters}
%
% All printable <ASCII> characters are allowed in the settings, with the
% following exceptions (on the left hand side, the replacements on the right):
%
%\begin{tabbing}
%  |\|\quad\=:\quad\=\cmd\textbackslash   \\
%  |{|     \>:\>     \cmd\textbraceleft   \\
%  |}|     \>:\>     \cmd\textbraceright  \\
%  |^|     \>:\>     \cmd\textasciicircum \\
%  |%|     \>:\>     \cmd\%               \\
%  |#|     \>:\>     \cmd\#
%\end{tabbing}
%
%\noindent
% Comma and equal sign must be guarded with braces (`|{,}|', `|{=}|') to keep
% \pkg{keyval} happy.
%
% Character commands are allowed as far as they have been defined in the proper
% \LaTeX\ way, that is, when they have been assigned a slot in the font
% encoding with \cmd\DeclareTextSymbol\ or \cmd\DeclareTextComposite.
% Characters defined via \cmd\chardef\ are also possible.
%
% Ligatures and \cmd\mathchardef ed symbols have to be specified numerically.
% Of course, numerical identification is possible in any other case, too.
%
%\changes{v1.1}{2004/09/14}{remove 8-bit characters from the configuration files
%               (suggested by \contributor Harald Harders <h.harders\at tu-bs.de>)}
%                                                    ^^A private mail, 2004/09/13
% 8-bit characters are also admissible, provided they have been declared in the
% input encoding file. They should, however, only be used in private
% configuration files, where the proper input encoding is guaranteed, or else in
% combination with the `|inputenc|' key.
%
%\subsection{Character inheritance}
%\GeneralChanges{Inheritance}
%
% First the lists of inheriting characters. We only declare those characters
% that are the same on \emph{both} sides, \ie, not \OE\ for O.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</m-t>
%<*m-t|zpeu|mvs>
%%% -----------------------------------------------------------------------
%%% CHARACTER INHERITANCE

%</m-t|zpeu|mvs>
%<*m-t>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\subsubsection{<OT1>}
% Glyphs that should possibly inherit settings on one side only:
% |012|~(`fi' ligature), |013|~(`fl'), |014|~(`ffi'), |015|~(`ffl'),
% \AE, \ae, \OE, \oe.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareCharacterInheritance
   { encoding = OT1 }
   { f = {011}, % ff
     i = {\i},
     j = {\j},
     O = {\O},
     o = {\o}
   }

%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\subsubsection{<T1>}
% Candidates here: |028|~(`fi'), |029|~(`fl'), |030|~(`ffi'), |031|~(`ffl'),
% |156| (`\IJ'~ligature, since \LaTeX\ 2005/12/01 accessible as |\IJ|),
% |188|~(`\ij', |\ij|), \AE, \ae, \OE, \oe.
%\changes{v1.5}{2004/12/11}{remove \cmd\ss\ from <T1> list, add \cmd\DJ}
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/26}{remove \cmd\DJ\ from <T1> list (it's the same as \cmd\DH)}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareCharacterInheritance
   { encoding = T1 }
   { A = {\`A,\'A,\^A,\~A,\"A,\r A,\k A,\u A},
     a = {\`a,\'a,\^a,\~a,\"a,\r a,\k a,\u a},
     C = {\'C,\c C,\v C},
     c = {\'c,\c c,\v c},
     D = {\v D,\DH},
     d = {\v d,\dj},
     E = {\`E,\'E,\^E,\"E,\k E,\v E},
     e = {\`e,\'e,\^e,\"e,\k e,\v e},
     f = {027}, % ff
     G = {\u G},
     g = {\u g},
     I = {\`I,\'I,\^I,\"I,\.I},
     i = {\`i,\'i,\^i,\"i,\i},
     j = {\j},
     L = {\L,\'L,\v L},
     l = {\l,\'l,\v l},
     N = {\'N,\~N,\v N},
     n = {\'n,\~n,\v n},
     O = {\O,\`O,\'O,\^O,\~O,\"O,\H O},
     o = {\o,\`o,\'o,\^o,\~o,\"o,\H o},
     R = {\'R,\v R},
     r = {\'r,\v r},
     S = {\'S,\c S,\v S,\SS},
     s = {\'s,\c s,\v s},
     T = {\c T,\v T},
     t = {\c t,\v t},
     U = {\`U,\'U,\^U,\"U,\H U,\r U},
     u = {\`u,\'u,\^u,\"u,\H u,\r u},
     Y = {\'Y,\"Y},
     y = {\'y,\"y},
     Z = {\'Z,\.Z,\v Z},
     z = {\'z,\.z,\v z}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/02/04}{remove `\texttt{-}' $\rightarrow$ `\texttt{127}'}
% The `soft hyphen' often has reduced right side bearing so that it may already
% be protruded, hence no inheritance.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%    - = {127},
   }

%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\subsubsection{<LY1>}
% More characters: |008|~(`fl'), |012|~(`fi'), |014|~(`ffi'), |015|~(`ffl'),
% \AE, \ae, \OE, \oe.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareCharacterInheritance
   { encoding = LY1 }
   { A = {\`A,\'A,\^A,\~A,\"A,\r A},
     a = {\`a,\'a,\^a,\~a,\"a,\r a},
     C = {\c C},
     c = {\c c},
     D = {\DH},
     E = {\`E,\'E,\^E,\"E},
     e = {\`e,\'e,\^e,\"e},
     f = {011}, % ff
     I = {\`I,\'I,\^I,\"I},
     i = {\`i,\'i,\^i,\"i,\i},
     L = {\L},
     l = {\l},
     N = {\~N},
     n = {\~n},
     O = {\`O,\'O,\^O,\~O,\"O,\O},
     o = {\`o,\'o,\^o,\~o,\"o,\o},
     S = {\v S},
     s = {\v s},
     U = {\`U,\'U,\^U,\"U},
     u = {\`u,\'u,\^u,\"u},
     Y = {\'Y,\"Y},
     y = {\'y,\"y},
     Z = {\v Z},
     z = {\v z}
   }

%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\subsubsection{<OT4>}
%\changes{v1.9}{2005/08/16}{add list for <OT4>}
% The Polish <OT1> extension. More interesting characters here:
% |009|~(`fk'), |012|~(`fi'), |013|~(`fl'), |014|~(`ffi'), |015|~(`ffl'),
% \AE, \ae, \OE, \oe.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareCharacterInheritance
   { encoding = OT4 }
   { A = {\k A},
     a = {\k a},
     C = {\'C},
     c = {\'c},
     E = {\k E},
     e = {\k e},
     f = {011}, % ff
     i = {\i},
     j = {\j},
     L = {\L},
     l = {\l},
     N = {\'N},
     n = {\'n},
     O = {\O,\'O},
     o = {\o,\'o},
     S = {\'S},
     s = {\'s},
     Z = {\'Z,\.Z},
     z = {\'z,\.z}
   }

%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\subsubsection{<QX>}
%\changes{v1.9d}{2006/04/20}{add list for <QX> encoding (contributed by
%                            \contributor Maciej Eder <maciej_eder\at poczta.onet.pl>)}
%                                                     ^^A private mail, 2006/04/19
% The Central European <QX> encoding.\footnote{
%   Contributed by \contributor Maciej Eder <maciej_eder\at poczta.onet.pl>.}
% Ligatures: |009|~(`fk'), |012|~(`fi'), |013|~(`fl'), |014|~(`ffi'),
% |015|~(`ffl'), \AE, \ae, \OE, \oe.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareCharacterInheritance
   { encoding = QX }
   { A = {\`A,\'A,\^A,\~A,\"A,\k A,\AA},
     a = {\`a,\'a,\^a,\~a,\"a,\k a,\aa},
     C = {\'C,\c C},
     c = {\'c,\c c},
     D = {\DH},
     E = {\`E,\'E,\^E,\"E,\k E},
     e = {\`e,\'e,\^e,\"e,\k e},
     f = {011}, % ff
     I = {\`I,\'I,\^I,\"I,\k I},
     i = {\`i,\'i,\^i,\"i,\k i,\i},
     j = {\j},
     L = {\L},
     l = {\l},
     N = {\'N,\~N},
     n = {\'n,\~n},
     O = {\O,\`O,\'O,\^O,\~O,\"O},
     o = {\o,\`o,\'o,\^o,\~o,\"o},
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v2.3c}{2008/09/01}{add \cmd\textcommabelow[\texttt{STst}] to <QX> encoding
%                            (reported by \contributor Vasile Gaburici <vgaburici\at gmail.com>)}
%                                          ^^A private mail, 2008/09/01, and
%                                          ^^A http://tug.org/pipermail/tex-live/2008-September/017385.html
% The Rumanian \cmd\textcommabelow\ accents are actually replacements for the
% \cmd\c\ variants, which had previously (and erroneously\footnote{
%   Cf. \url{http://tug.org/pipermail/tex-live/2008-August/017204.html}})
% been included in <QX> encoding. They are still kept for backwards
% compatibility.
%\iffalse
% If \cmd\textcommabelow\ is undefined, it will be silently ignored.
% This is due to a quirk in \cs{\MT@map@clist@}.
%\todo{fix \cs{\MT@map@clist@}?}
%\fi
%    \begin{macrocode}
     S = {\'S,\c S,\textcommabelow S,\v S},
     s = {\'s,\c s,\textcommabelow s,\v s},
     T = {\c T,\textcommabelow T},
     t = {\c t,\textcommabelow t},
     U = {\`U,\'U,\^U,\"U,\k U},
     u = {\`u,\'u,\^u,\"u,\k u},
     Y = {\'Y,\"Y},
     y = {\'y,\"y},
     Z = {\'Z,\.Z,\v Z},
     z = {\'z,\.z,\v z},
     . = \textellipsis
   }

%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\subsubsection{<T5>}
%\changes{v1.9}{2005/08/17}{add list for <T5> (requested by
%                           \contributor \thanh{} <hanthethanh\at gmail.com>)}
%                                                ^^A private email, 2005/08/16
% The Vietnamese encoding <T5>. It is so crowded with accented and double-accented
% characters that there is no room for any ligatures.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareCharacterInheritance
   { encoding = T5 }
   { A = {\`A,\'A,\~A,\h A,\d A,\^A,\u A,
          \`\Acircumflex,\'\Acircumflex,\~\Acircumflex,\h\Acircumflex,\d\Acircumflex,
          \`\Abreve,\'\Abreve,\~\Abreve,\h\Abreve,\d\Abreve},
     a = {\`a,\'a,\~a,\h a,\d a,\^a,\u a,
          \`\acircumflex,\'\acircumflex,\~\acircumflex,\h\acircumflex,\d\acircumflex,
          \`\abreve,\'\abreve,\~\abreve,\h\abreve,\d\abreve},
     D = {\DJ},
     d = {\dj},
     E = {\`E,\'E,\~E,\h E,\d E,\^E,
          \`\Ecircumflex,\'\Ecircumflex,\~\Ecircumflex,\h\Ecircumflex,\d\Ecircumflex},
     e = {\`e,\'e,\~e,\h e,\d e,\^e,
          \`\ecircumflex,\'\ecircumflex,\~\ecircumflex,\h\ecircumflex,\d\ecircumflex},
     I = {\`I,\'I,\~I,\h I,\d I},
     i = {\`i,\'i,\~i,\h i,\d i,\i},
     O = {\`O,\'O,\~O,\h O,\d O,\^O,\horn O,
          \`\Ocircumflex,\'\Ocircumflex,\~\Ocircumflex,\h\Ocircumflex,\d\Ocircumflex,
          \`\Ohorn,\'\Ohorn,\~\Ohorn,\h\Ohorn,\d\Ohorn},
     o = {\`o,\'o,\~o,\h o,\d o,\^o,\horn o,
          \`\ocircumflex,\'\ocircumflex,\~\ocircumflex,\h\ocircumflex,\d\ocircumflex,
          \`\ohorn,\'\ohorn,\~\ohorn,\h\ohorn,\d\ohorn},
     U = {\`U,\'U,\~U,\h U,\d U,\horn U,
          \`\Uhorn,\'\Uhorn,\~\Uhorn,\h\Uhorn,\d\Uhorn},
     u = {\`u,\'u,\~u,\h u,\d u,\horn u,
          \`\uhorn,\'\uhorn,\~\uhorn,\h\uhorn,\d\uhorn},
     Y = {\`Y,\'Y,\~Y,\h Y,\d Y},
     y = {\`y,\'y,\~y,\h y,\d y}
   }

%</m-t>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\subsubsection{Euro symbols}
% Make Euro symbols settings simpler.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*zpeu>
\DeclareCharacterInheritance
   { encoding = U,
     family   = {zpeu,zpeus,eurosans} }
   { E = 128 }

%</zpeu>
%<*mvs>
\DeclareCharacterInheritance
   { encoding = OT1,
     family   = mvs }
   { 164 = {099,100,101} } % \EURhv,\EURcr,\EURtm

%    \end{macrocode}
% Since 2006/05/11 (that is, one week after I've added these settings, after the
% package had been dormant for six years), \pkg{marvosym}'s encoding is
% (correctly) <U> instead of <OT1>.
%\changes{v1.9e}{2006/07/05}{adapt to \pkg{marvosym}'s changed encoding}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareCharacterInheritance
   { encoding = U,
     family   = mvs }
   { 164 = {099,100,101} }

%</mvs>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\subsection{Tracking}
%\GeneralChanges{Tracking}
%
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/02/23}{add ligatures that are to be disabled}
% By default, we only disable the `f*' ligatures, for those fonts that have
% any. Thus, ligatures and especially kerning for all other characters will be
% retained.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*m-t>
%%% -----------------------------------------------------------------------
%%% TRACKING/LETTERSPACING

\SetTracking
  [ name         = default,
    no ligatures = {f} ]
  { encoding     = {OT1,T1,T2A,LY1,OT4,QX} }
  { }

%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\subsection{Font expansion}
%\GeneralChanges{Expansion}
%
% These are \thanh's original expansion settings. They are used for all fonts
% (until somebody shows mercy and creates font-specific settings).
%    \begin{macrocode}
%%% -----------------------------------------------------------------------
%%% EXPANSION

\SetExpansion
   [ name     = default      ]
   { encoding = {OT1,OT4,QX,T1,LY1} }
   {
     A = 500,     a = 700,
   \AE = 500,   \ae = 700,
     B = 700,     b = 700,
     C = 700,     c = 700,
     D = 500,     d = 700,
     E = 700,     e = 700,
     F = 700,
     G = 500,     g = 700,
     H = 700,     h = 700,
     K = 700,     k = 700,
     M = 700,     m = 700,
     N = 700,     n = 700,
     O = 500,     o = 700,
   \OE = 500,   \oe = 700,
     P = 700,     p = 700,
     Q = 500,     q = 700,
     R = 700,
     S = 700,     s = 700,
     U = 700,     u = 700,
     W = 700,     w = 700,
     Z = 700,     z = 700,
     2 = 700,
     3 = 700,
     6 = 700,
     8 = 700,
     9 = 700
   }

%    \end{macrocode}
% Settings for Cyrillic <T2A> encoding.\footnote{Contributed by
%                                           \contributor Karl Karlsson <karl-karlsson\at yandex.ru>.}
%\changes{v2.3e}{2009/10/28}{settings for <T2A> encoding
%                            (contributed by \contributor Karl Karlsson <karl-karlsson\at yandex.ru>)}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\SetExpansion
   [ name     = T2A ]
   { encoding = T2A }
   {
     A = 500,     a = 700,
     B = 700,     b = 700,
     C = 700,     c = 700,
     D = 500,     d = 700,
     E = 700,     e = 700,
     F = 700,
     G = 500,     g = 700,
     H = 700,     h = 700,
     K = 700,     k = 700,
     M = 700,     m = 700,
     N = 700,     n = 700,
     O = 500,     o = 700,
     P = 700,     p = 700,
     Q = 500,     q = 700,
     R = 700,
     S = 700,     s = 700,
     U = 700,     u = 700,
     W = 700,     w = 700,
     Z = 700,     z = 700,
     2 = 700,
     3 = 700,
     6 = 700,
     8 = 700,
     9 = 700,
     \CYRA = 500,     \cyra = 700,
     \CYRB = 700,     \cyrb = 700,
     \CYRV = 700,     \cyrv = 700,
     \CYRG = 700,     \cyrg = 700,
     \CYRD = 700,     \cyrd = 700,
     \CYRE = 700,     \cyre = 700,
     \CYRZH = 700,    \cyrzh = 700,
     \CYRZ = 700,     \cyrz = 700,
     \CYRI = 700,     \cyri = 700,
     \CYRISHRT = 700, \cyrishrt = 700,
     \CYRK = 700,     \cyrk = 700,
     \CYRL = 700,     \cyrl = 700,
     \CYRM = 700,     \cyrm = 700,
     \CYRN = 700,     \cyrn = 700,
     \CYRO = 500,     \cyro = 700,
     \CYRP = 700,     \cyrp = 700,
     \CYRR = 700,     \cyrr = 700,
     \CYRS = 700,     \cyrs = 700,
     \CYRT = 700,     \cyrt = 700,
     \CYRU = 700,     \cyru = 700,
     \CYRF = 700,     \cyrf = 700,
     \CYRH = 700,     \cyrh = 700,
     \CYRC = 700,     \cyrc = 700,
     \CYRCH = 700,    \cyrch = 700,
     \CYRSH = 700,    \cyrsh = 700,
     \CYRSHCH = 700,  \cyrshch = 700,
     \CYRHRDSN = 700, \cyrhrdsn = 700,
     \CYRERY = 700,   \cyrery = 700,
     \CYRSFTSN = 700, \cyrsftsn = 700,
     \CYREREV = 700,  \cyrerev = 700,
     \CYRYU = 700,    \cyryu = 700,
     \CYRYA = 700,    \cyrya = 700
   }

%    \end{macrocode}
% <T5> encoding does not contain \cmd\AE, \cmd\ae, \cmd\OE\ and \cmd\oe.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\SetExpansion
   [ name     = T5 ]
   { encoding = T5 }
   {
     A = 500,     a = 700,
     B = 700,     b = 700,
     C = 700,     c = 700,
     D = 500,     d = 700,
     E = 700,     e = 700,
     F = 700,
     G = 500,     g = 700,
     H = 700,     h = 700,
     K = 700,     k = 700,
     M = 700,     m = 700,
     N = 700,     n = 700,
     O = 500,     o = 700,
     P = 700,     p = 700,
     Q = 500,     q = 700,
     R = 700,
     S = 700,     s = 700,
     U = 700,     u = 700,
     W = 700,     w = 700,
     Z = 700,     z = 700,
     2 = 700,
     3 = 700,
     6 = 700,
     8 = 700,
     9 = 700
   }

%</m-t>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\subsection{Character protrusion}
%\GeneralChanges{Protrusion}
%
%\changes{v1.1}{2004/09/14}{add factors for some more characters}
%\changes{v1.4b}{2004/11/19}{harmonise dashes in upshape and italic
%                            (\texttt{cmr}, \texttt{pad}, \texttt{ppl})}
%\changes{v1.9}{2005/08/16}{settings for <OT4> encoding (Computer Modern Roman,
%                           Palatino, Times)}
%\changes{v1.9}{2005/08/17}{settings for <T5> encoded Computer Modern Roman}
%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/12/02}{settings for <T5> encoded Charter}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%%% -----------------------------------------------------------------------
%%% PROTRUSION

%    \end{macrocode}
% For future historians, \thanh's original settings (from \file{protcode.tex},
% converted to \microtype\ notation).
%\begin{verbatim}
%\SetProtrusion
%   [ name     = thanh ]
%   { encoding = OT1 }
%   {
%     A = {50,50},
%     F = {  ,50},
%     J = {50,  },
%     K = {  ,50},
%     L = {  ,50},
%     T = {50,50},
%     V = {50,50},
%     W = {50,50},
%     X = {50,50},
%     Y = {50,50},
%     k = {  ,50},
%     r = {  ,50},
%     t = {  ,50},
%     v = {50,50},
%     w = {50,50},
%     x = {50,50},
%     y = {50,50},
%     . = { ,700},    {,}= { ,700},
%     : = { ,500},     ; = { ,500},
%     ! = { ,200},     ? = { ,200},
%     ( = {50,  },     ) = {  ,50},
%     - = { ,700},
%     \textendash        = { ,300},     \textemdash        = { ,200},
%     \textquoteleft     = {700, },     \textquoteright    = { ,700},
%     \textquotedblleft  = {500, },     \textquotedblright = { ,500}
%   }
%\end{verbatim}
%
%\subsubsection{Normal}
%
% The default settings always use the most moderate value.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*cfg-t>
\SetProtrusion
%<m-t>   [ name     = default ]
%    \end{macrocode}
% We also create configuration files for the fonts
%\begin{itemize}
%  \item Bitstream Charter (<NFSS> code |bch|)
%\changes{v1.5}{2004/11/28}{settings for Bitstream Charter}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<bch>   [ name     = bch-default ]
%    \end{macrocode}
%  \item Bitstream Letter Gothic (|blg|)
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/03/03}{settings for Bitstream Letter Gothic}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<blg>   [ name     = blg-default ]
%    \end{macrocode}
%  \item Computer Modern Roman (|cmr|)
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<cmr>   [ name     = cmr-default ]
%    \end{macrocode}
%  \item Adobe Garamond (|pad|, |padx|, |padj|)
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<pad>   [ name     = pad-default ]
%    \end{macrocode}
%  \item Minion\footnote{Contributed by \contributor Harald Harders <h.harders\at tu-bs.de>
%                        and \contributor Karl Karlsson <karl-karlsson\at yandex.ru>.}
%        (|pmnx|, |pmnj|)
%\changes{v1.1}{2004/09/14}{settings for Adobe Minion (contributed by
%                           \contributor Harald Harders <h.harders\at tu-bs.de>)}
%                                                  ^^A private mail, 2004/09/14
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<pmn>   [ name     = pmnj-default ]
%    \end{macrocode}
%  \item Palatino (|ppl|, |pplx|, |pplj|)
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<ppl>   [ name     = ppl-default ]
%    \end{macrocode}
%  \item Times (|ptm|, |ptmx|, |ptmj|)
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<ptm>   [ name     = ptm-default ]
%    \end{macrocode}
%  \item <URW> Garamond (|ugm|)
%\changes{v1.9c}{2006/01/26}{settings for <URW> Garamond}
%\end{itemize}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<ugm>   [ name     = ugm-default ]
%<m-t|cmr|pmn>   { }
%<bch|blg|pad|ugm>   { encoding = OT1,
%<ppl|ptm>   { encoding = {OT1,OT4},
%<bch>     family   = bch }
%<blg>     family   = blg }
%<pad>     family   = {pad,padx,padj} }
%<ppl>     family   = {ppl,pplx,pplj} }
%<ptm>     family   = {ptm,ptmx,ptmj} }
%<ugm>     family   = ugm }
   {
%<m-t|bch|blg|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm>     A = {50,50},
%<ugm>     A = {50,100},
%<pad|ptm>   \AE = {50,  },
%<ugm>   \AE = {150,50},
%<ugm>     B = {  ,50},
%<bch|pad|pmn|ugm>     C = {50,  },
%<bch|pad|pmn>     D = {  ,50},
%<ugm>     D = {  ,70},
%<ugm>     E = {  ,50},
%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ptm>     F = {  ,50},
%<ugm>     F = {  ,70},
%<bch|pad|pmn>     G = {50,  },
%<ugm>     G = {50,50},
%<blg>     I = {150,150},
%<m-t|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm|ugm>     J = {50,  },
%<bch|blg>     J = {100,  },
%<!blg>     K = {  ,50},
%<blg>     K = {50,  },
%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl>     L = {  ,50},
%<blg>     L = {  ,150},
%<ptm>     L = {  ,80},
%<ugm>     L = {  ,120},
%<bch|pad|pmn|ugm>     O = {50,50},
%<pad>   \OE = {50,  },
%<ugm>   \OE = {50,50},
%<blg>     P = {  ,100},
%<ugm>     P = {  ,50},
%<bch|pad|pmn>     Q = {50,70},
%<ugm>     Q = {50,50},
%<bch>     R = {  ,50},
%<ugm>     R = {  ,70},
%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm>     T = {50,50},
%<blg>     T = {100,100},
%<ugm>     T = {70,70},
%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm>     V = {50,50},
%<blg|ugm>     V = {70,70},
%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm>     W = {50,50},
%<ugm>     W = {70,70},
%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm>     X = {50,50},
%<ugm>     X = {50,70},
%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl>     Y = {50,50},
%<blg|ptm|ugm>     Y = {80,80},
%<ugm>     Z = {50,50},
%<blg>     f = {150,100},
%<blg>     i = {150,150},
%<blg>     j = {100,100},
%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm>     k = {  ,50},
%<ugm>     k = {  ,70},
%<blg>     l = {150,150},
%<pmn>     l = {  ,-50},
%<pad|ppl>     p = {50,50},
%<ugm>     p = {  ,50},
%<pad|ppl>     q = {50,  },
%<!blg>     r = {  ,50},
%<blg>     r = {100, 80},
%<cmr|pad|pmn>     t = {  ,70},
%<bch>     t = {  ,50},
%<blg>     t = {150, 80},
%<ugm>     t = {  ,100},
%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm>     v = {50,50},
%<blg>     v = {100,100},
%<ugm>     v = {50,70},
%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm>     w = {50,50},
%<ugm>     w = {50,70},
%<!blg>     x = {50,50},
%<blg>     x = {100,100},
%<m-t|bch|pad|pmn>     y = {  ,50},
%<blg>     y = { 50,100},
%<cmr|ppl|ptm>     y = {50,70},
%<ugm>     y = {  ,70},
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v1.6}{2005/01/11}{improve settings for numbers
%               (pointed out by \contributor Peter Muthesius <newsname\at gmx.de>)}
%                                       ^^A MID: <34b1h7F48s44tU1@individual.net>
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<cmr>     0 = {  ,50},
%<m-t>     1 = {50,50},
%<bch|blg|pad|ptm|ugm>     1 = {150,150},
%<cmr>     1 = {100,200},
%<pmn>     1 = {  ,50},
%<ppl>     1 = {100,100},
%<bch|cmr|pad|ugm>     2 = {50,50},
%<blg>     2 = {  ,100},
%<bch|pmn>     3 = {50,  },
%<cmr|pad|ugm>     3 = {50,50},
%<blg>     3 = {100,  },
%<m-t|pad>     4 = {50,50},
%<bch>     4 = {100,50},
%<blg>     4 = {100,  },
%<cmr|ugm>     4 = {70,70},
%<pmn>     4 = {50,  },
%<ptm>     4 = {70,  },
%<cmr>     5 = {  ,50},
%<pad>     5 = {50,50},
%<bch>     6 = {50,  },
%<cmr>     6 = {  ,50},
%<pad>     6 = {50,50},
%<m-t>     7 = {50,50},
%<bch|pad|pmn|ugm>     7 = {50,80},
%<blg>     7 = {100,100},
%<cmr|ptm>     7 = {50,100},
%<ppl>     7 = {  ,50},
%<cmr>     8 = {  ,50},
%<bch|pad>     9 = {50,50},
%<cmr>     9 = {  ,50},
%<m-t|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm|ugm>     . = { ,700},
%<bch>     . = { ,600},
%<blg>     . = {400,500},
%<!blg>    {,}= { ,500},
%<blg>    {,}= {300,400},
%<m-t|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm|ugm>     : = { ,500},
%<bch>     : = { ,400},
%<blg>     : = {300,400},
%<m-t|bch|pad|pmn|ptm>     ; = { ,300},
%<blg>     ; = {200,300},
%<cmr|ppl>     ; = { ,500},
%<ugm>     ; = { ,400},
%<!blg>     ! = { ,100},
%<blg>     ! = {200,200},
%<m-t|pad|pmn|ptm>     ? = { ,100},
%<bch|cmr|ppl|ugm>     ? = { ,200},
%<blg>     ? = {150,150},
%<pmn>     " = {300,300},
%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl>     @ = {50,50},
%<ptm>     @ = {100,100},
%<m-t|bch|blg|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm>     ~ = {200,250},
%<ugm>     ~ = {300,350},
%<pad|ppl|ptm>     & = {50,100},
%<ugm>     & = {  ,100},
%<m-t|cmr|pad|pmn>    \% = {50,50},
%<bch>    \% = {  ,50},
%<ppl|ptm>    \% = {100,100},
%<ugm>    \% = {50,100},
%<blg>    \# = {100,100},
%<m-t|ppl|ptm|ugm>     * = {200,200},
%<bch|pmn>     * = {200,300},
%<blg>     * = {150,200},
%<cmr|pad>     * = {300,300},
%<m-t|cmr|ppl|ptm>     + = {250,250},
%<bch>     + = {150,250},
%<pad>     + = {300,300},
%<blg|pmn>     + = {150,200},
%<ugm>     + = {250,300},
%<blg|ugm>    {=}= {200,200},
%<m-t|pad|pmn|ptm>     ( = {100,   },    ) = {   ,200},
%<bch|ugm>     ( = {200,   },    ) = {   ,200},
%<cmr|blg>     ( = {300,   },    ) = {   ,300},
%<ppl>     ( = {100,   },    ) = {   ,300},
%<bch|pmn>     [ = {100,   },    ] = {   ,100},
%<blg>     [ = {300,100},    ] = {   ,300},
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/15}{fix: remove \textbackslash\ from <OT1>,
%                           add \cmd\textbackslash\ to <T1> encoding}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<m-t|pad|pmn|ptm>     / = {100,200},
%<bch>     / = { ,200},
%<blg>     / = {300,300},
%<cmr|ppl>     / = {200,300},
%<ugm>     / = {100,300},
%<m-t|ptm>     - = {500,500},
%<bch|cmr|ppl>     - = {400,500},
%<blg>     - = {300,400},
%<pad>     - = {300,500},
%<pmn>     - = {200,400},
%<ugm>     - = {500,600},
%<blg>     < = {200,100},    > = {100,200},
%<blg>     _ = {150,250},
%<blg>     | = {250,250},
%<m-t|pmn>     \textendash       = {200,200},   \textemdash        = {150,150},
%<bch>     \textendash       = {200,300},   \textemdash        = {150,250},
%<cmr>     \textendash       = {400,300},   \textemdash        = {300,200},
%<pad|ppl|ptm>     \textendash       = {300,300},   \textemdash        = {200,200},
%<ugm>     \textendash       = {250,300},   \textemdash        = {250,250},
%    \end{macrocode}
% Why settings for left \emph{and} right quotes? Because in some languages they
% might be used like that (see the \pkg{csquotes} package for examples).
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<m-t|bch|pmn>     \textquoteleft    = {300,400},   \textquoteright    = {300,400},
%<blg>     \textquoteleft     = {400,600},   \textquoteright    = {400,600},
%<cmr>     \textquoteleft    = {500,700},   \textquoteright    = {500,600},
%<pad|ppl>     \textquoteleft    = {500,700},   \textquoteright    = {500,700},
%<ptm>     \textquoteleft    = {500,500},   \textquoteright    = {300,500},
%<ugm>     \textquoteleft    = {300,600},   \textquoteright    = {300,600},
%<m-t|bch|pmn>     \textquotedblleft = {300,300},   \textquotedblright = {300,300}
%<blg>     \textquotedblright = {300,400}
%<cmr>     \textquotedblleft = {500,300},   \textquotedblright = {200,600}
%<pad|ppl|ptm>     \textquotedblleft = {300,400},   \textquotedblright = {300,400}
%<ugm>     \textquotedblleft = {400,400},   \textquotedblright = {400,400}
   }

%    \end{macrocode}
% Greek uppercase letters are in <OT1> encoding only.
%\changes{v1.9}{2005/07/10}{fix: remove uppercase Greek letters from <T1> encoded <CMR>}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*m-t|cmr|pmn>
\SetProtrusion
%<m-t>   [ name     = OT1-default,
%<cmr>   [ name     = cmr-OT1,
%<pmn>   [ name     = pmnj-OT1,
%<m-t>     load     = default ]
%<cmr>     load     = cmr-default ]
%<pmn>     load     = pmnj-default ]
%<m-t>   { encoding = OT1 }
%<cmr>   { encoding = {OT1,OT4},
%<pmn>   { encoding = OT1,
%<cmr>     family   = cmr  }
%<pmn>     family   = pmnj }
   {
%<m-t|cmr>     \AE = {50,   },
%<pmn>     \OE = {50,  }
%<*cmr>
     "00 = {   ,150}, % \Gamma
     "01 = {100,100}, % \Delta
     "02 = { 50, 50}, % \Theta
     "03 = {100,100}, % \Lambda
     "06 = { 50, 50}, % \Sigma
     "07 = {100,100}, % \Upsilon
     "08 = { 50, 50}, % \Phi
     "09 = { 50, 50}  % \Psi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Remaining slots can be found in the source file.
%\iffalse ^^A ... namely, here:
%    "04 = {   ,   }, % \Xi
%    "05 = {   ,   }, % \Pi
%    "0A = {   ,   }, % \Omega
%\fi
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</cmr>
   }

%</m-t|cmr|pmn>
%    \end{macrocode}
% <T1> and <LY1> encodings contain some more characters. The default list
% will be loaded first.
%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/11/07}{fix: remove `\texttt{\_}' from <OT1> encoding}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\SetProtrusion
%<m-t>   [ name     = T1-default,
%<bch>   [ name     = bch-T1,
%<blg>   [ name     = blg-T1,
%<cmr>   [ name     = cmr-T1,
%<pad>   [ name     = pad-T1,
%<pmn>   [ name     = pmnj-T1,
%<ppl>   [ name     = ppl-T1,
%<ptm>   [ name     = ptm-T1,
%<ugm>   [ name     = ugm-T1,
%<m-t>     load     = default     ]
%<bch>     load     = bch-default ]
%<blg>     load     = blg-default ]
%<cmr>     load     = cmr-default ]
%<pad>     load     = pad-default ]
%<pmn>     load     = pmnj-default ]
%<ppl>     load     = ppl-default ]
%<ptm>     load     = ptm-default ]
%<ugm>     load     = ugm-default ]
%<m-t>   { encoding = {T1,LY1}    }
%<bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl>   { encoding = {T1,LY1},
%<blg|ptm|ugm>   { encoding = {T1},
%<bch>     family   = bch }
%<blg>     family   = blg }
%<cmr>     family   = cmr }
%<pad>     family   = {pad,padx,padj} }
%<pmn>     family   = pmnj }
%<ppl>     family   = {ppl,pplx,pplj} }
%<ptm>     family   = {ptm,ptmx,ptmj} }
%<ugm>     family   = ugm }
   {
%<m-t|cmr>     \AE = {50,  },
%<bch|pmn>     \OE = {50,  },
%<pmn>     \TH = {  ,50},
%<blg>     \v L = {   ,250},
%<blg>     \v d = {   ,250},
%<blg>     \v l = {   ,250},
%<blg>     \v t = {   ,250},
%<blg>     127 =  {300,400},
%<blg>     156 =  {100,   }, % IJ
%<blg>     188 =  { 80, 80}, % ij
%<m-t|bch|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm>       _ = {100,100},
%<cmr>       _ = {200,200},
%<ugm>       _ = {100,200},
%<m-t|pad|pmn|ptm>     \textbackslash    = {100,200},
%<bch>     \textbackslash    = {150,200},
%<blg>     \textbackslash    = {250,300},
%<cmr|ppl>     \textbackslash    = {200,300},
%<ugm>     \textbackslash    = {100,300},
%<ugm>     \textbar          = {200,200},
%<blg>     \textendash       = {300,300},   \textemdash        = {150,150},
%<blg>     \textquotedbl     = {300,400},   \textquotedblleft  = {300,400},
%<cmr>     \textquotedbl     = {300,300},   \textquotedblleft  = {200,600},
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v1.4}{2004/10/30}{tweak quote characters for \texttt{cmr}
%                           variants (<OT1>, <T1>, \texttt{lmr})}
% The <EC> fonts do something weird: they insert an implicit kern between quote
% and boundary character. Therefore, we must override the settings from <OT1>.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<m-t|cmr|pad|ppl|ptm|ugm>     \quotesinglbase   = {400,400},   \quotedblbase      = {400,400},
%<blg>     \quotesinglbase   = {400,400},   \quotedblbase      = {300,400},
%<bch|pmn>     \quotesinglbase   = {400,400},   \quotedblbase      = {300,300},
%<m-t|bch|pmn>     \guilsinglleft    = {400,300},   \guilsinglright    = {300,400},
%<blg>     \guilsinglleft    = {300,500},   \guilsinglright    = {300,500},
%<cmr|pad|ppl|ptm>     \guilsinglleft    = {400,400},   \guilsinglright    = {300,500},
%<ugm>     \guilsinglleft    = {400,400},   \guilsinglright    = {300,600},
%<m-t>     \guillemotleft    = {200,200},   \guillemotright    = {200,200},
%<cmr>     \guillemotleft    = {300,200},   \guillemotright    = {100,400},
%<bch|pmn>     \guillemotleft    = {200,200},   \guillemotright    = {150,300},
%<blg|pad|ppl|ptm>     \guillemotleft    = {300,300},   \guillemotright    = {200,400},
%<ugm>     \guillemotleft    = {300,400},   \guillemotright    = {300,400},
%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl|ugm>     \textexclamdown   = {100,   },   \textquestiondown  = {100,   },
%<blg>     \textexclamdown   = {200,   },   \textquestiondown  = {100,   },
%<ptm>     \textexclamdown   = {200,   },   \textquestiondown  = {200,   },
%<m-t|cmr|pad|ppl|ptm|ugm>     \textbraceleft    = {400,200},   \textbraceright    = {200,400},
%<bch|blg|pmn>     \textbraceleft    = {200,   },   \textbraceright    = {   ,300},
%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|ppl|ptm|ugm>     \textless         = {200,100},   \textgreater       = {100,200}
%<pmn>     \textless         = {100,   },   \textgreater       = {   ,100},
%<pmn>     \textvisiblespace = {100,100} % not in LY1
%    \end{macrocode}
%\iffalse
%   \dh = {  ,  },
%   \th = {  ,  },
%   \NG = {  ,  },
%   \ng = {  ,  },
%   \textasciicircum = {  ,  },
%   \textsterling = {  ,  }, % also in TS1
%   \textsection = {  ,  }, % also in TS1
%\fi
%    \begin{macrocode}
   }

%    \end{macrocode}
% The \pkg{lmodern} fonts used to restore the original settings from <OT1>
% fonts. Now, they require even other settings, though.
%\changes{v2.3a}{2008/02/19}{adjust <LMR> quotation marks again}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*cmr>
\SetProtrusion
   [ name     = lmr-T1,
     load     = cmr-T1   ]
   { encoding = {T1,LY1},
     family   = lmr      }
   {
     \textquotedblleft  = {300,400},  \textquotedblright = {300,400}
   }

%</cmr>
%    \end{macrocode}
% Settings for the <T2A> encoding (generic, Computer Modern Roman, and Minion).\footnote{Contributed by
%                            \contributor Karl Karlsson <karl-karlsson\at yandex.ru>.}
%\changes{v2.3e}{2009/10/28}{settings for <T2A> encoding (contributed by
%                            \contributor Karl Karlsson <karl-karlsson\at yandex.ru>)}
%                                                       ^^A private mail, 2009/10/21
%\changes{v2.4}{2009/11/15}{settings for <T2A> encoded Minion (contributed by
%                           \contributor Karl Karlsson <karl-karlsson\at yandex.ru>)}
%                                                       ^^A private mail, 2009/11/14
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*m-t|cmr|pmn>
\SetProtrusion
%<m-t>   [ name     = T2A-default,
%<cmr>   [ name     = cmr-T2A,
%<pmn>   [ name     = pmnj-T2A,
%<m-t>     load     = default     ]
%<cmr>     load     = cmr-default ]
%<pmn>     load     = pmnj-default ]
   { encoding = T2A,
%<m-t>   }
%<cmr>     family   = cmr }
%<pmn>     family   = pmnj }
   {
     \CYRA = {50,50},
     \CYRG = {  ,50},
     \CYRK = {  ,50},
     \CYRT = {50,50},
     \CYRH = {50,50},
     \CYRU = {50,50},
%<pmn>     \CYRS = {50,  },
%<pmn>     \CYRO = {50,50},
     \cyrk = {  ,50},
     \cyrg = {  ,50},
     \cyrh = {50,50},
%<m-t|pmn>     \cyru = {50,50},
%<cmr>     \cyru = {50,70},
%<m-t>        _  = {100,100},
%<cmr>        _  = {200,200},
%<m-t>     \textbackslash    = {100,200},   \quotedblbase      = {400,400},
%<cmr>     \textbackslash    = {200,300},   \quotedblbase      = {400,400},
%<pmn>     \textbackslash    = {100,200},   \quotedblbase      = {300,300},
%<cmr>     \textquotedbl     = {300,300},   \textquotedblleft  = {200,600},
%<m-t>     \guillemotleft    = {200,200},   \guillemotright    = {200,200},
%<cmr>     \guillemotleft    = {300,200},   \guillemotright    = {100,400},
%<pmn>     \guillemotleft    = {200,200},   \guillemotright    = {150,300},
%<m-t|cmr>     \textbraceleft    = {400,200},   \textbraceright    = {200,400},
%<pmn>     \textbraceleft    = {200,   },   \textbraceright    = {   ,300},
%<m-t|cmr>     \textless         = {200,100},   \textgreater       = {100,200}
%<pmn>     \textless         = {100,   },   \textgreater       = {   ,100}
   }

%</m-t|cmr|pmn>
%    \end{macrocode}
% Settings for the <QX> encoding (generic and Times).\footnote{Contributed by
%                            \contributor Maciej Eder <maciej_eder\at poczta.onet.pl>.}
%\changes{v1.9d}{2006/04/20}{settings for <QX> encoding (contributed by
%                            \contributor Maciej Eder <maciej_eder\at poczta.onet.pl>)}
%                                                     ^^A private mail, 2006/04/19
% It also includes some glyphs otherwise in <TS1>.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*m-t|ptm>
\SetProtrusion
%<m-t>   [ name     = QX-default,
%<ptm>   [ name     = ptm-QX,
%<m-t>     load     = default ]
%<ptm>     load     = ptm-default ]
%<m-t>   { encoding = QX }
%<ptm>   { encoding = QX,
%<ptm>     family   = {ptm,ptmx,ptmj} }
   {
     \AE = {50,  },
%<ptm>      *  = {200,200},
     {=} = {100,100},
     \textunderscore   = {100,100},
     \textbackslash    = {100,200},
     \quotedblbase     = {400,400},
%<m-t>     \guillemotleft    = {200,200},   \guillemotright    = {200,200},
%<ptm>     \guillemotleft    = {300,300},   \guillemotright    = {200,400},
     \textexclamdown   = {100,   },   \textquestiondown  = {100,   },
%<m-t>     \textbraceleft    = {400,200},   \textbraceright    = {200,400},
%<ptm>     \textbraceleft    = {200,200},   \textbraceright    = {200,300},
     \textless         = {200,100},   \textgreater       = {100,200},
     \textminus        = {200,200},   \textdegree        = {300,300},
%<m-t>     \copyright        = {100,100},   \textregistered    = {100,100}
%<ptm>     \copyright        = {100,150},   \textregistered    = {100,150},
%<ptm>     \textxgeq         = {   ,100},   \textxleq          = {100,   },
%<ptm>     \textalpha        = {   , 50},   \textDelta         = { 70, 70},
%<ptm>     \textpi           = { 50, 80},   \textSigma         = {   , 70},
%<ptm>     \textmu           = {   , 80},   \texteuro          = { 50, 50},
%<ptm>     \textellipsis     = {150,200},   \textasciitilde    = { 80, 80},
%<ptm>     \textapprox       = { 50, 50},   \textinfty         = {100,100},
%<ptm>     \textdagger       = {150,150},   \textdaggerdbl     = {100,100},
%<ptm>     \textdiv          = { 50,150},   \textsection       = { 80, 80},
%<ptm>     \texttimes        = {100,150},   \textpm            = { 50, 80},
%<ptm>     \textbullet       = {150,150},   \textperiodcentered = {300,300},
%<ptm>     \textquotesingle  = {500,500},   \textquotedbl      = {300,300},
%<ptm>     \textperthousand  = {    ,50}
   }

%</m-t|ptm>
%    \end{macrocode}
% <T5> is based on <OT1>; it shares some but not all extra characters of <T1>.
% All accented characters are already taken care of by the inheritance list.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*cmr|bch>
\SetProtrusion
%<cmr>   [ name     = cmr-T5,
%<cmr>     load     = cmr-default ]
%<bch>   [ name     = bch-T5,
%<bch>     load     = bch-default ]
   { encoding = T5,
%<cmr>     family   = cmr }
%<bch>     family   = bch }
   {
%<bch>     _ = {100,100},
%<bch>     \textbackslash    = {150,200},
%<cmr>     \textbackslash    = {200,300},
%<cmr>     \textquotedblleft = {200,600},
%<cmr>     \textquotedbl     = {300,300},
%<bch>     \quotesinglbase   = {400,400},   \quotedblbase      = {300,300},
%<cmr>     \quotesinglbase   = {400,400},   \quotedblbase      = {400,400},
%<bch>     \guilsinglleft    = {400,300},   \guilsinglright    = {300,400},
%<cmr>     \guilsinglleft    = {400,400},   \guilsinglright    = {300,500},
%<bch>     \guillemotleft    = {200,200},   \guillemotright    = {150,300},
%<cmr>     \guillemotleft    = {300,200},   \guillemotright    = {100,400},
%<bch>     \textbraceleft    = {200,   },   \textbraceright    = {   ,300},
%<cmr>     \textbraceleft    = {400,200},   \textbraceright    = {200,400},
     \textless         = {200,100},   \textgreater       = {100,200}
   }

%</cmr|bch>
%    \end{macrocode}
% Minion with lining numbers.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*pmn>
\SetProtrusion
   [ name     = pmnx-OT1,
     load     = pmnj-default ]
   { encoding = OT1,
     family   = pmnx }
   {
     1 = {230,180}
   }

\SetProtrusion
   [ name     = pmnx-T1,
     load     = pmnj-T1  ]
   { encoding = {T1,LY1},
     family   = pmnx     }
   {
     1 = {230,180}
   }

\SetProtrusion
   [ name     = pmnx-T2A,
     load     = pmnj-T2A  ]
   { encoding = {T2A},
     family   = pmnx     }
   {
     1 = {230,180}
   }

%</pmn>
%    \end{macrocode}
% Times is the default font for <LY1>, therefore we provide settings for the
% additional characters in this encoding, too.
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/26}{add <LY1> characters for Times}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*ptm>
 \SetProtrusion
   [ name     = ptm-LY1,
     load     = ptm-T1 ]
   { encoding = LY1,
     family   = {ptm,ptmx,ptmj} }
   {
     _                         = {100,100},
     \texttrademark            = {100,100},
     \textregistered           = {100,100},
     \textcopyright            = {100,100},
     \textdegree               = {300,300},
     \textminus                = {200,200},
     \textellipsis             = {150,200},
%    \texteuro                 = {   ,   }, % ?
     \textcent                 = {100,100},
     \textquotesingle          = {500,500},
     \textflorin               = { 50, 70},
     \textdagger               = {150,150},
     \textdaggerdbl            = {100,100},
     \textperthousand          = {   , 50},
     \textbullet               = {150,150},
     \textonesuperior          = {100,100},
     \texttwosuperior          = { 50, 50},
     \textthreesuperior        = { 50, 50},
     \textperiodcentered       = {300,300},
     \textplusminus            = { 50, 80},
     \textmultiply             = {100,100},
     \textdivide               = { 50,150}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Remaining slots in the source file.
%\iffalse
%    \textbrokenbar            = {   ,   },
%    \textyen                  = {   ,   },
%    \textfractionsolidus      = {   ,   },
%    \textordfeminine          = {   ,   },
%    \textordmasculine         = {   ,   },
%    \textmu                   = {   ,   },
%    \textparagraph            = {   ,   },
%    \textonequarter           = {   ,   },
%    \textonehalf              = {   ,   },
%    \textthreequarters        = {   ,   },
%\fi
%    \begin{macrocode}
   }

%</ptm>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\subsubsection{Italics}
%
% To find default settings for italic is difficult, since the character shapes
% and their behaviour at the beginning or end of line may be wildly different
% for different fonts. Therefore, we leave the letters away, and only set up the
% punctuation characters.
%\changes{v1.4b}{2004/11/22}{slanted like italics}
%\changes{v1.6}{2004/12/26}{add italic uppercase Greek letters}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\SetProtrusion
%<m-t>   [ name     = OT1-it   ]
%<bch>   [ name     = bch-it   ]
%<blg>   [ name     = blg-it,
%<blg>     load     = blg-default ]
%<cmr>   [ name     = cmr-it   ]
%<pad>   [ name     = pad-it   ]
%<pmn>   [ name     = pmnj-it  ]
%<ppl>   [ name     = ppl-it   ]
%<ptm>   [ name     = ptm-it   ]
%<ugm>   [ name     = ugm-it   ]
%<m-t|bch|blg|pad|ugm>   { encoding = OT1,
%<ppl|ptm>   { encoding = {OT1,OT4},
%<bch>     family   = bch,
%<blg>     family   = blg,
%<pad>     family   = {pad,padx,padj},
%<ppl>     family   = {ppl,pplx,pplj},
%<ptm>     family   = {ptm,ptmx,ptmj},
%<ugm>     family   = ugm,
%<m-t|bch|pad|ppl|ptm>     shape    = {it,sl}  }
%<blg|ugm>     shape    = it  }
%<cmr|pmn>   { }
   {
%<cmr|ptm>     A = {100,50},
%<pad|pmn>     A = {50,  },
%<ugm>     A = {  ,150},
%<ppl>     A = {50,50},
%<ptm>   \AE = {100,  },
%<pad|ppl>   \AE = {50,  },
%<cmr|pad|ppl|ptm>     B = {50,  },
%<pmn>     B = {20,-50},
%<bch|ppl|ptm|ugm>     C = {50,  },
%<cmr|pad>     C = {100, },
%<pmn>     C = {50,-50},
%<cmr|pad|ppl|ptm>     D = {50,50},
%<pmn>     D = {20,  },
%<cmr|pad|ppl|ptm>     E = {50,  },
%<pmn>     E = {20,-50},
%<cmr|pad|ptm>     F = {100, },
%<pmn>     F = {10,  },
%<ppl>     F = {50,  },
%<bch|ppl|ptm|ugm>     G = {50,  },
%<cmr|pad>     G = {100, },
%<pmn>     G = {50,-50},
%<cmr|pad|ppl|ptm>     H = {50,  },
%<cmr|pad|ptm>     I = {50,  },
%<pmn>     I = {20,-50},
%<cmr|ptm>     J = {100, },
%<pad>     J = {50,  },
%<pmn>     J = {20,  },
%<cmr|pad|ppl|ptm>     K = {50,  },
%<pmn>     K = {20,  },
%<cmr|pad|ppl|ptm>     L = {50,  },
%<pmn>     L = {20,50},
%<ugm>     L = {  ,100},
%<cmr|ptm>     M = {50,  },
%<pmn>     M = {  ,-30},
%<cmr|ptm>     N = {50,  },
%<pmn>     N = {  ,-30},
%<bch|pmn|ppl|ptm>     O = {50,  },
%<cmr|pad>     O = {100, },
%<ugm>     O = {70,50},
%<ppl|ptm>   \OE = {50,  },
%<pad>   \OE = {100, },
%<cmr|pad|ppl|ptm>     P = {50,  },
%<pmn>     P = {20,-50},
%<bch|pmn|ppl|ptm>     Q = {50,  },
%<cmr|pad>     Q = {100, },
%<ugm>     Q = {70,50},
%<cmr|pad|ppl|ptm>     R = {50,  },
%<pmn>     R = {20,  },
%<bch|cmr|pad|ppl|ptm>     S = {50,  },
%<pmn>     S = {20,-30},
%<bch|cmr|pad|ppl|ptm>     $ = {50,  },
%<pmn>     $ = {20,-30},
%<bch|pmn|ugm>     T = {70,  },
%<cmr|pad|ppl|ptm>     T = {100, },
%<cmr|pad|ppl|ptm>     U = {50,  },
%<pmn>     U = {50,-50},
%<cmr|pad|pmn|ugm>     V = {100, },
%<ppl|ptm>     V = {100,50},
%<cmr|pad|pmn|ugm>     W = {100, },
%<ppl>     W = {50,  },
%<ptm>     W = {100,50},
%<cmr|ppl|ptm>     X = {50,  },
%<cmr|ptm>     Y = {100, },
%<pmn>     Y = {50,  },
%<ppl>     Y = {100,50},
%<pmn>     Z = {  ,-50},
%<pmn>     d = {  ,-50},
%<pad|pmn>     f = { ,-100},
%<pmn>     i = {  ,-30},
%<pmn>     j = {  ,-30},
%<pmn>     l = {  ,-100},
%<bch>     o = {50,50},
%<bch>     p = {  ,50},
%<pmn>     p = {-50,  },
%<bch>     q = {50,  },
%<pmn>     r = {  ,50},
%<bch>     t = {  ,50},
%<pmn|ugm>     v = {50,  },
%<bch>     w = {  ,50},
%<pmn|ugm>     w = {50,  },
%<bch>     y = {  ,50},
%<cmr>     0 = {100, },
%<bch|ptm>     1 = {150,100},
%<cmr>     1 = {200,50},
%<pad>     1 = {150, },
%<pmn>     1 = {50,  },
%<ppl>     1 = {100, },
%<ugm>     1 = {150,150},
%<cmr>     2 = {100,-100},
%<pad|ppl|ptm>     2 = {50,  },
%<pmn>     2 = {-50,  },
%<bch>     3 = {50,  },
%<cmr>     3 = {100,-100},
%<pmn>     3 = {-100, },
%<ptm>     3 = {100,50},
%<bch>     4 = {100, },
%<cmr|pad>     4 = {150, },
%<ppl|ptm>     4 = {50,  },
%<cmr>     5 = {100, },
%<ptm>     5 = {50,  },
%<bch>     6 = {50,  },
%<cmr>     6 = {100, },
%<bch|pad|ptm>     7 = {100, },
%<cmr>     7 = {200,-150},
%<pmn>     7 = {20,  },
%<ppl>     7 = {50,  },
%<cmr>     8 = {50,-50},
%<cmr>     9 = {100,-100},
%<m-t|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl>     . = { ,500},
%<blg>     . = {400,600},
%<bch|ptm|ugm>     . = { ,700},
%<blg>    {,}= {300,500},
%<m-t|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl>    {,}= { ,500},
%<bch|ugm>    {,}= { ,600},
%<ptm>    {,}= { ,700},
%<m-t|cmr|pad|ppl>     : = { ,300},
%<bch|ugm>     : = { ,400},
%<pmn>     : = { ,200},
%<ptm>     : = { ,500},
%<m-t|cmr|pad|ppl>     ; = { ,300},
%<bch|ugm>     ; = { ,400},
%<pmn>     ; = { ,200},
%<ptm>     ; = { ,500},
%<ptm>     ! = { ,100},
%<bch>     ? = { ,200},
%<ptm>     ? = { ,100},
%<ppl>     ? = { ,300},
%<pmn>     " = {400,200},
%<m-t|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm>     & = {50,50},
%<bch>     & = {  ,80},
%<cmr>     & = {100,50},
%<ugm>     & = {50,100},
%<m-t|cmr|pad|pmn>    \% = {100, },
%<bch>    \% = {50,50},
%<ppl|ptm>    \% = {100,100},
%<ugm>    \% = {100,50},
%<m-t|pmn|ppl>     * = {200,200},
%<bch>     * = {300,200},
%<cmr>     * = {400,100},
%<pad>     * = {500,100},
%<ptm|ugm>     * = {400,200},
%<m-t|cmr|pmn|ppl>     + = {150,200},
%<bch|ugm>     + = {250,250},
%<pad|ptm>     + = {250,200},
%<m-t|pad|pmn|ppl>     @ = {50,50},
%<bch>     @ = {80,50},
%<cmr>     @ = {200,50},
%<ptm>     @ = {150,150},
%<m-t|bch|ugm>     ~ = {150,150},
%<cmr|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm>     ~ = {200,150},
%<ugm>    {=}= {200,200},
%<!blg>     ( = {200, },    ) = {  ,200},
%<m-t|cmr|pad|ppl|ptm|ugm>     / = {100,200},
%<bch>     / = {  ,150},
%<pmn>     / = {100,150},
%<m-t>     - = {300,300},
%<bch|pad>     - = {300,400},
%<pmn>     - = {200,300},
%<cmr>     - = {500,300},
%<ppl>     - = {300,500},
%<ptm>     - = {500,500},
%<ugm>     - = {400,700},
%<blg>     _ = {0,300},
%<m-t|pmn>     \textendash       = {200,200},   \textemdash        = {150,150},
%<bch>     \textendash       = {200,300},   \textemdash        = {150,200},
%<cmr>     \textendash       = {500,300},   \textemdash        = {400,200},
%<pad|ppl|ptm|ugm>     \textendash       = {300,300},   \textemdash        = {200,200},
%<m-t|bch|pmn|ugm>     \textquoteleft    = {400,200},   \textquoteright    = {400,200},
%<blg>     \textquoteleft     = {400,400},    \textquoteright    = {400,400},
%<cmr|pad>     \textquoteleft    = {800,200},   \textquoteright    = {800,200},
%<ppl>     \textquoteleft    = {700,400},   \textquoteright    = {700,400},
%<ptm>     \textquoteleft    = {800,500},   \textquoteright    = {800,500},
%<m-t|bch|pmn>     \textquotedblleft = {400,200},   \textquotedblright = {400,200}
%<blg>     \textquotedblright = {300,300}
%<cmr>     \textquotedblleft = {700,100},   \textquotedblright = {500,300}
%<pad>     \textquotedblleft = {700,200},   \textquotedblright = {700,200}
%<ppl>     \textquotedblleft = {500,300},   \textquotedblright = {500,300}
%<ptm>     \textquotedblleft = {700,400},   \textquotedblright = {700,400}
%<ugm>     \textquotedblleft = {600,200},   \textquotedblright = {600,200}
   }

%<*cmr|pmn>
\SetProtrusion
%<cmr>   [ name     = cmr-it-OT1,
%<pmn>   [ name     = pmnj-it-OT1,
%<cmr>     load     = cmr-it   ]
%<pmn>     load     = pmnj-it  ]
%<cmr>   { encoding = {OT1,OT4},
%<pmn>   { encoding = OT1,
%<cmr>     family   = cmr,
%<pmn>     family   = pmnj,
%<cmr>     shape    = it       }
%<pmn>     shape    = {it,sl}  }
   {
%<cmr>     \AE = {100,   },
%<pmn>     \AE = {  ,-50},
%<cmr>     \OE = {100,   },
%<pmn>     \OE = {50,   }
%<*cmr>
     "00 = {200,150}, % \Gamma
     "01 = {150,100}, % \Delta
     "02 = {150, 50}, % \Theta
     "03 = {150, 50}, % \Lambda
     "04 = {100,100}, % \Xi
     "05 = {100,100}, % \Pi
     "06 = {100, 50}, % \Sigma
     "07 = {200,150}, % \Upsilon
     "08 = {150, 50}, % \Phi
     "09 = {150,100}, % \Psi
     "0A = { 50, 50}  % \Omega
%</cmr>
   }

%</cmr|pmn>
\SetProtrusion
%<m-t>   [ name     = T1-it-default,
%<bch>   [ name     = bch-it-T1,
%<blg>   [ name     = blg-it-T1,
%<cmr>   [ name     = cmr-it-T1,
%<pad>   [ name     = pad-it-T1,
%<pmn>   [ name     = pmnj-it-T1,
%<ppl>   [ name     = ppl-it-T1,
%<ptm>   [ name     = ptm-it-T1,
%<ugm>   [ name     = ugm-it-T1,
%<m-t>     load     = OT1-it   ]
%<bch>     load     = bch-it   ]
%<blg>     load     = blg-T1   ]
%<cmr>     load     = cmr-it   ]
%<pmn>     load     = pmnj-it  ]
%<pad>     load     = pad-it   ]
%<ppl>     load     = ppl-it   ]
%<ptm>     load     = ptm-it   ]
%<ugm>     load     = ugm-it   ]
%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl>   { encoding = {T1,LY1},
%<blg|ptm|ugm>   { encoding = T1,
%<bch>     family   = bch,
%<blg>     family   = blg,
%<cmr>     family   = cmr,
%<pmn>     family   = pmnj,
%<pad>     family   = {pad,padx,padj},
%<ppl>     family   = {ppl,pplx,pplj},
%<ptm>     family   = {ptm,ptmx,ptmj},
%<ugm>     family   = ugm,
%<m-t|bch|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm>     shape    = {it,sl}  }
%<blg|cmr|ugm>     shape    = it       }
   {
%<m-t|bch|pmn>     _ = {  ,100},
%<blg>     _ = {0,300},
%<cmr|ugm>     _ = {100,200},
%<pad|ppl|ptm>     _ = {100,100},
%<blg>     . = {400,600},
%<blg>    {,}= {300,500},
%<cmr>     \AE = {100,   },
%<pmn>     \AE = {  ,-50},
%<bch|pmn>     \OE = { 50,   },
%<cmr>     \OE = {100,   },
%<pmn>     031 = { ,-100}, % ffl
%<cmr|ptm>     156 = {100, },  % IJ
%<pad>     156 = {50,  },  % IJ
%<pmn>     156 = {20,  },  % IJ
%<pmn>     188 = {  ,-30}, % ij
%<pmn>   \v t = { ,100},
%<m-t|pad|ppl|ptm>     \textbackslash    = {100,200},
%<cmr|ugm>     \textbackslash    = {300,300},
%<bch>     \textbackslash    = {150,150},
%<pmn>     \textbackslash    = {100,150},
%<ugm>     \textbar          = {200,200},
%<cmr>     \textquotedblleft = {500,300},
%<blg>    \textquoteleft     = {400,400},    \textquoteright    = {400,400},
%<blg>    \textquotedbl      = {300,300},    \textquotedblleft  = {300,300},
%<blg>    \textquotedblright = {300,300},    \quotedblbase      = {200,600},
%<m-t|ptm>     \quotesinglbase   = {300,700},   \quotedblbase      = {400,500},
%<cmr>     \quotesinglbase   = {300,700},   \quotedblbase      = {200,600},
%<bch|pmn>     \quotesinglbase   = {200,500},   \quotedblbase      = {150,500},
%<pad|ppl>     \quotesinglbase   = {500,500},   \quotedblbase      = {400,400},
%<ugm>     \quotesinglbase   = {300,700},   \quotedblbase      = {300,500},
%<m-t|ppl|ptm>     \guilsinglleft    = {400,400},   \guilsinglright    = {300,500},
%<bch|pmn>     \guilsinglleft    = {300,400},   \guilsinglright    = {200,500},
%<cmr>     \guilsinglleft    = {500,300},   \guilsinglright    = {400,400},
%<pad>     \guilsinglleft    = {500,400},   \guilsinglright    = {300,500},
%<ugm>     \guilsinglleft    = {400,400},   \guilsinglright    = {300,600},
%<m-t|ppl>     \guillemotleft    = {300,300},   \guillemotright    = {300,300},
%<bch|pmn>     \guillemotleft    = {200,300},   \guillemotright    = {150,400},
%<cmr>     \guillemotleft    = {400,100},   \guillemotright    = {200,300},
%<pad>     \guillemotleft    = {300,300},   \guillemotright    = {200,400},
%<ptm>     \guillemotleft    = {300,400},   \guillemotright    = {200,400},
%<ugm>     \guillemotleft    = {300,400},   \guillemotright    = {300,400},
%<m-t|pad|ppl|ugm>     \textexclamdown   = {100,   },   \textquestiondown  = {200,   },
%<cmr|ptm>     \textexclamdown   = {200,   },   \textquestiondown  = {200,   },
%<pmn>     \textexclamdown   = {-50,   },   \textquestiondown  = {-50,   },
%<m-t|ppl|ugm>     \textbraceleft    = {200,100},   \textbraceright    = {200,200},
%<bch|pmn>     \textbraceleft    = {200,   },   \textbraceright    = {   ,200},
%<cmr|pad|ptm>     \textbraceleft    = {400,100},   \textbraceright    = {200,200},
%<bch|pmn>     \textless         = {100,   },   \textgreater       = {   ,100},
%<cmr|pad|ppl|ptm>     \textless         = {300,100},   \textgreater       = {200,100}
%<pmn>     \textvisiblespace = {100,100}
  }

%<*m-t|cmr|pmn>
\SetProtrusion
%<m-t>   [ name     = T2A-it-default,
%<cmr>   [ name     = cmr-it-T2A,
%<pmn>   [ name     = pmnj-it-T2A,
%<m-t>     load     = OT1-it   ]
%<cmr>     load     = cmr-it   ]
%<pmn>     load     = pmnj-it  ]
   { encoding = T2A,
%<cmr>     family   = cmr,
%<pmn>     family   = pmnj,
%<m-t|pmn>     shape    = {it,sl}  }
%<cmr>     shape    = it       }
   {
%<cmr>     \CYRA = {100,50},
%<pmn>     \CYRA = {50,  },
%<cmr>     \CYRB = {50,  },
%<cmr>     \CYRV = {50,  },
%<pmn>     \CYRV = {20,-50},
%<cmr>     \CYRG = {100, },
%<pmn>     \CYRG = {10,  },
%<cmr>     \CYRD = {50,  },
%<cmr>     \CYRE = {50,  },
%<pmn>     \CYRE = {20,-50},
%<cmr>     \CYRZH = {50,  },
%<cmr>     \CYRZ = {50,  },
%<pmn>     \CYRZ = {20,-50},
%<cmr>     \CYRI = {50,  },
%<pmn>     \CYRI = {  ,-30},
%<cmr>     \CYRISHRT = {50,  },
%<cmr>     \CYRK = {50,  },
%<pmn>     \CYRK = {20,  },
%<cmr>     \CYRL = {50,  },
%<cmr>     \CYRM = {50,  },
%<pmn>     \CYRM = {  ,-30},
%<cmr>     \CYRN = {50,  },
%<cmr>     \CYRO = {100, },
%<pmn>     \CYRO = {50,  },
%<cmr>     \CYRP = {50,  },
%<cmr>     \CYRR = {50,  },
%<pmn>     \CYRR = {20,-50},
%<cmr>     \CYRS = {100, },
%<pmn>     \CYRS = {50,  },
%<cmr>     \CYRT = {100, },
%<pmn>     \CYRT = {70,  },
%<cmr>     \CYRU = {100, },
%<pmn>     \CYRU = {50,  },
%<cmr>     \CYRF = {100, },
%<cmr>     \CYRH = {50,  },
%<cmr>     \CYRC = {50,  },
%<cmr>     \CYRCH = {100, },
%<cmr>     \CYRSH = {50,  },
%<cmr>     \CYRSHCH = {50,  },
%<cmr>     \CYRHRDSN = {100, },
%<cmr>     \CYRERY = {50,  },
%<cmr>     \CYRSFTSN = {50,  },
%<cmr>     \CYREREV = {50,  },
%<cmr>     \CYRYU = {50,  },
%<cmr>     \CYRYA = {50,  },
%<pmn>     \CYRYA = {  ,20},
%<pmn>     \cyrr = {-50,  },
%<m-t|pmn>      _ = {  ,100},
%<cmr>      _ = {100,200},
%<pmn>      031 = { ,-100}, % ffl
%<pmn>     \v t = { ,100},
%<m-t>     \textbackslash    = {100,200},   \quotedblbase      = {400,500},
%<cmr>     \textbackslash    = {300,300},   \quotedblbase      = {200,600},
%<pmn>     \textbackslash    = {100,150},   \quotedblbase      = {150,500},
%<m-t>     \guillemotleft    = {300,300},   \guillemotright    = {300,300},
%<cmr>     \guillemotleft    = {400,100},   \guillemotright    = {200,300},
%<pmn>     \guillemotleft    = {200,300},   \guillemotright    = {150,400},
%<m-t>     \textbraceleft    = {200,100},   \textbraceright    = {200,200},
%<cmr>     \textbraceleft    = {400,100},   \textbraceright    = {200,200},
%<pmn>     \textbraceleft    = {200,   },   \textbraceright    = {   ,200},
%<cmr>     \textquotedblleft = {500,300},
%<cmr>     \textless         = {300,100},   \textgreater       = {200,100}
%<pmn>     \textless         = {100,   },   \textgreater       = {   ,100}
  }

%</m-t|cmr|pmn>
%<*m-t|ptm>
\SetProtrusion
%<m-t>   [ name     = QX-it-default,
%<ptm>   [ name     = ptm-it-QX,
%<m-t>     load     = OT1-it ]
%<ptm>     load     = ptm-it ]
   { encoding = {QX},
%<ptm>     family   = {ptm,ptmx,ptmj},
     shape    = {it,sl}  }
   {
%<ptm>     009 = {  , 50}, % fk
     {=} = {100,100},
%<m-t>     \textunderscore   = {100,100},
%<ptm>     \textunderscore   = {100,150},
     \textbackslash    = {100,200},
     \quotedblbase     = {300,400},
%<m-t>     \guillemotleft    = {300,300},   \guillemotright    = {300,300},
%<ptm>     \guillemotleft    = {200,400},   \guillemotright    = {200,400},
     \textexclamdown   = {200,   },   \textquestiondown  = {200,   },
     \textbraceleft    = {200,100},   \textbraceright    = {200,200},
     \textless         = {100,100},   \textgreater       = {100,100},
     \textminus        = {200,200},   \textdegree        = {300,150},
%<m-t>     \copyright        = {100,100},   \textregistered    = {100,100}
%<ptm>     \textregistered   = {100,150},   \copyright         = {100,150},
%<ptm>     \textDelta        = { 70,   },   \textdelta         = {   , 50},
%<ptm>     \textpi           = { 50, 80},   \textmu            = {   , 80},
%<ptm>     \texteuro         = {200,   },   \textellipsis      = {100,200},
%<ptm>     \textquoteleft    = {500,400},   \textquoteright    = {500,400},
%<ptm>     \textquotedblleft = {500,300},   \textquotedblright = {400,400},
%<ptm>     \textapprox       = { 50, 50},   \textinfty         = {100,100},
%<ptm>     \textdagger       = {150,150},   \textdaggerdbl     = {100,100},
%<ptm>     \textdiv          = {150,150},   \textasciitilde    = { 80, 80},
%<ptm>     \texttimes        = {100,150},   \textpm            = { 50, 80},
%<ptm>     \textbullet       = {300,100},   \textperiodcentered = {300,300},
%<ptm>     \textquotesingle  = {500,500},   \textquotedbl      = {300,300},
%<ptm>     \textperthousand  = {    ,50}
   }

%</m-t|ptm>
%<*cmr|bch>
\SetProtrusion
%<cmr>   [ name = cmr-it-T5,
%<cmr>     load = cmr-it ]
%<bch>   [ name = bch-it-T5,
%<bch>     load = bch-it ]
   { encoding = T5,
%<bch>     family   = bch,
%<cmr>     family   = cmr,
     shape    = it }
   {
%<bch>      _ = {  ,100},
%<cmr>      _ = {100,200},
%<bch>     \textbackslash    = {150,150},
%<cmr>     \textbackslash    = {300,300},
%<bch>     \quotesinglbase   = {200,500},   \quotedblbase      = {150,500},
%<cmr>     \quotesinglbase   = {300,700},   \quotedblbase      = {200,600},
%<bch>     \guilsinglleft    = {300,400},   \guilsinglright    = {200,500},
%<cmr>     \guilsinglleft    = {500,300},   \guilsinglright    = {400,400},
%<bch>     \guillemotleft    = {200,300},   \guillemotright    = {150,400},
%<cmr>     \guillemotleft    = {400,100},   \guillemotright    = {200,300},
%<bch>     \textbraceleft    = {200,   },   \textbraceright    = {   ,200},
%<cmr>     \textbraceleft    = {400,100},   \textbraceright    = {200,200},
%<bch>     \textless         = {100,   },   \textgreater       = {   ,100}
%<cmr>     \textless         = {300,100},   \textgreater       = {200,100}
  }

%</cmr|bch>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/06/01}{verified settings for slanted Computer Modern Roman}
% Slanted is very similar to italic.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*cmr>
\SetProtrusion
   [ name     = cmr-sl,
     load     = cmr-it-OT1 ]
   { encoding = {OT1,OT4},
     family   = cmr,
     shape    = sl  }
   {
      L = {  ,50},
      f = { ,-50},
      - = {300, },
     \textendash = {400,  },  \textemdash = {300,  }
   }

\SetProtrusion
   [ name     = cmr-sl-T1,
     load     = cmr-it-T1 ]
   { encoding = {T1,LY1},
     family   = cmr,
     shape    = sl  }
   {
      L = {  ,50},
      f = { ,-50},
      - = {300, },
     \textendash = {400,  },  \textemdash = {300,  }
   }

\SetProtrusion
   [ name     = cmr-sl-T2A,
     load     = cmr-it-T2A ]
   { encoding = T2A,
     family   = cmr,
     shape    = sl  }
   {
      L = {  ,50},
      f = { ,-50},
      - = {300, },
     \textendash = {400,  },  \textemdash = {300,  }
   }

\SetProtrusion
   [ name     = cmr-sl-T5,
     load     = cmr-it-T5 ]
   { encoding = T5,
     family   = cmr,
     shape    = sl  }
   {
      L = {  ,50},
      f = { ,-50},
      - = {300, },
     \textendash = {400,  },  \textemdash = {300,  }
   }

\SetProtrusion
   [ name     = lmr-it-T1,
     load     = cmr-it-T1 ]
   { encoding = {T1,LY1},
     family   = lmr,
     shape    = {it,sl} }
   {
     \textquotedblleft  = { ,200},  \textquotedblright = { ,200},
     \quotesinglbase    = { ,400},  \quotedblbase      = { ,500}
   }

%    \end{macrocode}
% Oldstyle numerals are slightly different.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\SetProtrusion
   [ name = cmr(oldstyle)-it,
     load = cmr-it-T1 ]
   { encoding = T1,
     family   = {hfor,cmor},
     shape    = {it,sl}  }
   {
     1 = {250, 50},
     2 = {150,-100},
     3 = {100,-50},
     4 = {150,150},
     6 = {200,   },
     7 = {200, 50},
     8 = {150,-50},
     9 = {100, 50}
   }

%</cmr>
%<*pmn>
\SetProtrusion
   [ name     = pmnx-it,
     load     = pmnj-it ]
   { encoding = OT1,
     family   = pmnx,
     shape    = {it,sl} }
   {
     1 = {100,150}
   }

\SetProtrusion
   [ name     = pmnx-it-T1,
     load     = pmnj-it-T1 ]
   { encoding = {T1,LY1},
     family   = pmnx,
     shape    = {it,sl} }
   {
     1 = {100,150}
   }

\SetProtrusion
   [ name     = pmnx-it-T2A,
     load     = pmnj-it-T2A ]
   { encoding = {T2A},
     family   = pmnx,
     shape    = {it,sl} }
   {
     1 = {100,150}
   }

%</pmn>
%<*ptm>
\SetProtrusion
   [ name     = ptm-it-LY1,
     load     = ptm-it-T1   ]
   { encoding = {LY1},
     family   = {ptm,ptmx,ptmj},
     shape    = {it,sl}  }
   {
     _                         = {100,100},
     \texttrademark            = {100,100},
     \textregistered           = {100,100},
     \textcopyright            = {100,100},
     \textdegree               = {300,100},
     \textminus                = {200,200},
     \textellipsis             = {100,200},
%    \texteuro                 = {   ,   }, % ?
     \textcent                 = {100,100},
     \textquotesingle          = {500,   },
     \textflorin               = {100, 70},
     \textdagger               = {150,150},
     \textdaggerdbl            = {100,100},
     \textbullet               = {150,150},
     \textonesuperior          = {150,100},
     \texttwosuperior          = {150, 50},
     \textthreesuperior        = {150, 50},
     \textparagraph            = {100,   },
     \textperiodcentered       = {500,300},
     \textonequarter           = { 50,   },
     \textonehalf              = { 50,   },
     \textplusminus            = {100,100},
     \textmultiply             = {150,150},
     \textdivide               = {150,150}
   }

%</ptm>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\subsubsection{Small caps}
%
% Small caps should inherit the values from their big brothers. Since values are
% relative to character width, we don't need to adjust them any further (but
% we have to reset some characters).
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*!(blg|ugm)>
\SetProtrusion
%<m-t>   [ name     = OT1-sc,
%<bch>   [ name     = bch-sc,
%<cmr>   [ name     = cmr-sc-OT1,
%<pad>   [ name     = pad-sc,
%<pmn>   [ name     = pmnj-sc,
%<ppl>   [ name     = ppl-sc,
%<ptm>   [ name     = ptm-sc,
%<m-t>     load     = default ]
%<bch>     load     = bch-default ]
%<cmr>     load     = cmr-OT1 ]
%<pad>     load     = pad-default ]
%<pmn>     load     = pmnj-default ]
%<ppl>     load     = ppl-default ]
%<ptm>     load     = ptm-default ]
%<m-t|bch|pad|pmn>   { encoding = OT1,
%<cmr|ppl|ptm>   { encoding = {OT1,OT4},
%<bch>     family   = bch,
%<cmr>     family   = cmr,
%<pad>     family   = {pad,padx,padj},
%<pmn>     family   = pmnj,
%<ppl>     family   = {ppl,pplx,pplj},
%<ptm>     family   = {ptm,ptmx,ptmj},
     shape    = sc }
   {
     a = {50,50},
%<cmr|pad|ppl|ptm>   \ae = {50,  },
%<bch|pmn>     c = {50,  },
%<bch|pad|pmn>     d = {  ,50},
%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ptm>     f = {  ,50},
%<bch|pad|pmn>     g = {50,  },
%<m-t|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm>     j = {50,  },
%<bch>     j = {100,  },
%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl>     l = {  ,50},
%<ptm>     l = {  ,80},
%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl>   013 = {  ,50}, % fl
%<ptm>   013 = {  ,80}, % fl
%<bch|pad|pmn>     o = {50,50},
%<pad|pmn>   \oe = {50,  },
%<ppl>     p = { 0, 0},
%<bch|pad|pmn>     q = {50,70},
%<ppl>     q = { 0,  },
%<m-t|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm>     r = {  , 0},
     t = {50,50},
%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl>     y = {50,50}
%<ptm>     y = {80,80}
   }

\SetProtrusion
%<m-t>   [ name     = T1-sc,
%<bch>   [ name     = bch-sc-T1,
%<cmr>   [ name     = cmr-sc-T1,
%<pad>   [ name     = pad-sc-T1,
%<pmn>   [ name     = pmnj-sc-T1,
%<ppl>   [ name     = ppl-sc-T1,
%<ptm>   [ name     = ptm-sc-T1,
%<m-t>     load     = T1-default ]
%<bch>     load     = bch-T1     ]
%<cmr>     load     = cmr-T1     ]
%<pad>     load     = pad-T1     ]
%<pmn>     load     = pmnj-T1    ]
%<ppl>     load     = ppl-T1     ]
%<ptm>     load     = ptm-T1     ]
   { encoding = {T1,LY1},
%<bch>     family   = bch,
%<cmr>     family   = cmr,
%<pad>     family   = {pad,padx,padj},
%<pmn>     family   = pmnj,
%<ppl>     family   = {ppl,pplx,pplj},
%<ptm>     family   = {ptm,ptmx,ptmj},
     shape    = sc }
   {
     a = {50,50},
%<cmr|pad|ppl|ptm>   \ae = {50,  },
%<bch|pmn>     c = {50,  },
%<bch|pad|pmn>     d = {  ,50},
%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ptm>     f = {  ,50},
%<bch|pad|pmn>     g = {50,  },
%<m-t|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm>     j = {50,  },
%<bch>     j = {100,  },
%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl>     l = {  ,50},
%<ptm>     l = {  ,80},
%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl>   029 = {  ,50}, % fl
%<ptm>   029 = {  ,80}, % fl
%<bch|pad|pmn>     o = {50,50},
%<bch|pad|pmn>   \oe = {50,  },
%<ppl>     p = { 0, 0},
%<bch|pad|pmn>     q = {50,70},
%<ppl>     q = { 0,  },
%<m-t|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm>     r = {  , 0},
     t = {50,50},
%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl>     y = {50,50}
%<ptm>     y = {80,80}
   }

%</!(blg|ugm)>
%<*m-t|cmr>
\SetProtrusion
%<m-t>   [ name     = T2A-sc,
%<cmr>   [ name     = cmr-sc-T2A,
%<m-t>     load     = T2A-default ]
%<cmr>     load     = cmr-T2A     ]
   { encoding = T2A,
%<cmr>     family   = cmr,
     shape    = sc }
   {
     \cyra = {50,50},
     \cyrg = {  ,50},
     \cyrt = {50,50},
     \cyry = {  ,50}
   }

%</m-t|cmr>
%<*m-t>
\SetProtrusion
   [ name     = QX-sc,
     load     = QX-default ]
   { encoding = QX,
     shape    = sc  }
   {
     a = {50,50},
     f = {  ,50},
     j = {50,  },
     l = {  ,50},
   013 = {  ,50}, % fl
     r = {  , 0},
     t = {50,50},
     y = {50,50}
   }

%</m-t>
%<*cmr|bch>
\SetProtrusion
%<bch>   [ name     = bch-sc-T5,
%<bch>     load     = bch-T5 ]
%<cmr>   [ name     = cmr-sc-T5,
%<cmr>     load     = cmr-T5 ]
   { encoding = T5,
%<bch>     family   = bch,
%<cmr>     family   = cmr,
     shape    = sc }
   {
     a = {50,50},
%<bch>     c = {50,  },
%<bch>     d = {  ,50},
     f = {  ,50},
%<bch>     g = {50,  },
%<bch>     j = {100, },
%<cmr>     j = {50,  },
     l = {  ,50},
%<bch>     o = {50,50},
%<bch>     q = { 0,  },
%<cmr>     r = {  , 0},
     t = {50,50},
     y = {50,50}
   }

%</cmr|bch>
%<*pmn>
\SetProtrusion
   [ name     = pmnx-sc,
     load     = pmnj-sc ]
   { encoding = OT1,
     family   = pmnx,
     shape    = sc }
   {
     1 = {230,180}
   }

\SetProtrusion
   [ name     = pmnx-sc-T1,
     load     = pmnj-sc-T1 ]
   { encoding = {T1,LY1},
     family   = pmnx,
     shape    = sc }
   {
     1 = {230,180}
   }

%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\subsubsection{Italic small caps}
% Minion provides real small caps in italics.
% The \pkg{slantsc} package calls them |scit|, Philipp Lehman's
% \pkg{fontinstallationguide} suggests |si|.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\SetProtrusion
   [ name     = pmnj-scit,
     load     = pmnj-it   ]
   { encoding = OT1,
     family   = pmnj,
     shape    = {scit,si} }
   {
     a = {50,  },
   \ae = {  ,-50},
     b = {20,-50},
     c = {50,-50},
     d = {20, 0},
     e = {20,-50},
     f = {10, 0},
   012 = {10,-50}, % fi
   013 = {10,-50}, % fl
   014 = {10,-50}, % ffi
   015 = {10,-50}, % ffl
     g = {50,-50},
     i = {20,-50},
     j = {20, 0},
     k = {20,  },
     l = {20,50},
     m = {  ,-30},
     n = {  ,-30},
     o = {50,  },
   \oe = {50,-50},
     p = {20,-50},
     q = {50,  },
     r = {20, 0},
     s = {20,-30},
     t = {70,  },
     u = {50,-50},
     v = {100,  },
     w = {100,  },
     y = {50,  },
     z = {  ,-50}
   }

\SetProtrusion
   [ name     = pmnj-scit-T1,
     load     = pmnj-it-T1   ]
   { encoding = {T1,LY1},
     family   = pmnj,
     shape    = {scit,si}    }
   {
     a = {50,  },
   \ae = {  ,-50},
     b = {20,-50},
     c = {50,-50},
     d = {20, 0},
     e = {20,-50},
     f = {10, 0},
   028 = {10,-50}, % fi
   029 = {10,-50}, % fl
   030 = {10,-50}, % ffi
   031 = {10,-50}, % ffl
     g = {50,-50},
     i = {20,-50},
   188 = {20, 0},  % ij
     j = {20, 0},
     k = {20,  },
     l = {20,50},
     m = {  ,-30},
     n = {  ,-30},
     o = {50,  },
   \oe = {50,-50},
     p = {20,-50},
     q = {50,  },
     r = {20, 0},
     s = {20,-30},
     t = {70,  },
     u = {50,-50},
     v = {100,  },
     w = {100,  },
     y = {50,  },
     z = {  ,-50}
   }

\SetProtrusion
   [ name     = pmnx-scit,
     load     = pmnj-scit ]
   { encoding = OT1,
     family   = pmnx,
     shape    = {scit,si} }
   {
     1 = {100,150}
   }

\SetProtrusion
   [ name     = pmnx-scit-T1,
     load     = pmnj-scit-T1 ]
   { encoding = {T1,LY1},
     family   = pmnx,
     shape    = {scit,si}    }
   {
     1 = {100,150}
   }

%</pmn>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\subsubsection{Text companion}
%
% Finally the <TS1> encoding.
% Still quite incomplete for Times and especially Palatino. Anybody?
%\changes{v1.2}{2004/09/28}{add settings for Computer Modern Roman and
%                           Adobe Garamond in <TS1> encoding}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\SetProtrusion
%<m-t>   [ name     = textcomp ]
%<bch>   [ name     = bch-textcomp ]
%<blg>   [ name     = blg-textcomp ]
%<cmr>   [ name     = cmr-textcomp ]
%<pad>   [ name     = pad-textcomp ]
%<pmn>   [ name     = pmn-textcomp ]
%<ppl>   [ name     = ppl-textcomp ]
%<ptm>   [ name     = ptm-textcomp ]
%<ugm>   [ name     = ugm-textcomp ]
%<m-t>   { encoding = TS1      }
%<!m-t>   { encoding = TS1,
%<bch>     family   = bch }
%<blg>     family   = blg }
%<cmr>     family   = cmr }
%<pad>     family   = {pad,padx,padj} }
%<pmn>     family   = {pmnx,pmnj} }
%<ppl>     family   = {ppl,pplx,pplj} }
%<ptm>     family   = {ptm,ptmx,ptmj} }
%<ugm>     family   = ugm }
   {
%<blg>     \textquotestraightbase    = {400,500},
%<cmr>     \textquotestraightbase    = {300,300},
%<pad|pmn>     \textquotestraightbase    = {400,400},
%<blg>     \textquotestraightdblbase = {300,400},
%<cmr|pmn>     \textquotestraightdblbase = {300,300},
%<pad>     \textquotestraightdblbase = {400,400},
%<bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ugm>     \texttwelveudash          = {200,200},
%<bch|cmr|pad|pmn>     \textthreequartersemdash  = {150,150},
%<ugm>     \textthreequartersemdash  = {200,200},
%<blg>     \textquotesingle          = {500,600},
%<cmr|pmn>     \textquotesingle          = {300,400},
%<pad>     \textquotesingle          = {400,500},
%<ptm>     \textquotesingle          = {500,500},
%<ugm>     \textquotesingle          = {300,500},
%<bch|cmr|pmn>     \textasteriskcentered     = {200,300},
%<blg>     \textasteriskcentered     = {150,200},
%<pad>     \textasteriskcentered     = {300,300},
%<ugm>     \textasteriskcentered     = {100,200},
%<pmn>     \textfractionsolidus      = {-200,-200},
%<cmr>     \textoneoldstyle          = {100,100},
%<pmn>     \textoneoldstyle          = {   , 50},
%<cmr>     \textthreeoldstyle        = {   , 50},
%<pad|pmn>     \textthreeoldstyle        = { 50,   },
%<cmr>     \textfouroldstyle         = { 50, 50},
%<pad|pmn>     \textfouroldstyle         = { 50,   },
%<cmr|pad|pmn>     \textsevenoldstyle        = { 50, 80},
%<cmr>     \textlangle               = {400,   },
%<cmr>     \textrangle               = {   ,400},
%<m-t|bch|pmn|ptm>     \textminus                = {200,200},
%<cmr|pad|ppl>     \textminus                = {300,300},
%<blg|ugm>     \textminus                = {250,300},
%<bch|pad|pmn>     \textlbrackdbl            = {100,   },
%<blg>     \textlbrackdbl            = {200,   },
%<bch|pad|pmn>     \textrbrackdbl            = {   ,100},
%<blg>     \textrbrackdbl            = {   ,200},
%<pmn>     \textasciigrave           = {200,500},
%<bch|blg|cmr|pad|pmn>     \texttildelow             = {200,250},
%<pmn>     \textasciibreve           = {300,400},
%<pmn>     \textasciicaron           = {300,400},
%<pmn>     \textacutedbl             = {200,300},
%<pmn>     \textgravedbl             = {150,300},
%<bch|pmn|ugm>     \textdagger               = { 80, 80},
%<blg>     \textdagger               = {200,200},
%<cmr|pad>     \textdagger               = {100,100},
%<ptm>     \textdagger               = {150,150},
%<blg>     \textdaggerdbl            = {150,150},
%<cmr|pad|pmn>     \textdaggerdbl            = { 80, 80},
%<ptm>     \textdaggerdbl            = {100,100},
%<bch>     \textbardbl               = {100,100},
%<blg|ugm>     \textbardbl               = {150,150},
%<bch>     \textbullet               = {200,200},
%<blg>     \textbullet               = {400,500},
%<cmr|pad|pmn>     \textbullet               = {   ,100},
%<ptm>     \textbullet               = {150,150},
%<ugm>     \textbullet               = { 50,100},
%<bch|cmr|pmn>     \textcelsius              = { 50,   },
%<pad>     \textcelsius              = { 80,   },
%<bch>     \textflorin               = { 50, 50},
%<blg>     \textflorin               = {100,100},
%<pad|ugm>     \textflorin               = {   ,100},
%<pmn>     \textflorin               = { 50,100},
%<ptm>     \textflorin               = { 50, 70},
%<cmr>     \textcolonmonetary        = {   , 50},
%<pad|pmn>     \textcolonmonetary        = { 50,   },
%<pmn>     \textinterrobang          = {   ,100},
%<pmn>     \textinterrobangdown      = {100,   },
%<m-t|pad|ptm>     \texttrademark            = {100,100},
%<bch>     \texttrademark            = {150,150},
%<blg|cmr|ppl>     \texttrademark            = {200,200},
%<pmn>     \texttrademark            = { 50, 50},
%<ugm>     \texttrademark            = {100,150},
%<bch|ugm>     \textcent                 = { 50,   },
%<ptm>     \textcent                 = {100,100},
%<bch>     \textsterling             = { 50,   },
%<ugm>     \textsterling             = {   , 50},
%<bch>     \textbrokenbar            = {200,200},
%<blg>     \textbrokenbar            = {250,250},
%<ugm>     \textbrokenbar            = {200,300},
%<pmn>     \textasciidieresis        = {300,400},
%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|ptm|ugm>     \textcopyright            = {100,100},
%<pmn>     \textcopyright            = {100,150},
%<ppl>     \textcopyright            = {200,200},
%<bch|cmr|ugm>     \textordfeminine          = {100,200},
%<pad|pmn>     \textordfeminine          = {200,200},
%<bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ugm>     \textlnot                 = {200,   },
%<blg>     \textlnot                 = {200,100},
%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|ptm|ugm>     \textregistered           = {100,100},
%<pmn>     \textregistered           = { 50,150},
%<ppl>     \textregistered           = {200,200},
%<pmn>     \textasciimacron          = {150,200},
%<m-t|ppl|ptm>     \textdegree               = {300,300},
%<bch>     \textdegree               = {150,200},
%<blg|ugm>     \textdegree               = {200,200},
%<cmr|pad>     \textdegree               = {400,400},
%<pmn>     \textdegree               = {150,400},
%<bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ugm>     \textpm                   = {150,200},
%<blg>     \textpm                   = {100,100},
%<ptm>     \textpm                   = { 50, 80},
%<bch|blg|ugm>     \texttwosuperior          = {100,200},
%<cmr>     \texttwosuperior          = { 50,100},
%<pad|pmn>     \texttwosuperior          = {200,200},
%<ptm>     \texttwosuperior          = { 50, 50},
%<bch|blg|ugm>     \textthreesuperior        = {100,200},
%<cmr>     \textthreesuperior        = { 50,100},
%<pad|pmn>     \textthreesuperior        = {200,200},
%<ptm>     \textthreesuperior        = { 50, 50},
%<pmn>     \textasciiacute           = {300,400},
%<bch|ugm>     \textmu                   = {   ,100},
%<bch|pad|pmn>     \textparagraph            = {   ,100},
%<bch|cmr|pad|pmn>     \textperiodcentered       = {300,400},
%<blg>     \textperiodcentered       = {400,500},
%<ptm>     \textperiodcentered       = {300,300},
%<ugm>     \textperiodcentered       = {200,500},
%<bch|blg|ugm>     \textonesuperior          = {200,300},
%<cmr|pad|pmn>     \textonesuperior          = {200,200},
%<ptm>     \textonesuperior          = {100,100},
%<bch|pad|pmn|ugm>     \textordmasculine         = {200,200},
%<blg|cmr>     \textordmasculine         = {100,200},
%<bch|cmr|pmn>     \texteuro                 = {100,   },
%<pad>     \texteuro                 = { 50,100},
%<bch>     \texttimes                = {200,200},
%<blg|ptm>     \texttimes                = {100,100},
%<cmr>     \texttimes                = {150,250},
%<pad>     \texttimes                = {100,150},
%<pmn>     \texttimes                = { 70,100},
%<ugm>     \texttimes                = {200,300},
%<bch|pad|pmn>     \textdiv                  = {150,200}
%<blg>     \textdiv                  = {100,100}
%<cmr>     \textdiv                  = {150,250}
%<ptm>     \textdiv                  = { 50,100},
%<ugm>     \textdiv                  = {200,300},
%<ptm>     \textperthousand          = {    ,50}
%<ugm>     \textsection              = {   ,100},
%<ugm>     \textonehalf              = { 50,100},
%<ugm>     \textonequarter           = { 50,100},
%<ugm>     \textthreequarters        = { 50,100},
%<ugm>     \textsurd                 = {   ,100}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Remaining slots in the source file.
%\iffalse
%    \textyen                     = {  ,  },
%    \texttwooldstyle             = {  ,  },
%    \textfiveoldstyle            = {  ,  },
%    \textsixoldstyle             = {  ,  },
%    \texteightoldstyle           = {  ,  },
%    \textnineoldstyle            = {  ,  },
%    \textleftarrow               = {  ,  },
%    \textrightarrow              = {  ,  },
%    \textblank                   = {  ,  },
%    \textdollar                  = {  ,  },
%    \textdblhyphen               = {  ,  },
%    \textdblhyphenchar           = {  ,  },
%    \textohm                     = {  ,  },
%    \textmho                     = {  ,  },
%    \textbigcircle               = {  ,  },
%    \textuparrow                 = {  ,  },
%    \textdownarrow               = {  ,  },
%    \textborn                    = {  ,  },
%    \textdied                    = {  ,  },
%    \textmarried                 = {  ,  },
%    \textdivorced                = {  ,  },
%    \textleaf                    = {  ,  },
%    \textmusicalnote             = {  ,  },
%    \textdollaroldstyle          = {  ,  },
%    \textcentoldstyle            = {  ,  },
%    \textwon                     = {  ,  },
%    \textnaira                   = {  ,  },
%    \textguarani                 = {  ,  },
%    \textpeso                    = {  ,  },
%    \textlira                    = {  ,  },
%    \textrecipe                  = {  ,  },
%    \textdong                    = {  ,  },
%    \textpertenthousand          = {  ,  },
%    \textpilcrow                 = {  ,  },
%    \textbaht                    = {  ,  },
%    \textnumero                  = {  ,  },
%    \textdiscount                = {  ,  },
%    \textestimated               = {  ,  },
%    \textopenbullet              = {  ,  },
%    \textservicemark             = {  ,  },
%    \textlquill                  = {  ,  },
%    \textrquill                  = {  ,  },
%    \textcopyleft                = {  ,  },
%    \textcircledP                = {  ,  },
%    \textreferencemark           = {  ,  },
%\fi
%    \begin{macrocode}
   }

%<*cmr|pad|pmn|ugm>
\SetProtrusion
%<cmr>   [ name     = cmr-textcomp-it ]
%<pad>   [ name     = pad-textcomp-it ]
%<pmn>   [ name     = pmn-textcomp-it ]
%<ugm>   [ name     = ugm-textcomp-it ]
   { encoding = TS1,
%<cmr>     family   = cmr,
%<pad>     family   = {pad,padx,padj},
%<pmn>     family   = {pmnx,pmnj},
%<ugm>     family   = ugm,
%<!ugm>     shape    = {it,sl} }
%<ugm>     shape    = it }
   {
%<cmr>     \textquotestraightbase    = {300,600},
%<pad|pmn>     \textquotestraightbase    = {400,400},
%<cmr>     \textquotestraightdblbase = {300,600},
%<pad>     \textquotestraightdblbase = {300,400},
%<pmn>     \textquotestraightdblbase = {300,300},
     \texttwelveudash          = {200,200},
%<cmr|pad|pmn>     \textthreequartersemdash  = {150,150},
%<ugm>     \textthreequartersemdash  = {200,200},
%<cmr>     \textquotesingle          = {600,300},
%<pad>     \textquotesingle          = {800,100},
%<pmn>     \textquotesingle          = {300,200},
%<ugm>     \textquotesingle          = {500,500},
%<cmr>     \textasteriskcentered     = {300,200},
%<pad>     \textasteriskcentered     = {500,100},
%<pmn>     \textasteriskcentered     = {200,300},
%<ugm>     \textasteriskcentered     = {300,150},
%<pmn>     \textfractionsolidus      = {-200,-200},
%<cmr>     \textoneoldstyle          = {100, 50},
%<pad>     \textoneoldstyle          = {100,   },
%<pmn>     \textoneoldstyle          = { 50,   },
%<pad>     \texttwooldstyle          = { 50,   },
%<pmn>     \texttwooldstyle          = {-50,   },
%<cmr>     \textthreeoldstyle        = {100, 50},
%<pmn>     \textthreeoldstyle        = {-100,  },
%<cmr>     \textfouroldstyle         = { 50, 50},
%<pad>     \textfouroldstyle         = { 50,100},
%<cmr>     \textsevenoldstyle        = { 50, 80},
%<pad>     \textsevenoldstyle        = { 50,   },
%<pmn>     \textsevenoldstyle        = { 20,   },
%<cmr>     \textlangle               = {400,   },
%<cmr>     \textrangle               = {   ,400},
%<cmr|pad>     \textminus                = {300,300},
%<pmn>     \textminus                = {200,200},
%<ugm>     \textminus                = {250,300},
%<pad|pmn>     \textlbrackdbl            = {100,   },
%<pad|pmn>     \textrbrackdbl            = {   ,100},
%<pmn>     \textasciigrave           = {300,300},
%<cmr|pad|pmn>     \texttildelow             = {200,250},
%<pmn>     \textasciibreve           = {300,300},
%<pmn>     \textasciicaron           = {300,300},
%<pmn>     \textacutedbl             = {200,300},
%<pmn>     \textgravedbl             = {150,300},
%<cmr>     \textdagger               = {100,100},
%<pad>     \textdagger               = {200,100},
%<pmn>     \textdagger               = { 80, 50},
%<ugm>     \textdagger               = { 80, 80},
%<cmr|pad>     \textdaggerdbl            = { 80, 80},
%<pmn>     \textdaggerdbl            = { 80, 50},
%<ugm>     \textbardbl               = {150,150},
%<cmr>     \textbullet               = {200,100},
%<pad>     \textbullet               = {300,   },
%<pmn>     \textbullet               = { 30, 70},
%<ugm>     \textbullet               = { 50,100},
%<cmr>     \textcelsius              = {100,   },
%<pad>     \textcelsius              = {200,   },
%<pmn>     \textcelsius              = { 50,-50},
%<pad>     \textflorin               = {100,   },
%<pmn>     \textflorin               = { 50,100},
%<ugm>     \textflorin               = {   ,100},
%<cmr>     \textcolonmonetary        = {150,   },
%<pad>     \textcolonmonetary        = {100,   },
%<pmn>     \textcolonmonetary        = { 50,-50},
%<cmr|pad>     \texttrademark            = {200,   },
%<pmn>     \texttrademark            = { 50,100},
%<ugm>     \texttrademark            = {150, 50},
%<ugm>     \textcent                 = { 50,   },
%<ugm>     \textsterling             = {   , 50},
%<ugm>     \textbrokenbar            = {200,300},
%<pmn>     \textasciidieresis        = {300,200},
%<cmr>     \textcopyright            = {100,   },
%<pad>     \textcopyright            = {200,100},
%<pmn>     \textcopyright            = {100,150},
%<ugm>     \textcopyright            = {300,   },
%<cmr>     \textordfeminine          = {100,100},
%<pmn>     \textordfeminine          = {200,200},
%<ugm>     \textordfeminine          = {100,200},
%<cmr|pad>     \textlnot                 = {300,   },
%<pmn|ugm>     \textlnot                 = {200,   },
%<cmr>     \textregistered           = {100,   },
%<pad>     \textregistered           = {200,100},
%<pmn>     \textregistered           = { 50,150},
%<ugm>     \textregistered           = {300,   },
%<pmn>     \textasciimacron          = {150,200},
%<cmr|pad>     \textdegree               = {500,100},
%<pmn>     \textdegree               = {150,150},
%<ugm>     \textdegree               = {300,200},
%<cmr>     \textpm                   = {150,100},
%<pad>     \textpm                   = {200,150},
%<pmn|ugm>     \textpm                   = {150,200},
%<cmr>     \textonesuperior          = {400,   },
%<pad>     \textonesuperior          = {300,100},
%<pmn>     \textonesuperior          = {200,100},
%<ugm>     \textonesuperior          = {300,300},
%<cmr>     \texttwosuperior          = {400,   },
%<pad>     \texttwosuperior          = {300,   },
%<pmn>     \texttwosuperior          = {200,100},
%<ugm>     \texttwosuperior          = {300,200},
%<cmr>     \textthreesuperior        = {400,   },
%<pad>     \textthreesuperior        = {300,   },
%<pmn>     \textthreesuperior        = {200,100},
%<ugm>     \textthreesuperior        = {300,200},
%<ugm>     \textmu                   = {   ,100},
%<pmn>     \textasciiacute           = {300,200},
%<cmr>     \textparagraph            = {200,   },
%<pmn>     \textparagraph            = {   ,100},
%<cmr>     \textperiodcentered       = {500,500},
%<pad|pmn|ugm>     \textperiodcentered       = {300,400},
%<cmr>     \textordmasculine         = {100,100},
%<pmn>     \textordmasculine         = {200,200},
%<ugm>     \textordmasculine         = {300,200},
%<cmr>     \texteuro                 = {200,   },
%<pad>     \texteuro                 = {100,   },
%<pmn>     \texteuro                 = {100,-50},
%<cmr>     \texttimes                = {200,200},
%<pad>     \texttimes                = {200,100},
%<pmn>     \texttimes                = { 70,100},
%<ugm>     \texttimes                = {200,300},
%<cmr|pad>     \textdiv                  = {200,200}
%<pmn>     \textdiv                  = {150,200}
%<ugm>     \textdiv                  = {200,300},
%<ugm>     \textsection              = {   ,200},
%<ugm>     \textonehalf              = { 50,100},
%<ugm>     \textonequarter           = { 50,100},
%<ugm>     \textthreequarters        = { 50,100},
%<ugm>     \textsurd                 = {   ,100}
   }

%</cmr|pad|pmn|ugm>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\subsubsection{Computer Modern math}
%
% Now to the math symbols for Computer Modern Roman. Definitions have been
% extracted from \file{fontmath.ltx}.
%\changes{v1.2}{2004/10/02}{add settings for Computer Modern Roman math symbols}
% I did not spend too much time fiddling with these settings, so they can surely
% be improved.
%
% The math font `|operators|' (also used for the \cmd\mathrm\ and
% \cmd\mathbf\ alphabets) is |OT1/cmr|, which we've already set up above.
% It's declared as:
%\begin{verbatim}
%\DeclareSymbolFont{operators}  {OT1}{cmr}{m} {n}
%\SetSymbolFont{operators}{bold}{OT1}{cmr}{bx}{n}
%\end{verbatim}
%
% \cmd\mathit\ (|OT1/cmr/m/it|) is also already set up.
%
% There are (for the moment) no settings for \cmd\mathsf\ and \cmd\mathtt.
%
% Math font `|letters|' (also used as \cmd\mathnormal) is declared as:
%\begin{verbatim}
%\DeclareSymbolFont{letters}    {OML}{cmm}{m}{it}
%\SetSymbolFont{letters}  {bold}{OML}{cmm}{b}{it}
%\end{verbatim}
%\changes{v1.6}{2004/12/26}{tune <CMR> math letters (<OML> encoding)}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*cmr>
\SetProtrusion
   [ name     = cmr-math-letters ]
   { encoding = OML,
     family   = cmm,
     series   = {m,b},
     shape    = it    }
   {
       A = {100, 50}, % \mathnormal
       B = { 50,   },
       C = { 50,   },
       D = { 50, 50},
       E = { 50,   },
       F = {100, 50},
       G = { 50, 50},
       H = { 50, 50},
       I = { 50, 50},
       J = {150, 50},
       K = { 50,100},
       L = { 50, 50},
       M = { 50,   },
       N = { 50,   },
       O = { 50,   },
       P = { 50,   },
       Q = { 50, 50},
       R = { 50,   },
       S = { 50,   },
       T = { 50,100},
       U = { 50, 50},
       V = {100,100},
       W = { 50,100},
       X = { 50,100},
       Y = {100,100},
       f = {100,100},
       h = {   ,100},
       i = {   , 50},
       j = {   , 50},
       k = {   , 50},
       r = {   , 50},
       v = {   , 50},
       w = {   , 50},
       x = {   , 50},
     "0B = { 50,100}, % \alpha
     "0C = { 50, 50}, % \beta
     "0D = {200,150}, % \gamma
     "0E = { 50, 50}, % \delta
     "0F = { 50, 50}, % \epsilon
     "10 = { 50,150}, % \zeta
     "12 = { 50,   }, % \theta
     "13 = {   ,100}, % \iota
     "14 = {   ,100}, % \kappa
     "15 = {100, 50}, % \lambda
     "16 = {   , 50}, % \mu
     "17 = {   , 50}, % \nu
     "18 = {   , 50}, % \xi
     "19 = { 50,100}, % \pi
     "1A = { 50, 50}, % \rho
     "1B = {   ,150}, % \sigma
     "1C = { 50,150}, % \tau
     "1D = { 50, 50}, % \upsilon
     "1F = { 50,100}, % \chi
     "20 = { 50, 50}, % \psi
     "21 = {   , 50}, % \omega
     "22 = {   , 50}, % \varepsilon
     "23 = {   , 50}, % \vartheta
     "24 = {   , 50}, % \varpi
     "25 = {100,   }, % \varrho
     "26 = {100,100}, % \varsigma
     "27 = { 50, 50}, % \varphi
     "28 = {100,100}, % \leftharpoonup
     "29 = {100,100}, % \leftharpoondown
     "2A = {100,100}, % \rightharpoonup
     "2B = {100,100}, % \rightharpoondown
     "2C = {300,200}, % \lhook
     "2D = {200,300}, % \rhook
     "2E = {   ,100}, % \triangleright
     "2F = {100,   }, % \triangleleft
     "3A = {   ,500}, % ., \ldotp
     "3B = {   ,500}, % ,
     "3C = {200,100}, % <
     "3D = {300,400}, % /
     "3E = {100,200}, % >
     "3F = {200,200}, % \star
     "5B = {   ,100}, % \flat
     "5E = {200,200}, % \smile
     "5F = {200,200}, % \frown
     "7C = {100,   }, % \jmath
     "7D = {   ,100}  % \wp
%    \end{macrocode}
% Remaining slots in the source file.
%\iffalse
%    "11 = {   ,   }, % \eta
%    "1E = {   ,   }, % \phi
%    "40 = {   ,   }, % \partial
%    "5C = {   ,   }, % \natural
%    "5D = {   ,   }, % \sharp
%    "60 = {   ,   }, % \ell
%    "7B = {   ,   }, % \imath
%\fi
%    \begin{macrocode}
   }

%    \end{macrocode}
% Math font `|symbols|' (also used for the \cmd\mathcal\ alphabet) is declared
% as:
%\begin{verbatim}
%\DeclareSymbolFont{symbols}    {OMS}{cmsy}{m}{n}
%\SetSymbolFont{symbols}  {bold}{OMS}{cmsy}{b}{n}
%\end{verbatim}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\SetProtrusion
   [ name     = cmr-math-symbols ]
   { encoding = OMS,
     family   = cmsy,
     series   = {m,b},
     shape    = n  }
   {
       A = {150, 50}, % \mathcal
       C = {   ,100},
       D = {   , 50},
       F = { 50,150},
       I = {   ,100},
       J = {100,150},
       K = {   ,100},
       L = {100,   },
       M = { 50, 50},
       N = { 50,100},
       P = {   , 50},
       Q = { 50,   },
       R = {   , 50},
       T = { 50,150},
       V = { 50, 50},
       W = {   , 50},
       X = {100,100},
       Y = {100,   },
       Z = {100,150},
     "00 = {300,300}, % -
     "01 = {   ,700}, % \cdot, \cdotp
     "02 = {150,250}, % \times
     "03 = {150,250}, % *, \ast
     "04 = {200,300}, % \div
     "05 = {150,250}, % \diamond
     "06 = {200,200}, % \pm
     "07 = {200,200}, % \mp
     "08 = {100,100}, % \oplus
     "09 = {100,100}, % \ominus
     "0A = {100,100}, % \otimes
     "0B = {100,100}, % \oslash
     "0C = {100,100}, % \odot
     "0D = {100,100}, % \bigcirc
     "0E = {100,100}, % \circ
     "0F = {100,100}, % \bullet
     "10 = {100,100}, % \asymp
     "11 = {100,100}, % \equiv
     "12 = {200,100}, % \subseteq
     "13 = {100,200}, % \supseteq
     "14 = {200,100}, % \leq
     "15 = {100,200}, % \geq
     "16 = {200,100}, % \preceq
     "17 = {100,200}, % \succeq
     "18 = {200,200}, % \sim
     "19 = {150,150}, % \approx
     "1A = {200,100}, % \subset
     "1B = {100,200}, % \supset
     "1C = {200,100}, % \ll
     "1D = {100,200}, % \gg
     "1E = {300,100}, % \prec
     "1F = {100,300}, % \succ
     "20 = {100,200}, % \leftarrow
     "21 = {200,100}, % \rightarrow
     "22 = {100,100}, % \uparrow
     "23 = {100,100}, % \downarrow
     "24 = {100,100}, % \leftrightarrow
     "25 = {100,100}, % \nearrow
     "26 = {100,100}, % \searrow
     "27 = {100,100}, % \simeq
     "28 = {100,100}, % \Leftarrow
     "29 = {100,100}, % \Rightarrow
     "2A = {100,100}, % \Uparrow
     "2B = {100,100}, % \Downarrow
     "2C = {100,100}, % \Leftrightarrow
     "2D = {100,100}, % \nwarrow
     "2E = {100,100}, % \swarrow
     "2F = {   ,100}, % \propto
     "30 = {   ,400}, % \prime
     "31 = {100,100}, % \infty
     "32 = {150,100}, % \in
     "33 = {100,150}, % \ni
     "34 = {100,100}, % \triangle, \bigtriangleup
     "35 = {100,100}, % \bigtriangledown
     "38 = {   ,100}, % \forall
     "39 = {100,   }, % \exists
     "3A = {200,   }, % \neg
     "3E = {200,200}, % \top
     "3F = {200,200}, % \bot, \perp
     "5E = {100,200}, % \wedge
     "5F = {100,200}, % \vee
     "60 = {   ,300}, % \vdash
     "61 = {300,   }, % \dashv
     "62 = {100,100}, % \lfloor
     "63 = {100,100}, % \rfloor
     "64 = {100,100}, % \lceil
     "65 = {100,100}, % \rceil
     "66 = {150,   }, % \lbrace
     "67 = {   ,150}, % \rbrace
     "68 = {400,   }, % \langle
     "69 = {   ,400}, % \rangle
     "6C = {100,100}, % \updownarrow
     "6D = {100,100}, % \Updownarrow
     "6E = {100,300}, % \, \backslash, \setminus
     "72 = {100,100}, % \nabla
     "79 = {200,200}, % \dagger
     "7A = {100,100}, % \ddagger
     "7B = {100,   }, % \mathparagraph
     "7C = {100,100}, % \clubsuit
     "7D = {100,100}, % \diamondsuit
     "7E = {100,100}, % \heartsuit
     "7F = {100,100}  % \spadesuit
%    \end{macrocode}
% Remaining slots in the source file.
%\iffalse
%    "36 = {   ,   }, % \not
%    "37 = {   ,   }, % \mapstochar
%    "3B = {   ,   }, % \emptyset
%    "3C = {   ,   }, % \Re
%    "3D = {   ,   }, % \Im
%    "40 = {   ,   }, % \aleph
%    "5B = {   ,   }, % \cup
%    "5C = {   ,   }, % \cap
%    "5D = {   ,   }, % \uplus
%    "6A = {   ,   }, % \arrowvert, \mid, \vert, |
%    "6B = {   ,   }, % \Arrowvert, \parallel, \Vert
%    "6F = {   ,   }, % \wr
%    "70 = {   ,   }, % \sqrtsign
%    "71 = {   ,   }, % \amalg
%    "73 = {   ,   }, % \smallint
%    "74 = {   ,   }, % \sqcup
%    "75 = {   ,   }, % \sqcap
%    "76 = {   ,   }, % \sqsubseteq
%    "77 = {   ,   }, % \sqsupseteq
%    "78 = {   ,   }, % \mathsection
%\fi
%    \begin{macrocode}
   }

%    \end{macrocode}
% We don't bother about `|largesymbols|', since it will only be used in display
% math, where protrusion doesn't work anyway. It's declared as:
%\begin{verbatim}
%\DeclareSymbolFont{largesymbols}{OMX}{cmex}{m}{n}
%\end{verbatim}
%\iffalse
%\SetProtrusion
%   [ name     = cmr-math-largesymbols ]
%   { encoding = OMX,
%     family   = cmex }
%   {
%     "00 % (
%     "01 % )
%     "02 % [
%     "03 % ]
%     "04 % \lfloor
%     "05 % \rfloor
%     "06 % \lceil
%     "07 % \rceil
%     "08 % \lbrace
%     "09 % \rbrace
%     "0A % <, \langle
%     "0B % >, \rangle
%     "0C % \vert, |
%     "0D % \Vert
%     "0E % /
%     "0F % \backslash
%     "3A % \lgroup
%     "3B % \rgroup
%     "3C % \arrowvert
%     "3D % \Arrowvert
%     "3E % \bracevert
%     "3F % \updownarrow
%     "40 % \lmoustache
%     "41 % \rmoustache
%     "46 % \bigsqcup
%     "48 % \ointop
%     "4A % \bigodot
%     "4C % \bigoplus
%     "4E % \bigotimes
%     "50 % \sum
%     "51 % \prod
%     "52 % \intop
%     "53 % \bigcup
%     "54 % \bigcap
%     "55 % \biguplus
%     "56 % \bigwedge
%     "57 % \bigvee
%     "60 % \coprod
%     "70 % \sqrtsign
%     "77 % \Updownarrow
%     "78 % \uparrow
%     "79 % \downarrow
%     "7A % \braceld, \lmoustache
%     "7B % \bracerd, \rmoustache
%     "7C % \bracelu
%     "7D % \braceru
%     "7E % \Uparrow
%     "7F % \Downarrow
%  }
%\fi
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</cmr>
%</cfg-t>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsubsection{<AMS> symbols}
%
% Settings for the <AMS> math fonts (\pkg{amssymb}).
%\changes{v1.8}{2005/06/01}{settings for <AMS> math fonts}
%\changes{v1.9d}{2006/02/04}{tweak <AMS> settings}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*cfg-u>
%    \end{macrocode}
% Symbol font `a'.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*msa>
\SetProtrusion
   [ name     = AMS-a ]
   { encoding = U,
     family   = msa  }
   {
     "05  =  {150,250},  % \centerdot
     "06  =  {100,100},  % \lozenge
     "07  =  { 50, 50},  % \blacklozenge
     "08  =  { 50, 50},  % \circlearrowright
     "09  =  { 50, 50},  % \circlearrowleft
     "0A  =  {100,100},  % \rightleftharpoons
     "0B  =  {100,100},  % \leftrightharpoons
     "0D  =  {-50,200},  % \Vdash
     "0E  =  {-50,200},  % \Vvdash
     "0F  =  {-70,150},  % \vDash
     "10  =  {100,150},  % \twoheadrightarrow
     "11  =  {100,150},  % \twoheadleftarrow
     "12  =  { 50,100},  % \leftleftarrows
     "13  =  { 50, 80},  % \rightrightarrows
     "14  =  {120,120},  % \upuparrows
     "15  =  {120,120},  % \downdownarrows
     "16  =  {200,200},  % \upharpoonright
     "17  =  {200,200},  % \downharpoonright
     "18  =  {200,200},  % \upharpoonleft
     "19  =  {200,200},  % \downharpoonleft
     "1A  =  { 80,100},  % \rightarrowtail
     "1B  =  { 80,100},  % \leftarrowtail
     "1C  =  { 50, 50},  % \leftrightarrows
     "1D  =  { 50, 50},  % \rightleftarrows
     "1E  =  {250,   },  % \Lsh
     "1F  =  {   ,250},  % \Rsh
     "20  =  {100,100},  % \rightsquigarrow
     "21  =  {100,100},  % \leftrightsquigarrow
     "22  =  {100, 50},  % \looparrowleft
     "23  =  { 50,100},  % \looparrowright
     "24  =  { 50, 80},  % \circeq
     "25  =  {   ,100},  % \succsim
     "26  =  {   ,100},  % \gtrsim
     "27  =  {   ,100},  % \gtrapprox
     "28  =  {150, 50},  % \multimap
     "2B  =  {100,150},  % \doteqdot
     "2C  =  {100,150},  % \triangleq
     "2D  =  {100, 50},  % \precsim
     "2E  =  {100, 50},  % \lesssim
     "2F  =  { 50, 50},  % \lessapprox
     "30  =  {100, 50},  % \eqslantless
     "31  =  { 50, 50},  % \eqslantgtr
     "32  =  {100, 50},  % \curlyeqprec
     "33  =  { 50,100},  % \curlyeqsucc
     "34  =  {100, 50},  % \preccurlyeq
     "36  =  { 50,   },  % \leqslant
     "38  =  {   , 50},  % \backprime
     "39  =  {250,250},  % \dabar@ : the dash bar in \dash(left,right)arrow
     "3C  =  { 50,100},  % \succcurlyeq
     "3E  =  {   , 50},  % \geqslant
     "40  =  {   , 50},  % \sqsubset
     "41  =  { 50,   },  % \sqsupset
     "42  =  {   ,150},  % \vartriangleright, \rhd
     "43  =  {150,   },  % \vartriangleleft, \lhd
     "44  =  {   ,100},  % \trianglerighteq, \unrhd
     "45  =  {100,   },  % \trianglelefteq, \unlhd
     "46  =  {100,100},  % \bigstar
     "48  =  { 50, 50},  % \blacktriangledown
     "49  =  {   ,100},  % \blacktriangleright
     "4A  =  {100,   },  % \blacktriangleleft
     "4B  =  {   ,150},  % \dashrightarrow (the arrow)
     "4C  =  {150,   },  % \dashleftarrow
     "4D  =  { 50, 50},  % \vartriangle
     "4E  =  { 50, 50},  % \blacktriangle
     "4F  =  { 50, 50},  % \triangledown
     "50  =  { 50, 50},  % \eqcirc
     "56  =  {   ,150},  % \Rrightarrow
     "57  =  {150,   },  % \Lleftarrow
     "58  =  {100,300},  % \checkmark
     "5C  =  { 50, 50},  % \angle
     "5D  =  { 50, 50},  % \measuredangle
     "5E  =  { 50, 50},  % \sphericalangle
     "5F  =  {   , 50},  % \varpropto
     "60  =  {100,100},  % \smallsmile
     "61  =  {100,100},  % \smallfrown
     "62  =  { 50,   },  % \Subset
     "63  =  {   , 50},  % \Supset
     "66  =  {150,150},  % \curlywedge
     "67  =  {150,150},  % \curlyvee
     "68  =  { 50,150},  % \leftthreetimes
     "69  =  {100, 50},  % \rightthreetimes
     "6C  =  { 50, 50},  % \bumpeq
     "6D  =  { 50, 50},  % \Bumpeq
     "6E  =  {100,   },  % \lll
     "6F  =  {   ,100},  % \ggg
     "70  =  { 50,100},  % \ulcorner
     "71  =  {100, 50},  % \urcorner
     "75  =  {150,200},  % \dotplus
     "76  =  { 50,100},  % \backsim
     "78  =  { 50,100},  % \llcorner
     "79  =  {100, 50},  % \lrcorner
     "7C  =  {100,100},  % \intercal
     "7D  =  { 50, 50},  % \circledcirc
     "7E  =  { 50, 50},  % \circledast
     "7F  =  { 50, 50}   % \circleddash
%    \end{macrocode}
% Remaining slots in the source file.
%\iffalse
%    "00  =  {   ,   },  % \boxdot
%    "01  =  {   ,   },  % \boxplus
%    "02  =  {   ,   },  % \boxtimes
%    "03  =  {   ,   },  % \square
%    "04  =  {   ,   },  % \blacksquare
%    "0C  =  {   ,   },  % \boxminus
%    "29  =  {   ,   },  % \therefore
%    "2A  =  {   ,   },  % \because
%    "35  =  {   ,   },  % \leqq
%    "37  =  {   ,   },  % \lessgtr
%    "3A  =  {   ,   },  % \risingdotseq
%    "3B  =  {   ,   },  % \fallingdotseq
%    "3D  =  {   ,   },  % \geqq
%    "3F  =  {   ,   },  % \gtrless
%    "47  =  {   ,   },  % \between
%    "51  =  {   ,   },  % \lesseqgtr
%    "52  =  {   ,   },  % \gtreqless
%    "53  =  {   ,   },  % \lesseqqgtr
%    "54  =  {   ,   },  % \gtreqqless
%    "55  =  {   ,   },  % \yen
%    "59  =  {   ,   },  % \veebar
%    "5A  =  {   ,   },  % \barwedge
%    "5B  =  {   ,   },  % \doublebarwedge
%    "64  =  {   ,   },  % \Cup
%    "65  =  {   ,   },  % \Cap
%    "6A  =  {   ,   },  % \subseteqq
%    "6B  =  {   ,   },  % \supseteqq
%    "72  =  {   ,   },  % \circledR
%    "73  =  {   ,   },  % \circledS
%    "74  =  {   ,   },  % \pitchfork
%    "77  =  {   ,   },  % \backsimeq
%    "7A  =  {   ,   },  % \maltese
%    "7B  =  {   ,   },  % \complement
%\fi
%    \begin{macrocode}
   }

%</msa>
%    \end{macrocode}
% Symbol font `b'.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*msb>
\SetProtrusion
   [ name     = AMS-b ]
   { encoding = U,
     family   = msb  }
   {
       A  =  { 50, 50},  % \mathbb
       C  =  { 50, 50},
       G  =  {   , 50},
       L  =  {   , 50},
       P  =  {   , 50},
       R  =  {   , 50},
       T  =  {   , 50},
       V  =  { 50, 50},
       X  =  { 50, 50},
       Y  =  { 50, 50},
     "00  =  { 50, 50},  % \lvertneqq
     "01  =  { 50, 50},  % \gvertneqq
     "02  =  { 50, 50},  % \nleq
     "03  =  { 50, 50},  % \ngeq
     "04  =  {100, 50},  % \nless
     "05  =  { 50,150},  % \ngtr
     "06  =  {100, 50},  % \nprec
     "07  =  { 50,150},  % \nsucc
     "08  =  { 50, 50},  % \lneqq
     "09  =  { 50, 50},  % \gneqq
     "0A  =  {100,100},  % \nleqslant
     "0B  =  {100,100},  % \ngeqslant
     "0C  =  {100, 50},  % \lneq
     "0D  =  { 50,100},  % \gneq
     "0E  =  {100, 50},  % \npreceq
     "0F  =  { 50,100},  % \nsucceq
     "10  =  { 50,   },  % \precnsim
     "11  =  { 50, 50},  % \succnsim
     "12  =  { 50, 50},  % \lnsim
     "13  =  { 50, 50},  % \gnsim
     "14  =  { 50, 50},  % \nleqq
     "15  =  { 50, 50},  % \ngeqq
     "16  =  { 50, 50},  % \precneqq
     "17  =  { 50, 50},  % \succneqq
     "18  =  { 50, 50},  % \precnapprox
     "19  =  { 50, 50},  % \succnapprox
     "1A  =  { 50, 50},  % \lnapprox
     "1B  =  { 50, 50},  % \gnapprox
     "1C  =  {150,200},  % \nsim
     "1D  =  { 50, 50},  % \ncong
     "1E  =  {100,150},  % \diagup
     "1F  =  {100,150},  % \diagdown
     "20  =  {100, 50},  % \varsubsetneq
     "21  =  { 50,100},  % \varsupsetneq
     "22  =  {100, 50},  % \nsubseteqq
     "23  =  { 50,100},  % \nsupseteqq
     "24  =  {100, 50},  % \subsetneqq
     "25  =  { 50,100},  % \supsetneqq
     "26  =  {100, 50},  % \varsubsetneqq
     "27  =  { 50,100},  % \varsupsetneqq
     "28  =  {100, 50},  % \subsetneq
     "29  =  { 50,100},  % \supsetneq
     "2A  =  {100, 50},  % \nsubseteq
     "2B  =  { 50,100},  % \nsupseteq
     "2C  =  { 50,100},  % \nparallel
     "2D  =  {100,150},  % \nmid
     "2E  =  {150,150},  % \nshortmid
     "2F  =  {100,100},  % \nshortparallel
     "30  =  {   ,150},  % \nvdash
     "31  =  {   ,150},  % \nVdash
     "32  =  {   ,100},  % \nvDash
     "33  =  {   ,100},  % \nVDash
     "34  =  {   ,100},  % \ntrianglerighteq
     "35  =  {100,   },  % \ntrianglelefteq
     "36  =  {100,   },  % \ntriangleleft
     "37  =  {   ,100},  % \ntriangleright
     "38  =  {100,200},  % \nleftarrow
     "39  =  {100,200},  % \nrightarrow
     "3A  =  {100,100},  % \nLeftarrow
     "3B  =  { 50,100},  % \nRightarrow
     "3C  =  {100,100},  % \nLeftrightarrow
     "3D  =  {100,200},  % \nleftrightarrow
     "3E  =  { 50, 50},  % \divideontimes
     "3F  =  { 50, 50},  % \varnothing
     "60  =  {200,   },  % \Finv
     "61  =  {   , 50},  % \Game
     "68  =  {100,100},  % \eqsim
     "69  =  { 50,   },  % \beth
     "6A  =  { 50,   },  % \gimel
     "6B  =  {150,   },  % \daleth
     "6C  =  {200,   },  % \lessdot
     "6D  =  {   ,200},  % \gtrdot
     "6E  =  {100,200},  % \ltimes
     "6F  =  {150,100},  % \rtimes
     "70  =  { 50,100},  % \shortmid
     "71  =  { 50, 50},  % \shortparallel
     "72  =  {200,300},  % \smallsetminus
     "73  =  {100,200},  % \thicksim
     "74  =  { 50,100},  % \thickapprox
     "75  =  { 50, 50},  % \approxeq
     "76  =  { 50,100},  % \succapprox
     "77  =  { 50, 50},  % \precapprox
     "78  =  {100,100},  % \curvearrowleft
     "79  =  { 50,150},  % \curvearrowright
     "7A  =  { 50,200},  % \digamma
     "7B  =  {100, 50},  % \varkappa
     "7F  =  {200,   }   % \backepsilon
%    \end{macrocode}
% Remaining slots in the source file.
%\iffalse
%    "40  =  {   ,   },  % \nexists
%    "66  =  {   ,   },  % \mho
%    "67  =  {   ,   },  % \eth
%    "7C  =  {   ,   },  % \Bbbk
%    "7D  =  {   ,   },  % \hslash
%    "7E  =  {   ,   },  % \hbar
%\fi
%    \begin{macrocode}
   }

%</msb>
%    \end{macrocode}
% \subsubsection{Euler}
%
% Euler Roman font (package \pkg{euler}).
%\changes{v1.9e}{2006/07/28}{settings for Euler Roman font}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*eur>
\SetProtrusion
   [ name     = euler ]
   { encoding = U,
     family   = eur  }
   {
     "01  =  {100,100},
     "03  =  {100,150},
     "06  =  {   ,100},
     "07  =  {100,150},
     "08  =  {100,100},
     "0A  =  {100,100},
     "0B  =  {   , 50},
     "0C  =  {   ,100},
     "0D  =  {100,100},
     "0E  =  {   ,100},
     "0F  =  {100,100},
     "10  =  {100,100},
     "13  =  {   ,100},
     "14  =  {   ,100},
     "15  =  {   , 50},
     "16  =  {   , 50},
     "17  =  { 50,100},
     "18  =  { 50,100},
     "1A  =  {   , 50},
     "1B  =  {   , 50},
     "1C  =  { 50,100},
     "1D  =  { 50,100},
     "1E  =  { 50,100},
     "1F  =  { 50,100},
     "20  =  {   , 50},
     "21  =  {   , 50},
     "22  =  { 50,100},
     "24  =  {   , 50},
     "27  =  { 50,100},
       1  =  {100,100},
       7  =  { 50,100},
     "3A  =  {300,500},
     "3B  =  {200,400},
     "3C  =  {200,100},
     "3D  =  {200,200},
     "3E  =  {100,200},
       A  =  {   ,100},
       D  =  {   , 50},
       J  =  { 50,   },
       K  =  {   , 50},
       L  =  {   , 50},
       Q  =  {   , 50},
       T  =  { 50,   },
       X  =  { 50, 50},
       Y  =  { 50,   },
       h  =  {   , 50},
       k  =  {   , 50}
   }

%    \end{macrocode}
% Extended by the \pkg{eulervm} package.
%\changes{v1.9f}{2006/07/31}{fix: \texttt{euler-vm} did not load \texttt{euler} settings}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\SetProtrusion
   [ name     = euler-vm,
     load     = euler ]
   { encoding = U,
     family   = zeur  }
   {
     "28  =  {100,200},
     "29  =  {100,200},
     "2A  =  {100,150},
     "2B  =  {100,150},
     "2C  =  {200,300},
     "2D  =  {200,300},
     "2E  =  {   ,100},
     "2F  =  {100,   },
     "3F  =  {150,150},
     "5B  =  {   ,100},
     "5E  =  {100,100},
     "5F  =  {100,100},
     "80  =  {   , 50},
     "81  =  {200,250},
     "82  =  {100,200}
   }

%</eur>
%    \end{macrocode}
% Euler Script font (\pkg{eucal}).
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*eus>
\SetProtrusion
   [ name     = euscript ]
   { encoding = U,
     family   = eus  }
   {
       A  =  {100,100},
       B  =  { 50,100},
       C  =  { 50, 50},
       D  =  { 50,100},
       E  =  { 50,100},
       F  =  { 50,   },
       G  =  { 50,   },
       H  =  {   ,100},
       K  =  {   , 50},
       L  =  {   ,150},
       M  =  {   , 50},
       N  =  {   , 50},
       O  =  { 50, 50},
       P  =  { 50, 50},
       T  =  {   ,100},
       U  =  {   , 50},
       V  =  { 50, 50},
       W  =  { 50, 50},
       X  =  { 50, 50},
       Y  =  { 50,   },
       Z  =  { 50,100},
     "00  =  {250,250},
     "18  =  {200,200},
     "3A  =  {200,150},
     "40  =  {   ,100},
     "5E  =  {100,100},
     "5F  =  {100,100},
     "66  =  { 50,   },
     "67  =  {   , 50},
     "6E  =  {200,200}
   }

\SetProtrusion
   [ name     = euscript-vm,
     load     = euscript ]
   { encoding = U,
     family   = zeus  }
   {
     "01  =  {600,600},
     "02  =  {200,200},
     "03  =  {200,200},
     "04  =  {200,200},
     "05  =  {150,150},
     "06  =  {200,200},
     "07  =  {200,200},
     "08  =  {100,100},
     "09  =  {100,100},
     "0A  =  {100,100},
     "0B  =  {100,100},
     "0C  =  {100,100},
     "0D  =  {100,100},
     "0E  =  {150,150},
     "0F  =  {100,100},
     "10  =  {150,150},
     "11  =  {100,100},
     "12  =  {150,100},
     "13  =  {100,150},
     "14  =  {150,100},
     "15  =  {100,150},
     "16  =  {200,100},
     "17  =  {100,200},
     "19  =  {150,150},
     "1A  =  {150,100},
     "1B  =  {100,150},
     "1C  =  {100,100},
     "1D  =  {100,100},
     "1E  =  {250,100},
     "1F  =  {100,250},
     "20  =  {150,200},
     "21  =  {150,200},
     "22  =  {150,150},
     "23  =  {150,150},
     "24  =  {100,200},
     "25  =  {150,150},
     "26  =  {150,150},
     "27  =  {100,100},
     "28  =  {100,100},
     "29  =  {100,150},
     "2A  =  {100,100},
     "2B  =  {100,100},
     "2C  =  {100,100},
     "2D  =  {150,150},
     "2E  =  {150,150},
     "2F  =  {100,100},
     "30  =  {100,100},
     "31  =  {100,100},
     "32  =  {100,100},
     "33  =  {100,100},
     "34  =  {100,100},
     "35  =  {100,100},
     "3E  =  {150,150},
     "3F  =  {150,150},
     "60  =  {   ,200},
     "61  =  {200,   },
     "62  =  {100,100},
     "63  =  {100,100},
     "64  =  {100,100},
     "65  =  {100,100},
     "68  =  {300,   },
     "69  =  {   ,300},
     "6C  =  {100,100},
     "6D  =  {100,100},
     "6F  =  {100,100},
     "72  =  {100,100},
     "73  =  {200,100},
     "76  =  {   ,100},
     "77  =  {100,   },
     "78  =  { 50, 50},
     "79  =  {100,100},
     "7A  =  {100,100},
     "7D  =  {150,150},
     "7E  =  {100,100},
     "A8  =  {100,100},
     "A9  =  {100,100},
     "AB  =  {200,200},
     "BA  =  {   ,200},
     "BB  =  {   ,200},
     "BD  =  {200,200},
     "DE  =  {200,200}
   }

%</eus>
%    \end{macrocode}
% Euler Fraktur font (\pkg{eufrak}).
%\changes{v1.9e}{2006/07/28}{complete settings for Euler Fraktur and Script fonts}
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*euf>
\SetProtrusion
   [ name     = mathfrak ]
   { encoding = U,
     family   = euf  }
   {
       A  =  {   , 50},
       B  =  {   , 50},
       C  =  { 50, 50},
       D  =  {   , 80},
       E  =  { 50,   },
       G  =  {   , 50},
       L  =  {   , 80},
       O  =  {   , 50},
       T  =  {   , 80},
       X  =  { 80, 50},
       Z  =  { 80, 50},
       b  =  {   , 50},
       c  =  {   , 50},
       k  =  {   , 50},
       p  =  {   , 50},
       q  =  { 50,   },
       v  =  {   , 50},
       w  =  {   , 50},
       x  =  {   , 50},
       1  =  {100,100},
       2  =  { 80, 80},
       3  =  { 80, 50},
       4  =  { 80, 50},
       7  =  { 50, 50},
     "12  =  {500,500},
     "13  =  {500,500},
       !  =  {   ,200},
       '  =  {200,300},
       (  =  {200,   },
       )  =  {   ,200},
       *  =  {200,200},
       +  =  {200,250},
       -  =  {200,200},
      {,} =  {300,300},
       .  =  {400,400},
      {=} =  {200,200},
       :  =  {   ,200},
       ;  =  {   ,200},
       ]  =  {   ,200}
   }

%</euf>
%</cfg-u>
%    \end{macrocode}
%\subsubsection{Euro symbols}
%\changes{v1.9d}{2006/05/04}{settings for Euro symbols (Adobe, <ITC>, \pkg{marvosym})}
%\changes{v1.9e}{2006/07/05}{fix: forgotten comma in \file{mt-mvs.cfg};
%                            adapt to \pkg{marvosym}'s changed encoding}
% Settings for various Euro symbols (Adobe Euro fonts (packages \pkg{eurosans},
% \pkg{europs}), <ITC> Euro fonts (package \pkg{euroitc}) and \pkg{marvosym}\footnote{
%   Of course, there are many more symbols in this font. Feel free to contribute
%   protrusion settings!}).
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*cfg-e>
\SetProtrusion
%<zpeu|euroitc>   { encoding = U,
%<mvs>   { encoding = {OT1,U},
%<zpeu>     family   = zpeu }
%<euroitc>     family   = {euroitc,euroitcs} }
%<mvs>     family   = mvs }
   {
%<zpeu>     E = {50, }
%<euroitc>     E = {100,50}
%<mvs>     164 = {50,50},   % \EUR
%<mvs>     068 = {50,-100}  % \EURdig
   }

%<*zpeu|euroitc>
\SetProtrusion
   { encoding = U,
%<zpeu>     family   = zpeu,
%<euroitc>     family   = {euroitc,euroitcs},
     shape    = it* }
   {
%<zpeu>     E = {100,-50}
%<euroitc>     E = {100,}
   }

%</zpeu|euroitc>
%<*zpeu>
\SetProtrusion
   { encoding = U,
     family   = {zpeus,eurosans} }
   {
     E = {100,50}
   }

\SetProtrusion
   { encoding = U,
     family   = {zpeus,eurosans},
     shape    = it* }
   {
     E = {200, }
   }

%</zpeu>
%</cfg-e>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\subsection{Interword spacing}\label{sub:conf-spacing}
%\GeneralChanges{Spacing}
%
% Default unit is space.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*m-t>
%%% -----------------------------------------------------------------------
%%% INTERWORD SPACING

\SetExtraSpacing
   [ name = default ]
   { encoding = {OT1,T1,LY1,OT4,QX,T5} }
   {
%    \end{macrocode}
% These settings are only a first approximation. The following reasoning is from
% a mail from \contributor Ulrich Dirr <ud\at art-satz.de>^^A private mail, 2005/06/14
%\ifpdf\IfFileExists{justification.jpg}{^^A
% , who also provided the sample in figure~\ref{fig:example-spacing}^^A
%\changes{v2.2}{2007/04/05}{add sample}^^A
%   \begin{figure}
%     \caption{^^A
%       Example for interword spacing (from Siemoneit 1989).
%         ^^A Manfred Siemoneit, Typographisches Gestalten.
%         ^^A Regeln und Tips f\"ur die richtige Gestaltung von Drucksachen,
%         ^^A Bielefeld 1989
%       The numbers indicate the preference\slash order when the interword space
%       needs to be shrunk.}
%     \label{fig:example-spacing}
%     \includegraphics[width=.6\textwidth]{justification.jpg}
%   \end{figure}^^A
%}\relax\fi.
% I do not claim to have coped with the task.
%\todo{fix settings}
%
%\begin{quote}
% `The idea is -- analog to the tables for expansion and protrusion -- to
% have tables for optical reduction\slash expansion of spaces in dependence of the
% actual character so that the distance between words is optically equal.
%
% When reducing distances the (weighting) order is:
%\begin{itemize}
%  \item after commas
%    \begin{macrocode}
     {,} = { ,-500,500},
%    \end{macrocode}
%  \item in front of capitals which have optical more room on their left
%        side, \eg, `A', `J', `T', `V', `W', and `Y'
%        [this is not yet possible -- RS]
%  \item in front of capitals which have circle/oval shapes on their left
%        side, \eg, `C', `G', `O', and `Q'
%        [ditto -- RS]
%  \item after `r' (because of the bigger optical room on the righthand side)
%    \begin{macrocode}
      r  = { ,-300,300},
%    \end{macrocode}
%  \item\relax [before or] after lowercase characters with ascenders
%    \begin{macrocode}
      b  = { ,-200,200},
      d  = { ,-200,200},
      f  = { ,-200,200},
      h  = { ,-200,200},
      k  = { ,-200,200},
      l  = { ,-200,200},
      t  = { ,-200,200},
%    \end{macrocode}
%  \item\relax [before or] after lowercase characters with x-height plus descender
%        with additional optical space, \eg, `v', or `w'
%    \begin{macrocode}
      c  = { ,-100,100},
      p  = { ,-100,100},
      v  = { ,-100,100},
      w  = { ,-100,100},
      z  = { ,-100,100},
      x  = { ,-100,100},
      y  = { ,-100,100},
%    \end{macrocode}
%  \item\relax [before or] after lowercase characters with x-height plus descender
%        without additional optical space
%    \begin{macrocode}
      i  = { , 50, -50},
      m  = { , 50, -50},
      n  = { , 50, -50},
      u  = { , 50, -50},
%    \end{macrocode}
%  \item after colon and semicolon
%    \begin{macrocode}
      :  = { ,200,-200},
      ;  = { ,200,-200},
%    \end{macrocode}
%  \item after punctuation which ends a sentence, \eg, period, exclamation
%        mark, question mark
%    \begin{macrocode}
      .  = { ,250,-250},
      !  = { ,250,-250},
      ?  = { ,250,-250}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\end{itemize}
% The order has to be reversed when enlarging is needed.'
%\end{quote}
%    \begin{macrocode}
   }

%    \end{macrocode}
% Questions are:
%\begin{itemize}
%  \item Is the result really better?
%  \item Is it overdone? (Try with a |factor| \textless\ 1000.)
%  \item Should the first parameter also be used? (Probably.)
%  \item What about quotation marks, parentheses etc.?
%\end{itemize}
%
% Furthermore, there seems to be a \pdftex\ bug with spacing in combination
% with a non-zero \cmd\spaceskip\
% (reported by \contributor Axel Berger <Axel_Berger\at b.maus.de>):
%  ^^A dctt, `myheadings, markboth', 2008/10/06, MID: <200810062134.a58193@b.maus.de>
%\todo{report \pdftex\ bug}
%\begin{verbatim}
%\parfillskip0pt
%\rightskip0pt plus 1em
%\spaceskip\fontdimen2\font
% test test\par
%\pdfadjustinterwordglue2
%\stbscode\font`t=-50
% test test
%\bye
%\end{verbatim}
% Some more characters in <T2A>.\footnote{Contributed by
%                     \contributor Karl Karlsson <karl-karlsson\at yandex.ru>.}
%\changes{v2.3e}{2009/10/28}{settings for <T2A> encoding (contributed by
%                            \contributor Karl Karlsson <karl-karlsson\at yandex.ru>)}
%                                                       ^^A private mail, 2009/10/21
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*m-t>
\SetExtraSpacing
   [ name     = T2A,
     load     = default ]
   { encoding = T2A,
     family   = cmr }
   {
      \cyrg  = { ,-300,300},
      \cyrb  = { ,-200,200},
      \cyrk  = { ,-200,200},
      \cyrs  = { ,-100,100},
      \cyrr  = { ,-100,100},
      \cyrh  = { ,-100,100},
      \cyru  = { ,-100,100},
      \cyrt  = { , 50, -50},
      \cyrp  = { , 50, -50},
      \cyri  = { , 50, -50},
      \cyrishrt  = { , 50, -50},
   }

%</m-t>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsubsection{Nonfrenchspacing}
% The following settings simulate \cmd\nonfrenchspacing\ (since space factors
% will be ignored when spacing adjustment is in effect). They may be used for
% English contexts.
%
% From the \TeX book:
%\begin{quote}
%                                                                   `If the
% space factor $f$ is different from 1000, the interword glue is computed as
% follows:  Take the normal space glue for the current font, and add the
% extra space if $f\ge2000$.
%  [\,\dots]
% Then the stretch component is multiplied by $f/1000$, while the shrink
% component is multiplied by $1000/f$.'
%\end{quote}
% The `extra space' (\fontdim7) for Computer Modern Roman is a third of
% \fontdim2, \ie, 333.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\SetExtraSpacing
   [ name     = nonfrench-cmr,
     load     = default,
     context  = nonfrench ]
   { encoding = {OT1,T1,LY1,OT4,QX,T5},
     family   = cmr }
   {
%    \end{macrocode}
% \file{latex.ltx} has:
%\begin{verbatim}[morekeywords={[1]{\nonfrenchspacing}}]
%\def\nonfrenchspacing{
%  \sfcode`\. 3000
%  \sfcode`\? 3000
%  \sfcode`\! 3000
%\end{verbatim}
%    \begin{macrocode}
     . = {333,2000,-667},
     ? = {333,2000,-667},
     ! = {333,2000,-667},
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{verbatim}
%  \sfcode`\: 2000
%\end{verbatim}
%    \begin{macrocode}
     : = {333,1000,-500},
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{verbatim}
%  \sfcode`\; 1500
%\end{verbatim}
%    \begin{macrocode}
     ; = {   , 500,-333},
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{verbatim}
%  \sfcode`\, 1250
%\end{verbatim}
%    \begin{macrocode}
    {,}= {   , 250,-200}
%    \end{macrocode}
%\begin{verbatim}
%}
%\end{verbatim}
%    \begin{macrocode}
   }

%    \end{macrocode}
% \pkg{fontinst}, however, which is also used to create the \pkg{PSNFSS} font
% metrics, sets \fontdim7 to 240 by default. Therefore, the fallback settings
% use this value for the first component.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\SetExtraSpacing
   [ name     = nonfrench-default,
     load     = default,
     context  = nonfrench ]
   { encoding = {OT1,T1,LY1,OT4,QX,T5} }
   {
     . = {240,2000,-667},
     ? = {240,2000,-667},
     ! = {240,2000,-667},
     : = {240,1000,-500},
     ; = {   , 500,-333},
    {,}= {   , 250,-200}
   }

%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Additional kerning}
%\GeneralChanges{Kerning}
%
% Default unit is 1\,em.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%%% -----------------------------------------------------------------------
%%% ADDITIONAL KERNING

%    \end{macrocode}
% A dummy list to be loaded when no context is active.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\SetExtraKerning
   [ name = empty ]
   { encoding = {OT1,T1,T2A,LY1,OT4,QX,T5,TS1} }
   { }

%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\subsubsection{French}
%
% The ratio of \fontdim2 to \fontdim6 varies for different fonts, so that
% either the kerning of the colon (which should be a space, \ie, \fontdim2) or
% that of the other punctuation characters (\TeX's \cmd\thinspace, \ie, one
% sixth of \fontdim6) may be inaccurate, depending on which |unit| we choose
% (|space| or |1em|). For Times, for example, a thin space would be 665. I
% don't know whether French typography really wants a thin space, or rather (as
% it happens to turn out with <CMR>) half a space.
% (Wikipedia\footnote{\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Espace_typographique}, 5 July 2007.}
% claims it should be a quarter of an em, which seems too much to me; then
% again, it also says that this \emph{was} a thin space in French typography.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
\SetExtraKerning
   [ name     = french-default,
     context  = french,
     unit     = space   ]
   { encoding = {OT1,T1,LY1} }
   {
     :  = {1000,}, % = \fontdimen2
     ;  = {500, }, % ~ \thinspace
     !  = {500, },
     ?  = {500, }
   }

%    \end{macrocode}
% These settings have the disadvantage that a word following a left guillemet
% will not be hyphenated. This might be fixed in \pdftex.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\SetExtraKerning
   [ name     = french-guillemets,
     context  = french-guillemets,
     load     = french-default,
     unit     = space   ]
   { encoding = {T1,LY1} }
   {
    \guillemotleft  = { ,800}, % = 0.8\fontdimen2
    \guillemotright = {800, }
   }

\SetExtraKerning
   [ name     = french-guillemets-OT1,
     context  = french-guillemets,
     load     = french-default,
     unit     = space   ]
   { encoding = OT1     }
   { }

%    \end{macrocode}
%
%\subsubsection{Turkish}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\SetExtraKerning
   [ name     = turkish,
     context  = turkish ]
   { encoding = {OT1,T1,LY1} }
   {
     :  = {167, }, % = \thinspace
     !  = {167, },
    {=} = {167, }
   }

%</m-t>
%</config>
%    \end{macrocode}
%^^A\changes{v2.0}{2006/12/28}{remove \texttt{letterspacing} settings}
%\GeneralChanges*
%
%\section{Auxiliary file for micro fine tuning}
%
% This file can be used to test protrusion and expansion settings.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*test>
\documentclass{article}

%% Here you can specify the font you want to test, using
%% the commands \fontfamily, \fontseries and \fontshape.
%% Make sure to end all lines with a comment character!
\newcommand*\TestFont{%
  \fontfamily{ppl}%
%%  \fontseries{b}%
%%  \fontshape{it}% sc, sl
}

\usepackage{ifthen}
\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
\usepackage[verbose,expansion=alltext,stretch=50]{microtype}

\pagestyle{empty}
\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
\newcommand*\crulefill{\cleaders\hbox{$\mkern-2mu\smash-\mkern-2mu$}\hfill}
\newcommand*\testprotrusion[2][]{%
  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{r}}{}{#2}%
  lorem ipsum dolor sit amet,
    \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{r}}{\crulefill}{\leftarrowfill} #2
    \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{l}}{\crulefill}{\rightarrowfill}
  you know the rest%
  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{l}}{}{#2}%
  \linebreak
  {\fontencoding{\encodingdefault}%
  \fontseries{\seriesdefault}%
  \fontshape{\shapedefault}%
  \selectfont
  Here is the beginning of a line, \dotfill and here is its end}\linebreak
}
\newcommand*\showTestFont{\expandafter\stripprefix\meaning\TestFont}
\def\stripprefix#1>{}
\newcount\charcount
\begin{document}

\microtypesetup{expansion=false}

{\centering The font in this document is called by:\\
 \texttt{\showTestFont}\par}\bigskip

\TestFont\selectfont
 This line intentionally left empty\linebreak
%% A -- Z
\charcount=65
\loop
  \testprotrusion{\char\charcount}
  \advance\charcount 1
  \ifnum\charcount < 91 \repeat
%% a -- z
\charcount=97
\loop
  \testprotrusion{\char\charcount}
  \advance\charcount 1
  \ifnum\charcount < 123 \repeat
%% 0 -- 9
\charcount=48
\loop
  \testprotrusion{\char\charcount}
  \advance\charcount 1
  \ifnum\charcount < 58 \repeat
%%
 \testprotrusion[r]{,}
 \testprotrusion[r]{.}
 \testprotrusion[r]{;}
 \testprotrusion[r]{:}
 \testprotrusion[r]{?}
 \testprotrusion[r]{!}
 \testprotrusion[l]{\textexclamdown}
 \testprotrusion[l]{\textquestiondown}
 \testprotrusion[r]{)}
 \testprotrusion[l]{(}
 \testprotrusion{/}
 \testprotrusion{\char`\\}
 \testprotrusion{-}
 \testprotrusion{\textendash}
 \testprotrusion{\textemdash}
 \testprotrusion{\textquoteleft}
 \testprotrusion{\textquoteright}
 \testprotrusion{\textquotedblleft}
 \testprotrusion{\textquotedblright}
 \testprotrusion{\quotesinglbase}
 \testprotrusion{\quotedblbase}
 \testprotrusion{\guilsinglleft}
 \testprotrusion{\guilsinglright}
 \testprotrusion{\guillemotleft}
 \testprotrusion{\guillemotright}

\newpage
The following displays the current font stretched by 5\%,
normal, and shrunk by 5\%:

\bigskip
\newlength{\MTln}
\newcommand*\teststring
  {ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789}
\settowidth{\MTln}{\teststring}
\microtypesetup{expansion=true}

\parbox{1.05\MTln}{\teststring\linebreak\\
                   \teststring}\par\bigskip
\parbox{0.95\MTln}{\teststring}

\end{document}
%</test>
%    \end{macrocode}
% Needless to say that things may always be improved. For suggestions, mail to
% \mailtoRS.
%
% ^^A -------------------------------------------------------------------------
%\makeatother
%
% \CharacterTable
%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
%
% \CheckSum{9578}
%
% \Finale
%
\endinput
%
